The Project Gutenberg eBook of Latin for Beginners, by Benjamin L. D'Ooge

This ebook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this ebook or online at https://www.gutenberg.org/license. If you are not located in the United States, you’ll have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this eBook.

Title: Latin for Beginners

Author: Benjamin L. D'Ooge

Release Date: April 25, 2006 [EBook #18251]

Language: English

*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ***

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

BY

BENJAMIN L. D’OOGE, PH.D.

PROFESSOR IN THE MICHIGAN STATE NORMAL COLLEGE

GINN AND COMPANY

BOSTON · NEW YORK · CHICAGO · LONDON

COPYRIGHT, 1909, 1911 BY BENJAMIN L. D’OOGE

ENTERED AT STATIONERS’ HALL

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

013.4

The Athenæum Press

GINN AND COMPANY · PROPRIETORS ·

BOSTON · U.S.A.

CONTENTS

LESSON

PAGE

Preface

TO THE STUDENT—By way of Introduction

1-4

PART I. THE PRONUNCIATION OF LATIN

ALPHABET, SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS, SYLLABLES, QUANTITY, ACCENT, HOW TO READ LATIN

5-11

PART II. WORDS AND FORMS

I-VI.

FIRST PRINCIPLES—Subject and Predicate, Inflection, Number, Nominative Subject, Possessive Genitive, Agreement of Verb, Direct Object, Indirect Object, etc.—DIALOGUE

12-24

VII-VIII.

FIRST OR Ā-DECLENSION—Gender, Agreement of Adjectives, Word Order

25-30

IX-X.

SECOND OR O-DECLENSION—GENERAL RULES FOR DECLENSION—Predicate Noun, Apposition—DIALOGUE

31-35

XI.

ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS

36-37

XII.

NOUNS IN -ius AND -ium—GERMĀNIA

38-39

XIII.

SECOND DECLENSION (Continued)—Nouns in -er and -ir—ITALIA—DIALOGUE

39-41

XIV.

POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS

42-43

XV.

ABLATIVE DENOTING WITH—Cause, Means, Accompaniment, Manner—THE ROMANS PREPARE FOR WAR

44-46

XVI.

THE NINE IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES

46-47

XVII.

THE DEMONSTRATIVE is, ea, id—DIALOGUE

48-50

XVIII.

CONJUGATION—Present, Imperfect, and Future of sum—DIALOGUE

51-53

XIX.

PRESENT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF amō AND moneō

54-56

XX.

IMPERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF amō AND moneō—Meaning of the Imperfect—NIOBE AND HER CHILDREN

56-57

XXI.

FUTURE ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF amō AND moneō—NIOBE AND HER CHILDREN (Concluded)

58-59

XXII.

REVIEW OF VERBS—The Dative with Adjectives—CORNELIA AND HER JEWELS

59-61

XXIII.

PRESENT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF regō AND audiō—CORNELIA AND HER JEWELS (Concluded)

61-63

XXIV.

IMPERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF regō AND audiō—The Dative with Special Intransitive Verbs

63-65

XXV.

FUTURE ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF regō AND audiō

65-66

XXVI.

VERBS IN -iō—Present, Imperfect, and Future Active Indicative of capiō—The Imperative

66-68

XXVII.

PASSIVE VOICE—Present, Imperfect, and Future Indicative of amō and moneō—PERSEUS AND ANDROMEDA

68-71

XXVIII.

PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE INDICATIVE PASSIVE OF regō AND audiō—PERSEUS AND ANDROMEDA (Continued)

72-73

XXIX.

PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE INDICATIVE PASSIVE OF -iō VERBS—PRESENT PASSIVE INFINITIVE AND IMPERATIVE

73-75

XXX.

SYNOPSES IN THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS—THE ABLATIVE DENOTING FROM—Place from Which, Separation, Personal Agent

75-78

XXXI.

PERFECT, PLUPERFECT AND FUTURE PERFECT OF sum—DIALOGUE

79-81

XXXII.

PERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF THE FOUR REGULAR CONJUGATIONS—Meanings of the Perfect—PERSEUS AND ANDROMEDA (Continued)

81-83

XXXIII.

PLUPERFECT AND FUTURE PERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE—PERFECT ACTIVE INFINITIVE

84-85

XXXIV.

REVIEW OF THE ACTIVE VOICE—PERSEUS AND ANDROMEDA (Concluded)

86-87

XXXV.

PASSIVE PERFECTS OF THE INDICATIVE—PERFECT PASSIVE AND FUTURE ACTIVE INFINITIVE

88-90

XXXVI.

REVIEW OF PRINCIPAL PARTS—Prepositions, Yes-or-No Questions

90-93

XXXVII.

CONJUGATION OF possum—The Infinitive used as in English—Accusative Subject of an Infinitive—THE FAITHLESS TARPEIA

93-96

XXXVIII.

THE RELATIVE PRONOUN AND THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN—Agreement of the Relative—THE FAITHLESS TARPEIA (Concluded)

97-101

XXXIX-XLI.

THE THIRD DECLENSION—Consonant Stems

101-106

XLII.

REVIEW LESSON—TERROR CIMBRICUS

107

XLIII.

THIRD DECLENSION—I-Stems

108-110

XLIV.

IRREGULAR NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION—GENDER IN THE THIRD DECLENSION—THE FIRST BRIDGE OVER THE RHINE

111-112

XLV.

ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION—THE ROMANS INVADE THE ENEMY’S COUNTRY

113-115

XLVI.

THE FOURTH OR U-DECLENSION

116-117

XLVII.

EXPRESSIONS OF PLACE—Place to Which, Place from Which, Place at or in Which, the Locative—Declension of domus—DÆDALUS AND ICARUS

117-121

XLVIII.

THE FIFTH OR Ē-DECLENSION—Ablative of Time—DÆDALUS AND ICARUS (Continued)

121-123

XLIX.

PRONOUNS—Personal and Reflexive Pronouns—DÆDALUS AND ICARUS (Concluded)

123-126

L.

THE INTENSIVE PRONOUN ipse AND THE DEMONSTRATIVE īdem—HOW HORATIUS HELD THE BRIDGE

126-127

LI.

THE DEMONSTRATIVES hic, iste, ille—A GERMAN CHIEFTAIN ADDRESSES HIS FOLLOWERS—HOW HORATIUS HELD THE BRIDGE (Continued)

128-130

LII.

THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS—HOW HORATIUS HELD THE BRIDGE (Concluded)

130-132

LIII.

REGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES

133-135

LIV.

IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES—Ablative with Comparatives

135-136

LV.

IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES (Continued)—Declension of plūs

137-138

LVI.

IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES (Concluded)—Ablative of the Measure of Difference

138-139

LVII.

FORMATION AND COMPARISON OF ADVERBS

140-142

LVIII.

NUMERALS—Partitive Genitive

142-144

LIX.

NUMERALS (Continued)—Accusative of Extent—CÆSAR IN GAUL

144-146

LX.

DEPONENT VERBS—Prepositions with the Accusative

146-147

PART III. CONSTRUCTIONS

LXI.

THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD—Inflection of the Present—Indicative and Subjunctive Compared

148-152

LXII.

THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF PURPOSE

152-153

LXIII.

INFLECTION OF THE IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE—Sequence of Tenses

153-155

LXIV.

INFLECTION OF THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE—Substantive Clauses of Purpose

156-159

LXV.

SUBJUNCTIVE OF possum—Verbs of Fearing

160-161

LXVI.

THE PARTICIPLES—Tenses and Declension

161-164

LXVII.

THE IRREGULAR VERBS volō, nōlō, mālō—Ablative Absolute

164-166

LXVIII.

THE IRREGULAR VERB fīō—Subjunctive of Result

167-168

LXIX.

SUBJUNCTIVE OF CHARACTERISTIC—Predicate Accusative

169-171

LXX.

CONSTRUCTIONS WITH cum—Ablative of Specification

171-173

LXXI.

VOCABULARY REVIEW—Gerund and Gerundive—Predicate Genitive

173-177

LXXII.

THE IRREGULAR VERB eō—Indirect Statements

177-180

LXXIII.

VOCABULARY REVIEW—THE IRREGULAR VERB ferō—Dative with Compounds

181-183

LXXIV.

VOCABULARY REVIEW—Subjunctive in Indirect Questions

183-185

LXXV.

VOCABULARY REVIEW—Dative of Purpose or End for Which

185-186

LXXVI.

VOCABULARY REVIEW—Genitive and Ablative of Quality or Description

186-188

LXXVII.

REVIEW OF AGREEMENT—Review of the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative

189-190

LXXVIII.

REVIEW OF THE ABLATIVE

191-192

LXXIX.

REVIEW OF THE SYNTAX OF VERBS

192-193

READING MATTER

INTRODUCTORY SUGGESTIONS

194-195

THE LABORS OF HERCULES

196-203

P. CORNELIUS LENTULUS: THE STORY OF A ROMAN BOY

204-215

APPENDIXES AND VOCABULARIES

APPENDIX I. TABLES OF DECLENSIONS, CONJUGATIONS, NUMERALS, ETC.

226-260

APPENDIX II. RULES OF SYNTAX

261-264

APPENDIX III. REVIEWS

265-282

SPECIAL VOCABULARIES

283-298

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

299-331

ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY

332-343

INDEX

344-348

Display Problems

PREFACE

To make the course preparatory to Cæsar at the same time systematic, thorough, clear, and interesting is the purpose of this series of lessons.

The first pages are devoted to a brief discussion of the Latin language, its history, and its educational value. The body of the book, consisting of seventy-nine lessons, is divided into three parts.

Part I is devoted to pronunciation, quantity, accent, and kindred introductory essentials.

Part II carries the work through the first sixty lessons, and is devoted to the study of forms and vocabulary, together with some elementary constructions, a knowledge of which is necessary for the translation of the exercises and reading matter. The first few lessons have been made unusually simple, to meet the wants of pupils not well grounded in English grammar.

Part III contains nineteen lessons, and is concerned primarily with the study of syntax and of subjunctive and irregular verb forms. The last three of these lessons constitute a review of all the constructions presented in the book. There is abundant easy reading matter; and, in order to secure proper concentration of effort upon syntax and translation, no new vocabularies are introduced, but the vocabularies in Part II are reviewed.

It is hoped that the following features will commend themselves to teachers:

The forms are presented in their natural sequence, and are given, for the most part, in the body of the book as well as in a grammatical appendix. The work on the verb is intensive in character, work in other directions being reduced to a minimum while this is going on. The forms of the subjunctive are studied in correlation with the subjunctive constructions.

The vocabulary has been selected with the greatest care, using Lodge’s “Dictionary of Secondary Latin” and Browne’s “Latin Word List” as a basis. There are about six hundred words, exclusive of proper names, in the special vocabularies, and these are among the simplest and commonest words in the language. More than ninety-five per cent of those chosen are Cæsarian, and of these more than ninety per cent are used in Cæsar five or more times. The few words not Cæsarian are of such frequent occurrence in Cicero, Vergil, and other authors as to justify their appearance here. But teachers desiring to confine word study to Cæsar can easily do so, as the Cæsarian words are printed in the vocabularies in distinctive type. Concrete nouns have been preferred to abstract, root words to compounds and derivatives, even when the latter were of more frequent occurrence in Cæsar. To assist the memory, related English words are added in each special vocabulary. To insure more careful preparation, the special vocabularies have been removed from their respective lessons and placed by themselves. The general vocabulary contains about twelve hundred words, and of these above eighty-five per cent are found in Cæsar.

The syntax has been limited to those essentials which recent investigations, such as those of Dr. Lee Byrne and his collaborators, have shown to belong properly to the work of the first year. The constructions are presented, as far as possible, from the standpoint of English, the English usage being given first and the Latin compared or contrasted with it. Special attention has been given to the constructions of participles, the gerund and gerundive, and the infinitive in indirect statements. Constructions having a logical connection are not separated but are treated together.

Exercises for translation occur throughout, those for translation into Latin being, as a rule, only half as long as those for translation into English. In Part III a few of the commoner idioms in Cæsar are introduced and the sentences are drawn mainly from that author. From first to last a consistent effort is made to instill a proper regard for Latin word order, the first principles of which are laid down early in the course.

Selections for reading are unusually abundant and are introduced from the earliest possible moment. These increase in number and length as the book progresses, and, for the most part, are made an integral part of the lessons instead of being massed at the end of the book. This arrangement insures a more constant and thorough drill in forms and vocabulary, promotes reading power, and affords a breathing spell between succeeding subjects. The material is drawn from historical and mythological sources, and the vocabulary employed includes but few words not already learned. The book closes with a continued story which recounts the chief incidents in the life of a Roman boy. The last chapters record his experiences in Cæsar’s army, and contain much information that will facilitate the interpretation of the Commentaries. The early emphasis placed on word order and sentence structure, the simplicity of the syntax, and the familiarity of the vocabulary, make the reading selections especially useful for work in sight translation.

Reviews are called for at frequent intervals, and to facilitate this branch of the work an Appendix of Reviews has been prepared, covering both the vocabulary and the grammar.

The illustrations are numerous, and will, it is hoped, do much to stimulate interest in the ancient world and to create true and lasting impressions of Roman life and times.

A consistent effort has been made to use simple language and clear explanation throughout.

As an aid to teachers using this book a “Teacher’s Manual” has been prepared, which contains, in addition to general suggestions, notes on each lesson.

The author wishes to express his gratitude to the numerous teachers who tested the advance pages in their classes, and, as a result of their experience, have given much valuable aid by criticism and suggestion. Particular acknowledgments are due to Miss A. Susan Jones of the Central High School, Grand Rapids, Michigan; to Miss Clara Allison of the High School at Hastings, Michigan; and to Miss Helen B. Muir and Mr. Orland O. Norris, teachers of Latin in this institution.

BENJAMIN L. D’OOGE

MICHIGAN STATE NORMAL COLLEGE

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

TO THE STUDENT—BY WAY OF INTRODUCTION

What is Latin? If you will look at the map of Italy on the opposite page, you will find near the middle of the peninsula and facing the west coast a district called Latium,  1 and Rome its capital. The Latin language, meaning the language of Latium, was spoken by the ancient Romans and other inhabitants of Latium, and Latin was the name applied to it after the armies of Rome had carried the knowledge of her language far beyond its original boundaries. As the English of to-day is not quite the same as that spoken two or three hundred years ago, so Latin was not always the same at all times, but changed more or less in the course of centuries. The sort of Latin you are going to learn was in use about two thousand years ago. And that period has been selected because the language was then at its best and the greatest works of Roman literature were being produced. This period, because of its supreme excellence, is called the Golden Age of Roman letters.

1. Pronounce Lā´shĭ-ŭm.

The Spread of Latin. For some centuries after Rome was founded, the Romans were a feeble and insignificant people, their territory was limited to Latium, and their existence constantly threatened by warlike neighbors. But after the third century before Christ, Rome’s power grew rapidly. She conquered all Italy, then reached out for the lands across the sea and beyond the Alps, and finally ruled over the whole ancient world. The empire thus established lasted for more than four hundred years. The importance of Latin increased with the growth of Roman power, and what had been a dialect spoken by a single tribe became the universal language. Gradually the language changed somewhat, developing differently in different countries. In Italy it has become Italian, in Spain Spanish, and in France French. All these nations, therefore, are speaking a modernized form of Latin.

The Romans and the Greeks. In their career of conquest the Romans came into conflict with the Greeks. The Greeks were inferior to the Romans in military power, but far superior to them in culture. They excelled in art, literature, music, science, and philosophy. Of all these pursuits the Romans were ignorant until contact with Greece revealed to them the value of education and filled them with the thirst for knowledge. And so it came about that while Rome conquered Greece by force of arms, Greece conquered Rome by force of her intellectual superiority and became her schoolmaster. It was soon the established custom for young Romans to go to Athens and to other centers of Greek learning to finish their training, and the knowledge of the Greek language among the educated classes became universal. At the same time many cultured Greeks—poets, artists, orators, and philosophers—flocked to Rome, opened schools, and taught their arts. Indeed, the preëminence of Greek culture became so great that Rome almost lost her ambition to be original, and her writers vied with each other in their efforts to reproduce in Latin what was choicest in Greek literature. As a consequence of all this, the civilization and national life of Rome became largely Grecian, and to Greece she owed her literature and her art.

Rome and the Modern World. After conquering the world, Rome impressed her language, laws, customs of living, and modes of thinking upon the subject nations, and they became Roman; and the world has remained largely Roman ever since. Latin continued to live, and the knowledge of Latin was the only light of learning that burned steadily through the dark ages that followed the downfall of the Roman Empire. Latin was the common language of scholars and remained so even down to the days of Shakespeare. Even yet it is more nearly than any other tongue the universal language of the learned. The life of to-day is much nearer the life of ancient Rome than the lapse of centuries would lead one to suppose. You and I are Romans still in many ways, and if Cæsar and Cicero should appear among us, we should not find them, except for dress and language, much unlike men of to-day.

Latin and English. Do you know that more than half of the words in the English dictionary are Latin, and that you are speaking more or less Latin every day? How has this come about? In the year 1066 William the Conqueror invaded England with an army of Normans. The Normans spoke French—which, you remember, is descended from Latin—and spread their language to a considerable extent over England, and so Norman-French played an important part in the formation of English and forms a large proportion of our vocabulary. Furthermore, great numbers of almost pure Latin words have been brought into English through the writings of scholars, and every new scientific discovery is marked by the addition of new terms of Latin derivation. Hence, while the simpler and commoner words of our mother tongue are Anglo-Saxon, and Anglo-Saxon forms the staple of our colloquial language, yet in the realms of literature, and especially in poetry, words of Latin derivation are very abundant. Also in the learned professions, as in law, medicine, and engineering, a knowledge of Latin is necessary for the successful interpretation of technical and scientific terms.

Why study Latin? The foregoing paragraphs make it clear why Latin forms so important a part of modern education. We have seen that our civilization rests upon that of Greece and Rome, and that we must look to the past if we would understand the present. It is obvious, too, that the knowledge of Latin not only leads to a more exact and effective use of our own language, but that it is of vital importance and of great practical value to any one preparing for a literary or professional career. To this it may be added that the study of Latin throws a flood of light upon the structure of language in general and lays an excellent foundation for all grammatical study. Finally, it has been abundantly proved that there is no more effective means of strengthening the mind than by the earnest pursuit of this branch of learning.

Review Questions. Whence does Latin get its name? Where is Latium? Where is Rome? Was Latin always the same? What sort of Latin are we to study? Describe the growth of Rome’s power and the spread of Latin. What can you say of the origin of Italian, French, and Spanish? How did the ancient Greeks and Romans compare? How did Greece influence Rome? How did Rome influence the world? In what sense are we Romans still? What did Latin have to do with the formation of English? What proportion of English words are of Latin origin, and what kind of words are they? Why should we study Latin?

PART I

THE PRONUNCIATION OF LATIN

THE ALPHABET

1. The Latin alphabet contains the same letters as the English except that it has no w and no j.

2. The vowels, as in English, are a, e, i, o, u, y. The other letters are consonants.

3. I is used both as a vowel and as a consonant. Before a vowel in the same syllable it has the value of a consonant and is called I consonant.

Thus in Iū-li-us the first i is a consonant, the second a vowel.

SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS  1

1. N.B. The sounds of the letters are best learned by hearing them correctly pronounced. The matter in this section is, therefore, intended for reference rather than for assignment as a lesson. As a first step it is suggested that the teacher pronounce the examples in class, the pupils following.

4. Latin was not pronounced like English. The Romans at the beginning of the Christian era pronounced their language substantially as described below.

5. The vowels have the following sounds:

VOWELS    2

LATIN EXAMPLES

ā as in father

ă like the first   a in aha´, never as in hat

hāc, stās

ă´-măt, că-nās

ē as in they

ĕ as in met

tē´-lă, mē´-tă

tĕ´-nĕt, mĕr´-cēs

ī as in machine

ĭ as in bit

sĕr´-tī, prā´-tī

sĭ´-tĭs, bĭ´-bī

ō as in holy

ŏ as in wholly, never as in hot

Rō´-mă, ō´-rĭs

mŏ´-dŏ, bŏ´-nōs

ū as in rude, or as oo in boot

ŭ as in   full, or as oo in foot

ū´-mŏr, tū´-bĕr

ŭt, tū´-tŭs

2. Long vowels are marked ¯, short ones ˘.

NOTE. It is to be observed that there is a decided difference in sound, except in the case of a, between the long and the short vowels. It is not merely a matter of quantity but also of quality.

6. In diphthongs (two-vowel sounds) both vowels are heard in a single syllable.

DIPHTHONGS

LATIN EXAMPLES

ae as ai in aisle

au as ou in out

tae´-dae

gau´-dĕt

ei as ei in eight

eu as ĕ´o͝o (a short e followed by a short u in one syllable)

dein´-dĕ

seu

oe like oi in toil

ui like o͝o´ĭ (a short u followed by a short i in one syllable. Cf. English we)

foe´-dŭs

cui, huic

NOTE. Give all the vowels and diphthongs their proper sounds and do not slur over them in unaccented syllables, as is done in English.

7. Consonants are pronounced as in English, except that

CONSONANTS

LATIN EXAMPLES

c is always like c in cat, never as in cent

g is always like g in get, never as in gem

i consonant is always like y in yes

n before c, qu, or g is like ng in sing (compare the sound of n in anchor)

că´-dō, cĭ´-bŭs, cē´-nă

gĕ´-mō, gĭg´-nō

iăm, iŏ´-cŭs

ăn´-cŏ-ră (ang´-ko-ra)

qu, gu, and sometimes su before a vowel have the sound of qw, gw, and sw. Here u has the value of consonant v and is not counted a vowel

ĭn´-quĭt, quī, lĭn´-guă, săn´-guĭs, suā´-dĕ-ō

s is like s in sea, never as in ease

t is always like t in native, never as in nation

rŏ´-să, ĭs

ră´-tĭ-ō, nā´-tĭ-ō

v is like w in wine, never as in vine

x has the value of two consonants (cs or gs) and is like x in extract, not as in exact

vī´-nŭm, vĭr

ĕx´-trā, ĕx-āc´-tŭs

bs is like ps and bt like pt

ch, ph, and th are like c, p, t

ŭrbs, ŏb-tĭ´-nĕ-ō

pŭl´-chĕr, Phoe´-bē, thĕ-ā´-trŭm

a. In combinations of consonants give each its distinct sound. Doubled consonants should be pronounced with a slight pause between the two sounds. Thus pronounce tt as in rat-trap, not as in rattle; pp as in hop-pole, not as in upper. Examples, mĭt´-tō, Ăp´pĭ-ŭs, bĕl´-lŭm.

SYLLABLES

8. A Latin word has as many syllables as it has vowels and diphthongs. Thus aes-tā´-tĕ has three syllables, au-dĭ-ĕn´-dŭs has four.

a. Two vowels with a consonant between them never make one syllable, as is so often the case in English. Compare English inside with Latin īn-sī´-dĕ.

9. Words are divided into syllables as follows:

1. A single consonant between two vowels goes with the second. Thus ă-mā´-bĭ-lĭs, mĕ-mŏ´-rĭ-ă, ĭn-tĕ´-rĕ-ā, ă´-bĕst, pĕ-rē´-gĭt.  3

3. In writing and printing it is customary to divide the parts of a compound, as inter-eā, ab-est, sub-āctus, per-ēgit, contrary to the correct phonetic rule.

2. Combinations of two or more consonants:

a. A consonant followed by l or r goes with the l or r. Thus pū´-blĭ-cŭs, ă´-grī.

EXCEPTION. Prepositional compounds of this nature, as also ll and rr, follow rule b. Thus ăb´-lŭ-ō, ăb-rŭm´-pō, ĭl´-lĕ, fĕr´-rŭm.

b. In all other combinations of consonants the first consonant goes with the preceding vowel.  4 Thus măg´-nŭs, ĕ-gĕs´-tās, vĭc-tō´-rĭ-ă, hŏs´-pĕs, ăn´-nŭs, sŭ-bāc´-tŭs.

4. The combination nct is divided nc-t, as fūnc-tŭs, sānc-tŭs.

3. The last syllable of a word is called the ul´-ti-ma; the one next to the last, the pe-nult´; the one before the penult, the an´-te-pe-nult´.

10.             EXERCISE

Divide the words in the following passage into syllables and pronounce them, placing the accent as indicated:

Vā́dĕ ăd fŏrmī́căm, Ō pĭ́gĕr, ĕt cōnsī́dĕrā vĭ́ās ĕ́iŭs ĕt dĭ́scĕ săpĭĕ́ntĭăm: quae cŭm nōn hắbĕăt dŭ́cĕm nĕc praecĕptṓrĕm nĕc prī́ncĭpĕm, pắrăt ĭn aestā́tĕ cĭ́bŭm sĭ́bĭ ĕt cŏ́ngrĕgăt ĭn mĕ́ssĕ quŏd cŏ́mĕdăt.

[Go to the ant, thou sluggard; consider her ways, and be wise: which, having no guide, overseer, or ruler, provideth her meat in the summer and gathereth her food in the harvest.]

QUANTITY

11. The quantity of a vowel or a syllable is the time it takes to pronounce it. Correct pronunciation and accent depend upon the proper observance of quantity.

12. Quantity of Vowels. Vowels are either long (¯) or short (˘). In this book the long vowels are marked. Unmarked vowels are to be considered short.

1. A vowel is short before another vowel or h; as pŏ-ē´-ta, tră´-hō.

2. A vowel is short before nt and nd, before final m or t, and, except in words of one syllable, before final l or r. Thus a´-mănt, a-măn´-dus, a-mā´-băm, a-mā´-băt, a´-ni-măl, a´-mŏr.

3. A vowel is long before nf, ns, nx, and nct. Thus īn´-fe-rō, re´-gēns, sān´-xī, sānc´-tus.

4. Diphthongs are always long, and are not marked.

13. Quantity of Syllables. Syllables are either long or short, and their quantity must be carefully distinguished from that of vowels.

1. A syllable is short,

a. If it ends in a short vowel; as ă´-mō, pĭ´-grĭ.

NOTE. In final syllables the short vowel may be followed by a final consonant. Thus the word mĕ-mŏ´-rĭ-ăm contains four short syllables. In the first three a short vowel ends the syllable, in the last the short vowel is followed by a final consonant.

2. A syllable is long,

a. If it contains a long vowel or a diphthong, as cū´-rō, poe´-nae, aes-tā´-te.

b. If it ends in a consonant which is followed by another consonant, as cor´-pus, mag´-nus.

NOTE. The vowel in a long syllable may be either long or short, and should be pronounced accordingly. Thus in ter´-ra, in´-ter, the first syllable is long, but the vowel in each case is short and should be given the short sound. In words like saxum the first syllable is long because x has the value of two consonants (cs or gs).

3. In determining quantity h is not counted a consonant.

NOTE. Give about twice as much time to the long syllables as to the short ones. It takes about as long to pronounce a short vowel plus a consonant as it does to pronounce a long vowel or a diphthong, and so these quantities are considered equally long. For example, it takes about as long to say cŭr´-rō as it does cū´-rō, and so each of these first syllables is long. Compare mŏl´-lis and mō´-lis, ā-mĭs´-sī and ā-mi´-sī.

ACCENT

14. Words of two syllables are accented on the first, as mēn´-sa, Cae´-sar.

15. Words of more than two syllables are accented on the penult if the penult is long. If the penult is short, accent the antepenult. Thus mo-nē´-mus, re´-gi-tur, a-gri´-co-la, a-man´-dus.

NOTE. Observe that the position of the accent is determined by the length of the syllable and not by the length of the vowel in the syllable. (Cf. § 13. 2, Note.)

16. Certain little words called enclit´ics  5 which have no separate existence, are added to and pronounced with a preceding word. The most common are -que, and; -ve, or; and -ne, the question sign. The syllable before an enclitic takes the accent, regardless of its quantity. Thus populus´que, dea´que, rēgna´ve, audit´ne.

5. Enclitic means leaning back, and that is, as you see, just what these little words do. They cannot stand alone and so they lean back for support upon the preceding word.

HOW TO READ LATIN

17. To read Latin well is not so difficult, if you begin right. Correct habits of reading should be formed now. Notice the quantities carefully, especially the quantity of the penult, to insure your getting the accent on the right syllable. (Cf. § 15.) Give every vowel its proper sound and every syllable its proper length. Then bear in mind that we should read Latin as we read English, in phrases rather than in separate words. Group together words that are closely connected in thought. No good reader halts at the end of each word.

18. Read the stanzas of the following poem by Longfellow, one at a time, first the English and then the Latin version. The syllables inclosed in parentheses are to be slurred or omitted to secure smoothness of meter.

EXCELSIOR [HIGHER]!   6

The shades of night were falling fast,

As through an Alpine village passed

A youth, who bore, ’mid snow and ice,

A banner with the strange device,

Excelsior!

Cadēbant noctis umbrae, dum

Ibat per vīcum Alpicum

Gelū nivequ(e) adolēscēns,

Vēxillum cum signō ferēns,

Excelsior!

His brow was sad; his eye beneath,

Flashed like a falchion from its sheath,

And like a silver clarion rung

The accents of that unknown tongue,

Excelsior!

Frōns trīstis, micat oculus

Velut ē vāgīnā gladius;

Sonantque similēs tubae

Accentūs lingu(ae) incognitae,

Excelsior!

In happy homes he saw the light

Of household fires gleam warm and bright;

Above, the spectral glaciers shone,

And from his lips escaped a groan,

Excelsior!

In domibus videt clārās

Focōrum lūcēs calidās;

Relucet glaciēs ācris,

Et rumpit gemitūs labrīs,

Excelsior!

“Try not the Pass!” the old man said;

“Dark lowers the tempest overhead,

The roaring torrent is deep and wide!”

And loud that clarion voice replied,

Excelsior!

Dīcit senex, “Nē trānseās!

Suprā nigrēscit tempestās;

Lātus et altus est torrēns.”

Clāra vēnit vōx respondēns,

Excelsior!

At break of day, as heavenward

The pious monks of Saint Bernard

Uttered the oft-repeated prayer,

A voice cried through the startled air,

Excelsior!

Iam lūcēscēbat, et frātrēs

Sānctī Bernardī vigilēs

Ōrābant precēs solitās,

Cum vōx clāmāvit per aurās,

Excelsior!

A traveler, by the faithful hound,

Half-buried in the snow was found,

Still grasping in his hand of ice

That banner with the strange device,

Excelsior!

Sēmi-sepultus viātor

Can(e) ā fīdō reperītur,

Comprēndēns pugnō gelidō

Illud vēxillum cum signō,

Excelsior!

There in the twilight cold and gray,

Lifeless, but beautiful, he lay,

And from the sky, serene and far,

A voice fell, like a falling star,

Excelsior!

Iacet corpus exanimum

Sed lūce frīgidā pulchrum;

Et caelō procul exiēns

Cadit vōx, ut Stella cadēns,

Excelsior!

6. Translation by C. W. Goodchild in Praeco Latinus, October, 1898.

PART II

WORDS AND FORMS

LESSON I

FIRST PRINCIPLES

19. Subject and Predicate. 1. Latin, like English, expresses thoughts by means of sentences. A sentence is a combination of words that expresses a thought, and in its simplest form is the statement of a single fact. Thus,

Galba is a farmer

Galba est agricola

The sailor fights

Nauta pugnat

In each of these sentences there are two parts:

SUBJECT

Galba

Galba

The sailor

Nauta

PREDICATE

is a farmer

est agricola

fights

pugnat

2. The subject is that person, place, or thing about which something is said, and is therefore a noun or some word which can serve the same purpose.

a. Pronouns, as their name implies (pro, “instead of,” and noun), often take the place of nouns, usually to save repeating the same noun, as, Galba is a farmer; he is a sturdy fellow.

3. The predicate is that which is said about the subject, and consists of a verb with or without modifiers.

a. A verb is a word which asserts something (usually an act) concerning a person, place, or thing.

20. The Object. In the two sentences, The boy hit the ball and The ball hit the boy, the same words are used, but the meaning is different, and depends upon the order of the words. The doer of the act, that about which something is said, is, as we have seen above, the subject. That to which something is done is the direct object of the verb. The boy hit the ball is therefore analyzed as follows:

SUBJECT

PREDICATE

The boy

hit the ball

(verb) (direct object)

a. A verb whose action passes over to the object directly, as in the sentence above, is called a transitive verb. A verb which does not admit of a direct object is called intransitive, as, I walk, he comes.

21. The Copula. The verb to be in its different forms—are, is, was, etc.—does not tell us anything about the subject; neither does it govern an object. It simply connects the subject with the word or words in the predicate that possess a distinct meaning. Hence it is called the copula, that is, the joiner or link.

22. In the following sentences pronounce the Latin and name the nouns, verbs, subjects, objects, predicates, copulas:

1.

America est patria mea

America is fatherland my

2.

Agricola fīliam amat

(The) farmer (his) daughter loves

3.

Fīlia est Iūlia

(His) daughter is Julia

4.

Iūlia et agricola sunt in īnsulā

Julia and (the) farmer are on (the) island

5.

Iūlia aquam portat

Julia water carries

6.

Rosam in comīs habet

(A) rose in (her) hair (she) has

7.

Iūlia est puella pulchra

Julia is (a) girl pretty

8.

Domina fīliam pulchram habet

(The) lady (a) daughter beautiful has

a. The sentences above show that Latin does not express some words which are necessary in English. First of all, Latin has no article the or a; thus agricola may mean the farmer, a farmer, or simply farmer. Then, too, the personal pronouns, I, you, he, she, etc., and the possessive pronouns, my, your, his, her, etc., are not expressed if the meaning of the sentence is clear without them.

LESSON II

FIRST PRINCIPLES (Continued)

23. Inflection. Words may change their forms to indicate some change in sense or use, as, is, are; was, were; who, whose, whom; farmer, farmer’s; woman, women. This is called inflection. The inflection of a noun, adjective, or pronoun is called its declension, that of a verb its conjugation.

24. Number. Latin, like English, has two numbers, singular and plural. In English we usually form the plural by adding -s or -es to the singular. So Latin changes the singular to the plural by changing the ending of the word. Compare

Naut-a pugnat

The sailor fights

Naut-ae pugnant

The sailors fight

25. RULE. Nouns that end in -a in the singular end in -ae in the plural.

26. Learn the following nouns so that you can give the English for the Latin or the Latin for the English. Write the plural of each.

- agri´cola, farmer (agriculture)  1

- aqua, water (aquarium)

- causa, cause, reason

- do´mina, lady of the house, mistress (dominate)

- filia, daughter (filial)

- fortū´na, fortune

- fuga, flight (fugitive)

- iniū´ria, wrong, injury

- lūna, moon (lunar)

- nauta, sailor (nautical)

- puel´la, girl

- silva, forest (silvan)

- terra, land (terrace)

1. The words in parentheses are English words related to the Latin. When the words are practically identical, as causa, cause, no comparison is needed.

27. Compare again the sentences

Nauta pugna-t

The sailor fights

Nautae pugna-nt

The sailors fight

In the first sentence the verb pugna-t is in the third person singular, in the second sentence pugna-nt is in the third person plural.

28. RULE. Agreement of Verb. A finite verb must always be in the same person and number as its subject.

29. RULE. In the conjugation of the Latin verb the third person singular active ends in -t, the third person plural in -nt. The endings which show the person and number of the verb are called personal endings.

30. Learn the following verbs and write the plural of each. The personal pronouns he, she, it, etc., which are necessary in the inflection of the English verb, are not needed in the Latin, because the personal endings take their place. Of course, if the verb’s subject is expressed we do not translate the personal ending by a pronoun; thus nauta pugnat is translated the sailor fights, not the sailor he fights.

ama-t

he (she, it)

loves, is loving, does love   (amity, amiable)

labō´ra-t

“   “   “

labors, is laboring, does labor

nūntia-t  2

“   “   “

announces, is announcing, does announce

porta-t

“   “   “

carries, is carrying, does carry   (porter)

pugna-t

“   “   “

fights, is fighting, does fight   (pugnacious)

2. The u in nūntiō is long by exception. (Cf. § 12. 2.)

31.             EXERCISES

I. 1. The daughter loves, the daughters love. 2. The sailor is carrying, the sailors carry. 3. The farmer does labor, the farmers labor. 4. The girl is announcing, the girls do announce. 5. The ladies are carrying, the lady carries.

II. 1. Nauta pugnat, nautae pugnant. 2. Puella amat, puellae amant. 3. Agricola portat, agricolae portant. 4. Fīlia labōrat, fīliae labōrant. 5. Nauta nūntiat, nautae nūntiant. 6. Dominae amant, domina amat.

DOMINA

LESSON III

FIRST PRINCIPLES (Continued)

32. Declension of Nouns. We learned above (§§ 19, 20) the difference between the subject and object, and that in English they may be distinguished by the order of the words. Sometimes, however, the order is such that we are left in doubt. For example, the sentence The lady her daughter loves might mean either that the lady loves her daughter, or that the daughter loves the lady.

1. If the sentence were in Latin, no doubt could arise, because the subject and the object are distinguished, not by the order of the words, but by the endings of the words themselves. Compare the following sentences:

Domina fīliam amat

Fīliam domina amat

Amat fīliam domina

Domina amat fīliam

The lady loves her daughter

Fīlia dominam amat

Dominam fīlia amat

Amat dominam fīlia

Fīlia amat dominam

The daughter loves the lady

a. Observe that in each case the subject of the sentence ends in -a and the object in -am. The form of the noun shows how it is used in the sentence, and the order of the words has no effect on the essential meaning.

2. As stated above (§ 23), this change of ending is called declension, and each different ending produces what is called a case. When we decline a noun, we give all its different cases, or changes of endings. In English we have three cases,—nominative, possessive, and objective; but, in nouns, the nominative and objective have the same form, and only the possessive case shows a change of ending, by adding ’s or the apostrophe. The interrogative pronoun, however, has the fuller declension, who? whose? whom?

33. The following table shows a comparison between English and Latin declension forms, and should be thoroughly memorized:

ENGLISH CASES

LATIN CASES

Declension of who?

Name of case and use

Declension of domina   and translation

Name of case and use

S

I

N

G

U

L

A

R

Who?

Nominative—

case of the subject

do´min-a

the lady

Nominative—

case of the subject

Whose?

Possessive—

case of the possessor

domin-ae

the lady’s

Genitive—

case of the possessor

Whom?

Objective—

case of the object

domin-am

the lady

Accusative—

case of the direct object

P

L

U

R

A

L

Who?

Nominative—

case of the subject

domin-ae

the ladies

Nominative—

case of the subject

Whose?

Possessive—

case of the possessor

domin-ā´rum

the ladies’

of the ladies

Genitive—

case of the possessor

Whom?

Objective—

case of the object

domin-ās

the ladies

Accusative—

case of the direct object

When the nominative singular of a noun ends in -a, observe that

a. The nominative plural ends in -ae.

b. The genitive singular ends in -ae and the genitive plural in -ārum.

c. The accusative singular ends in -am and the accusative plural in -ās.

d. The genitive singular and the nominative plural have the same ending.

34.             EXERCISE

Pronounce the following words and give their general meaning. Then give the number and case, and the use of each form. Where the same form stands for more than one case, give all the possible cases and uses.

1. Silva, silvās, silvam. 2. Fugam, fugae, fuga. 3. Terrārum, terrae, terrās. 4. Aquās, causam, lūnās. 5. Fīliae, fortūnae, lūnae. 6. Iniūriās, agricolārum, aquārum. 7. Iniūriārum, agricolae, puellās. 8. Nautam, agricolās, nautās. 9. Agricolam, puellam, silvārum.

LESSON IV

FIRST PRINCIPLES (Continued)

35. We learned from the table (§ 33) that the Latin nominative, genitive, and accusative correspond, in general, to the nominative, possessive, and objective in English, and that they are used in the same way. This will be made even clearer by the following sentence:

Fīlia agricolae nautam amat,

the farmer’s daughter (or the daughter of the farmer) loves the sailor

What is the subject? the direct object? What case is used for the subject? for the direct object? What word denotes the possessor? In what case is it?

36. RULE. Nominative Subject. The subject of a finite verb is in the Nominative and answers the question Who? or What?

37. RULE. Accusative Object. The direct object of a transitive verb is in the Accusative and answers the question Whom? or What?

38. RULE. Genitive of the Possessor. The word denoting the owner or possessor of something is in the Genitive and answers the question Whose?

DIANA SAGITTAS PORTAT ET FERAS NECAT

39.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 283.

I. 1. Diāna est dea. 2. Lātōna est dea. 3. Diāna et Lātōna sunt deae. 4. Diāna est dea lūnae. 5. Diāna est fīlia Lātōnae. 6. Lātōna Diānam amat. 7. Diāna est dea silvārum. 8. Diāna silvam amat. 9. Diāna sagittās portat. 10. Diāna ferās silvae necat. 11. Ferae terrārum pugnant.

For the order of words imitate the Latin above.

II. 1. The daughter of Latona does love the forests. 2. Latona’s daughter carries arrows. 3. The farmers’ daughters do labor. 4. The farmer’s daughter loves the waters of the forest. 5. The sailor is announcing the girls’ flight. 6. The girls announce the sailors’ wrongs. 7. The farmer’s daughter labors. 8. Diana’s arrows are killing the wild beasts of the land.

40.             CONVERSATION

Translate the questions and answer them in Latin. The answers may be found in the exercises preceding.

1. Quis est Diāna?

2. Cuius fīlia est Diāna?

3. Quis Diānam amat?

4. Quis silvam amat?

5. Quis sagittās portat?

6. Cuius fīliae labōrant?

LESSON V

FIRST PRINCIPLES (Continued)

41. The Dative Case. In addition to the relationships between words expressed by the nominative, genitive (possessive), and accusative (objective) cases, there are other relationships, to express which in English we use such words as from, with, by, to, for, in, at.  1

1. Words like to, for, by, from, in, etc., which define the relationship between words, are called prepositions.

Latin, too, makes frequent use of such prepositions; but often it expresses these relations without them by means of case forms which English does not possess. One of the cases found in the Latin declension and lacking in English is called the dative.

42. When the nominative singular ends in -a, the dative singular ends in -ae and the dative plural in -īs.

NOTE. Observe that the genitive singular, the dative singular, and the nominative plural all have the same ending, -ae; but the uses of the three cases are entirely different. The general meaning of the sentence usually makes clear which case is intended.

a. Form the dative singular and plural of the following nouns: fuga, causa, fortūna, terra, aqua, puella, agricola, nauta, domina.

43. The Dative Relation. The dative case is used to express the relations conveyed in English by the prepositions to, towards, for.

These prepositions are often used in English in expressions of motion, such as She went to town, He ran towards the horse, Columbus sailed for America. In such cases the dative is not used in Latin, as motion through space is foreign to the dative relation. But the dative is used to denote that to or towards which a benefit, injury, purpose, feeling, or quality is directed, or that for which something serves or exists.

a. What dative relations do you discover in the following?

The teacher gave a prize to John because he replied so promptly to all her questions—a good example for the rest of us. It is a pleasure to us to hear him recite. Latin is easy for him, but it is very hard for me. Some are fitted for one thing and others for another.

44. The Indirect Object. Examine the sentence

Nauta fugam nūntiat, the sailor announces the flight

Here the verb, nūntiat, governs the direct object, fugam, in the accusative case. If, however, we wish to mention the persons to whom the sailor announces the flight, as, The sailor announces the flight to the farmers, the verb will have two objects:

1. Its direct object, flight (fugam)

2. Its indirect object,   farmers

According to the preceding section, to the farmers is a relation covered by the dative case, and we are prepared for the following rule:

45. RULE. Dative Indirect Object. The indirect object of a verb is in the Dative.

a. The indirect object usually stands before the direct object.

46. We may now complete the translation of the sentence The sailor announces the flight to the farmers, and we have

Nauta agricolīs fugam nūntiat

47.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 283.

Point out the direct and indirect objects and the genitive of the possessor.

I. 1. Quis nautīs pecūniam dat? 2. Fīliae agricolae nautīs pecūniam dant. 3. Quis fortūnam pugnae nūntiat? 4. Galba agricolīs fortunam pugnae nūntiat. 5. Cui domina fābulam nārrat? 6. Fīliae agricolae domina fābulam nārrat. 7. Quis Diānae corōnam dat? 8. Puella Diānae corōnam dat quia Diānam amat. 9. Dea lūnae sagittās portat et ferās silvārum necat. 10. Cuius victōriam Galba nūntiat? 11. Nautae victōriam Galba nūntiat.

Imitate the word order of the preceding exercise.

II. 1. To whom do the girls give a wreath? 2. The girls give a wreath to Julia, because Julia loves wreaths. 3. The sailors tell the ladies  2 a story, because the ladies love stories. 4. The farmer gives his (§ 22. a) daughter water. 5. Galba announces the cause of the battle to the sailor. 6. The goddess of the moon loves the waters of the forest. 7. Whose wreath is Latona carrying? Diana’s.

2. Observe that in English the indirect object often stands without a preposition to to mark it, especially when it precedes the direct object.

LESSON VI

FIRST PRINCIPLES (Continued)

48. The Ablative Case. Another case, lacking in English but found in the fuller Latin declension, is the ab´la-tive.

49. When the nominative singular ends in -a, the ablative singular ends in -ā and the ablative plural in -īs.

a. Observe that the final -ă of the nominative is short, while the final -ā of the ablative is long, as,

Nom. fīliă

Abl. fīliā

b. Observe that the ablative plural is like the dative plural.

c. Form the ablative singular and plural of the following nouns: fuga, causa, fortūna, terra, aqua, puella, agricola, nauta, domina.

50. The Ablative Relation. The ablative case is used to express the relations conveyed in English by the prepositions from, with, by, at, in. It denotes

1. That from which something is separated, from which it starts, or of which it is deprived—generally translated by from.

2. That with which something is associated or by means of which it is done—translated by with or by.

3. The place where or the time when something happens—translated by in or at.

a. What ablative relations do you discover in the following?

In our class there are twenty boys and girls. Daily at eight o’clock they come from home with their books, and while they are at school they study Latin with great zeal. In a short time they will be able to read with ease the books written by the Romans. By patience and perseverance all things in this world can be overcome.

51. Prepositions. While, as stated above (§ 41), many relations expressed in English by prepositions are in Latin expressed by case forms, still prepositions are of frequent occurrence, but only with the accusative or ablative.

52. RULE. Object of a Preposition. A noun governed by a preposition must be in the Accusative or Ablative case.

53. Prepositions denoting the ablative relations from, with, in, on, are naturally followed by the ablative case. Among these are

ā  1 or ab, from, away from

dē, from, down from

ē  1 or ex, from, out from, out of

cum, with

in, in, on

1. ā and ē are used only before words beginning with a consonant; ab and ex are used before either vowels or consonants.

1. Translate into Latin, using prepositions. In the water, on the land, down from the forest, with the fortune, out of the forests, from the victory, out of the waters, with the sailors, down from the moon.

54. Adjectives. Examine the sentence

Puella parva bonam deam amat, the little girl loves the good goddess

In this sentence parva (little) and bonam (good) are not nouns, but are descriptive words expressing quality. Such words are called adjectives,  2 and they are said to belong to the noun which they describe.

2. Pick out the adjectives in the following: “When I was a little boy, I remember that one cold winter’s morning I was accosted by a smiling man with an ax on his shoulder. ‘My pretty boy,’ said he, ‘has your father a grindstone?’ ‘Yes, sir,’ said I. ‘You are a fine little fellow,’ said he. ‘Will you let me grind my ax on it?’”

You can tell by its ending to which noun an adjective belongs. The ending of parva shows that it belongs to puella, and the ending of bonam that it belongs to deam. Words that belong together are said to agree, and the belonging-together is called agreement. Observe that the adjective and its noun agree in number and case.

55. Examine the sentences

Puella est parva, the girl is little

Puella parva bonam deam amat, the little girl loves the good goddess

In the first sentence the adjective parva is separated from its noun by the verb and stands in the predicate. It is therefore called a predicate adjective. In the second sentence the adjectives parva and bonam are closely attached to the nouns puella and deam respectively, and are called attributive adjectives.

a. Pick out the attributive and the predicate adjectives in the following:

Do you think Latin is hard? Hard studies make strong brains. Lazy students dislike hard studies. We are not lazy.

56.             DIALOGUE

JULIA AND GALBA

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 283.

I. Quis, Galba, est Diāna?

G. Diāna, Iūlia, est pulchra dea lūnae et silvārum.

I. Cuius fīlia, Galba, est Diāna?

G. Lātōnae fīlia, Iūlia, est Diāna.

I. Quid Diāna portat?

G. Sagittās Diāna portat.

I. Cūr Diāna sagittās portat?

G. Diāna sagittās portat, Iūlia, quod malās ferās silvae magnae necat.

I. Amatne Lātōna fīliam?

G. Amat, et fīlia Lātōnam amat.

I. Quid fīlia tua parva portat?

G. Corōnās pulchrās fīlia mea parva portat.

I. Cui fīlia tua corōnās pulchrās dat?

G. Diānae corōnās dat.

I. Quis est cum fīliā tuā? Estne sōla?

G. Sōla nōn est; fīlia mea parva est cum ancillā meā.

a. When a person is called or addressed, the case used is called the voc´ative (Latin vocāre, “to call”). In form the vocative is regularly like the nominative. In English the name of the person addressed usually stands first in the sentence. The Latin vocative rarely stands first. Point out five examples of the vocative in this dialogue.

b. Observe that questions answered by yes or no in English are answered in Latin by repeating the verb. Thus, if you wished to answer in Latin the question Is the sailor fighting? Pugnatne nauta? you would say Pugnat, he is fighting, or Nōn pugnat, he is not fighting.

LESSON VII

THE FIRST OR Ā-DECLENSION

57. In the preceding lessons we have now gone over all the cases, singular and plural, of nouns whose nominative singular ends in -a. All Latin nouns whose nominative singular ends in -a belong to the First Declension. It is also called the Ā-Declension because of the prominent part which the vowel a plays in the formation of the cases. We have also learned what relations are expressed by each case. These results are summarized in the following table:

CASE

NOUN

TRANSLATION

USE AND GENERAL MEANING OF EACH CASE

SINGULAR

Nom.

do´min-a

the lady

The subject

Gen.

domin-ae

of the lady, or the lady’s

The possessor of something

Dat.

domin-ae

to or for the lady

Expressing the relation   to or for, especially the indirect object

Acc.

domin-am

the lady

The direct object

Abl.

domin-ā

from, with, by, in, the lady

Separation (  from), association or means (with, by), place where or time when (in, at)

PLURAL

Nom.

domin-ae

the ladies

The same as the singular

Gen.

domin-ā´rum

of the ladies, or the ladies’

Dat.

domin-īs

to or for the ladies

Acc.

domin-ās

the ladies

Abl.

domin-īs

from, with, by, in, the ladies

58. The Base. That part of a word which remains unchanged in inflection and to which the terminations are added is called the base.

Thus, in the declension above, domin- is the base and -a is the termination of the nominative singular.

59. Write the declension of the following nouns, separating the base from the termination by a hyphen. Also give them orally.

pugna, terra, lūna, ancil´la, corō´na, īn´sula, silva

60. Gender. In English, names of living beings are either masculine or feminine, and names of things without life are neuter. This is called natural gender. Yet in English there are some names of things to which we refer as if they were feminine; as, “Have you seen my yacht? She is a beauty.” And there are some names of living beings to which we refer as if they were neuter; as, “Is the baby here? No, the nurse has taken it home.” Some words, then, have a gender quite apart from sex or real gender, and this is called grammatical gender.

Latin, like English, has three genders. Names of males are usually masculine and of females feminine, but names of things have grammatical gender and may be either masculine, feminine, or neuter. Thus we have in Latin the three words, lapis, a stone; rūpēs, a cliff; and saxum, a rock. Lapis is masculine, rūpēs feminine, and saxum neuter. The gender can usually be determined by the ending of the word, and must always be learned, for without knowing the gender it is impossible to write correct Latin.

61. Gender of First-Declension Nouns. Nouns of the first declension are feminine unless they denote males. Thus silva is feminine, but nauta, sailor, and agricola, farmer, are masculine.

62.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 284.

I. 1. Agricola cum fīliā in casā habitat. 2. Bona fīlia agricolae cēnam parat. 3. Cēna est grāta agricolae  1 et agricola bonam fīliam laudat. 4. Deinde fīlia agricolae gallīnās ad cēnam vocat. 5. Gallīnae fīliam agricolae amant. 6. Malae fīliae bonās cēnās nōn parant. 7. Fīlia agricolae est grāta dominae. 8. Domina in īnsulā magnā habitat. 9. Domina bonae puellae parvae pecūniam dat.

II. 1. Where does the farmer live? 2. The farmer lives in the small cottage. 3. Who lives with the farmer? 4. (His) little daughter lives with the farmer. 5. (His) daughter is getting (parat) a good dinner for the farmer. 6. The farmer praises the good dinner. 7. The daughter’s good dinner is pleasing to the farmer.

1. Note that the relation expressed by the dative case covers that to which a feeling is directed. (Cf. § 43.)

What Latin words are suggested by this picture?

63.             CONVERSATION

Answer the questions in Latin.

1. Quis cum agricolā in casā habitat?

2. Quid bona fīlia agricolae parat?

3. Quem agricola laudat?

4. Vocatne fīlia agricolae gallīnās ad cēnam?

5. Cuius fīlia est grāta dominae?

6. Cui domina pecūniam dat?

LESSON VIII

FIRST DECLENSION (Continued)

64. We have for some time now been using adjectives and nouns together and you have noticed an agreement between them in case and in number (§ 54). They agree also in gender. In the phrase silva magna, we have a feminine adjective in -a agreeing with a feminine noun in -a.

65. RULE. Agreement of Adjectives. Adjectives agree with their nouns in gender, number, and case.

66. Feminine adjectives in -a are declined like feminine nouns in -a, and you should learn to decline them together as follows:

NOUN

ADJECTIVE

domina (base domin-), f., lady

bona (base bon-), good

SINGULAR

TERMINATIONS

Nom.

do´mina

bona

-a

Gen.

dominae

bonae

-ae

Dat.

dominae

bonae

-ae

Acc.

dominam

bonam

-am

Abl.

dominā

bonā

-ā

PLURAL

TERMINATIONS

Nom.

dominae

bonae

-ae

Gen.

dominā´rum

bonā´rum

-ārum

Dat.

dominīs

bonīs

-īs

Acc.

dominās

bonās

-ās

Abl.

dominīs

bonīs

-īs

a. In the same way decline together puella mala, the bad girl; ancil´la parva, the little maid; fortū´na magna, great fortune.

67. The words dea, goddess, and fīlia, daughter, take the ending -ābus instead of -īs in the dative and ablative plural. Note the dative and ablative plural in the following declension:

dea bona (bases de- bon-  )

SINGULAR

PLURAL

Nom.

dea bona

deae bonae

Gen.

deae bonae

deā´rum bonā´rum

Dat.

deae bonae

deā´bus bonīs

Acc.

deam bonam

deās bonās

Abl.

deā bonā

dea´bus bonīs

a. In the same way decline together fīlīa parva.

68. Latin Word Order. The order of words in English and in Latin sentences is not the same.

In English we arrange words in a fairly fixed order. Thus, in the sentence My daughter is getting dinner for the farmers, we cannot alter the order of the words without spoiling the sentence. We can, however, throw emphasis on different words by speaking them with more force. Try the effect of reading the sentence by putting special force on my, daughter, dinner, farmers.

In Latin, where the office of the word in the sentence is shown by its ending (cf. § 32. 1), and not by its position, the order of words is more free, and position is used to secure the same effect that in English is secured by emphasis of voice. To a limited extent we can alter the order of words in English, too, for the same purpose. Compare the sentences

I saw a game of football at Chicago last November (normal order)

Last November I saw a game of football at Chicago

At Chicago, last November, I saw a game of football

1. In a Latin sentence the most emphatic place is the first; next in importance is the last; the weakest point is the middle. Generally the subject is the most important word, and is placed first; usually the verb is the next in importance, and is placed last. The other words of the sentence stand between these two in the order of their importance. Hence the normal order of words—that is, where no unusual emphasis is expressed—is as follows:

subject—modifiers of the subject—indirect object—direct object—adverb—verb

Changes from the normal order are frequent, and are due to the desire for throwing emphasis upon some word or phrase. Notice the order of the Latin words when you are translating, and imitate it when you are turning English into Latin.

2. Possessive pronouns and modifying genitives normally stand after their nouns. When placed before their nouns they are emphatic, as fīlia mea, my daughter; mea fīlia, my daughter; casa Galbae, Galba’s cottage; Galbae casa, Galba’s cottage.

Notice the variety of emphasis produced by writing the following sentence in different ways:

Fīlia mea agricolīs cēnam parat (normal order)

Mea fīlia agricolīs parat cēnam (mea and cēnam emphatic)

Agricolīs fīlia mea cēnam parat (agricolīs emphatic)

3. An adjective placed before its noun is more emphatic than when it follows. When great emphasis is desired, the adjective is separated from its noun by other words.

Fīlia mea casam parvam nōn amat (parvam not emphatic)

Fīlia mea parvam casam nōn amat (parvam more emphatic)

Parvam fīlia mea casam nōn amat (parvam very emphatic)

4. Interrogative words usually stand first, the same as in English.

5. The copula (as est, sunt) is of so little importance that it frequently does not stand last, but may be placed wherever it sounds well.

69.             EXERCISE

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 284.

Note the order of the words in these sentences and pick out those that are emphatic.

1. Longae nōn sunt tuae viae. 2. Suntne tubae novae in meā casā? Nōn sunt. 3. Quis lātā in silvā habitat? Diāna, lūnae clārae pulchra dea, lātā in silvā habitat. 4. Nautae altās et lātās amant aquās. 5. Quid ancilla tua portat? Ancilla mea tubam novam portat. 6. Ubi sunt Lesbia et Iūlia? In tuā casa est Lesbia et Iūlia est in meā. 7. Estne Italia lāta terra? Longa est Italia, nōn lāta. 8. Cui Galba agricola fābulam novam nārrat? Fīliābus dominae clārae fābulam novam nārrat. 9. Clāra est īnsula Sicilia. 10. Quem laudat Lātōna? Lātōna laudat fīliam.

First Review of Vocabulary and Grammar, §§ 502-505

LESSON IX

THE SECOND OR O-DECLENSION

70. Latin nouns are divided into five declensions.

The declension to which a noun belongs is shown by the ending of the genitive singular. This should always be learned along with the nominative and the gender.

71. The nominative singular of nouns of the Second or O-Declension ends in -us, -er, -ir, or -um. The genitive singular ends in -ī.

72. Gender. Nouns in -um are neuter. The others are regularly masculine.

73. Declension of nouns in -us and -um. Masculines in -us and neuters in -um are declined as follows:

dominus (base domin-), m., master

pīlum (base pīl-), n., spear

SINGULAR

TERMINATIONS

TERMINATIONS

Nom.

do´minus  1

-us

pīlum

-um

Gen.

dominī

-ī

pīlī

-ī

Dat.

dominō

-ō

pīlō

-ō

Acc.

dominum

-um

pīlum

-um

Abl.

dominō

-ō

pīlō

-ō

Voc.

domine

-e

pīlum

-um

PLURAL

Nom.

dominī

-ī

pīla

-a

Gen.

dominō´rum

-ōrum

pīlō´rum

-ōrum

Dat.

dominīs

-īs

pīlīs

-īs

Acc.

dominōs

-ōs

pīla

-a

Abl.

dominīs

-īs

pīlīs

-īs

1. Compare the declension of domina and of dominus.

a. Observe that the masculines and the neuters have the same terminations excepting in the nominative singular and the nominative and accusative plural.

b. The vocative singular of words of the second declension in -us ends in -ĕ, as domine, O master; serve, O slave. This is the most important exception to the rule in § 56. a.

74. Write side by side the declension of domina, dominus, and pīlum. A comparison of the forms will lead to the following rules, which are of great importance because they apply to all five declensions:

a. The vocative, with a single exception (see § 73. b), is like the nominative. That is, the vocative singular is like the nominative singular, and the vocative plural is like the nominative plural.

b. The nominative, accusative, and vocative of neuter nouns are alike, and in the plural end in -a.

c. The accusative singular of masculines and feminines ends in -m and the accusative plural in -s.

d. The dative and ablative plural are always alike.

e. Final -i and -o are always long; final -a is short, except in the ablative singular of the first declension.

75. Observe the sentences

Lesbia est bona, Lesbia is good

Lesbia est ancilla, Lesbia is a maidservant

We have learned (§ 55) that bona, when used, as here, in the predicate to describe the subject, is called a predicate adjective. Similarly a noun, as ancilla, used in the predicate to define the subject is called a predicate noun.

76. RULE. Predicate Noun. A predicate noun agrees in case with the subject of the verb.

PILA

77.             DIALOGUE

LEGATUS CUM PILO ET TUBA

GALBA AND MARCUS

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 285.

G. Quis, Mārce, est lēgātus cum pīlō et tubā?

M. Lēgātus, Galba, est Sextus.

G. Ubi Sextus habitat?  2

M. In oppidō Sextus cum fīliābus habitat.

G. Amantne oppidānī Sextum?

M. Amant oppidānī Sextum et laudant, quod magnā cum cōnstantiā pugnat.

G. Ubi, Mārce, est ancilla tua? Cūr nōn cēnam parat?

M. Ancilla mea, Galba, equō lēgātī aquam et frūmentum dat.

G. Cūr nōn servus Sextī equum dominī cūrat?

M. Sextus et servus ad mūrum oppidī properant. Oppidānī bellum parant.  3

2. habitat is here translated does live. Note the three possible translations of the Latin present tense:

habitat

he lives

he is living

he does live

Always choose the translation which makes the best sense.

3. Observe that the verb parō means not only to prepare but also to prepare for, and governs the accusative case.

78.             CONVERSATION

Translate the questions and answer them in Latin.

1. Ubi fīliae Sextī habitant?

2. Quem oppidānī amant et laudant?

3. Quid ancilla equō lēgātī dat?

4. Cuius equum ancilla cūrat?

5. Quis ad mūrum cum Sextō properat?

6. Quid oppidānī parant?

LESSON X

SECOND DECLENSION (Continued)

79. We have been freely using feminine adjectives, like bona, in agreement with feminine nouns of the first declension and declined like them. Masculine adjectives of this class are declined like dominus, and neuters like pīlum. The adjective and noun, masculine and neuter, are therefore declined as follows:

MASCULINE NOUN AND ADJECTIVE

NEUTER NOUN AND ADJECTIVE

dominus bonus, the good master

pīlum bonum, the good spear

BASES domin- bon-

BASES pīl- bon-

SINGULAR

TERMINATIONS

TERMINATIONS

Nom.

do´minus bonus

-us

pīlum bonum

-um

Gen.

dominī bonī

-ī

pīlī bonī

-ī

Dat.

dominō bonō

-ō

pīlō bonō

-ō

Acc.

dominum bonum

-um

pīlum bonum

-um

Abl.

dominō bonō

-ō

pīlō bonō

-ō

Voc.

domine bone

-e

pīlum bonum

-um

PLURAL

Nom.

dominī bonī

-ī

pīla bona

-a

Gen.

dominō´rum bonō´rum

-ōrum

pīlō´rum bonō´rum

-ōrum

Dat.

dominīs bonīs

-is

pīlīs bonīs

-īs

Acc.

dominōs bonōs

-ōs

pīla bona

-a

Abl.

dominīs bonīs

-īs

pīlīs bonīs

-īs

Decline together bellum longum, equus parvus, servus malus, mūrus altus, frūmentum novum.

80. Observe the sentences

Lesbia ancilla est bona, Lesbia, the maidservant, is good

Fīlia Lesbiae ancillae est bona, the daughter of Lesbia, the maidservant, is good

Servus Lesbiam ancillam amat, the slave loves Lesbia, the maidservant

In these sentences ancilla, ancillae, and ancillam denote the class of persons to which Lesbia belongs and explain who she is. Nouns so related that the second is only another name for the first and explains it are said to be in apposition, and are always in the same case.

81. RULE. Apposition. An appositive agrees in case with the noun which it explains.

82.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 285.

I. 1. Patria servī bonī, vīcus servōrum bonōrum, bone popule. 2. Populus oppidī magnī, in oppidō magnō, in oppidīs magnīs. 3. Cum pīlīs longīs, ad pīla longa, ad mūrōs lātōs. 4. Lēgāte male, amīcī legātī malī, cēna grāta dominō bonō. 5. Frūmentum equōrum parvōrum, domine bone, ad lēgātōs clārōs. 6. Rhēnus est in Germāniā, patriā meā. 7. Sextus lēgātus pīlum longum portat. 8. Oppidānī bonī Sextō lēgātō clārā pecūniam dant. 9. Malī servī equum bonum Mārcī dominī necant. 10. Galba agricola et Iūlia fīlia bona labōrant. 11. Mārcus nauta in īnsulā Siciliā habitat.

II. 1. Wicked slave, who is your friend? Why does he not praise Galba, your master? 2. My friend is from (ex) a village of Germany, my fatherland. 3. My friend does not love the people of Italy. 4. Who is caring for  1 the good horse of Galba, the farmer? 5. Mark, where is Lesbia, the maidservant? 6. She is hastening  1 to the little cottage  2 of Julia, the farmer’s daughter.

1. See footnote 1, p. 33. Remember that cūrat is transitive and governs a direct object.

2. Not the dative. (Cf. § 43.)

LESSON XI

ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS

83. Adjectives of the first and second declensions are declined in the three genders as follows:

SINGULAR

MASCULINE

FEMININE

NEUTER

Nom.

bonus

bona

bonum

Gen.

bonī

bonae

bonī

Dat.

bonō

bonae

bonō

Acc.

bonum

bonam

bonum

Abl.

bonō

bonā

bonō

Voc.

bone

bona

bonum

PLURAL

Nom.

bonī

bonae

bona

Gen.

bonōrum

bonārum

bonōrum

Dat.

bonīs

bonīs

bonīs

Acc.

bonōs

bonās

bona

Abl.

bonīs

bonīs

bonīs

a. Write the declension and give it orally across the page, thus giving the three genders for each case.

b. Decline grātus, -a, -um; malus, -a, -um; altus, -a, -um; parvus, -a, -um.

84. Thus far the adjectives have had the same terminations as the nouns. However, the agreement between the adjective and its noun does not mean that they must have the same termination. If the adjective and the noun belong to different declensions, the terminations will, in many cases, not be the same. For example, nauta, sailor, is masculine and belongs to the first declension. The masculine form of the adjective bonus is of the second declension. Consequently, a good sailor is nauta bonus. So, the wicked farmer is agricola malus. Learn the following declensions:

85.             nauta bonus (bases naut- bon-), m., the good sailor

SINGULAR

PLURAL

Nom.

nauta

bonus

nautae

bonī

Gen.

nautae

bonī

nautārum

bonōrum

Dat.

nautae

bonō

nautīs

bonīs

Acc.

nautam

bonum

nautās

bonōs

Abl.

nautā

bonō

nautīs

bonīs

Voc.

nauta

bone

nautae

bonī

86.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 285.

I. 1. Est  1 in vīcō nauta bonus. 2. Sextus est amīcus nautae bonī. 3. Sextus nautae bonō galeam dat. 4. Populus Rōmānus nautam bonum laudat. 5. Sextus cum nautā bonō praedam portat. 6. Ubi, nauta bone, sunt arma et tēla lēgātī Rōmānī? 7. Nautae bonī ad bellum properant. 8. Fāma nautārum bonōrum est clāra. 9. Pugnae sunt grātae nautīs bonīs. 10. Oppidānī nautās bonōs cūrant. 11. Cūr, nautae bonī, malī agricolae ad Rhēnum properant? 12. Malī agricolae cum bonīs nautīs pugnant.

II. 1. The wicked farmer is hastening to the village with (his) booty. 2. The reputation of the wicked farmer is not good. 3. Why does Galba’s daughter give arms and weapons to the wicked farmer? 4. Lesbia invites the good sailor to dinner. 5. Why is Lesbia with the good sailor hastening from the cottage? 6. Sextus, where is my helmet? 7. The good sailors are hastening to the toilsome battle. 8. The horses of the wicked farmers are small. 9. The Roman people give money to the good sailors. 10. Friends care for the good sailors. 11. Whose friends are fighting with the wicked farmers?

1. Est, beginning a declarative sentence, there is.

GALEAE

LESSON XII

NOUNS IN -IUS AND -IUM

87. Nouns of the second declension in -ius and -ium end in -ī in the genitive singular, not in -iī, and the accent rests on the penult; as, fīlī from fīlius (son), praesi´dī from praesi´dium (garrison).

88. Proper names of persons in -ius, and fīlius, end in -ī in the vocative singular, not in -ĕ, and the accent rests on the penult; as, Vergi´lī, O Vergil; fīlī, O son.

a. Observe that in these words the vocative and the genitive are alike.

89.             praesidium (base praesidi-), n., garrison       fīlius (base fīli-), m., son

SINGULAR

Nom.

praesidium

fīlius

Gen.

praesi´dī

fīlī

Dat.

praesidiō

fīliō

Acc.

praesidium

fīlium

Abl.

praesidiō

fīliō

Voc  .

praesidium

fīlī

The plural is regular. Note that the -i- of the base is lost only in the genitive singular, and in the vocative of words like fīlius.

Decline together praesidium parvum; fīlius bonus; fluvius longus, the long river; proelium clārum, the famous battle.

90.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 285.

I. 1. Frūmentum bonae terrae, gladī malī, bellī longī. 2. Cōnstantia magna, praesidia magna, clāre Vergi´lī. 3. Male serve, Ō clārum oppidum, male fīlī, fīliī malī, fīlī malī. 4. Fluvī longī, fluviī longī, fluviōrum longōrum, fāma praesi´dī magnī. 5. Cum gladiīs parvīs, cum deābus clārīs, ad nautās clārōs. 6. Multōrum proeliōrum, praedae magnae, ad proelia dūra.

GERMĀNIA

II. Germānia, patria Germānōrum, est clāra terra. In Germāniā sunt fluviī multī. Rhēnus magnus et lātus fluvius Germāniae est. In silvīs lātīs Germāniae sunt ferae multae. Multi Germāni in oppidīs magnis et in vīcīs parvīs habitant et multī sunt agricolae bonī. Bella Germānōrum sunt magna et clāra. Populus Germāniae bellum et proelia amat et saepe cum finitimīs pugnat. Fluvius Rhēnus est fīnitimus oppidīs  1 multīs et clārīs.

1. Dative with fīnitimus. (See § 43.)

LESSON XIII

SECOND DECLENSION (Continued)

91. Declension of Nouns in -er and -ir. In early Latin all the masculine nouns of the second declension ended in -os. This -os later became -us in words like servus, and was dropped entirely in words with bases ending in -r, like puer, boy; ager, field; and vir, man. These words are therefore declined as follows:

92.             puer, m., boy       ager, m., field          vir, m., man

BASE puer-

BASE agr-

BASE vir-

SINGULAR

TERMINATIONS

Nom.

puer

ager

vir

——

Gen.

puerī

agrī

virī

-ī

Dat.

puerō

agrō

virō

-ō

Acc.

puerum

agrum

virum

-um

Abl.

puerō

agrō

virō

-ō

PLURAL

Nom.

puerī

agrī

virī

-ī

Gen.

puerōrum

agrōrum

virōrum

-ōrum

Dat.

puerīs

agrīs

virīs

-īs

Acc.

puerōs

agrōs

virōs

-ōs

Abl.

puerīs

agrīs

virīs

-īs

a. The vocative case of these words is like the nominative, following the general rule (§ 74. a).

b. The declension differs from that of servus only in the nominative and vocative singular.

c. Note that in puer the e remains all the way through, while in ager it is present only in the nominative. In puer the e belongs to the base, but in ager (base agr-) it does not, and was inserted in the nominative to make it easier to pronounce. Most words in -er are declined like ager. The genitive shows whether you are to follow puer or ager.

93. Masculine adjectives in -er of the second declension are declined like nouns in -er. A few of them are declined like puer, but most of them like ager. The feminine and neuter nominatives show which form to follow, thus,

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

līber

lībera

līberum

(free  )

is like puer

pulcher

pulchra

pulchrum

(pretty  )

is like ager

For the full declension in the three genders, see § 469. b. c.

94. Decline together the words vir līber, terra lībera, frūmentum līberum, puer pulcher, puella pulchra, oppidum pulchrum

95.       ITALIA     1

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 286.

Magna est Italiae fāma, patriae Rōmānōrum, et clāra est Rōma, domina orbis terrārum.  2 Tiberim,  3 fluvium Rōmānum, quis nōn laudat et pulchrōs fluviō fīnitimōs agrōs? Altōs mūrōs, longa et dūra bella, clārās victōriās quis nōn laudat? Pulchra est terra Italia. Agrī bonī agricolīs praemia dant magna, et equī agricolārum cōpiam frūmentī ad oppida et vīcōs portant. In agrīs populī Rōmānī labōrant multī servī. Viae Italiae sunt longae et lātae. Fīnitima Italiae est īnsula Sicilia.

1. In this selection note especially the emphasis as shown by the order of the words.

2. orbis terrārum, of the world.

3. Tiberim, the Tiber, accusative case.

96.             DIALOGUE

MARCUS AND CORNELIUS

LEGIONARIUS

C. Ubi est, Mārce, fīlius tuus? Estne in pulchrā terrā Italiā?

M. Nōn est, Cornēlī, in Italiā. Ad fluvium Rhēnum properat cum cōpiīs Rōmānīs quia est  4 fāma Novī bellī cum Germānīs. Līber Germāniae populus Rōmānōs Nōn amat.

C. Estne fīlius tuus copiārum Rōmānārum lēgātus?

M. Lēgātus nōn est, sed est apud legiōnāriōs.

C. Quae  5 arma portat  6?

M. Scūtum magnum et lōrīcam dūram et galeam pulchram portat.

C. Quae tēla portat?

M. Gladium et pīlum longum portat.

C. Amatne lēgātus fīlium tuum?

M. Amat, et saepe fīliō meō praemia pulchra et praedam multam dat.

C. Ubi est terra Germānōrum?

M. Terra Germānōrum, Cornēlī est fīnitima Rhēnō, fluviō magnō et altō.

4. est, before its subject, there is; so sunt, there are.

5. Quae, what kind of, an interrogative adjective pronoun.

6. What are the three possible translations of the present tense?

LESSON XIV

THE POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS

97. Observe the sentences

This is my shield

This shield is mine

In the first sentence my is a possessive adjective; in the second mine is a possessive pronoun, for it takes the place of a noun, this shield is mine being equivalent to this shield is my shield. Similarly, in Latin the possessives are sometimes adjectives and sometimes pronouns.

98. The possessives my, mine, your, yours, etc. are declined like adjectives of the first and second declensions.

SINGULAR

1st Pers.

meus, mea, meum

my, mine

2d Pers.

tuus, tua, tuum

your, yours

3d Pers.

suus, sua, suum

his (own), her (own), its (own)

PLURAL

1st Pers.

noster, nostra, nostrum

our, ours

2d Pers.

vester, vestra, vestrum

your, yours

3d Pers.

suus, sua, suum

their (own), theirs

NOTE. Meus has the irregular vocative singular masculine mī, as mī fīlī, O my son.

a. The possessives agree with the name of the thing possessed in gender, number, and case. Compare the English and Latin in

Sextus is calling his boy

Julia is calling her boy

Sextus

Iūlia

suum puerum vocat

Observe that suum agrees with puerum, and is unaffected by the gender of Sextus or Julia.

b. When your, yours, refers to one person, use tuus; when to more than one, vester; as,

Lesbia, your wreaths are pretty

Girls, your wreaths are pretty

Corōnae tuae, Lesbia, sunt pulchrae

Corōnae vestrae, puellae, sunt pulchrae

c. Suus is a reflexive possessive, that is, it usually stands in the predicate and regularly refers back to the subject. Thus, Vir suōs servōs vocat means The man calls his (own) slaves. Here his (suōs) refers to man (vir), and could not refer to any one else.

d. Possessives are used much less frequently than in English, being omitted whenever the meaning is clear without them. (Cf. § 22. a.) This is especially true of suus, -a, -um, which, when inserted, is more or less emphatic, like our his own, her own, etc.

99.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 286.

I. 1. Mārcus amīcō Sextō cōnsilium suum nūntiat 2. Est cōpia frūmentī in agrīs nostrīs. 3. Amīcī meī bonam cēnam ancillae vestrae laudant 4. Tua lōrīca, mī fīlī, est dūra. 5. Scūta nostra et tēla, mī amīce, in castrls Rōmānīs sunt. 6. Suntne virī patriae tuae līberī? Sunt. 7. Ubi, Cornēlī, est tua galea pulchra? 8. Mea galea, Sexte, est in casā meā. 9. Pīlum longum est tuum, sed gladius est meus. 10. Iūlia gallīnās suās pulchrās amat et gallīnae dominam suam amant. 11. Nostra castra sunt vestra. 12. Est cōpia praedae in castrīs vestrīs. 13. Amīcī tuī miserīs et aegrīs cibum et pecūniam saepe dant.

II. 1. Our teacher praises Mark’s industry. 2. My son Sextus is carrying his booty to the Roman camp.  1 3. Your good girls are giving aid to the sick and wretched.  2 4. There are   3 frequent battles in our villages. 5. My son, where is the lieutenant’s food? 6. The camp is mine, but the weapons are yours.

1. Not the dative. Why?

2. Here the adjectives sick and wretched are used like nouns.

3. Where should sunt stand? Cf. I. 2 above.

AGRICOLA ARAT

LESSON XV

THE ABLATIVE DENOTING WITH

100. Of the various relations denoted by the ablative case (§ 50) there is none more important than that expressed in English by the preposition with. This little word is not so simple as it looks. It does not always convey the same meaning, nor is it always to be translated by cum. This will become clear from the following sentences:

a. Mark is feeble with (for or because of) want of food

b. Diana kills the beasts with (or by) her arrows

c. Julia is with Sextus

d. The men fight with great steadiness

a. In sentence a, with want (of food) gives the cause of Mark’s feebleness. This idea is expressed in Latin by the ablative without a preposition, and the construction is called the ablative of cause:

Mārcus est īnfīrmus inopiā cibī

b. In sentence b, with (or by) her arrows tells by means of what Diana kills the beasts. This idea is expressed in Latin by the ablative without a preposition, and the construction is called the ablative of means:

Diāna sagittīs suīs ferās necat

c. In sentence c we are told that Julia is not alone, but in company with Sextus. This idea is expressed in Latin by the ablative with the preposition cum, and the construction is called the ablative of accompaniment:

Iūlia est cum Sextō

d. In sentence d we are told how the men fight. The idea is one of manner. This is expressed in Latin by the ablative with cum, unless there is a modifying adjective present, in which case cum may be omitted. This construction is called the ablative of manner:

Virī (cum) cōnstantiā magnā pugnant

101. You are now able to form four important rules for the ablative denoting with:

102. RULE. Ablative of Cause. Cause is denoted by the ablative without a preposition. This answers the question Because of what?

103. RULE. Ablative of Means. Means is denoted by the ablative without a preposition. This answers the question By means of what? With what?

N.B. Cum must never be used with the ablative expressing cause or means.

104. RULE. Ablative of Accompaniment. Accompaniment is denoted by the ablative with cum. This answers the question With whom?

105. RULE. Ablative of Manner. The ablative with cum is used to denote the manner of an action. Cum may be omitted, if an adjective is used with the ablative. This answers the question How? In what manner?

106. What uses of the ablative do you discover in the following passage, and what question does each answer?

The soldiers marched to the fort with great speed and broke down the gate with blows of their muskets. The inhabitants, terrified by the din, attempted to cross the river with their wives and children, but the stream was swollen with (or by) the rain. Because of this many were swept away by the waters and only a few, almost overcome with fatigue, with great difficulty succeeded in gaining the farther shore.

107.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 286.

I. The Romans prepare for War. Rōmānī, clārus Italiae populus, bellum parant. Ex agrīs suīs, vicīs, oppidīsque magnō studiō virī validī ad arma properant. Iam lēgatī cum legiōnariīs ex Italiā ad Rhēnum, fluvium Germāniae altum et lātum, properant, et servī equīs et carrīs cibum frūmentumque ad castra Rōmāna portant. Inopiā bonōrum tēlōrum īnfirmī sunt Germānī, sed Rōmānī armāti galeīs, lōrīcīs, scūtīs, gladiīs, pīlīsque sunt validī.

II. 1. The sturdy farmers of Italy labor in the fields with great diligence. 2. Sextus, the lieutenant, and (his) son Mark are fighting with the Germans. 3. The Roman legionaries are armed with long spears. 4. Where is Lesbia, your maid, Sextus? Lesbia is with my friends in Galba’s cottage. 5. Many are sick because of bad water and for lack of food. 6. The Germans, with (their) sons and daughters, are hastening with horses and wagons.

LESSON XVI

THE NINE IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES

108. There are nine irregular adjectives of the first and second declensions which have a peculiar termination in the genitive and dative singular of all genders:

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

Gen.

-īus

-īus

-īus

Dat.

-ī

-ī

-ī

Otherwise they are declined like bonus, -a, -um. Learn the list and the meaning of each:

alius, alia, aliud, other, another (of several)

alter, altera, alterum, the one, the other (of two)

ūnus, -a, -um, one, alone; (in the plural) only

ūllus, -a, -um, any

nūllus, -a, -um, none, no

sōlus, -a, -um, alone

tōtus, -a, -um, all, whole, entire

uter, utra, utrum, which? (of two)

neuter, neutra, neutrum, neither (of two)

109.             PARADIGMS

SINGULAR

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

nūllus

nūlla

nūllum

alius

alia

aliud

Gen.

nūllī´us

nūllī´us

nūllī´us

alī´us

alī´us

alī´us

Dat.

nūllī

nūllī

nūllī

aliī

aliī

aliī

Acc.

nūllum

nūllam

nūllum

alium

aliam

aliud

Abl.

nūllō

nūllā

nūllō

aliō

aliā

aliō

THE PLURAL IS REGULAR

a. Note the peculiar neuter singular ending in -d of alius. The genitive alīus is rare. Instead of it use alterīus, the genitive of alter.

b. These peculiar case endings are found also in the declension of pronouns (see § 114). For this reason these adjectives are sometimes called the pronominal adjectives.

110. Learn the following idioms:

alter, -era, -erum ... alter, -era, -erum, the one ... the other (of two)

alius, -a, -ud ... alius, -a, -ud, one ... another (of any number)

aliī, -ae, -a ... aliī, -ae, -a, some ... others

EXAMPLES

1. Alterum oppidum est magnum, alterum parvum, the one town is large, the other small (of two towns).

2. Aliud oppidum est validum, aliud īnfīrmum, one town is strong, another weak (of towns in general).

3. Aliī gladiōs, aliī scūta portant, some carry swords, others shields.

111.             EXERCISES

I. 1. In utrā casā est Iūlia? Iūlia est in neutrā casā. 2. Nūllī malō puerō praemium dat magister. 3. Alter puer est nauta, alter agricola. 4. Aliī virī aquam, aliī terram amant. 5. Galba ūnus (or sōlus) cum studiō labōrat. 6. Estne ūllus carrus in agrō meō? 7. Lesbia est ancilla alterīus dominī, Tullia alterīus. 8. Lesbia sōla cēnam parat. 9. Cēna nūllīus alterīus ancillae est bona. 10. Lesbia nūllī aliī virō cēnam dat.

NOTE. The pronominal adjectives, as you observe, regularly stand before and not after their nouns.

II. 1. The men of all Germany are preparing for war. 2. Some towns are great and others are small. 3. One boy likes chickens, another horses. 4. Already the booty of one town is in our fort. 5. Our whole village is suffering for (i.e. weak because of) lack of food. 6. The people are already hastening to the other town. 7. Among the Romans (there) is no lack of grain.

LESSON XVII

THE DEMONSTRATIVE IS, EA, ID

112. A demonstrative is a word that points out an object definitely, as this, that, these, those. Sometimes these words are pronouns, as, Do you hear these? and sometimes adjectives, as, Do you hear these men? In the former case they are called demonstrative pronouns, in the latter demonstrative adjectives.

113. Demonstratives are similarly used in Latin both as pronouns and as adjectives. The one used most is

is, masculine; ea, feminine; id, neuter

SINGULAR

this

that

PLURAL

these

those

114. Is is declined as follows. Compare its declension with that of alius, § 109.

BASE e-

SINGULAR

PLURAL

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

is

ea

id

eī (or   iī)

eae

ea

Gen.

eius

eius

eius

eōrum

eārum

eōrum

Dat.

eī

eī

eī

eīs (or   iīs)

eīs (or   iīs)

eīs (or   iīs)

Acc.

eum

eam

id

eōs

eās

ea

Abl.

eō

eā

eō

eīs (or   iīs)

eīs (or   iīs)

eīs (or   iīs)

Note that the base e- changes to i- in a few cases. The genitive singular eius is pronounced eh´yus. In the plural the forms with two i’s are preferred and the two i’s are pronounced as one. Hence, pronounce iī as ī and iīs as īs.

115. Besides being used as demonstrative pronouns and adjectives the Latin demonstratives are regularly used for the personal pronoun he, she, it. As a personal pronoun, then, is would have the following meanings:

SING.

Nom.

is, he; ea, she; id, it

Gen.

eius, of him or his; eius, of her, her, or hers; eius, of it or its

Dat.

eī, to or for him; eī, to or for her; eī, to or for it

Acc.

eum, him; eam, her; id, it

Abl.

eō, with, from, etc., him; eā, with, from, etc., her; eō, with, from, etc., it

PLUR.

Nom.

eī or iī, eae, ea, they

Gen.

eōrum, eārum, eōrum, of them, their

Dat.

eīs or iīs, eīs or iīs, eīs or iīs, to or for them

Acc.

eōs, eās, ea, them

Abl.

eīs or iīs, eīs or iīs, eīs or iīs, with, from, etc., them

116. Comparison between suus and is. We learned above (§ 98. c) that suus is a reflexive possessive. When his, her (poss.), its, their, do not refer to the subject of the sentence, we express his, her, its by eius, the genitive singular of is, ea, id; and their by the genitive plural, using eōrum to refer to a masculine or neuter antecedent noun and eārum to refer to a feminine one.

EXAMPLES

Galba calls his (own) son, Galba suum fīlium vocat

Galba calls his son (not his own, but another’s), Galba eius fīlium vocat

Julia calls her (own) children, Iūlia suōs līberōs vocat

Julia calls her children (not her own, but another’s), Iūlia eius līberōs vocat

The men praise their (own) boys, virī suōs puerōs laudant

The men praise their boys (not their own, but others’), virī eōrum puerōs laudant

117.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 287.

1. He praises her, him, it, them. 2. This cart, that report, these teachers, those women, that abode, these abodes. 3. That strong garrison, among those weak and sick women, that want of firmness, those frequent plans.

4. The other woman is calling her chickens (her own). 5. Another woman is calling her chickens (not her own). 6. The Gaul praises his arms (his own). 7. The Gaul praises his arms (not his own). 8. This farmer often plows their fields. 9. Those wretched slaves long for their master (their own). 10. Those wretched slaves long for their master (not their own). 11. Free men love their own fatherland. 12. They love its villages and towns.

118.             DIALOGUE  1

CORNELIUS AND MARCUS

M. Quis est vir, Cornēlī, cum puerō parvō? Estne Rōmānus et līber?

C. Rōmānus nōn est, Mārce. Is vir est servus et eius domicilium est in silvīs Galliae.

M. Estne puer fīlius eius servī an alterīus?

C. Neutrīus fīlius est puer. Is est fīlius lēgātī Sextī.

M. Quō puer cum eō servō properat?

C. Is cum servō properat ad lātōs Sextī agrōs.  2 Tōtum frūmentum est iam mātūrum et magnus servōrum numerus in Italiae  3 agrīs labōrat.

M. Agricolaene sunt Gallī et patriae suae agrōs arant?

C. Nōn agricolae sunt. Bellum amant Gallī, nōn agrī cultūram. Apud eōs virī pugnant et fēminae auxiliō līberōrum agrōs arant parantque cibum.

M. Magister noster puerīs puellīsque grātās Gallōrum fābulās saepe nārrat et laudat eōs saepe.

C. Mala est fortūna eōrum et saepe miserī servī multīs cum lacrimīs patriam suam dēsīderant.

1. There are a number of departures from the normal order in this dialogue. Find them, and give the reason.

2. When a noun is modified by both a genitive and an adjective, a favorite order of words is adjective, genitive, noun.

3. A modifying genitive often stands between a preposition and its object.

Second Review, Lessons IX-XVII, §§ 506-509

LESSON XVIII

CONJUGATION

THE PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE TENSES OF SUM

119. The inflection of a verb is called its conjugation (cf. § 23). In English the verb has but few changes in form, the different meanings being expressed by the use of personal pronouns and auxiliaries, as, I am carried, we have carried, they shall have carried, etc. In Latin, on the other hand, instead of using personal pronouns and auxiliary verbs, the form changes with the meaning. In this way the Romans expressed differences in tense, mood, voice, person, and number.

120. The Tenses. The different forms of a verb referring to different times are called its tenses. The chief distinctions of time are present, past, and future:

1.   The present, that is, what is happening now, or what usually happens, is expressed by

THE PRESENT TENSE

2.   The past, that is, what was happening, used to happen, happened, has happened, or had happened, is expressed by

THE IMPERFECT, PERFECT, AND PLUPERFECT TENSES

3.   The future, that is, what is going to happen, is expressed by

THE FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT TENSES

121. The Moods. Verbs have inflection of mood to indicate the manner in which they express action. The moods of the Latin verb are the indicative, subjunctive, imperative, and infinitive.

a. A verb is in the indicative mood when it makes a statement or asks a question about something assumed as a fact. All the verbs we have used thus far are in the present indicative.

122. The Persons. There are three persons, as in English. The first person is the person speaking (I sing); the second person the person spoken to (you sing); the third person the person spoken of (he sings). Instead of using personal pronouns for the different persons in the two numbers, singular and plural, the Latin verb uses the personal endings (cf. § 22 a; 29). We have already learned that -t is the ending of the third person singular in the active voice and -nt of the third person plural. The complete list of personal endings of the active voice is as follows:

SINGULAR

PLURAL

1st Pers.

I

-m or -ō

we

-mus

2d Pers.

thou or you

-s

you

-tis

3d Pers.

he, she, it

-t

they

-nt

123. Most verbs form their moods and tenses after a regular plan and are called regular verbs. Verbs that depart from this plan are called irregular. The verb to be is irregular in Latin as in English. The present, imperfect, and future tenses of the indicative are inflected as follows:

PRESENT INDICATIVE

SINGULAR

PLURAL

1st Pers.

su-m, I am

su-mus, we are

2d Pers.

e-s, you    1 are

es-tis, you    1 are

3d Pers.

es-t, he, she, or it is

su-nt, they are

IMPERFECT INDICATIVE

1st Pers.

er-a-m, I was

er-ā´-mus, we were

2d Pers.

er-ā-s, you were

er-ā´-tis, you were

3d Pers.

er-a-t, he, she, or it was

er-a-nt, they were

FUTURE INDICATIVE

1st Pers.

er-ō, I shall be

er´-i-mus, we shall be

2d Pers.

er-i-s, you will be

er´-i-tis, you will be

3d Pers.

er-i-t, he will be

er-u-nt, they will be

a. Be careful about vowel quantity and accent in these forms, and consult §§ 12.2; 14; 15.

1. Observe that in English you are, you were, etc. may be either singular or plural. In Latin the singular and plural forms are never the same.

124.             DIALOGUE

THE BOYS SEXTUS AND MARCUS

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 287.

S. Ubi es, Mārce? Ubi est Quīntus? Ubi estis, amīcī?

M. Cum Quīntō, Sexte, in silvā sum. Nōn sōlī sumus; sunt in silvā multī aliī puerī.

S. Nunc laetus es, sed nūper nōn laetus erās. Cūr miser erās?

M. Miser eram quia amīcī meī erant in aliō vicō et eram sōlus. Nunc sum apud sociōs meōs. Nunc laetī sumus et erimus.

S. Erātisne in lūdo hodiē?

M. Hodiē nōn erāmus in lūdō, quod magister erat aeger.

S. Eritisne mox in lūdō?

M. Amīcī meī ibi erunt, sed ego (I) nōn erō.

S. Cūr nōn ibi eris? Magister, saepe irātus, inopiam tuam studī dīligentiaeque nōn laudat.

M. Nūper aeger eram et nunc īnfīrmus sum.

125.             EXERCISE

1. You are, you were, you will be, (sing. and plur.). 2. I am, I was, I shall be. 3. He is, he was, he will be. 4. We are, we were, we shall be. 5. They are, they were, they will be.

6. Why were you not in school to-day? I was sick. 7. Lately he was a sailor, now he is a farmer, soon he will be a teacher. 8. To-day I am happy, but lately I was wretched. 9. The teachers were happy because of the boys’ industry.

PUERI ROMANI IN LUDO

LESSON XIX

THE FOUR REGULAR CONJUGATIONS · PRESENT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF AMŌ AND MONEŌ

126. There are four conjugations of the regular verbs. These conjugations are distinguished from each other by the final vowel of the present conjugation-stem.  1 This vowel is called the distinguishing vowel, and is best seen in the present infinitive.

1. The stem is the body of a word to which the terminations are attached. It is often identical with the base (cf. § 58). If, however, the stem ends in a vowel, the latter does not appear in the base, but is variously combined with the inflectional terminations. This point is further explained in § 230.

Below is given the present infinitive of a verb of each conjugation, the present stem, and the distinguishing vowel.

CONJUGATION

PRES. INFIN.

PRES. STEM

DISTINGUISHING

VOWEL

I.

amā´re, to love

amā-

ā

II.

monē´re, to advise

monē-

ē

III.

re´gĕre, to rule

regĕ-

ĕ

IV.

audī´re, to hear

audi-

ī

a. Note that the present stem of each conjugation is found by dropping -re, the ending of the present infinitive.

NOTE. The present infinitive of sum is esse, and es- is the present stem.

127. From the present stem are formed the present, imperfect, and future tenses.

128. The inflection of the Present Active Indicative of the first and of the second conjugation is as follows:

a´mō, amā´re (love  )

mo´neō, monē´re (advise  )

PRES. STEM amā-

PRES. STEM monē-

PERSONAL

ENDINGS

SING.

1. a´mō, I love

mo´neō, I advise

-ō

2. a´mās, you love

mo´nēs, you advise

-s

3. a´mat, he (she, it) loves

mo´net, he (she, it) advises

-t

PLUR.

1. amā´mus, we love

monē´mus, we advise

-mus

2. amā´tis, you love

monē´tis, you advise

-tis

3. a´mant, they love

mo´nent, they advise

-nt

1. The present tense is inflected by adding the personal endings to the present stem, and its first person uses -o and not -m. The form amō is for amā-ō, the two vowels ā-ō contracting to ō. In moneō there is no contraction. Nearly all regular verbs ending in -eo belong to the second conjugation.

2. Note that the long final vowel of the stem is shortened before another vowel (monē-ō = mo´nĕō), and before final -t (amăt, monĕt) and -nt (amănt, monĕnt). Compare § 12. 2.

129. Like amō and moneō inflect the present active indicative of the following verbs  2:

2. The only new verbs in this list are the five of the second conjugation which are starred. Learn their meanings.

INDICATIVE PRESENT

INFINITIVE PRESENT

a´rō, I plow

arā´re, to plow

cū´rō, I care for

cūrā´re, to care for

*dē´leō, I destroy

dēlē´re, to destroy

dēsī´derō, I long for

dēsīderā´re, to long for

dō,  3 I give

da´re, to give

*ha´beō, I have

habē´re, to have

ha´bitō, I live, I dwell

habitā´re, to live, to dwell

*iu´beō, I order

iubē´re, to order

labō´rō, I labor

labōrā´re, to labor

lau´dō, I praise

laudā´re, to praise

mātū´rō, I hasten

mātūrā´re, to hasten

*mo´veō, I move

movē´re, to move

nār´rō, I tell

nārrā´re, to tell

ne´cō, I kill

necā´re, to kill

nūn´tiō, I announce

nūntiā´re, to announce

pa´rō, I prepare

parā´re, to prepare

por´tō, I carry

portā´re, to carry

pro´perō, I hasten

properā´re, to hasten

pug´nō, I fight

pugnā´re, to fight

*vi´deō, I see

vidē´re, to see

vo´cō, I call

vocā´re, to call

3. Observe that in dō, dăre, the a is short, and that the present stem is dă- and not dā-. The only forms of dō that have a long are dās (pres. indic.), dā (pres. imv.), and dāns (pres. part.).

130. The Translation of the Present. In English there are three ways of expressing present action. We may say, for example, I live, I am living, or I do live. In Latin the one expression habitō covers all three of these expressions.

131.             EXERCISES

Give the voice, mood, tense, person, and number of each form.

I. 1. Vocāmus, properātis, iubent. 2. Movētis, laudās, vidēs. 3. Dēlētis, habētis, dant. 4. Mātūrās, dēsīderat, vidēmus. 5. Iubet, movent, necat. 6. Nārrāmus, movēs, vident. 7. Labōrātis, properant, portās, parant. 8. Dēlet, habētis, iubēmus, dās.

N.B. Observe that the personal ending is of prime importance in translating a Latin verb form. Give that your first attention.

II. 1. We plow, we are plowing, we do plow. 2. They care for, they are caring for, they do care for. 3. You give, you are having, you do have (sing.). 4. We destroy, I do long for, they are living. 5. He calls, they see, we are telling. 6. We do fight, we order, he is moving, he prepares. 7. They are laboring, we kill, you announce.

LESSON XX

IMPERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF AMŌ AND MONEŌ

132. Tense Signs. Instead of using auxiliary verbs to express differences in tense, like was, shall, will, etc., Latin adds to the verb stem certain elements that have the force of auxiliary verbs. These are called tense signs.

133. Formation and Inflection of the Imperfect. The tense sign of the imperfect is -bā-, which is added to the present stem. The imperfect consists, therefore, of three parts:

PRESENT STEM

TENSE SIGN

PERSONAL

ENDING

amā-

ba-

m

loving

was

I

The inflection is as follows:

CONJUGATION   I

CONJUGATION   II

SINGULAR

PERSONAL

ENDINGS

1. amā´bam, I was loving

monē´bam, I was advising

-m

2. amā´bās, you were loving

monē´bās, you were advising

-s

3. amā´bat, he was loving

monē´bat, he was advising

-t

PLURAL

1. amābā´mus, we were loving

monēbā´mus, we were advising

-mus

2. amābā´tis, you were loving

monēbā´tis, you were advising

-tis

3. amā´bant, they were loving

monē´bant, they were advising

-nt

a. Note that the ā of the tense sign -bā- is shortened before -nt, and before m and t when final. (Cf. § 12. 2.)

In a similar manner inflect the verbs given in § 129.

134. Meaning of the Imperfect. The Latin imperfect describes an act as going on or progressing in past time, like the English past-progressive tense (as, I was walking). It is the regular tense used to describe a past situation or condition of affairs.

135.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Vidēbāmus, dēsīderābat, mātūrābās. 2. Dabant, vocābātis, dēlēbāmus. 3. Pugnant, laudābās, movēbātis. 4. Iubēbant, properābātis, portābāmus. 5. Dabās, nārrābant, labōrābātis. 6. Vidēbant, movēbās, nūntiābāmus. 7. Necābat, movēbam, habēbat, parābātis.

II. 1. You were having (sing. and plur.), we were killing, they were laboring. 2. He was moving, we were ordering, we were fighting. 3. We were telling, they were seeing, he was calling. 4. They were living, I was longing for, we were destroying. 5. You were giving, you were moving, you were announcing, (sing. and plur.). 6. They were caring for, he was plowing, we were praising.

136.             NI´OBE AND HER CHILDREN

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 287.

Niobē, rēgina Thēbānōrum, erat pulchra fēmina sed superba. Erat superba nōn sōlum fōrmā  1 suā marītīque potentiā  1 sed etiam magnō līberōrum numerō.  1 Nam habēbat  2 septem fīliōs et septem fīliās. Sed ea superbia erat rēgīnae  3 causa magnae trīstitiae et līberīs  3 causa dūrae poenae.

NOTE. The words Niobē, Thēbānōrum, and marītī will be found in the general vocabulary. Translate the selection without looking up any other words.

1. Ablative of cause.

2. Translate had; it denotes a past situation. (See § 134.)

3. Dative, cf. § 43.

LESSON XXI

FUTURE ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF AMŌ AND MONEŌ

137. The tense sign of the Future Indicative in the first and second conjugations is -bi-. This is joined to the present stem of the verb and followed by the personal ending, as follows:

PRESENT STEM

TENSE SIGN

PERSONAL

ENDING

amā-

bi-

s

love

will

you

138. The Future Active Indicative is inflected as follows.

CONJUGATION   I

CONJUGATION   II

SINGULAR

1. amā´bō, I shall love

monē´bō, I shall advise

2. amā´bis, you will love

monē´bis, you will advise

3. amā´bit, he will love

monē´bit, he will advise

PLURAL

1. amā´bimus, we shall love

monē´bimus, we shall advise

2. amā´bitis will love

monē´bitis, you will advise

3. amā´bunt, they will love

monē´bunt, they will advise

a. The personal endings are as in the present. The ending -bō in the first person singular is contracted from -bi-ō. The -bi- appears as -bu- in the third person plural. Note that the inflection is like that of erō, the future of sum. Pay especial attention to the accent.

In a similar manner inflect the verbs given in § 129.

139.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Movēbitis, laudābis, arābō. 2. Dēlēbitis, vocābitis, dabunt. 3. Mātūrābis, dēsīderābit, vidēbimus. 4. Habēbit, movēbunt, necābit. 5. Nārrābimus, monēbis, vidēbunt. 6. Labōrābitis, cūrābunt, dabis. 7. Habitābimus, properābitis, iubēbunt, parābit. 8. Nūntiābō, portābimus, iubēbō.

II. 1. We shall announce, we shall see, I shall hasten. 2. I shall carry, he will plow, they will care for. 3. You will announce, you will move, you will give, (sing. and plur.). 4. We shall fight, we shall destroy, I shall long for. 5. He will call, they will see, you will tell (plur.). 6. They will dwell, we shall order, he will praise. 7. They will labor, we shall kill, you will have (sing. and plur.), he will destroy.

140.             NIOBE AND HER CHILDREN (Concluded)

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 288.

Apollō et Diāna erant līberī Lātōnae. Iīs Thēbānī sacra crēbra parābant.  1 Oppidānī amābant Lātōnam et līberōs eius. Id superbae rēgīnae erat molestum. “Cūr,” inquit, “Lātōnae et līberīs sacra parātis? Duōs līberōs habet Lātōna; quattuordecim habeō ego. Ubi sunt mea sacra?” Lātōna iīs verbīs  2 īrāta līberōs suōs vocat. Ad eam volant Apollō Diānaque et sagittīs  3 suīs miserōs līberōs rēgīnae superbae dēlent. Niobē, nūper laeta, nunc misera, sedet apud līberōs interfectōs et cum perpetuīs lacrimīs  4 eōs dēsīderat.

NOTE. Consult the general vocabulary for Apollō, inquit, duōs, and quattuordecim. Try to remember the meaning of all the other words.

1. Observe the force of the imperfect here, used to prepare, were in the habit of preparing; so amābant denotes a past situation of affairs. (See § 134.)

2. Ablative of cause.

3. Ablative of means.

4. This may be either manner or accompaniment. It is often impossible to draw a sharp line between means, manner, and accompaniment. The Romans themselves drew no sharp distinction. It was enough for them if the general idea demanded the ablative case.

LESSON XXII

REVIEW OF VERBS · THE DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES

141. Review the present, imperfect, and future active indicative, both orally and in writing, of sum and the verbs in § 129.

142. We learned in § 43 for what sort of expressions we may expect the dative, and in § 44 that one of its commonest uses is with verbs to express the indirect object. It is also very common with adjectives to express the object toward which the quality denoted by the adjective is directed. We have already had a number of cases where grātus, agreeable to, was so followed by a dative; and in the last lesson we had molestus, annoying to, followed by that case. The usage may be more explicitly stated by the following rule:

143. RULE. Dative with Adjectives. The dative is used with adjectives to denote the object toward which the given quality is directed. Such are, especially, those meaning near, also fit, friendly, pleasing, like, and their opposites.

144. Among such adjectives memorize the following:

idōneus, -a, -um, fit, suitable (for)

amīcus, -a, -um, friendly (to)

inimīcus, -a, -um, hostile (to)

grātus, -a, -um, pleasing (to), agreeable (to)

molestus, -a, -um, annoying (to), troublesome (to)

fīnitimus, -a, -um, neighboring (to)

proximus, -a, -um, nearest, next (to)

145.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Rōmānī terram idōneam agrī cultūrae habent. 2. Gallī cōpiīs Rōmānīs inimīcī erant. 3. Cui dea Lātōna amīca non erat? 4. Dea Lātōna superbae rēgīnae amīca nōn erat. 5. Cibus noster, Mārce, erit armātīs virīs grātus. 6. Quid erat molestum populīs Italiae? 7. Bella longa cum Gallīs erant molesta populīs Italiae. 8. Agrī Germānōrum fluviō Rhēnō fīnitimī erant. 9. Rōmānī ad silvam oppidō proximam castra movēbant. 10. Nōn sōlum fōrma sed etiam superbia rēgīnae erat magna. 11. Mox rēgīna pulchra erit aegra trīstitiā. 12. Cūr erat Niobē, rēgīna Thēbānōrum, laeta? Laeta erat Niobē multīs fīliīs et fīliābus.

II. 1. The sacrifices of the people will be annoying to the haughty queen. 2. The sacrifices were pleasing not only to Latona but also to Diana. 3. Diana will destroy those hostile to Latona. 4. The punishment of the haughty queen was pleasing to the goddess Diana. 5. The Romans will move their forces to a large field  1 suitable for a camp. 6. Some of the allies were friendly to the Romans, others to the Gauls.

1. Why not the dative?

146.             CORNELIA AND HER JEWELS

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 288.

Apud antīquās dominās, Cornēlia, Āfricānī fīlia, erat  2 maximē clāra. Fīliī eius erant Tiberius Gracchus et Gāius Gracchus. Iī puerī cum Cornēliā in oppidō Rōmā, clārō Italiae oppidō, habitābant. Ibi eōs cūrābat Cornēlia et ibi magnō cum studiō eōs docēbat. Bona fēmina erat Cornēlia et bonam disciplīnam maximē amābat.

NOTE. Can you translate the paragraph above? There are no new words.

2. Observe that all the imperfects denote continued or progressive action, or describe a state of affairs. (Cf. § 134.)

LESSON XXIII

PRESENT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF REGŌ AND AUDIŌ

147. As we learned in § 126, the present stem of the third conjugation ends in -ĕ, and of the fourth in -ī. The inflection of the Present Indicative is as follows:

CONJUGATION   III

CONJUGATION   IV

re´gō, re´gere (rule  )

au´diō, audī´re (hear  )

PRES. STEM regĕ-

PRES. STEM audī-

SINGULAR

1. re´gō, I rule

au´diō, I hear

2. re´gis, you rule

au´dīs, you hear

3. re´git, he (she, it) rules

au´dit, he (she, it) hears

PLURAL

1. re´gimus, we rule

audī´mus, we hear

2. re´gitis, you rule

audī´tis, you hear

3. re´gunt, they rule

au´diunt, they hear

1. The personal endings are the same as before.

2. The final short -e- of the stem regĕ- combines with the -ō in the first person, becomes -u- in the third person plural, and becomes -ĭ- elsewhere. The inflection is like that of erō, the future of sum.

3. In audiō the personal endings are added regularly to the stem audī-. In the third person plural -u- is inserted between the stem and the personal ending, as audi-u-nt. Note that the long vowel of the stem is shortened before final -t just as in amō and moneō. (Cf. § 12. 2.)

Note that -i- is always short in the third conjugation and long in the fourth, excepting where long vowels are regularly shortened. (Cf. § 12. 1, 2.)

148. Like regō and audiō inflect the present active indicative of the following verbs:

INDICATIVE PRESENT

INFINITIVE PRESENT

agō, I drive

agere, to drive

dīcō, I say

dīcere, to say

dūcō, I lead

dūcere, to lead

mittō, I send

mittere, to send

mūniō, I fortify

mūnīre, to fortify

reperiō, I find

reperīre, to find

veniō, I come

venīre, to come

149.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Quis agit? Cūr venit? Quem mittit? Quem dūcis? 2. Quid mittunt? Ad quem veniunt? Cuius castra mūniunt? 3. Quem agunt? Venīmus. Quid puer reperit? 4. Quem mittimus? Cuius equum dūcitis? Quid dīcunt? 5. Mūnīmus, venītis, dīcit. 6. Agimus, reperītis, mūnīs. 7. Reperis, ducitis, dīcis. 8. Agitis, audimus, regimus.

II. 1. What do they find? Whom do they hear? Why does he come? 2. Whose camp are we fortifying? To whom does he say? What are we saying? 3. I am driving, you are leading, they are hearing. 4. You send, he says, you fortify (sing. and plur.). 5. I am coming, we find, they send. 6. They lead, you drive, he does fortify. 7. You lead, you find, you rule, (all plur.).

150.             CORNELIA AND HER JEWELS (Concluded)

Proximum domicīliō Cornēliae erat pulchrae Campānae domicilium. Campāna erat superba nōn sōlum fōrmā suā sed maximē ōrnāmentīs suīs. Ea  1 laudābat semper. “Habēsne tū ūlla ornāmenta, Cornēlia?” inquit. “Ubi sunt tua ōrnāmenta?” Deinde Cornēlia fīliōs suōs Tiberium et Gāium vocat. “Puerī meī,” inquit, “sunt mea ōrnāmenta. Nam bonī līberī sunt semper bonae fēminae ōrnāmenta maximē clāra.”

NOTE. The only new words here are Campāna, semper, and tū.

1. Ea, accusative plural neuter.

“PUERI MEI SUNT MEA ORNAMENTA”

LESSON XXIV

IMPERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF REGŌ AND AUDIŌ · THE DATIVE WITH SPECIAL INTRANSITIVE VERBS

151.             PARADIGMS

CONJUGATION   III

CONJUGATION   IV

SINGULAR

1. regē´bam, I was ruling

audiē´bam, I was hearing

2. regē´bās, you were riding

audiē´bās, you were hearing

3. regē´bat, he was ruling

audiē´bat, he was hearing

PLURAL

1. regēbā´mus, we were ruling

audiēbā´mus, we were hearing

2. regēbā´tis, you were ruling

audiēbā´tis, you were hearing

3. regē´bant, they were ruling

audiē´bant, they were hearing

1. The tense sign is -bā-, as in the first two conjugations.

2. Observe that the final -ĕ- of the stem is lengthened before the tense sign -bā-. This makes the imperfect of the third conjugation just like the imperfect of the second (cf. monēbam and regēbam).

3. In the fourth conjugation -ē- is inserted between the stem and the tense sign -bā- (audi-ē-ba-m).

4. In a similar manner inflect the verbs given in § 148.

152.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Agēbat, veniēbat, mittēbat, dūcēbant. 2. Agēbant, mittēbant, dūcēbas, mūniēbant. 3. Mittēbāmus, dūcēbātis, dīcēbant. 4. Mūniēbāmus, veniēbātis, dīcēbās. 5. Mittēbās, veniēbāmus, reperiēbat. 6. Reperiēbās, veniēbās, audiēbātis. 7. Agēbāmus, reperiēbātis, mūniēbat. 8. Agēbātis, dīcēbam, mūniēbam.

II. 1. They were leading, you were driving (sing. and plur.), he was fortifying. 2. They were sending, we were finding, I was coming. 3. You were sending, you were fortifying, (sing. and plur.), he was saying. 4. They were hearing, you were leading (sing. and plur.), I was driving. 5. We were saying, he was sending, I was fortifying. 6. They were coming, he was hearing, I was finding. 7. You were ruling (sing. and plur.), we were coming, they were ruling.

153. The Dative with Special Intransitive Verbs. We learned above (§ 20. a) that a verb which does not admit of a direct object is called an intransitive verb. Many such verbs, however, are of such meaning that they can govern an indirect object, which will, of course, be in the dative case (§ 45). Learn the following list of intransitive verbs with their meanings. In each case the dative indirect object is the person or thing to which a benefit, injury, or feeling is directed. (Cf. § 43.)

crēdō, crēdere, believe (give belief to)

faveō, favēre, favor (show favor to)

noceō, nocēre, injure (do harm to)

pāreō, pārēre, obey (give obedience to)

persuādeō, persuādēre, persuade (offer persuasion to)

resistō, resistere, resist (offer resistance to)

studeō, studēre, be eager for (give attention to)

154. RULE. Dative with Intransitive Verbs. The dative of the indirect object is used with the intransitive verbs crēdō, faveō, noceō, pāreō, persuādeō, resistō, studeō, and others of like meaning.

155.             EXERCISE

1. Crēdisne verbīs sociōrum? Multī verbīs eōrum nōn crēdunt. 2. Meī fīnitimī cōnsiliō tuō nōn favēbunt, quod bellō student. 3. Tiberius et Gāius disciplīnae dūrae nōn resistēbant et Cornēliae pārēbant. 4. Dea erat inimīca septem fīliābus rēgīnae. 5. Dūra poena et perpetua trīstitia rēgīnae nōn persuādēbunt. 6. Nūper ea resistēbat et nunc resistit potentiae Lātōnae. 7. Mox sagittae volābunt et līberīs miserīs nocēbunt.

LESSON XXV

FUTURE ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF REGŌ AND AUDIŌ

156. In the future tense of the third and fourth conjugations we meet with a new tense sign. Instead of using -bi-, as in the first and second conjugations, we use -ā-  1 in the first person singular and -ē- in the rest of the tense. In the third conjugation the final -ĕ- of the stem is dropped before this tense sign; in the fourth conjugation the final -ī- of the stem is retained.  2

1. The -ā- is shortened before -m final, and -ē- before -t final and before -nt. (Cf. § 12. 2.)

2. The -ī- is, of course, shortened, being before another vowel. (Cf. § 12. 1.)

157.             PARADIGMS

CONJUGATION   III

CONJUGATION   IV

SINGULAR

1. re´gam, I shall rule

au´diam, I shall hear

2. re´gēs, you will rule

au´diēs, you will hear

3. re´get, he will rule

au´diet, he will hear

PLURAL

1. regē´mus, we shall rule

audiē´mus, we shall hear

2. regē´tis, you will rule

audiē´tis, you will hear

3. re´gent, they will rule

au´dient, they will hear

1. Observe that the future of the third conjugation is like the present of the second, excepting in the first person singular.

2. In the same manner inflect the verbs given in § 148.

158.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Dīcet, dūcētis, mūniēmus. 2. Dīcent, dīcētis, mittēmus. 3. Mūnient, venient, mittent, agent. 4. Dūcet, mittēs, veniet, aget. 5. Mūniet, reperiētis, agēmus. 6. Mittam, veniēmus, regent. 7. Audiētis, veniēs, reperiēs. 8. Reperiet, agam, dūcēmus, mittet. 9. Vidēbitis, sedēbō, vocābimus.

II. 1. I shall find, he will hear, they will come. 2. I shall fortify, he will send, we shall say. 3. I shall drive, you will lead, they will hear. 4. You will send, you will fortify, (sing. and plur.), he will say. 5. I shall come, we shall find, they will send.

6. Who  3 will believe the story? I  4 shall believe the story. 7. Whose friends do you favor? We favor our friends. 8. Who will resist our weapons? Sextus will resist your weapons. 9. Who will persuade him? They will persuade him. 10. Why were you injuring my horse? I was not injuring your horse. 11. Whom does a good slave obey? A good slave obeys his master. 12. Our men were eager for another battle.

3. Remember that quis, who, is singular in number.

4. Express by ego, because it is emphatic.

LESSON XXVI

VERBS IN -IŌ OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION · THE IMPERATIVE MOOD

159. There are a few common verbs ending in -iō which do not belong to the fourth conjugation, as you might infer, but to the third. The fact that they belong to the third conjugation is shown by the ending of the infinitive. (Cf. § 126.) Compare

audiō, audī´re (hear), fourth conjugation

capiō, ca´pere (take), third conjugation

160. The present, imperfect, and future active indicative of capiō are inflected as follows:

capiō, capere, take

PRES. STEM cape-

PRESENT

IMPERFECT

FUTURE

SINGULAR

1. ca´piō

capiē´bam

ca´piam

2. ca´pis

capiē´bās

ca´piēs

3. ca´pit

capiē´bat

ca´piet

PLURAL

1. ca´pimus

capiēbā´mus

capiē´mus

2. ca´pitis

capiēbā´tis

capiē´tis

3. ca´piunt

capiē´bant

ca´pient

1. Observe that capiō and the other -iō verbs follow the fourth conjugation wherever in the fourth conjugation two vowels occur in succession. (Cf. capiō, audiō; capiunt, audiunt; and all the imperfect and future.) All other forms are like the third conjugation. (Cf. capis, regis; capit, regit; etc.)

2. Like capiō, inflect

faciō, facere, make, do

fugiō, fugere, flee

iaciō, iacere, hurl

rapiō, rapere, seize

161. The Imperative Mood. The imperative mood expresses a command; as, come! send! The present tense of the imperative is used only in the second person, singular and plural. The singular in the active voice is regularly the same in form as the present stem. The plural is formed by adding -te to the singular.

CONJUGATION

SINGULAR

PLURAL

I.

amā, love thou

amā´te, love ye

II.

monē, advise thou

monē´te, advise ye

III.

(a  )

rege, rule thou

re´gite, rule ye

(b  )

cape, take thou

ca´pite, take ye

IV.

audī, hear thou

audī´te, hear ye

sum   (irregular)

es, be thou

este, be ye

1. In the third conjugation the final -ĕ- of the stem becomes -ĭ- in the plural.

2. The verbs dīcō, say; dūcō, lead; and faciō, make, have the irregular forms dīc, dūc, and fac in the singular.

3. Give the present active imperative, singular and plural, of veniō, dūcō, vocō, doceō, laudō, dīcō, sedeō, agō, faciō, mūniō, mittō, rapiō.

162.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Fugient, faciunt, iaciēbat. 2. Dēlē, nūntiāte, fugiunt. 3. Venīte, dīc, faciētis. 4. Dūcite, iaciam, fugiēbant. 5. Fac, iaciēbāmus, fugimus, rapite. 6. Sedēte, reperī, docēte. 7. Fugiēmus, iacient, rapiēs. 8. Reperient, rapiēbātis, nocent. 9. Favēte, resistē, pārēbitis.

10. Volā ad multās terrās et dā auxilium. 11. Ego tēla mea capiam et multās ferās dēlēbō. 12. Quis fābulae tuae crēdet? 13. Este bonī, puerī, et audīte verba grāta magistrī.

II. 1. The goddess will seize her arms and will hurl her weapons. 2. With her weapons she will destroy many beasts. 3. She will give aid to the weak.  1 4. She will fly to many lands and the beasts will flee. 5. Romans, tell  2 the famous story to your children.

1. Plural. An adjective used as a noun. (Cf. § 99. II. 3.)

2. Imperative. The imperative generally stands first, as in English.

Third Review, Lessons XVIII-XXVI, §§ 510-512

LESSON XXVII

THE PASSIVE VOICE · PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE INDICATIVE OF AMŌ AND MONEŌ

163. The Voices. Thus far the verb forms have been in the active voice; that is, they have represented the subject as performing an action; as,

The lion——> killed——> the hunter

A verb is said to be in the passive voice when it represents its subject as receiving an action; as,

The lion <—— was killed <—— by the hunter

Note the direction of the arrows.

164. Passive Personal Endings. In the passive voice we use a different set of personal endings. They are as follows:

SING.

1. -r, I

PLUR.

1. -mur, we

2. -ris, -re, you

2. -minī, you

3. -tur, he, she, it

3. -ntur, they

a. Observe that the letter -r appears somewhere in all but one of the endings. This is sometimes called the passive sign.

165.             PARADIGMS

amō, amāre

monēo, monēre

PRES. STEM amā-

PRES. STEM monē-

PRESENT INDICATIVE

PERSONAL

ENDINGS

SING.

a´m  or, I am loved

mo´ne  or, I am advised

-or  1

amā´  ris or amā´re, you are loved

monē´  ris or monē´re, you are advised

-ris or -re

amā´  tur, he is loved

monē´  tur, he is advised

-tur

PLUR.

amā´  mur, we are loved

monē´  mur, we are advised

-mur

amā´  minī, you are loved

monē´  minī, you are advised

-mini

ama  n´tur, they are loved

mone  n´tur, they are advised

-ntur

IMPERFECT INDICATIVE (TENSE SIGN -bā-  )

SING.

amā´  bar, I was being loved

monē´  bar, I was being advised

-r

amā  bā´ris or amābā´re, you were being loved

monē  bā´ris or monēbā´re, you were being advised

-ris or -re

amā  bā´tur, he was being loved

monē  bā´tur, he was being advised

-tur

PLUR.

amā  bā´mur, we were being loved

monē  bā´mur, we were being advised

-mur

amā  bā´minī, you were being loved

monē  bā´minī, you were being advised

-minī

amā  ban´tur, they were being loved

monē  ban´tur, they were being advised

-ntur

FUTURE (TENSE SIGN -bi-  )

SING.

amā´  bor, I shall be loved

monē´  bor, I shall be advised

-r

amā´  beris or amā´bere, you will be loved

monē´  beris or monē´bere, you will be advised

-ris or -re

amā´  bitur, he will be loved

monē´  bitur, he will be advised

-tur

PLUR.

amā´  bimur, we shall be loved

monē´  bimur, we shall be advised

-mur

amā  bi´minī, you will be loved

monē  bi´minī, you will be advised

-minī

amā  bun´tur, they will be loved

monē  bun´tur, they will be advised

-ntur

1. In the present the personal ending of the first person singular is -or.

1. The tense sign and the personal endings are added as in the active.

2. In the future the tense sign -bi- appears as -bo- in the first person, -be- in the second, singular number, and as -bu- in the third person plural.

3. Inflect laudō, necō, portō, moveō, dēleō, iubeō, in the present, imperfect, and future indicative, active and passive.

166. Intransitive verbs, such as mātūrō, I hasten; habitō, I dwell, do not have a passive voice with a personal subject.

167.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Laudāris or laudāre, laudās, datur, dat. 2. Dabitur, dabit, vidēminī, vidētis. 3. Vocābat, vocābātur, dēlēbitis, dēlēbiminī. 4. Parābātur, parābat, cūrās, cūrāris or cūrāre. 5. Portābantur, portābant, vidēbimur, vidēbimus. 6. Iubēris or iubēre, iubēs, laudābāris or laudābāre, laudābās. 7. Movēberis or movēbere, movēbis, dabantur, dabant. 8. Dēlentur, dēlent, parābāmur, parābāmus.

II. 1. We prepare, we are prepared, I shall be called, I shall call, you were carrying, you were being carried. 2. I see, I am seen, it was being announced, he was announcing, they will order, they will be ordered. 3. You will be killed, you will kill, you move, you are moved, we are praising, we are being praised. 4. I am called, I call, you will have, you are cared for. 5. They are seen, they see, we were teaching, we were being taught, they will move, they will be moved.

PERSEUS ANDROMEDAM SERVAT

168.             PER´SEUS AND ANDROM´EDA

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 288.

Perseus fīlius erat Iovis,  2 maximī  3 deōrum. Dē eō multās fabulās nārrant poētae. Eī favent deī, eī magica arma et ālās dant. Eīs tēlīs armātus et ālīs frētus ad multās terrās volābat et mōnstra saeva dēlēbat et miserīs īnfīrmīsque auxilium dabat. Aethiopia est terra Āfricae. Eam terram Cēpheus  5 regēbat. Eī  6 Neptūnus, maximus aquārum deus, erat īrātus et mittit  7 mōnstrum saevum ad Aethiopiam. Ibi mōnstrum nōn sōlum lātīs pulchrīsque Aethiopiae agrīs nocēbat sed etiam domicilia agricolārum dēlēbat, et multōs virōs, fēminās, līberōsque necābat. Populus ex agrīs fugiēbat et oppida mūrīs validīs mūniēbat. Tum Cēpheus magnā trīstitiā commōtus ad Iovis ōrāculum properat et ita dīcit: “Amīcī meī necantur; agrī meī vāstantur. Audī verba mea, Iuppiter. Dā miserīs auxilium. Age mōnstrum saevum ex patriā.”

2. Iovis, the genitive of Iuppiter.

3. Used substantively, the greatest. So below, l. 4, miserīs and īnfīrmīs are used substantively.

4. Pronounce in two syllables, Ce´pheus.

5. Eī, at him, dative with īrātus.

6. The present is often used, as in English, in speaking of a past action, in order to make the story more vivid and exciting.

LESSON XXVIII

PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE INDICATIVE PASSIVE OF REGŌ AND AUDIŌ

169. Review the present, imperfect, and future indicative active of regō and audiō, and learn the passive of the same tenses (§§ 490, 491).

a. Observe that the tense signs of the imperfect and future are the same as in the active voice, and that the passive personal endings (§ 164) are added instead of the active ones.

b. Note the slight irregularity in the second person singular present of the third conjugation. There the final -e- of the stem is not changed to -i-, as it is in the active. We therefore have re´geris or re´gere, not re´giris, re´gire.

c. Inflect agō, dīcō, dūcō, mūniō, reperiō, in the present, imperfect, and future indicative, active and passive.

170.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Agēbat, agēbātur, mittēbat, mittēbātur, dūcēbat. 2. Agunt, aguntur, mittuntur, mittunt, mūniunt. 3. Mittor, mittar, mittam, dūcēre, dūcere. 4. Dīcēmur, dīcimus, dīcēmus, dīcimur, mūniēbaminī. 5. Dūcitur, dūciminī, reperīmur, reperiar, agitur. 6. Agēbāmus, agēbāmur, reperīris, reperiēminī. 7. Mūnīminī, veniēbam, dūcēbar, dīcētur. 8. Mittiminī, mittitis, mittēris, mitteris, agēbāminī. 9. Dīcitur, dīcit, mūniuntur, reperient, audientur.

II. 1. I was being driven, I was driving, we were leading, we were being led, he says, it is said. 2. I shall send, I shall be sent, you will find, you will be found, they lead, they are led. 3. I am found, we are led, they are driven, you were being led (sing. and plur.). 4. We shall drive, we shall be driven, he leads, he is being led, they will come, they will be fortified. 5. They were ruling, they were being ruled, you will send, you will be sent, you are sent, (sing. and plur.). 6. He was being led, he will come, you are said (sing. and plur.).

171.             PERSEUS AND ANDROMEDA (Continued)

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 288.

Tum ōrāculum ita respondet: “Mala est fortūna tua. Neptūnus, magnus aquārum deus, terrae Aethiopiae inimīcus, eās poenās mittit. Sed parā īrātō deō sacrum idōneum et mōnstrum saevum ex patriā tuā agētur. Andromeda fīlia tua est mōnstrō grāta. Dā eam mōnstrō. Servā cāram patriam et vītam populī tuī.” Andromeda autem erat puella pulchra. Eam amābat Cēpheus maximē.

LESSON XXIX

PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND FUTURE INDICATIVE PASSIVE OF -IŌ VERBS · PRESENT PASSIVE INFINITIVE AND IMPERATIVE

172. Review the active voice of capiō, present, imperfect, and future, and learn the passive of the same tenses (§ 492).

a. The present forms capior and capiuntur are like audior, audiuntur, and the rest of the tense is like regor.

b. In like manner inflect the passive of iaciō and rapiō.

173. The Infinitive. The infinitive mood gives the general meaning of the verb without person or number; as, amāre, to love. Infinitive means unlimited. The forms of the other moods, being limited by person and number, are called the finite, or limited, verb forms.

174. The forms of the Present Infinitive, active and passive, are as follows:

CONJ.

PRES. STEM

PRES. INFINITIVE ACTIVE

PRES. INFINITIVE PASSIVE

I.

amā-

amā´re, to love

amā´rī, to be loved

II.

monē-

monē´re, to advise

monē´rī, to be advised

III.

rege-

re´gere, to rule

re´gī, to be ruled

cape-

ca´pere, to take

ca´pī, to be taken

IV.

audī-

audī´re, to hear

audīrī, to be heard

1. Observe that to form the present active infinitive we add -re to the present stem.

a. The present infinitive of sum is esse. There is no passive.

2. Observe that the present passive infinitive is formed from the active by changing final -e to -ī, except in the third conjugation, which changes final -ere to -ī.

3. Give the active and passive present infinitives of doceō, sedeō, volō, cūrō, mittō, dūcō, mūniō, reperiō, iaciō, rapiō.

175. The forms of the Present Imperative, active and passive, are as follows:

ACTIVE    1

PASSIVE

CONJ.

SING.

PLUR.

SING.

PLUR.

I.

a´mā

amā´te

amā´re, be thou loved

amā´minī, be ye loved

II.

mo´nē

monē´te

monē´re, be thou advised

monē´minī, be ye advised

III.

re´ge

re´gite

re´gere, be thou ruled

regi´minī, be ye ruled

ca´pe

ca´pite

ca´pere, be thou taken

capi´minī, be ye taken

IV.

au´dī

audī´te

audī´re, be thou heard

audī´minī, be ye heard

1. Observe that the second person singular of the present passive imperative is like the present active infinitive, and that both singular and plural are like the second person singular  2 and plural, respectively, of the present passive indicative.

2. Give the present imperative, both active and passive, of the verbs in § 174. 3.

1. For the sake of comparison the active is repeated from § 161.

2. That is, using the personal ending -re. A form like amāre may be either indicative, infinitive, or imperative.

176.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 289.

I. 1. Tum Perseus ālīs ad terrās multās volabit. 2. Mōnstrum saevum per aquās properat et mox agrōs nostrōs vāstābit. 3. Sī autem Cēpheus ad ōrāculum properābit, ōrāculum ita respondēbit. 4. Quis tēlīs Perseī superābitur? Multa mōnstra tēlīs eius superābuntur. 5. Cum cūrīs magnīs et lacrimīs multīs agricolae ex domiciliīs cārīs aguntur. 6. Multa loca vāstābantur et multa oppida dēlēbantur. 7. Mōnstrum est validum, tamen superābitur. 8. Crēdēsne semper verbīs ōrāculī? Ego iīs non semper crēdam. 9. Pārēbitne Cēpheus ōrāculō? Verba ōrāculī eī persuādēbunt. 10. Si nōn fugiēmus, oppidum capiētur et oppidānī necābuntur. 11. Vocāte puerōs et nārrāte fābulam clāram dē mōnstrō saevō.

II. 1. Fly thou, to be cared for, be ye sent, lead thou. 2. To lead, to be led, be ye seized, fortify thou. 3. To be hurled, to fly, send thou, to be found. 4. To be sent, be ye led, to hurl, to be taken. 5. Find thou, hear ye, be ye ruled, to be fortified.

LESSON XXX

SYNOPSES IN THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS · THE ABLATIVE DENOTING FROM

177. You should learn to give rapidly synopses of the verbs you have had, as follows:  1

CONJUGATION   I

CONJUGATION   II

INDICATIVE

ACTIVE

PASSIVE

ACTIVE

PASSIVE

Pres.

a´mō

a´mor

mo´neō

mo´neor

Imperf.

amā´bam

amā´bar

monē´bam

monē´bar

Fut.

amā´bo

amā´bor

monē´bo

monē´bor

IMPERATIVE

Pres.

a´mā

amā´re

mo´nē

monē´re

INFINITIVE

Pres.

amā´re

amā´rī

monē´re

monē´rī

CONJUGATION   III

CONJUGATION III

(-iō   verbs)

INDICATIVE

ACTIVE

PASSIVE

ACTIVE

PASSIVE

Pres.

re´gō

re´gor

ca´piō

ca´pior

Imperf.

regē´bam

regē´bar

capiē´bam

capiē´bar

Fut.

re´gam

re´gar

ca´piam

ca´piar

IMPERATIVE

Pres.

re´ge

re´gere

ca´pe

ca´pere

INFINITIVE

Pres.

re´gere

re´gī

ca´pere

ca´pī

CONJUGATION   IV

INDICATIVE

ACTIVE

PASSIVE

Pres.

au´diō

au´dior

Imperf.

audiē´bam

audiē´bar

Fut.

au´diam

au´diar

IMPERATIVE

Pres.

au´dī

audī´re

INFINITIVE

Pres.

audī´re

audī´rī

1. Synopses should be given not only in the first person, but in other persons as well, particularly in the third singular and plural.

1. Give the synopsis of rapiō, mūniō, reperiō, doceō, videō, dīcō, agō, laudō, portō, and vary the person and number.

178. We learned in § 50 that one of the three relations covered by the ablative case is expressed in English by the preposition from. This is sometimes called the separative ablative, and it has a number of special uses. You have already grown familiar with the first mentioned below.

179. RULE. Ablative of the Place From. The place from which is expressed by the ablative with the prepositions ā or ab, dē, ē or ex.

Agricolae ex agrīs veniunt, the farmers come from the fields

a. ā or ab denotes from near a place; ē or ex, out from it; and dē, down from it. This may be represented graphically as follows:

180. RULE. Ablative of Separation. Words expressing separation or deprivation require an ablative to complete their meaning.

a. If the separation is actual and literal of one material thing from another, the preposition ā or ab, ē or ex, or dē is generally used. If no actual motion takes place of one thing from another, no preposition is necessary.

(a  )

Perseus terram ā mōnstrīs līberat

Perseus frees the land from monsters (literal separation— actual motion is expressed)

(b  )

Perseus terram trīstitiā līberat

Perseus frees the land from sorrow (figurative separation— no actual motion is expressed)

181. RULE. Ablative of the Personal Agent. The word expressing the person from whom an action starts, when not the subject, is put in the ablative with the preposition ā or ab.

a. In this construction the English translation of ā, ab is by rather than from. This ablative is regularly used with passive verbs to indicate the person by whom the act was performed.

Mōnstrum ā Perseō necātur, the monster is being slain by (lit. from) Perseus

b. Note that the active form of the above sentence would be Perseus monstrum necat, Perseus is slaying the monster. In the passive the object of the active verb becomes the subject, and the subject of the active verb becomes the ablative of the personal agent, with ā or ab.

c. Distinguish carefully between the ablative of means and the ablative of the personal agent. Both are often translated into English by the preposition by. (Cf. § 100. b.) Means is a thing; the agent or actor is a person. The ablative of means has no preposition. The ablative of the personal agent has ā or ab. Compare

Fera sagittā necātur, the wild beast is killed by an arrow

Fera ā Diānā necātur, the wild beast is killed by Diana

Sagittā, in the first sentence, is the ablative of means; ā Diānā, in the second, is the ablative of the personal agent.

182.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 289.

I. 1. Viri inopiā cibī dēfessī ab eō locō discēdent. 2. Germānī castrīs Rōmānīs adpropinquābant, tamen lēgātus cōpiās ā proeliō continēbat. 3. Multa Gallōrum oppida ab Rōmanīs capientur. 4. Tum Rōmānī tōtum populum eōrum oppidōrum gladiīs pīlīsque interficient. 5. Oppidānī Rōmānīs resistent, sed defessī longō proelīo fugient. 6. Multī ex Galliā fugiēbant et in Germānōrum vicīs habitābant. 7. Miserī nautae vulnerantur ab inimīcīs  2 saevīs et cibō egent. 8. Discēdite et date virīs frūmentum et cōpiam vīnī. 9. Cōpiae nostrae ā proeliō continēbantur ab Sextō lēgatō. 10. Id oppidum ab prōvinciā Rōmānā longē aberat.

II. 1. The weary sailors were approaching a place dear to the goddess Diana. 2. They were without food and without wine. 3. Then Galba and seven other men are sent to the ancient island by Sextus. 4. Already they are not far away from the land, and they see armed men on a high place. 5. They are kept from the land by the men with spears and arrows. 6. The men kept hurling their weapons down from the high place with great eagerness.

2. inimīcīs, here used as a noun. See vocabulary.

LESSON XXXI

PERFECT, PLUPERFECT, AND FUTURE PERFECT OF SUM

183. Principal Parts. There are certain parts of the verb that are of so much consequence in tense formation that we call them the principal parts.

The principal parts of the Latin verb are the present, the past, and the past participle; as go, went, gone; see, saw, seen, etc.

The principal parts of the Latin verb are the first person singular of the present indicative, the present infinitive, the first person singular of the perfect indicative, and the perfect passive participle.

184. Conjugation Stems. From the principal parts we get three conjugation stems, from which are formed the entire conjugation. We have already learned about the present stem, which is found from the present infinitive (cf. § 126. a). The other two stems are the perfect stem and the participial stem.

185. The Perfect Stem. The perfect stem of the verb is formed in various ways, but may always be found by dropping -ī from the first person singular of the perfect, the third of the principal parts. From the perfect stem are formed the following tenses:

THE PERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE

THE PLUPERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE (ENGLISH PAST PERFECT)

THE FUTURE PERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE

All these tenses express completed action in present, past, or future time respectively.

186. The Endings of the Perfect. The perfect active indicative is inflected by adding the endings of the perfect to the perfect stem. These endings are different from those found in any other tense, and are as follows:

SING.

1. -ī, I

PLUR.

1. -imus, we

2. -istī, you

2. -istis, you

3. -it, he, she, it

3. -ērunt or -ēre, they

187. Inflection of sum in the perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect indicative:

PRES. INDIC.

PRES. INFIN.

PERF. INDIC.

PRIN. PARTS sum

esse

fuī

PERFECT STEM fu-

PERFECT

SINGULAR

PLURAL

fu´ī, I have been, I was

fu´imus, we have been, we were

fuis´tī, you have been, you were

fuis´tis, you have been, you were

fu´it, he has been, he was

fuē´runt or fuē´re, they have been, they were

PLUPERFECT (TENSE SIGN -erā-  )

fu´eram, I had been

fuerā´mus, we had been

fu´erās, you had been

fuerā´tis, you had been

fu´erat, he had been

fu´erant, they had been

FUTURE PERFECT (TENSE SIGN -erā-  )

fu´erō, I shall have been

fue´rimus, we shall have been

fu´eris, you will have been

fue´ritis, you will have been

fu´erit, he will have been

fu´erint, they will have been

1. Note carefully the changing accent in the perfect.

2. Observe that the pluperfect may be formed by adding eram, the imperfect of sum, to the perfect stem. The tense sign is -erā-.

3. Observe that the future perfect may be formed by adding erō, the future of sum, to the perfect stem. But the third person plural ends in -erint, not in -erunt. The tense sign is -eri-.

4. All active perfects, pluperfects, and future perfects are formed on the perfect stem and inflected in the same way.

188.             DIALOGUE

THE BOYS TITUS, MARCUS, AND QUINTUS

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 289.

M. Ubi fuistis, Tite et Quīnte?

T. Ego in meō lūdō fuī et Quīntus in suō lūdō fuit. Bonī puerī fuimus. Fuitne Sextus in vīcō hodiē?

M. Fuit. Nūper per agrōs proximōs fluviō properābat. Ibi is et Cornēlius habent nāvigium.

T. Nāvigium dīcis? Aliī  1 nārrā eam fābulam!

M. Vērō (Yes, truly), pulchrum et novum nāvigium!

Q. Cuius pecūniā  2 Sextus et Cornēlius id nāvigium parant? Quis iīs pecūniam dat?

M. Amīcī Cornēlī multum habent aurum et puer pecūniā nōn eget.

T. Quō puerī nāvigābunt? Nāvigābuntne longē ā terrā?

M. Dubia sunt cōnsilia eōrum. Sed hodiē, crēdō, sī ventus erit idōneus, ad maximam īnsulam nāvigābunt. Iam anteā ibi fuērunt. Tum autem ventus erat perfidus et puerī magnō in perīculō erant.

Q. Aqua ventō commōta est inimīca nautīs semper, et saepe perfidus ventus nāvigia rapit, agit, dēletque. Iī puerī, sī nōn fuerint maximē attentī, īrātā aquā et validō ventō superābuntur et ita interficientur.

1. Dative case. (Cf. § 109.)

2. Ablative of means.

189.             EXERCISE

1. Where had the boys been before? They had been in school. 2. Where had Sextus been? He had been in a field next to the river. 3. Who has been with Sextus to-day? Cornelius has been with him. 4. Who says so? Marcus. 5. If the wind has been suitable, the boys have been in the boat. 6. Soon we shall sail with the boys. 7. There  3 will be no danger, if we are (shall have been) careful.  4

3. The expletive there is not expressed, but the verb will precede the subject, as in English.

4. This predicate adjective must be nominative plural to agree with we.

LESSON XXXII

THE PERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE OF THE FOUR REGULAR CONJUGATIONS

190. Meanings of the Perfect. The perfect tense has two distinct meanings. The first of these is equivalent to the English present perfect, or perfect with have, and denotes that the action of the verb is complete at the time of speaking; as, I have finished my work. As this denotes completed action at a definite time, it is called the perfect definite.

The perfect is also used to denote an action that happened sometime in the past; as, I finished my work. As no definite time is specified, this is called the perfect indefinite. It corresponds to the ordinary use of the English past tense.

a. Note carefully the difference between the following tenses:

I

was finishing

used to finish

my work (imperfect, § 134  )

I finished my work   (perfect indefinite)

I have finished my work   (perfect definite)

When telling a story the Latin uses the perfect indefinite to mark the different forward steps of the narrative, and the imperfect to describe situations and circumstances that attend these steps. If the following sentences were Latin, what tenses would be used?

“Last week I went to Boston. I was trying to find an old friend of mine, but he was out of the city. Yesterday I returned home.”

191. Inflection of the Perfect. We learned in § 186 that any perfect is inflected by adding the endings of the perfect to the perfect stem. The inflection in the four regular conjugations is then as follows:

CONJ.   I

CONJ.   II

CONJ.   III

CONJ.   IV

amāvī

monuī

rēxī

cēpī

audīvī

I have loved

I loved or did love

I have advised

I advised or did advise

I have ruled

I ruled or did rule

I have taken

I took or did take

I have heard

I heard or did hear

PERFECT STEMS

amāv-

monu-

rēx-

cēp-

audīv-

SINGULAR

1. amā´vī

mo´nuī

rē´xī

cē´pī

audī´vī

2. amāvis´tī

monuis´tī

rēxis´tī

cēpis´tī

audīvis´tī

3. amā´vit

mo´nuit

rē´xit

cē´pit

audī´vit

PLURAL

1. amā´vimus

monu´imus

rē´ximus

cē´pimus

audī´vimus

2. amāvis´tis

monuis´tis

rēxis´tis

cēpis´tis

audīvis´tis

3. amāv  ē´runt or amāvē´re

monu  ē´runt or monuē´re

rēx  ē´runt or rēxē´re

cēp  ē´runt or cēpē´re

audīv  ē´runt or audīvē´re

1. The first person of the perfect is always given as the third of the principal parts. From this we get the perfect stem. This shows the absolute necessity of learning the principal parts thoroughly.

2. Nearly all perfects of the first conjugation are formed by adding -vī to the present stem. Like amāvī inflect parāvī, vocāvī, cūrāvī, laudāvī.

3. Note carefully the changing accent in the perfect. Drill on it.

192. Learn the principal parts and inflect the perfects:

PRES. INDIC.

PRES. INFIN.

PERF. INDIC.

dō

dăre

dedī

give

dēleō

dēlēre

dēlēvī

destroy

habeō

habēre

habuī

have

moveō

movēre

mōvī

move

pāreō

pārēre

pāruī

obey

prohibeō

prohibēre

prohibuī

restrain, keep from

videō

vidēre

vīdī

see

dīcō

dīcere

dīxī

say

discēdō

discēdere

discessī

depart

dūcō

dūcere

dūxī

lead

faciō

facere

fēcī

make, do

mittō

mittere

mīsī

send

mūniō

mūnīre

mūnīvī

fortify

veniō

venīre

vēnī

come

193.             PERSEUS AND ANDROMEDA (Continued)

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 290.

Cēpheus, adversā fortūnā maximē commōtus, discessit et multīs cum lacrimīs populō Aethiopiae verba ōrāculī nārrāvit. Fāta Andromedae, puellae pulchrae, ā tōtō populō dēplōrābantur, tamen nūllum erat auxilium. Deinde Cēpheus cum plēnō trīstitiae animō cāram suam fīliam ex oppidī portā ad aquam dūxit et bracchia eius ad saxa dūra revīnxit. Tum amīcī puellae miserae longē discessērunt et diū mōnstrum saevum exspectāvērunt.

Tum forte Perseus, ālīs frētus, super Aethiopiam volābat. Vīdit populum, Andromedam, lacrimās, et, magnopere attonitus, ad terram dēscendit. Tum Cēpheus eī tōtās cūrās nārrāvit et ita dīxit: “Pārēbō verbīs ōrāculī, et prō patriā fīliam meam dabō; sed sī id mōnstrum interficiēs et Andromedam servābis, tibi (to you) eam dabō.”

LESSON XXXIII

PLUPERFECT AND FUTURE PERFECT ACTIVE INDICATIVE · PERFECT ACTIVE INFINITIVE

194.

CONJ.   I

CONJ.   II

CONJ.   III

CONJ.   IV

amō

moneō

regō

capiō

audiō

PERFECT STEMS

amāv-

monu-

rēx-

cēp-

audīv-

PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE

TENSE SIGN -erā-

SINGULAR

I had loved

I had advised

I had ruled

I had taken

I had heard

1. amā´veram

monu´eram

rē´xeram

cē´peram

audī´veram

2. amā´verās

monu´erās

rē´xerās

cē´perās

audī´verās

3. amā´verat

monu´erat

rē´xerat

cē´perat

audī´verat

PLURAL

1. amāverā´mus

monuerā´mus

rēxerā´mus

cēperā´mus

audīverā´mus

2. amāverā´tis

monuerā´tis

rēxerā´tis

cēperā´tis

audīverā´tis

3. amā´verant

monu´erant

rē´xerant

cē´perant

audī´verant

FUTURE PERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE

TENSE SIGN -eri-

SINGULAR

I shall have loved

I shall have advised

I shall have ruled

I shall have taken

I shall have heard

1. amā´verō

monu´erō

rē´xerō

cē´perō

audī´verō

2. amā´veris

monu´eris

rē´xeris

cē´peris

audī´veris

3. amā´verit

monu´erit

rē´xerit

cē´perit

audī´verit

PLURAL

1. amāve´rimus

monue´rimus

rēxe´rimus

cēpe´rimus

audīve´rimus

2. amāve´ritis

monue´ritis

rēxe´ritis

cēpe´ritis

audīve´ritis

3. amā´verint

monu´erint

rē´xerint

cē´perint

audī´verint

1. Observe that these are all inflected alike and the rules for formation given in § 187. 2-4 hold good here.

2. In like manner inflect the pluperfect and future perfect indicative active of dō, portō, dēleō, moveō, habeō, dīcō, discēdō, faciō, veniō, mūniō.

195. The Perfect Active Infinitive. The perfect active infinitive is formed by adding -isse to the perfect stem.

CONJ.

PERFECT STEM

PERFECT INFINITIVE

I.

amāv-

amāvis´se, to have loved

II.

monu-

monuis´se, to have advised

III.

(a  )

rēx-

rēxis´se, to have ruled

(b  )

cēp-

cēpis´se, to have taken

IV.

audīv-

audīvis´se, to have heard

sum

fu-

fuis´se, to have been

1. In like manner give the perfect infinitive active of dō, portō, dēleō, moveō, habeō, dīcō, discēdō, faciō, veniō, mūniō.

196.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Habuistī, mōvērunt, miserant. 2. Vīdit, dīxeris, dūxisse. 3. Mīsistis, pāruērunt, discesserāmus. 4. Mūnīvit, dederam, mīserō. 5. Habuerimus, dēlēvī, pāruit, fuisse. 6. Dederās, mūnīveritis, vēnerātis, mīsisse. 7. Vēnerās, fēcisse, dederātis, portāveris.

8. Quem verba ōrāculī mōverant? Populum verba ōrāculī mōverant. 9. Cui Cēpheus verba ōrāculī nārrāverit? Perseō Cēpheus verba ōrāculī nārrāverit. 10. Amīcī ab Andromedā discesserint. 11. Mōnstrum saevum domicilia multa dēlēverat. 12. Ubi mōnstrum vīdistis? Id in aquā vīdimus. 13. Quid mōnstrum faciet? Mōnstrum Andromedam interficiet.

II. 1. They have obeyed, we have destroyed, I shall have had. 2. We shall have sent, I had come, they have fortified. 3. I had departed, he has obeyed, you have sent (sing. and plur.). 4. To have destroyed, to have seen, he will have given, they have carried. 5. He had destroyed, he has moved, you have had (sing. and plur.). 6. I have given, you had moved (sing. and plur.), we had said. 7. You will have made (sing. and plur.), they will have led, to have given.

8. Who had seen the monster? Andromeda had seen it. 9. Why had the men departed from  1 the towns? They had departed because the monster had come. 10. Did Cepheus obey  2 the oracle  3? He did.

1. ex. What would ab mean?

2. Did ... obey, perfect tense.

3. What case?

LESSON XXXIV

REVIEW OF THE ACTIVE VOICE

197. A review of the tenses of the indicative active shows the following formation:

TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE

P  RESENT = First of the principal parts

IMPERFECT = Present stem + -ba-m

F  UTURE = Present stem +

-bō, Conj. I and II

-a-m  , Conj. III and IV

P  ERFECT = Third of the principal parts

PLUPERFECT = Perfect stem + -era-m

FUTURE PERFECT = Perfect stem + -erō

198. The synopsis of the active voice of amō, as far as we have learned the conjugation, is as follows:

PRINCIPAL PARTS amō, amāre, amāvī

PRES. STEM amā-

PERF. STEM amāv-

INDIC.

Pres. amō

INDIC.

Perf. amāvī

Imperf. amābam

Pluperf. amāveram

Fut. amābō

Fut. perf. amāverō

PRES. IMV. amā

PRES. INFIN. amāre

PERF. INFIN. amāvisse

1. Learn to write in the same form and to give rapidly the principal parts and synopsis of parō, dō, laudō, dēleō, habeō, moveō, pāreō, videō, dīcō, discēdō, dūcō, mittō, capiō, muniō, veniō.  1

1. Learn to give synopses rapidly, and not only in the first person singular but in any person of either number.

199. Learn the following principal parts:  2

PRES. INDIC.

PRES. INFIN.

PERF. INDIC.

IRREGULAR

VERBS

sum

ab´sum

dō

esse

abes´se

dare

fuī

ā´fuī

dedī

be

be away

give

CONJUGATION

II

contineō

doceō

egeō

faveō

iubeō

noceō

persuādeō

respondeō

sedeō

studeō

continēre

docēre

egēre

favēre

iubēre

nocēre

persuādēre

respondēre

sedēre

studēre

continuī

docuī

eguī

fāvī

iussī

nocuī

persuāsī

respondī

sēdī

studuī

hold in, keep

teach

need

favor

order

injure

persuade

reply

sit

be eager

CONJUGATION

III

agō

crēdō

fugiō

iaciō

interficiō

rapiō

resis´tō

agere

crēdere

fugere

iacere

interficere

rapere

resis´tere

ēgī

crēdidī

fūgī

iēcī

interfēcī

rapuī

re´stitī

drive

believe

flee

hurl

kill

seize

resist

CONJUGATION

IV

repe´riō

reperī´re

rep´perī

find

2. These are all verbs that you have had before, and the perfect is the only new form to be learned.

200.             PERSEUS AND ANDROMEDA (Concluded)

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 290. Read the whole story.

Perseus semper proeliō studēbat  3 et respondit,  3 “Verba tua sunt maximē grāta,” et laetus arma sua magica parāvit.  3 Subitō mōnstrum vidētur; celeriter per aquam properat et Andromedae adpropinquat. Eius amīcī longē absunt et misera puella est sōla. Perseus autem sine morā super aquam volāvit.  3 Subitō dēscendit  3 et dūrō gladiō saevum mōnstrum graviter vulnerāvit.  3 Diū pugnātur,  4 diū proelium est dubium. Dēnique autem Perseus mōnstrum interfēcit  3 et victōriam reportāvit.  3 Tum ad saxum vēnit  3 et Andromedam līberāvit  3 et eam ad Cēpheum dūxit.  3 Is, nūper miser, nunc laetus, ita dīxit  3: “Tuō auxiliō, mī amīce, cāra fīlia mea est lībera; tua est Andromeda.” Diū Perseus cum Andromedā ibi habitābat  3 et magnopere ā tōtō populō amābātur.  3

3. See if you can explain the use of the perfects and imperfects in this passage.

4. The verb pugnātur means, literally, it is fought; translate freely, the battle is fought, or the contest rages. The verb pugnō in Latin is intransitive, and so does not have a personal subject in the passive. A verb with an indeterminate subject, designated in English by it, is called impersonal.

LESSON XXXV

THE PASSIVE PERFECTS OF THE INDICATIVE · THE PERFECT PASSIVE AND FUTURE ACTIVE INFINITIVE

201. The fourth and last of the principal parts (§ 183) is the perfect passive participle. From it we get the participial stem on which are formed the future active infinitive and all the passive perfects.

1. Learn the following principal parts, which are for the first time given in full:

CONJ.

PRES. INDIC.

PRES. INFIN.

PERF. INDIC.

PERF. PASS. PART

I.

amō

amā´-re

amā´v-ī

amā´t-us

This is the model for all regular verbs of the first conjugation.

II.

mo´neō

monē´-re

mo´nu-ī

mo´nit-us

III.

regō

re´ge-re

rēx-ī

rēct-us

ca´piō

ca´pe-re

cēp-ī

capt-us

IV.

au´diō

audī´-re

audī´v-ī

audī´t-us

2. The base of the participial stem is found by dropping -us from the perfect passive participle.

202. In English the perfect, past perfect, and future perfect tenses of the indicative passive are made up of forms of the auxiliary verb to be and the past participle; as, I have been loved, I had been loved, I shall have been loved.

Very similarly, in Latin, the perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect passive tenses use respectively the present, imperfect, and future of sum as an auxiliary verb with the perfect passive participle, as

Perfect passive, amā´tus sum, I have been or was loved

Pluperfect passive, amā´tus eram, I had been loved

Future perfect passive,   amā´tus erō, I shall have been loved

1. In the same way give the synopsis of the corresponding tenses of moneō, regō, capiō, and audiō, and give the English meanings.

203. Nature of the Participle. A participle is partly verb and partly adjective. As a verb it possesses tense and voice. As an adjective it is declined and agrees with the word it modifies in gender, number, and case.

204. The perfect passive participle is declined like bonus, bona, bonum, and in the compound tenses (§ 202) it agrees as a predicate adjective with the subject of the verb.

EXAMPLES IN

SINGULAR

Vir laudātus est, the man was praised, or has been praised

Puella laudāta est, the girl was praised, or has been praised

Cōnsilium laudātum est, the plan was praised, or has been praised

EXAMPLES IN

PLURAL

Virī laudātī sunt, the men were praised, or have been praised

Puellae laudātae sunt, the girls were praised, or have been praised

Cōnsilia laudāta sunt, the plans were praised, or have been praised

1. Inflect the perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect indicative passive of amō, moneō, regō, capiō, and audiō (§§ 488-492).

205. The perfect passive infinitive is formed by adding esse, the present infinitive of sum, to the perfect passive participle; as, amā´t-us (-a, -um) esse, to have been loved; mo´nit-us (-a, -um) esse, to have been advised.

1. Form the perfect passive infinitive of regō, capiō, audiō, and give the English meanings.

206. The future active infinitive is formed by adding esse, the present infinitive of sum, to the future active participle. This participle is made by adding -ūrus, -a, -um to the base of the participial stem. Thus the future active infinitive of amō is amat-ū´rus (-a, -um) esse, to be about to love.

a. Note that in forming the three tenses of the active infinitive we use all three conjugation stems:

Present, amāre (present stem), to love

Perfect, amāvisse (perfect stem), to have loved

Future, amāt  ūrus esse (participial stem), to be about to love

1. Give the three tenses of the active infinitive of laudō, moneō, regō, capiō, audiō, with the English meanings.

207.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Fābula Andromedae nārrāta est. 2. Multae fābulae ā magistrō nārrātae sunt. 3. Ager ab agricolā validō arātus erat. 4. Agrī ab agricolīs validīs arātī erant. 5. Aurum ā servō perfidō ad domicilium suum portātum erit. 6. Nostra arma ā lēgātō laudāta sunt. Quis vestra arma laudāvit? 7. Ab ancillā tuā ad cēnam vocātae sumus. 8. Andromeda mōnstrō nōn data est, quia mōnstrum ā Perseō necātum erat.

II. 1. The provinces were laid waste, the field had been laid waste, the towns will have been laid waste. 2. The oracles were heard, the oracle was heard, the oracles had been heard. 3. The oracle will have been heard, the province had been captured, the boats have been captured. 4. The fields were laid waste, the man was advised, the girls will have been advised. 5. The towns had been ruled, we shall have been captured, you will have been heard.

LESSON XXXVI

REVIEW OF PRINCIPAL PARTS · PREPOSITIONS YES-OR-NO QUESTIONS

208. The following list shows the principal parts of all the verbs you have had excepting those used in the paradigms. The parts you have had before are given for review, and the perfect participle is the only new form for you to learn. Sometimes one or more of the principal parts are lacking, which means that the verb has no forms based on that stem. A few verbs lack the perfect passive participle but have the future active participle in -ūrus, which appears in the principal parts instead.

IRREGULAR VERBS

sum

absum

dō  1

esse

abesse

dare

fuī

āfuī

dedī

futūrus

āfutūrus

datus

be

be away

give

1. dō is best classed with the irregular verbs because of the short a in the present and participial stems.

CONJUGATION   I

portō

portāre

portāvī

portātus

carry

So for all verbs of this conjugation thus far used.

CONJUGATION   II

contineō

dēleō

doceō

egeō

faveō

iubeō

moveō

noceō

pāreō

persuādeō

prohibeō

respondeō

sedeō

studeō

videō

continēre

dēlēre

docēre

egēre

favēre

iubēre

movēre

nocēre

pārēre

persuādēre

prohibēre

respondēre

sedēre

studēre

vidēre

continuī

dēlēvī

docuī

eguī

fāvī

iussī

mōvī

nocuī

pāruī

persuāsī

prohibuī

respondī

sēdī

studuī

vīdī

contentus

dēlētus

doctus

——

fautūrus

iussus

mōtus

nocitūrus

——

persuāsus

prohibitus

respōnsus

-sessus

——

vīsus

hold in, keep

destroy

teach

lack

favor

order

move

injure

obey

persuade (from)

restrain, keep

reply

sit

be eager

see

CONJUGATION   III

agō

crēdō

dīcō

discēdō

dūcō

faciō  2

fugiō

iaciō

interficiō

mittō

rapiō

resistō

agere

crēdere

dīcere

discēdere

dūcere

facere

fugere

iacere

interficere

mittere

rapere

resistere

ēgī

crēdidī

dīxī

discessī

dūxī

fēcī

fūgī

iēcī

interfēcī

mīsī

rapuī

restitī

āctus

crēditus

dictus

discessus

ductus

factus

fugitūrus

iactus

interfectus

missus

raptus

——

drive

believe

say

depart

lead

make

flee

hurl

kill

send

seize

resist

CONJUGATION   IV

mūniō

reperiō

veniō

mūnīre

reperīre

venīre

mūnīvī

rep´perī

vēnī

mūnītus

repertus

ventus

fortify

find

come

2. faciō has an irregular passive which will be presented later.

209. Prepositions. 1. We learned in §§ 52, 53 that only the accusative and the ablative are used with prepositions, and that prepositions expressing ablative relations govern the ablative case. Those we have had are here summarized. The table following should be learned.

ā or ab, from, by

cum, with

dē, down from, concerning

ē or ex, out from, out of

prō, before, in front of; for, in behalf of

sine, without

2. Prepositions not expressing ablative relations must govern the accusative (§ 52). Of these we have had the following:

ad, to

apud, among

per, through

There are many others which you will meet as we proceed.

3. The preposition in when meaning in or on governs the ablative; when meaning to, into, against (relations foreign to the ablative) in governs the accusative.

210. Yes-or-No Questions. Questions not introduced by some interrogative word like who, why, when, etc., but expecting the answer yes or no, may take one of three forms:

1. Is he coming? (Asking for information. Implying nothing as to the answer expected.)

2. Is he not coming? (Expecting the answer yes.)

3.   He isn´t coming, is he? (Expecting the answer no.)

These three forms are rendered in Latin as follows:

1. Venitne? is he coming?

2. Nōnne venit? is he not coming?

3.   Num venit? he isn´t coming, is he?

a. -ne, the question sign, is usually added to the verb, which then stands first.

b. We learned in § 56. b that yes-or-no questions are usually answered by repeating the verb, with or without a negative. Instead of this, ita, vērō, certē, etc. (so, truly, certainly, etc.) may be used for yes, and nōn, minimē, etc. for no if the denial is emphatic, as, by no means, not at all.

211.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 290.

I. 1. Nōnne habēbat Cornēlia ōrnāmenta aurī? Habēbat. 2. Num Sextus lēgātus scūtum in dextrō bracchiō gerēbat? Nōn in dextrō, sed sinistrō in bracchiō Sextus scūtum gerēbat. 3. Frūstrā bella multa ab Gallīs gesta erant. 4. Ubi oppidum ā perfidō Sextō occupātum est, oppidānī miserī gladiō interfectī sunt. 5. Id oppidum erat plēnum frūmentī. 6. Nōnne Sextus ab oppidānīs frūmentum postulāvit? Vērō, sed iī recūsāvērunt frūmentum dare. 7. Cūr oppidum ab Sextō dēlētum est? Quia frūmentum recūsātum est. 8. Ea victōria nōn dubia erat. 9. Oppidānī erant dēfessī et armīs egēbant. 10. Num fugam temptāvērunt? Minimē.

II. 1. Where was Julia standing? She was standing where you had ordered. 2. Was Julia wearing any ornaments? She had many ornaments of gold. 3. Did she not attempt flight when she saw the danger? She did. 4. Who captured her? Galba captured her without delay and held her by the left arm. 5. She didn´t have the lady’s gold, did she? No, the gold had been taken by a faithless maid and has been brought back.

Fourth Review, Lessons XXVII-XXXVI, §§ 513-516

LESSON XXXVII

CONJUGATION OF POSSUM · THE INFINITIVE USED AS IN ENGLISH

212. Learn the principal parts of possum, I am able, I can, and its inflection in the indicative and infinitive. (Cf. § 495.)

a. Possum, I can, is a compound of potis, able, and sum, I am.

213. The Infinitive with Subject Accusative. The infinitive (cf. § 173) is a verbal noun. Used as a noun, it has the constructions of a noun. As a verb it can govern a case and be modified by an adverb. The uses of the infinitive are much the same in Latin as in English.

1. In English certain verbs of wishing, commanding, forbidding, and the like are used with an object clause consisting of a substantive in the objective case and an infinitive, as, he commanded the men to flee. Such object clauses are called infinitive clauses, and the substantive is said to be the subject of the infinitive.

Similarly in Latin, some verbs of wishing, commanding, forbidding, and the like are used with an object clause consisting of an infinitive with a subject in the accusative case, as, Is virōs fugere iussit, he commanded the men to flee.

214. RULE. Subject of the Infinitive. The subject of the infinitive is in the accusative.

215. The Complementary Infinitive. In English a verb is often followed by an infinitive to complete its meaning, as, the Romans are able to conquer the Gauls. This is called the complementary infinitive, as the predicate is not complete without the added infinitive.

Similarly in Latin, verbs of incomplete predication are completed by the infinitive. Among such verbs are possum, I am able, I can; properō, mātūrō, I hasten; temptō, I attempt; as

Rōmānī Gallōs superāre possunt, the Romans are able to (or can) conquer the Gauls

Bellum gerere mātūrant, they hasten to wage war

a. A predicate adjective completing a complementary infinitive agrees in gender, number, and case with the subject of the main verb.

Malī puerī esse bonī nōn possunt, bad boys are not able to (or cannot) be good.

Observe that bonī agrees with puerī.

216. The Infinitive used as a Noun. In English the infinitive is often used as a pure noun, as the subject of a sentence, or as a predicate nominative. For example, To conquer (= conquering) is pleasing; To see (= seeing) is to believe (= believing). The same use of the infinitive is found in Latin, especially with est, as

Superāre est grātum, to conquer is pleasing

Vidēre est crēdere, to see is to believe

a. In the construction above, the infinitive often has a subject, which must then be in the accusative case, as

Galbam superāre inimīcōs est grātum multīs,

for Galba to conquer his enemies is pleasing to many

b. An infinitive used as a noun is neuter singular. Thus, in the sentence superāre est grātum, the predicate adjective grātum is in the neuter nominative singular to agree with superāre the subject.

217.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 291.

I. 1. Magister lūdī līberōs cum dīligentiā labōrāre iussit. 2. Egēre cibō et vinō est virīs molestum. 3. Virī armātī vetuērunt Gallōs castra ibi pōnere. 4. Estne lēgātus in castellō an in mūrō? Is est prō portā. 5. Ubi nostrī  1 fugere incēpērunt, lēgātus ab vestrīs  1 captus est. 6. Gallī castellum ibi oppugnāverant ubi praesidium erat īnfīrmum. 7. Aliī pugnāre temptābant, aliī portās petēbant. 8. Fēminae prō domiciliīs sedēbant neque resistere validīs Gallīs poterant. 9. Bellum est saevum, nec īnfīrmīs nec miserīs favet. 10. Sed virī arma postulābant et studēbant Gallōs dē mūrīs agere. 11. Id castellum ab Gallīs occupārī Rōmānīs nōn grātum erit. 12. Gallī ubi ā Rōmānīs victī sunt, esse līberī  2 cessāvērunt. 13. Diū sine aquā vīvere nōn potestis.

1. Supply men. nostri, vestrī, and suī are often used as nouns in this way.

2. Not children. The Romans used līberī either as an adjective, meaning free, or as a noun, meaning the free, thereby signifying their free-born children. The word was never applied to children of slaves.

II. 1. The girl began daily to carry water from the river to the gates. 2. The Gauls had pitched their camp in a place suitable for a battle. 3. For a long time they tried in vain to seize the redoubt. 4. Neither did they cease to hurl weapons against  3 the walls. 5. But they were not able to (could not) take the town.

3. in with the accusative.

218.             THE FAITHLESS TARPE´IA

Sabīnī ōlim cum Rōmānīs bellum gerēbant et multās victōriās reportāverant. Iam agrōs proximōs mūrīs vāstābant, iam oppidō adpropinquābant. Rōmānī autem in Capitōlium fūgerant et longē perīculō aberant. Mūrīs validīs et saxīs altīs crēdēbant. Frūstrā Sabīnī tēla iaciēbant, frūstrā portās dūrās petēbant; castellum occupāre nōn poterant. Deinde novum cōnsilium cēpērunt.  4

Tarpēia erat puella Rōmāna pulchra et superba. Cotīdiē aquam cōpiīs Rōmānīs in Capitōlium portābat. Eī  5 nōn nocēbant Sabīnī, quod ea sine armīs erat neque Sabīnī bellum cum fēminīs līberīsque gerēbant. Tarpēia autem maximē amābat ōrnāmenta aurī. Cotīdiē Sabīnōrum ōrnāmenta vidēbat et mox ea dēsīderāre incipiēbat. Eī ūnus ex  6 Sabīnīs dīxit, “Dūc cōpiās Sabīnās intrā portās, Tarpēia, et maxima erunt praemia tua.”

4. cōnsilium capere, to make a plan. Why is the perfect tense used here and the imperfect in the preceding sentences? Explain the use of tenses in the next paragraph.

5. Dative with nocēbant. (Cf. § 154.)

6. ex, out of, i.e. from the nuumber of; best translated of.

TARPEIA PUELLA PERFIDA

LESSON XXXVIII

THE RELATIVE PRONOUN AND THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN

219. Sentences are simple, compound, or complex.

a. A simple sentence is a sentence containing but one statement, that is, one subject and one predicate: The Romans approached the town.

b. A compound sentence is a sentence containing two or more independent statements: The Romans approached the town | and | the enemy fled.

NOTE. An independent statement is one that can stand alone; it does not depend upon another statement.

c. A complex sentence is a sentence containing one independent statement and one or more dependent statements: When the Romans approached the town | the enemy fled.

NOTE. A dependent or subordinate statement is one that depends on or qualifies another statement; thus the enemy fled is independent, and when the Romans approached the town is dependent or subordinate.

d. The separate statements in a compound or complex sentence are called clauses. In a complex sentence the independent statement is called the main clause and the dependent statement the subordinate clause.

220. Examine the complex sentence

The Romans killed the men who were taken

Here are two clauses:

a. The main clause, The Romans killed the men

b. The subordinate clause, who were taken

The word who is a pronoun, for it takes the place of the noun men. It also connects the subordinate clause who were taken with the noun men. Hence the clause is an adjective clause. A pronoun that connects an adjective clause with a substantive is called a relative pronoun, and the substantive for which the relative pronoun stands is called its antecedent. The relative pronouns in English are who, whose, whom, which, what, that.

221. The relative pronoun in Latin is quī, quae, quod, and it is declined as follows:

SINGULAR

PLURAL

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

quī

quae

quod

quī

quae

quae

Gen.

cuius

cuius

cuius

quōrum

quārum

quōrum

Dat.

cui

cui

cui

quibus

quibus

quibus

Acc.

quem

quam

quod

quōs

quās

quae

Abl.

quō

quā

quō

quibus

quibus

quibus

1. Review the declension of is, § 114, and note the similarity in the endings. The forms quī, quae, and quibus are the only forms showing new endings.

NOTE. The genitive cuius and the dative cui are pronounced co͝oi´yo͝os (two syllables) and co͝oi (one syllable).

222. The Relative Pronoun is translated as follows:  1

MASC. AND FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

who, that

which, what, that

Gen.

of whom, whose

of which, of what, whose

Dat.

to or for whom

to or for which, to or for what

Acc.

whom, that

which, what, that

Abl.

from, etc., whom

from, etc., which or what

1. This table of meanings need not be memorized. It is inserted for reference when translating.

a. We see from the table above that quī, when it refers to a person, is translated by some form of who or by that; and that when it refers to anything else it is translated by which, what, or that.

223. Note the following sentences:

The Romans killed the men who were taken

The Romans killed the woman who was taken

Rōmānī interfēcērunt virōs quī captī sunt

Rōmānī interfēcērunt fēminam quae capta est

In the first sentence who (quī) refers to the antecedent men (virōs), and is masculine plural. In the second, who (quae) refers to woman (fēminam), and feminine singular. From this we learn that the relative must agree with its antecedent in gender and number. In neither of the sentences are the antecedents and relatives in the same case. Virōs and fēminam are accusatives, and quī and quae are nominatives, being the subjects of the subordinate clauses. Hence

224. RULE. Agreement of the Relative. A relative pronoun must agree with its antecedent in gender and number; but its case is determined by the way it is used in its own clause.

225. Interrogative Pronouns. An interrogative pronoun is a pronoun that asks a question. In English the interrogatives are who? which? what? In Latin they are quis? quid? (pronoun) and quī? quae? quod? (adjective).

226. Examine the sentences

a. Who is the man? Quis est vir?

b. What man is leading them? Quī vir eōs dūcit?

In a, who is an interrogative pronoun. In b, what is an interrogative adjective. Observe that in Latin quis, quid is the pronoun and quī, quae, quod is the adjective.

227. 1. The interrogative adjective quī, quae, quod is declined just like the relative pronoun. (See § 221.)

2. The interrogative pronoun quis, quid is declined like quī, quae, quod in the plural. In the singular it is declined as follows:

MASC. AND FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

quis, who?

quid, what? which?

Gen.

cuius, whose?

cuius, whose?

Dat.

cui, to or for whom?

cui, to or for what or which?

Acc.

quem, whom?

quid, what? which?

Abl.

quō, from, etc., whom?

quō, from, etc., which or what?

NOTE. Observe that the masculine and feminine are alike and that all the forms are like the corresponding forms of the relative, excepting quis and quid.

228.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Quis est aeger? Servus quem amō est aeger. 2. Cuius scūtum habēs? Scūtum habeō quod lēgātus ad castellum mīsit. 3. Cui lēgātus suum scūtum dabit? Fīliō meō scūtum dabit. 4. Ubi Germānī antīquī vīvēbant? In terrā quae est proxima Rhēnō Germānī vīvēbant. 5. Quibuscum  2 Germānī bellum gerēbant? Cum Rōmānīs, qui eōs superāre studēbant, Germānī bellum gerēbant. 6. Quī virī castra pōnunt? Iī sunt virī quōrum armīs Germānī victī sunt. 7. Quibus tēlīs cōpiae nostrae eguērunt? Gladiīs et telīs nostrae cōpiae eguērunt. 8. Ā quibus porta sinistra tenēbātur? Ā sociīs porta sinistra tenēbātur. 9. Quae prōvinciae ā Rōmānīs occupātae sunt? Multae prōvinciae ā Rōmānīs occupātae sunt. 10. Quibus virīs deī favēbunt? Bonīs virīs deī favēbunt.

2. cum is added to the ablative of relative, interrogative, and personal pronouns instead of being placed before them.

GERMANI ANTIQUI

II. 1. What victory will you announce? 2. I will announce to the people the victory which the sailors have won. 3. The men who were pitching camp were eager for battle. 4. Nevertheless they were soon conquered by the troops which Sextus had sent. 5. They could not resist our forces, but fled from that place without delay.

229.             THE FAITHLESS TARPEIA (Concluded)  3

Tarpēia, commōta ōrnamentīs Sabīnōrum pulchrīs, diū resistere nōn potuit et respondit: “Date mihi  4 ōrnāmenta quae in sinistrīs bracchīs geritis, et celeriter cōpiās vestrās in Capitōlium dūcam.” Nec Sabīnī recūsāvērunt, sed per dūrās magnāsque castellī portās properāvērunt quō  5 Tarpēia dūxit et mox intrā validōs et altōs mūrōs stābant. Tum sine morā in  6 Tarpēiam scūta graviter iēcērunt; nam scūta quoque in sinistrīs bracchiīs gerēbant. Ita perfida puella Tarpēia interfecta est; ita Sabīnī Capitōlium occupāvērunt.

3. Explain the use of the tenses in this selection.

4. to me.

5. quō = whither, to the place where. Here quo is the relative adverb. We have had it used before as the interrogative adverb, whither? to what place?

6. upon.

LESSON XXXIX

THE THIRD DECLENSION · CONSONANT STEMS

230. Bases and Stems. In learning the first and second declensions we saw that the different cases were formed by adding the case terminations to the part of the word that did not change, which we called the base. If to the base we add -ā in the first declension, and -o in the second, we get what is called the stem. Thus porta has the base port- and the stem portā-; servus has the base serv- and the stem servo-.

These stem vowels, -ā- and -o-, play so important a part in the formation of the case terminations that these declensions are named from them respectively the Ā- and O-Declensions.

231. Nouns of the Third Declension. The third declension is called the Consonant or I-Declension, and its nouns are classified according to the way the stem ends. If the last letter of the stem is a consonant, the word is said to have a consonant stem; if the stem ends in -i-, the word is said to have an i-stem. In consonant stems the stem is the same as the base. In i-stems the stem is formed by adding -i- to the base. The presence of the i makes a difference in certain of the cases, so the distinction is a very important one.

232. Consonant stems are divided into two classes:

I. Stems that add -s to the base to form the nominative singular.

II. Stems that add no termination in the nominative singular.

CLASS I

233. Stems that add -s to the base in the nominative singular are either masculine or feminine and are declined as follows:

prīnceps, m., chief

mīles, m., soldier

lapis, m., stone

BASES OR

STEMS

prīncip-

mīlit-

lapid-

SINGULAR

TERMINATIONS

M. AND F.

Nom.

prīnceps

mīles

lapis

-s

Gen.

prīn´cipis

mīlitis

lapidis

-is

Dat.

prīn´cipī

mīlitī

lapidī

-ī

Acc.

prīn´cipem

mīlitem

lapidem

-em

Abl.

prīn´cipe

mīlite

lapide

-e

PLURAL

Nom.

prīn´cipēs

mīlitēs

lapidēs

-ēs

Gen.

prīn´cipum

mīlitum

lapidum

-um

Dat.

prīnci´pibus

mīlitibus

lapidibus

-ibus

Acc.

prīn´cipēs

mīlitēs

lapidēs

-ēs

Abl.

prīnci´pibus

mīlitibus

lapidibus

-ibus

rēx, m., king

iūdex, m., judge

virtūs, f., manliness

BASES OR

STEMS

rēg-

iūdic-

virtūt-

Nom.

rēx

iūdex

virtūs

-s

Gen.

rēgis

iūdicis

virtū´tis

-is

Dat.

rēgī

iūdicī

virtū´tī

-ī

Acc.

rēgem

iūdicem

virtū´tem

-em

Abl.

rēge

iūdice

virtū´te

-e

PLURAL

Nom.

rēgēs

iūdicēs

virtū´tēs

-ēs

Gen.

rēgum

iūdicum

virtū´tum

-um

Dat.

rēgibus

iūdicibus

virtū´tibus

-ibus

Acc.

rēgēs

iūdicēs

virtū´tēs

-ēs

Abl.

rēgibus

iūdicibus

virtū´tibus

-ibus

1. The base or stem is found by dropping -is in the genitive singular.

2. Most nouns of two syllables, like prīnceps (prīncip-), mīles (mīlit-), iūdex (iūdic-), have i in the base, but e in the nominative.

a. lapis is an exception to this rule.

3. Observe the consonant changes of the base or stem in the nominative:

a. A final -t or -d is dropped before -s; thus mīles for mīlets, lapis for lapids, virtūs for virtūts.

b. A final -c or -g unites with -s and forms -x; thus iūdec + s = iūdex, rēg + s = rēx.

4. Review § 74 and apply the rules to this declension.

In like manner decline dux, ducis, m., leader; eques, equitis, m., horseman; pedes, peditis, m., foot soldier; pēs, pedis, m.,foot.

234.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 291.

I. 1. Neque peditēs neque equitēs occupāre castellum Rōmānum poterant. 2. Summā virtūte mūrōs altōs cotīdiē oppugnābant. 3. Pedes mīlitum lapidibus quī dē mūrō iaciēbantur saepe vulnerābantur. 4. Quod novum cōnsilium dux cēpit? 5. Is perfidam puellam pulchrīs ōrnāmentīs temptāvit. 6. Quid puella fēcit? 7. Puella commōta aurō mīlitēs per portās dūxit. 8. Tamen praemia quae summō studiō petīverat nōn reportāvit. 9. Apud Rōmānōs antīquōs Tarpēia nōn est laudāta.

II. 1. What ship is that which I see? That (illud) ship is the Victory. It is sailing now with a favorable wind and will soon approach Italy. 2. The judges commanded the savages to be seized and to be killed. 3. The chiefs of the savages suddenly began to flee, but were quickly captured by the horsemen. 4. The king led the foot soldiers to the wall from which the townsmen were hurling stones with the greatest zeal.

NAVIGIUM

LESSON XL

THE THIRD DECLENSION · CONSONANT STEMS (Continued)

CLASS II

235. Consonant stems that add no termination in the nominative are declined in the other cases exactly like those that add -s. They may be masculine, feminine, or neuter.

236.             PARADIGMS

MASCULINES AND FEMININES

cōnsul, m., consul

legiō, f., legion

ōrdō, m., row

pater, m., father

BASES OR

STEMS

cōnsul-

legiōn-

ōrdin-

patr-

SINGULAR

TERMINATIONS

M. AND F.

Nom.

cōnsul

legiō

ōrdō

pater

—

Gen.

cōnsulis

legiōnis

ōrdinis

patris

-is

Dat.

cōnsulī

legiōnī

ōrdinī

patrī

-ī

Acc.

cōnsulem

legiōnem

ōrdinem

patrem

-em

Abl.

cōnsule

legiōne

ōrdine

patre

-e

PLURAL

Nom.

cōnsulēs

legiōnēs

ōrdinēs

patrēs

-ēs

Gen.

cōnsulum

legiōnum

ōrdinum

patrum

-um

Dat.

cōnsulibus

legiōnibus

ōrdinibus

patribus

-ibus

Acc.

cōnsulēs

legiōnēs

ōrdinēs

patrēs

-ēs

Abl.

cōnsulibus

legiōnibus

ōrdinibus

patribus

-ibus

1. With the exception of the nominative, the terminations are exactly the same as in Class I, and the base or stem is found in the same way.

2. Masculines and feminines with bases or stems in -in- and -ōn- drop -n- and end in -ō in the nominative, as legiō (base or stem legiōn-), ōrdō (base or stem ōrdin-).

3. Bases or stems in -tr- have -ter in the nominative, as pater (base or stem patr-).

4. Note how the genitive singular gives the clue to the whole declension. Always learn this with the nominative.

237.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 291.

I. 1. Audīsne tubās, Mārce? Nōn sōlum tubās audiō sed etiam ōrdinēs militum et carrōs impedīmentōrum plēnōs vidēre possum. 2. Quās legiōnēs vidēmus? Eae legiōnēs nūper ex Galliā vēnērunt. 3. Quid ibi fēcērunt? Studēbantne pugnāre an sine virtūte erant? 4. Multa proelia fēcērunt  1 et magnās victōriās et multōs captīvōs reportāvērunt. 5. Quis est imperātor eārum legiōnum? Caesar, summus Rōmānōrum imperātor. 6. Quis est eques quī pulchram corōnam gerit? Is eques est frāter meus. Eī corōna ā cōnsule data est quia summā virtūte pugnāverat et ā barbarīs patriam servāverat.

II. 1. Who has seen my father to-day? 2. I saw him just now (nūper). He was hastening to your dwelling with your mother and sister. 3. When men are far from the fatherland and lack food, they cannot be restrained  2 from wrong  3. 4. The safety of the soldiers is dear to Cæsar, the general. 5. The chiefs were eager to storm a town full of grain which was held by the consul. 6. The king forbade the baggage of the captives to be destroyed.

1. proelium facere = to fight a battle.

2. contineō. Cf. § 180.

3. Abl. iniūriā.

LESSON XLI

THE THIRD DECLENSION · CONSONANT STEMS (Concluded)

238. Neuter consonant stems add no termination in the nominative and are declined as follows:

flūmen, n., river

tempus, n., time

opus, n., work

caput, n., head

BASES OR

STEMS

flūmin-

tempor-

oper-

capit-

SINGULAR

TERMINATIONS

Nom.

flūmen

tempus

opus

caput

—

Gen.

flūminis

temporis

operis

capitis   -is

-is

Dat.

flūminī

temporī

operī

capitī

-ī

Acc.

flūmen

tempus

opus

caput

—

Abl.

flūmine

tempore

opere

capite

-e

PLURAL

Nom.

flūmina

tempora

opera

capita

-a

Gen.

flūminum

temporum

operum

capitum

-um

Dat.

flūminibus

temporibus

operibus

capitibus

-ibus

Acc.

flūmina

tempora

opera

capita

-a

Abl.

flūminibus

temporibus

operibus

capitibus

-ibus

1. Review § 74 and apply the rules to this declension.

2. Bases or stems in -in- have -e- instead of -i- in the nominative, as flūmen, base or stem flūmin-.

3. Most bases or stems in -er- and -or- have -us in the nominative, as opus, base or stem oper-; tempus, base or stem tempor-.

239.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 292.

I. 1. Barbarī ubi Rōmam cēpērunt, maxima rēgum opera dēlēvērunt. 2. Rōmānī multās calamitātēs ā barbarīs accēpērunt. 3. Ubi erat summus terror apud oppidānōs, animī dubiī eōrum ab ōrātōre clarō cōnfīrmāti sunt. 4. Rōma est in rīpīs fiūminis magnī. 5. Ubi Caesar imperātor mīlitēs suōs arma capere iussit, iī ā proeliō continērī nōn potuērunt. 6. Ubi proelium factum est, imperātor reperīrī nōn potuit. 7. Imperātor sagittā in capite vulnerātus erat et stāre nōn poterat. 8. Eum magnō labōre pedes ex proeliō portāvit. 9. Is bracchiīs suīs imperātōrem tenuit et eum ex perīculīs summīs servāvit. 10. Virtūte suā bonus mīles ab imperātōre corōnam accēpit.

II. 1. The consul placed a crown on the head of the victor. 2. Before the gates he was received by the townsmen. 3. A famous orator praised him and said, “By your labors you have saved the fatherland from disaster.” 4. The words of the orator were pleasing to the victor. 5. To save the fatherland was a great task.

CORONA

LESSON XLII

REVIEW LESSON

240. Review the paradigms in §§ 233, 236, 238; and decline all nouns of the third declension in this selection.

TERROR CIMBRICUS  1

Ōlim Cimbrī et Teutonēs, populī Germāniae, cum fēminīs līberīsque Italiae adpropinquāverant et cōpiās Rōmānās maximō proeliō vīcerant. Ubi fuga legiōnum nūntiāta est, summus erat terror tōtīus Rōmae, et Rōmānī, graviter commōtī, sacra crēbra deīs faciēbant et salūtem petēbant.

Tum Mānlius ōrātor animōs populī ita cōnfīrmāvit:—“Magnam calamitātem accēpimus. Oppida nostra ā Cimbrīs Teutonibusque capiuntur, agricolae interficiuntur, agrī vāstantur, cōpiae barbarōrum Rōmae adpropinquant. Itaque, nisi novīs animīs proelium novum faciēmus et Germānōs ex patriā nostrā sine morā agēmus, erit nūlla salūs fēminīs nostrīs līberīsque. Servāte līberōs! Servāte patriam! Anteā superātī sumus quia imperātōrēs nostrī fuērunt īnfīrmī. Nunc Marius, clārus imperātor, quī iam multās aliās victōriās reportāvit, legiōnēs dūcet et animōs nostrōs terrōre Cimbricō līberāre mātūrābit.”

Marius tum in Āfricā bellum gerēbat. Sine morā ex Āfricā in Italiam vocātus est. Cōpiās novās nōn sōlum tōtī Italiae sed etiam prōvinciīs sociōrum imperāvit.  2 Disciplīnā autem dūrā labōribusque perpetuīs mīlitēs exercuit. Tum cum peditibus equitibusque, quī iam proeliō studēbant, ad Germānōrum castra celeriter properāvit. Diū et ācriter pugnātum est.  3 Dēnique barbarī fūgērunt et multī in fugā ab equitibus sunt interfectī. Marius pater patriae vocātus est.

1. About the year 100 B.C. the Romans were greatly alarmed by an invasion of barbarians from the north known as Cimbri and Teutons. They were traveling with wives and children, and had an army of 300,000 fighting men. Several Roman armies met defeat, and the city was in a panic. Then the Senate called upon Marius, their greatest general, to save the country. First he defeated the Teutons in Gaul. Next, returning to Italy, he met the Cimbri. A terrible battle ensued, in which the Cimbri were utterly destroyed; but the terror Cimbricus continued to haunt the Romans for many a year thereafter.

2. He made a levy (of troops) upon, imperāvit with the acc. and the dat.

3. Cf. § 200. II. 2.

LESSON XLIII

THE THIRD DECLENSION · I-STEMS

241. To decline a noun of the third declension correctly we must know whether or not it is an i-stem. Nouns with i-stems are

1. Masculines and feminines:

a. Nouns in -ēs and -īs with the same number of syllables in the genitive as in the nominative. Thus caedēs, caedis, is an i-stem, but mīles, mīlitis, is a consonant stem.

b. Nouns in -ns and -rs.

c. Nouns of one syllable in -s or -x preceded by a consonant.

2. Neuters in -e, -al, and -ar.

242. The declension of i-stems is nearly the same as that of consonant stems. Note the following differences:

a. Masculines and feminities have -ium in the genitive plural and -īs or -ēs in the accusative plural.

b. Neuters have -ī in the ablative singular, and an -i- in every form of the plural.

243. Masculine and Feminine I-Stems. Masculine and feminine i-stems are declined as follows:

caedēs, f., slaughter

hostis, m., enemy

urbs, f., city

cliēns, m., retainer

STEMS

caedi-

hosti-

urbi-

clienti-

BASES

caed-

host-

urb-

client-

SINGULAR

TERMINATIONS

M. AND F.

Nom.

caedēs

hostis

urbs

cliēns  1

-s, -is, or -ēs

Gen.

caedis

hostis

urbis

clientis

-is

Dat.

caedī

hostī

urbī

clientī

-ī

Acc.

caedem

hostem

urbem

clientem

-em (-im  )

Abl.

caede

hoste

urbe

cliente

-e (-ī  )

PLURAL

Nom.

caedēs

hostēs

urbēs

clientēs

-ēs

Gen.

caedium

hostium

urbium

clientium

-ium

Dat.

caedibus

hostibus

urbibus

clientibus

-ibus

Acc.

caedīs, -ēs

hostīs, -ēs

urbīs, -ēs

clientīs, -ēs

-īs, -ēs

Abl.

caedibus

hostibus

urbibus

clientibus

-ibus

1. Observe that the vowel before -ns is long, but that it is shortened before -nt. Cf. § 12. 2, 3.

1. avis, cīvis, fīnis, ignis, nāvis have the ablative singular in -ī or -e.

2. turris has accusative turrim and ablative turrī or turre.

244. Neuter I-Stems. Neuter i-stems are declined as follows:

īnsigne, n., decoration

animal, n., animal

calcar, n., spur

STEMS

īnsigni-

animāli-

calcāri-

BASES

īnsign-

animāl-

calcār-

SINGULAR

TERMINATIONS

Nom.

īnsigne

animal

calcar

-e or  —

Gen.

īnsignis

animālis

calcāris

-is

Dat.

īnsignī

animālī

calcārī

-ī

Acc.

īnsigne

animal

calcar

-e or  —

Abl.

īnsignī

animālī

calcārī

-ī

PLURAL

Nom.

īnsignia

animālia

calcāria

-ia

Gen.

īnsignium

animālium

calcārium

-ium

Dat.

īnsignibus

animālibus

calcāribus

-ibus

Acc.

īnsignia

animālia

calcāria

-ia

Abl.

īnsignibus

animālibus

calcāribus

-ibus

1. Review § 74 and see how it applies to this declension.

2. The final -i- of the stem is usually dropped in the nominative. If not dropped, it is changed to -e.

3. A long vowel is shortened before final -l or -r. (Cf. § 12. 2.)

245.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 292.

I. 1. Quam urbem vidēmus? Urbs quam vidētis est Rōma. 2. Cīvēs Rōmānī urbem suam turribus altīs et mūrīs longīs mūnīverant. 3. Ventī nāvīs longās prohibēbant fīnibus hostium adpropinquāre. 4. Imperātor a clientibus suīs calcāria aurī et alia īnsignia accēpit. 5. Mīlitēs Rōmānī cum hostibus bella saeva gessērunt et eōs caede magnā superāvērunt. 6. Alia animālia terram, alia mare amant. 7. Nāvēs longae quae auxilium ad imperātōrem portābant ignī ab hostibus dēlētae sunt. 8. In eō marī avis multās vīdimus quae longē ā terrā volāverant. 9. Nōnne vīdistis nāvīs longās hostium et ignīs quibus urbs nostra vāstābātur? Certē, sed nec caedem cīvium nec fugam clientium vīdimus. 10. Avēs et alia animālia, ubi ignem vīdērunt, salūtem fugā petere celeriter incēpērunt. 11. Num. iūdex in peditum ōrdinibus stābat? Minimē, iūdex erat apud equitēs et equus eius īnsigne pulchrum gerēbat.

NAVES LONGAE

II. 1. Because of the lack of grain the animals of the village were not able to live. 2. When the general  2 heard the rumor, he quickly sent a horseman to the village. 3. The horseman had a beautiful horse and wore spurs of gold. 4. He said to the citizens, “Send your retainers with horses and wagons to our camp, and you will receive an abundance of grain.” 5. With happy hearts they hastened to obey his words.  3

2. Place first.

3. Not the accusative. Why?

LESSON XLIV

IRREGULAR NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION · GENDER IN THE THIRD DECLENSION

246.             PARADIGMS

The “Stems” are missing in the printed book. They have been supplied from the inflectional table in the Appendix.

vīs, f., force

iter, n., march

STEMS

vī- and vīri-

iter- and itiner-

BASES

v- and   vīr-

iter- and itiner-

SINGULAR

Nom.

vīs

iter

Gen.

vīs (rare)

itineris

Dat.

vī (rare)

itinerī

Acc.

vim

iter

Abl.

vī

itinere

PLURAL

Nom.

vīrēs

itinera

Gen.

vīrium

itinerum

Dat.

vīribus

itineribus

Acc.

vīrīs, or -ēs

itinera

Abl.

vīribus

itineribus

247. There are no rules for gender in the third declension that do not present numerous exceptions.  1 The following rules, however, are of great service, and should be thoroughly mastered:

1. Masculine are nouns in -or, -ōs, -er, -ĕs (gen. -itis).

a. arbor, tree, is feminine; and iter, march, is neuter.

2. Feminine are nouns in -ō, -is, -x, and in -s preceded by a consonant or by any long vowel but ō.

a. Masculine are collis (hill), lapis, mēnsis (month), ōrdō, pēs, and nouns in -nis and -guis—as ignis, sanguis (blood)—and the four monosyllables

dēns, a tooth

mōns, a mountain

pōns, a bridge

fōns, a fountain

3. Neuters are nouns in -e, -al, -ar, -n, -ur, -ŭs, and caput.

1. Review § 60. Words denoting males are, of course, masculine, and those denoting females, feminine.

248. Give the gender of the following nouns and the rule by which it is determined:

animal

calamitās

flūmen

lapis

nāvis

avis

caput

ignis

legiō

opus

caedēs

eques

īnsigne

mare

salūs

calcar

fīnis

labor

mīles

urbs

249.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 292.

I. The First Bridge over the Rhine. Salūs sociōrum erat semper cāra Rōmānīs. Ōlim Gallī, amīcī Rōmānōrum, multās iniūriās ab Germānīs quī trāns flūmen Rhēnum vivēbant accēperant. Ubi lēgātī ab iīs ad Caesarem imperātōrem Rōmānum vēnērunt et auxilium postulāvērunt, Rōmānī magnīs itineribus ad hostium fīnīs properāvērunt. Mox ad rīpās magnī flūminis vēnērunt. Imperātor studēbat cōpiās suās trāns fluvium dūcere, sed nūllā viā  2 poterat. Nūllās nāvīs habēbat. Alta erat aqua. Imperātor autem, vir clārus, numquam adversā fortūnā commōtus, novum cōnsilium cēpit. Iussit suōs  3 in  4 lātō flūmine facere pontem. Numquam anteā pōns in Rhēnō vīsus erat. Hostēs ubi pontem quem Rōmānī fēcerant vīdērunt, summō terrōre commōtī, sine morā fugam parāre incēpērunt.

II. 1. The enemy had taken (possession of) the top of the mountain. 2. There were many trees on the opposite hills. 3. We pitched our camp near (ad) a beautiful spring. 4. A march through the enemies’ country is never without danger. 5. The time of the month was suitable for the march. 6. The teeth of the monster were long. 7. When the foot soldiers  4 saw the blood of the captives, they began to assail the fortifications with the greatest violence.  5

2. Abl. of manner.

3. suōs, used as a noun, his men.

4. We say build a bridge over; the Romans, make a bridge on.

5. Place first.

Fifth Review, Lessons XXXVII-XLIV, §§ 517-520

LESSON XLV

ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION · I-STEMS

250. Adjectives are either of the first and second declensions (like bonus, aeger, or līber), or they are of the third declension.

251. Nearly all adjectives of the third declension have i-stems, and they are declined almost like nouns with i-stems.

252. Adjectives learned thus far have had a different form in the nominative for each gender, as, bonus, m.; bona, f.; bonum, n. Such an adjective is called an adjective of three endings. Adjectives of the third declension are of the following classes:

I.

Adjectives of three endings—

a different form in the nominative for each gender.

II.

Adjectives of two endings—

masculine and feminine nominative alike, the neuter different.

III.

Adjectives of one ending—

masculine, feminine, and neuter nominative all alike.

253. Adjectives of the third declension in -er have three endings; those in -is have two endings; the others have one ending.

CLASS I

254. Adjectives of Three Endings are declined as follows:

ācer, ācris, ācre, keen, eager

STEM ācri-

BASE ācr-

SINGULAR

PLURAL

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

ācer

ācris

ācre

ācrēs

ācrēs

ācria

Gen.

ācris

ācris

ācris

ācrium

ācrium

ācrium

Dat.

ācrī

ācrī

ācrī

ācribus

ācribus

ācribus

Acc.

ācrem

ācrem

ācre

ācrīs, -ēs

ācrīs, -ēs

ācria

Abl.

ācrī

ācrī

ācrī

ācribus

ācribus

ācribus

CLASS II

255. Adjectives of Two Endings are declined as follows:

omnis, omne, every, all  1

STEM omni-

BASE omn-

SINGULAR

PLURAL

MASC. AND FEM.

NEUT.

MASC. AND FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

omnis

omne

omnēs

omnia

Gen.

omnis

omnis

omnium

omnium

Dat.

omnī

omnī

omnibus

omnibus

Acc.

omnem

omne

omnīs, ēs

omnia

Abl.

omnī

omnī

omnibus

omnibus

1. omnis is usually translated every in the singular and all in the plural.

CLASS III

256. Adjectives of One Ending are declined as follows:

pār, equal

STEM pari-

BASE par-

SINGULAR

PLURAL

MASC. AND FEM.

NEUT.

MASC. AND FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

pār

pār

parēs

paria

Gen.

paris

paris

parium

parium

Dat.

parī

parī

paribus

paribus

Acc.

parem

pār

parīs, ēs

paria

Abl.

parī

parī

paribus

paribus

1. All i-stem adjectives have -ī in the ablative singular.

2. Observe that the several cases of adjectives of one ending have the same form for all genders excepting in the accusative singular and in the nominative and accusative plural.

3. Decline vir ācer, legiō ācris, animal ācre, ager omnis, scūtum omne, proelium pār.

257. There are a few adjectives of one ending that have consonant stems. They are declined exactly like nouns with consonant stems.

258.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 293.

I. The Romans invade the Enemy’s Country. Ōlim peditēs Rōmānī cum equitibus vēlōcibus in hostium urbem iter faciēbant. Ubi nōn longē āfuērunt, rapuērunt agricolam, quī eīs viam brevem et facilem dēmōnstrāvit. Iam Rōmānī moenia alta, turrīs validās aliaque opera urbis vidēre poterant. In moenibus stābant multī prīncipēs. Prīncipēs ubi vīdērunt Rōmānōs, iussērunt cīvīs lapidēs aliaque tēla dē mūrīs iacere. Tum mīlitēs fortēs continērī ā proeliō nōn poterant et ācer imperātor signum tubā darī iussit. Summā vī omnēs mātūrāvērunt. Imperātor Sextō lēgātō impedīmenta omnia mandāvit. Sextus impedīmenta in summō colle conlocāvit. Grave et ācre erat proelium, sed hostēs nōn parēs Rōmānīs erant. Aliī interfectī, aliī captī sunt. Apud captīvōs erant māter sororque rēgis. Paucī Rōmānōrum ab hostibus vulnerātī sunt. Secundum proelium Rōmānīs erat grātum. Fortūna fortibus semper favet.

II. 1. Some months are short, others are long. 2. To seize the top of the mountain was difficult. 3. Among the hills of Italy are many beautiful springs. 4. The soldiers were sitting where the baggage had been placed because their feet were weary. 5. The city which the soldiers were eager to storm had been fortified by strong walls and high towers. 6. Did not the king intrust a heavy crown of gold and all his money to a faithless slave? Yes, but the slave had never before been faithless.

AQUILA LEGIONIS

LESSON XLVI

THE FOURTH OR U-DECLENSION

259. Nouns of the fourth declension are either masculine or neuter.

260. Masculine nouns end in -us, neuters in -ū. The genitive ends in -ūs.

a. Feminine by exception are domus, house; manus, hand; and a few others.

PARADIGMS

The “Stems” are missing in the printed book. They have been supplied from the inflectional table in the Appendix.

adventus, m., arrival

cornū, n., horn

STEMS

adventu-

cornu-

BASES

advent-

corn-

SINGULAR

TERMINATIONS

MASC.

NEUT.

Nom.

adventus

cornū

-us

-ū

Gen.

adventūs

cornūs

-ūs

-ūs

Dat.

adventuī (ū  )

cornū

-uī (ū  )

-ū

Acc.

adventum

cornū

-um

-ū

Abl.

adventū

cornū

-ū

-ū

PLURAL

Nom.

adventūs

cornua

-ūs

-ua

Gen.

adventuum

cornuum

-uum

-uum

Dat.

adventibus

cornibus

-ibus

-ibus

Acc.

adventūs

cornua

-ūs

-ua

Abl.

adventibus

cornibus

-ibus

-ibus

1. Observe that the base is found, as in other declensions, by dropping the ending of the genitive singular.

2. lacus, lake, has the ending -ubus in the dative and ablative plural; portus, harbor, has either -ubus or -ibus.

3. cornū is the only neuter that is in common use.

261.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 293.

I. 1. Ante adventum Caesaris vēlōcēs hostium equitēs ācrem impetum in castra fēcērunt. 2. Continēre exercitum ā proeliō nōn facile erat. 3. Post adventum suum Caesar iussit legiōnēs ex castrīs dūcī. 4. Prō castrīs cum hostium equitātū pugnātum est. 5. Post tempus breve equitātus trāns flūmen fūgit ubi castra hostium posita erant. 6. Tum victor imperātor agrōs vāstāvit et vīcōs hostium cremāvit. 7. Castra autem nōn oppugnāvit quia mīlitēs erant dēfessī et locus difficilis. 8. Hostēs nōn cessāvērunt iacere tēla, quae paucīs nocuērunt. 9. Post adversum proelium principēs Gallōrum lēgātōs ad Caesarem mittere studēbant, sed populō persuādēre nōn poterant.

II. 1. Did you see the man-of-war on the lake? 2. I did not see it (fem.) on the lake, but I saw it in the harbor. 3. Because of the strong wind the sailor forbade his brother to sail. 4. Cæsar didn´t make an attack on the cavalry on the right wing, did he? 5. No, he made an attack on the left wing. 6. Who taught your swift horse to obey? 7. I trained my horse with my (own) hands, nor was the task difficult. 8. He is a beautiful animal and has great strength.

LESSON XLVII

EXPRESSIONS OF PLACE · THE DECLENSION OF DOMUS

262. We have become thoroughly familiar with expressions like the following:

Galba ad (or in) oppidum properat

Galba ab (dē or ex) oppidō properat

Galba in oppidō habitat

From these expressions we may deduce the following rules:

263. RULE. Accusative of the Place to. The place to which is expressed by ad or in with the accusative. This answers the question Whither?

264. RULE. Ablative of the Place from. The place from which is expressed by ā or ab, dē, ē or ex, with the separative ablative. This answers the question Whence? (Cf. Rule, § 179.)

265. RULE. Ablative of the Place at or in. The place at or in which is expressed by the ablative with in. This answers the question Where?

a. The ablative denoting the place where is called the locative ablative (cf. locus, place).

266. Exceptions. Names of towns, small islands,  1 domus, home, rūs, country, and a few other words in common use omit the prepositions in expressions of place, as,

Galba Athēnās properat, Galba hastens to Athens

Galba Athēnīs properat, Galba hastens from Athens

Galba Athēnīs habitat, Galba lives at (or in) Athens

Galba domum properat, Galba hastens home

Galba rūs properat, Galba hastens to the country

Galba domō properat, Galba hastens from home

Galba rūre properat, Galba hastens from the country

Galba rūrī (less commonly rūre) habitat, Galba lives in the country

a. Names of countries, like Germānia, Italia, etc., do not come under these exceptions. With them prepositions must not be omitted.

1. Small islands are classed with towns because they generally have but one town, and the name of the town is the same as the name of the island.

267. The Locative Case. We saw above that the place-relation expressed by at or in is regularly covered by the locative ablative. However, Latin originally expressed this relation by a separate form known as the locative case. This case has been everywhere merged in the ablative excepting in the singular number of the first and second declensions. The form of the locative in these declensions is like the genitive singular, and its use is limited to names of towns and small islands, domī, at home, and a few other words.

268. RULE. Locative and Locative Ablative. To express the place in which with names of towns and small islands, if they are singular and of the first or second declension, use the locative; otherwise use the locative ablative without a preposition; as,

Galba Rōmae habitat, Galba lives at Rome

Galba Corinthī habitat, Galba lives at Corinth

Galba domī habitat, Galba lives at home

Here Rōmae, Corinthī, and domī are locatives, being singular and of the first and second declensions respectively. But in

Galba Athēnīs habitat, Galba lives at Athens,

Galba Pompēiīs habitat, Galba lives at Pompeii

Athēnīs and Pompēiīs are locative ablatives. These words can have no locative case, as the nominatives Athēnae and Pompēiī are plural and there is no plural locative case form.

269. The word domus, home, house, has forms of both the second and the fourth declension. Learn its declension (§ 468).

270.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 293.

I. 1. Corinthī omnia īnsignia aurī ā ducibus victōribus rapta erant. 2. Caesar Genāvam exercitum magnīs itineribus dūxit. 3. Quem pontem hostēs cremāverant? Pontem in Rhēnō hostēs cremāverant. 4. Pompēiīs multās Rōmānōrum domōs vidēre poteritis. 5. Rōmā cōnsul equō vēlōcī rūs properāvit. 6. Domī cōnsulis hominēs multī sedēbant. 7. Imperātor iusserat lēgātum Athēnās cum multīs nāvibus longīs nāvigāre. 8. Ante moenia urbis sunt ōrdinēs arborum altārum. 9. Propter arborēs altās nec lacum nec portum reperīre potuimus. 10. Proeliīs crēbrīs Caesar legiōnēs suās quae erant in Galliā exercēbat. 11. Cotīdiē in locō idoneō castra pōnēbat et mūniēbat.

II. 1. Cæsar, the famous general, when he had departed from Rome, hastened to the Roman province on a swift horse.  2 2. He had heard a rumor concerning the allies at Geneva. 3. After his arrival Cæsar called the soldiers together and commanded them to join battle. 4. The enemy hastened to retreat, some because  3 they were afraid, others because  3 of wounds. 5. Recently I was at Athens and saw the place where the judges used to sit.  4 6. Marcus and Sextus are my brothers; the one lives at Rome, the other in the country.

2. Latin says “by a swift horse.” What construction?

3. Distinguish between the English conjunction because (quia or quod) and the preposition because of (propter).

4. used to sit, express by the imperfect.

DAEDALUS ET ICARUS

271.             DAED´ALUS AND IC´ARUS

Crēta est īnsula antīqua quae aquā altā magnī maris pulsātur. Ibi ōlim Mīnōs erat rēx. Ad eum vēnit Daedalus quī ex Graeciā patriā fugiēbat. Eum Mīnōs rēx benignīs verbīs accēpit et eī domicilium in Crētā dedit.   5Quō in locō Daedalus sine cūrā vīvebat et rēgī multa et clāra opera faciēbat. Post tempus longum autem Daedalus patriam cāram dēsīderāre incēpit. Domum properāre studēbat, sed rēgī persuādēre nōn potuit et mare saevum fugam vetābat.

5. And in this place; quō does not here introduce a subordinate relative clause, but establishes the connection with the preceding sentence. Such a relative is called a connecting relative, and is translated by and and a demonstrative or personal pronoun.

LESSON XLVIII

THE FIFTH OR Ē-DECLENSION · THE ABLATIVE OF TIME

272. Gender. Nouns of the fifth declension are feminine except diēs, day, and merīdiēs, midday, which are usually masculine.

273.             PARADIGMS

The “Stems” are missing in the printed book. They have been supplied from the inflectional table in the Appendix.

diēs, m., day

rēs, f. thing

STEMS

diē-

rē-

BASES

di-

r-

SINGULAR

TERMINATIONS

Nom.

diēs

rēs

-ēs

Gen.

diēī

reī

-ē̆ī

Dat.

diēī

reī

-ē̆ī

Acc.

diem

rem

-em

Abl.

diē

rē

-ē

PLURAL

Nom.

diēs

rēs

-ēs

Gen.

diērum

rērum

-ērum

Dat.

diēbus

rēbus

-ēbus

Acc.

diēs

rēs

-ēs

Abl.

diēbus

rēbus

-ēbus

1. The vowel e which appears in every form is regularly long. It is shortened in the ending -eī after a consonant, as in r-ĕī; and before -m in the accusative singular, as in di-em. (Cf. § 12. 2.)

2. Only diēs and rēs are complete in the plural. Most other nouns of this declension lack the plural. Aciēs, line of battle, and spēs, hope, have the nominative and accusative plural.

274. The ablative relation (§ 50) which is expressed by the prepositions at, in, or on may refer not only to place, but also to time, as at noon, in summer, on the first day. The ablative which is used to express this relation is called the ablative of time.

275. RULE. The Ablative of Time. The time when or within which anything happens is expressed by the ablative without a preposition.

a. Occasionally the preposition in is found. Compare the English Next day we started and On the next day we started.

276.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 294.

I. Galba the Farmer. Galba agricola rūrī vīvit. Cotīdiē prīmā lūce labōrāre incipit, nec ante noctem in studiō suō cessat. Merīdiē Iūlia fīlia eum ad cēnam vocat. Nocte pedēs dēfessōs domum vertit. Aestāte fīliī agricolae auxilium patrī dant. Hieme agricola eōs in lūdum mittit. Ibi magister pueris multās fābulās dē rēbus gestīs Caesaris nārrat. Aestāte fīliī agricolae perpetuīs labōribus exercentur nec grave agrī opus est iīs molestum. Galba sine ūllā cūrā vivit nec rēs adversās timet.

II. 1. In that month there were many battles in Gaul. 2. The cavalry of the enemy made an attack upon Cæsar’s line of battle. 3. In the first hour of the night the ship was overcome by the billows. 4. On the second day the savages were eager to come under Cæsar’s protection. 5. The king had joined battle, moved by the hope of victory. 6. That year a fire destroyed many birds and other animals. 7. We saw blood on the wild beast’s teeth.

277.             DAED´ALUS AND IC´ARUS (Continued)

Tum Daedalus gravibus cūrīs commōtus fīliō suō Īcarō ita dixit: “Animus meus, Īcare, est plēnus trīstitiae nec oculī lacrimīs egent. Discēdere ex Crētā, Athēnās properāre, maximē studeō; sed rēx recūsat audīre verba mea et omnem reditūs spem ēripit. Sed numquam rēbus adversīs vincar. Terra et mare sunt inimīca, sed aliam fugae viam reperiam.” Tum in artīs ignōtās animum dīmittit et mīrum capit cōnsilium. Nam pennās in ōrdine pōnit et vērās ālās facit.

LESSON XLIX

PRONOUNS CLASSIFIED · PERSONAL AND REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS

278. We have the same kinds of pronouns in Latin as in English. They are divided into the following eight classes:

1. Personal pronouns, which show the person speaking, spoken to, or spoken of; as, ego, I; tū, you; is, he. (Cf. § 279. etc.)

2. Possessive pronouns, which denote possession; as, meus, tuus, suus, etc. (Cf. § 98.)

3. Reflexive pronouns, used in the predicate to refer back to the subject; as, he saw himself. (Cf. § 281.)

4. Intensive pronouns, used to emphasize a noun or pronoun; as, I myself saw it. (Cf. § 285.)

5. Demonstrative pronouns, which point out persons or things; as, is, this, that. (Cf. § 112.)

6. Relative pronouns, which connect a subordinate adjective clause with an antecedent; as, quī, who. (Cf. § 220.)

7. Interrogative pronouns, which ask a question; as, quis, who? (Cf. § 225.)

8. Indefinite pronouns, which point out indefinitely; as, some one, any one, some, certain ones, etc. (Cf. § 296.)

279. The demonstrative pronoun is, ea, id, as we learned in § 115, is regularly used as the personal pronoun of the third person (he, she, it, they, etc.).

280. The personal pronouns of the first person are ego, I; nōs, we; of the second person, tū, thou or you; vōs, ye or you. They are declined as follows:

SINGULAR

FIRST PERSON

SECOND PERSON

Nom.

ego, I

tū, you

Gen.

meī, of me

tuī, of you

Dat.

mihi, to or for me

tibi, to or for you

Acc.

mē, me

tē, you

Abl.

mē, with, from, etc., me

tē, with, from, etc., you

PLURAL

Nom.

nōs, we

vōs, you

Gen.

nostrum or nostrī, of us

vestrum or vestrī, of you

Dat.

nōbīs, to or for us

vōbīs, to or for you

Acc.

nōs, us

vōs, you

Abl.

nōbīs, with, from, etc., us

vōbīs, with, from, etc., you

1. The personal pronouns are not used in the nominative excepting for emphasis or contrast.

281. The Reflexive Pronouns. 1. The personal pronouns ego and tū may be used in the predicate as reflexives; as,

videō mē, I see myself

vidēmus nōs, we see ourselves

vidēs tē, you see yourself

vidētis vōs, you see yourselves

2. The reflexive pronoun of the third person (himself, herself, itself, themselves) has a special form, used only in these senses, and declined alike in the singular and plural.

SINGULAR AND PLURAL

Gen.

suī

Acc.

sē

Dat.

sibi

Abl.

sē

EXAMPLES

Puer sē videt, the boy sees himself

Puella sē videt, the girl sees herself

Animal sē videt, the animal sees itself

Iī sē vident, they see themselves

a. The form sē is sometimes doubled, sēsē, for emphasis.

3. Give the Latin for

I teach myself

We teach ourselves

You teach yourself

You teach yourselves

He teaches himself

They teach themselves

282. The preposition cum, when used with the ablative of ego, tū, or suī, is appended to the form, as, mēcum, with me; tēcum, with you; nōbīscum, with us; etc.

283.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 294.

I. 1. Mea māter est cāra mihi et tua māter est cāra tibi. 2. Vestrae litterae erant grātae nōbis et nostrae litterae erant grātae vōbīs. 3. Nūntius rēgis quī nōbīscum est nihil respondēbit. 4. Nūntiī pācem amīcitiamque sibi et suīs sociīs postulāvērunt. 5. Sī tū arma sūmēs, ego rēgnum occupābō. 6. Uter vestrum est cīvis Rōmānus? Neuter nostrum. 7. Eō tempore multī supplicium dedērunt quia rēgnum petierant. 8. Sūme supplicium, Caesar, dē hostibus patriae ācribus. 9. Prīmā lūce aliī metū commōtī sēsē fugae mandāvērunt; aliī autem magnā virtūte impetum exercitūs nostrī sustinuērunt. 10. Soror rēgis, ubi dē adversō proeliō audīvit, sēsē Pompēiīs interfēcit.

II. 1. Whom do you teach? I teach myself. 2. The soldier wounded himself with his sword. 3. The master praises us, but you he does not praise. 4. Therefore he will inflict punishment on you, but we shall not suffer punishment. 5. Who will march (i.e. make a march) with me to Rome? 6. I will march with you to the gates of the city. 7. Who will show us  1 the way? The gods will show you  1 the way.

1. Not accusative.

DAED´ALUS AND IC´ARUS (Concluded)

284. Puer Īcarus ūnā  2 stābat et mīrum patris opus vidēbat. Postquam manus ultima  3 ālīs imposita est, Daedalus eās temptāvit et similis avī in aurās volāvit. Tum ālās umerīs fīlī adligāvit et docuit eum volāre et dīxit, “Tē vetō, mī fīlī, adpropinquāre aut sōlī aut marī. Sī fluctibus adpropinquāveris,  4 aqua ālīs tuīs nocēbit, et sī sōlī adpropinquāveris,  4 ignis eās cremābit.” Tum pater et filius iter difficile incipiunt. Ālās movent et aurae sēsē committunt. Sed stultus puer verbīs patris nōn pāret. Sōlī adpropinquat. Ālae cremantur et Īcarus in mare dēcidit et vitam āmittit. Daedalus autem sine ūllō perīculō trāns fluctūs ad īnsulam Siciliam volāvit.

2. Adverb, see vocabulary.

3. manus ultima, the finishing touch. What literally?

4. Future perfect. Translate by the present.

LESSON L

THE INTENSIVE PRONOUN IPSE AND THE DEMONSTRATIVE ĪDEM

285. Ipse means -self (him-self, her-self, etc.) or is translated by even or very. It is used to emphasize a noun or pronoun, expressed or understood, with which it agrees like an adjective.

a. Ipse must be carefully distinguished from the reflexive suī. The latter is always used as a pronoun, while ipse is regularly adjective. Compare

Homō sē videt, the man sees himself (reflexive)

Homō ipse perīculum videt, the man himself (intensive) sees the danger

Homō ipsum perīculum videt, the man sees the danger itself (intensive)

286. Except for the one form ipse, the intensive pronoun is declined exactly like the nine irregular adjectives (cf. §§ 108, 109). Learn the declension (§ 481).

287. The demonstrative īdem, meaning the same, is a compound of is. It is declined as follows:

SINGULAR

PLURAL

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

īdem

e´adem

idem

iī´dem

eī´dem

eae´dem

e´adem

Gen.

eius´dem

eius´dem

eius´dem

eōrun´dem

eārun´dem

eōrun´dem

Dat.

eī´dem

eī´dem

eī´dem

iīs´dem

eīs´dem

iīs´dem

eīs´dem

iīs´dem

eīs´dem

Acc.

eun´dem

ean´dem

idem

eōs´dem

eās´dem

e´adem

Dat.

eī´dem

eī´dem

eī´dem

iīs´dem

eīs´dem

iīs´dem

eīs´dem

iīs´dem

eīs´dem

a. From forms like eundem (eum + -dem), eōrundem (eōrum + -dem), we learn the rule that m before d is changed to n.

b. The forms iīdem, iīsdem are often spelled and pronounced with one ī.

288.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 295.

I. 1. Ego et tū  1 in eādem urbe vīvimus. 2. Iter ipsum nōn timēmus sed ferās saevās quae in silvā dēnsā esse dīcuntur. 3. Ōlim nōs ipsī idem iter fēcimus. 4. Eō tempore multās ferās vīdimus. 5. Sed nōbīs nōn nocuērunt. 6. Caesar ipse scūtum dē manibus mīlitis ēripuit et in ipsam aciem properāvit. 7. Itaque mīlitēs summā virtūte tēla in hostium corpora iēcērunt. 8. Rōmānī quoque gravia vulnera accēpērunt. 9. Dēnique hostēs terga vertērunt et ommīs in partīs  2 fūgērunt. 10. Eādem hōrā litterae Rōmam ab imperātōre ipsō missae sunt. 11. Eōdem mēnse captīvī quoque in Italiam missī sunt. 12. Sed multī propter vulnera iter difficile trāns montīs facere recūsābant et Genāvae esse dīcēbantur.

1. Observe that in Latin we say I and you, not you and I.

2. Not parts, but directions.

II. 1. At Pompeii there is a wonderful mountain. 2. When I was in that place, I myself saw that mountain. 3. On the same day many cities were destroyed by fire and stones from that very mountain. 4. You have not heard the true story of that calamity, have you?  3 5. On that day the very sun could not give light to men. 6. You yourself ought to tell (to) us that story.

3. Cf. § 210.

289.             HOW HORATIUS HELD THE BRIDGE  4

Tarquinius Superbus, septimus et ultimus rēx Rōmānōrum, ubi in exsilium ab īrātīs Rōmānīs ēiectus est, ā Porsenā, rēge Etrūscōrum, auxilium petiit. Mox Porsena magnīs cum cōpiīs Rōmam vēnit, et ipsa urbs summō in perīculō erat. Omnibus in partibus exercitus Rōmānus victus erat. Iam rēx montem Iāniculum  5 occupāverat. Numquam anteā Rōmānī tantō metū tenēbantur. Ex agrīs in urbem properābant et summō studiō urbem ipsam mūniēbant.

4. The story of Horatius has been made familiar by Macaulay’s well-known poem “Horatius” in his Lays of Ancient Rome. Read the poem in connection with this selection.

5. The Janiculum is a high hill across the Tiber from Rome.

LESSON LI

THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS HIC, ISTE, ILLE

290. We have already learned the declension of the demonstrative pronoun is and its use. (Cf. Lesson XVII.) That pronoun refers to persons or things either far or near, and makes no definite reference to place or time. If we wish to point out an object definitely in place or time, we must use hic, iste, or ille. These demonstratives, like is, are used both as pronouns and as adjectives, and their relation to the speaker may be represented graphically thus:

a. In dialogue hic refers to a person or thing near the speaker; iste, to a person or thing near the person addressed; ille, to a person or thing remote from both. These distinctions are illustrated in the model sentences, § 293, which should be carefully studied and imitated.

291. Hic is declined as follows:

SINGULAR

PLURAL

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

hic

haec

hoc

hī

hae

haec

Gen.

huius

huius

huius

hōrum

hārum

hōrum

Dat.

huic

huic

huic

hīs

hīs

hīs

Acc.

hunc

hanc

hoc

hōs

hās

haec

Abl.

hōc

hāc

hōc

hīs

hīs

hīs

a. Huius is pronounced ho͝o´yo͝os, and huic is pronounced ho͝oic (one syllable).

292. The demonstrative pronouns iste, ista, istud, and ille, illa, illud, except for the nominative and accusative singular neuter forms istud and illud, are declined exactly like ipse, ipsa, ipsum. (See § 481.)

293.             MODEL SENTENCES

Is this horse (of mine) strong?

Estne hic equus validus?

That horse (of yours) is strong, but that one (yonder) is weak

Iste equus est validus, sed ille est īnfīrmus

Are these (men by me) your friends?

Suntne hī amīcī tuī?

Those (men by you) are my friends, but those (men yonder) are enemies

Istī sunt amīcī meī, sed illī sunt inimīcī

294.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 295.

I. A German Chieftain addresses his Followers. Ille fortis Germānōrum dux suōs convocāvit et hōc modō animōs eōrum cōnfirmāvit. “Vōs, quī in hīs fīnibus vīvitis, in hunc locum convocāvī  1 quia mēcum dēbētis istōs agrōs et istās domōs ab iniūriīs Rōmānōrum liberāre. Hoc nōbīs nōn difficile erit, quod illī hostēs hās silvās dēnsās, ferās saevās quārum vestīgia vident, montēs altōs timent. Sī fortēs erimus, deī ipsī nōbīs viam salūtis dēmonstrābunt. Ille sōl, istī oculī calamītātēs nostrās vīdērunt.  1 Itaque nōmen illīus reī pūblicae Rōmānae nōn sōlum nōbis, sed etiam omnibus hominibus quī lībertātem amant, est invīsum. Ad arma vōs vocō. Exercēte istam prīstinam virtūtem et vincētis.”

II. 1. Does that bird (of yours)  2 sing? 2. This bird (of mine)  2 sings both  3 in summer and in winter and has a beautiful voice. 3. Those birds (yonder)  2 in the country don´t sing in winter. 4. Snatch a spear from the hands of that soldier (near you)  2 and come home with me. 5. With those very eyes (of yours)  2 you will see the tracks of the hateful enemy who burned my dwelling and made an attack on my brother. 6. For (propter) these deeds (rēs) we ought to inflict punishment on him without delay. 7. The enemies of the republic do not always suffer punishment.

1. The perfect definite. (Cf. § 190.)

2. English words in parentheses are not to be translated. They are inserted to show what demonstratives should be used. (Cf. § 290.)

3. both ... and, et ... et.

HORATIUS PONTEM DEFENDIT

295.             HOW HORATIUS HELD THE BRIDGE (Continued)

Altera urbis pars mūrīs, altera flūmine satis mūnīrī vidēbātur. Sed erat pōns in flūmine quī hostibus iter paene dedit. Tum Horātius Cocles, fortis vir, magnā vōce dīxit, “Rescindite pontem, Rōmānī! Brevī tempore Porsena in urbem cōpiās suās trādūcet.” Iam hostēs in ponte erant, sed Horātius cum duōbus (cf. § 479) comitibus ad extrēmam pontis partem properāvit, et hi sōli aciem hostium sustinuērunt. Tum vērō cīvēs Rōmānī pontem ā tergō rescindere incipiunt, et hostēs frūstrā Horātium superāre temptant.

LESSON LII

THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS

296. The indefinite pronouns are used to refer to some person or some thing, without indicating which particular one is meant. The pronouns quis and quī, which we have learned in their interrogative and relative uses, may also be indefinite; and nearly all the other indefinite pronouns are compounds of quis or quī and declined almost like them. Review the declension of these words, §§ 221, 227.

297. Learn the declension and meaning of the following indefinites:

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

quis

quid, some one, any one (substantive)

quī

qua or quae

quod, some, any (adjective), § 483

aliquis

aliquid, some one, any one (substantive), § 487

aliquī

aliqua

aliquod, some, any (adjective), § 487

quīdam

quaedam

quoddam, quiddam, a certain, a certain one, § 485

quisquam

quicquam or quidquam (no plural), any one (at all) (substantive), § 486

quisque

quidque, each one, every one (substantive), § 484

quisque

quaeque

quodque, each, every (adjective), § 484

Transcriber’s Note:

In the original text, the combined forms (masculine/feminine) were printed in the “masculine” column.

NOTE. The meanings of the neuters, something, etc., are easily inferred from the masculine and feminine.

a. In the masculine and neuter singular of the indefinites, quis-forms and quid-forms are mostly used as substantives, quī-forms and quod-forms as adjectives.

b. The indefinites quis and quī never stand first in a clause, and are rare excepting after sī, nisi, nē, num (as, sī quis, if any one; sī quid, if anything; nisi quis, unless some one). Generally aliquis and aliquī are used instead.

c. The forms qua and aliqua are both feminine nominative singular and neuter nominative plural of the indefinite adjectives quī and aliquī respectively. How do these differ from the corresponding forms of the relative quī?

d. Observe that quīdam (quī + -dam) is declined like quī, except that in the accusative singular and genitive plural m of quī becomes n (cf. § 287. a): quendam, quandam, quōrundam, quārundam; also that the neuter has quiddam (substantive) and quoddam (adjective) in the nominative and accusative singular. Quīdam is the least indefinite of the indefinite pronouns, and implies that you could name the person or thing referred to if you cared to do so.

e. Quisquam and quisque (substantive) are declined like quis.

f. Quisquam, any one (quicquam or quidquam, anything), is always used substantively and chiefly in negative sentences. The corresponding adjective any is ūllus, -a, -um (§ 108).

298.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 295.

I. 1. Aliquis dē ponte in flūmen dēcidit sed sine ūllō perīculō servātus est. 2. Est vērō in vītā cuiusque hominis aliqua bona fortūna. 3. Nē mīlitum quidem  1 quisquam in castrīs mānsit. 4. Sī quem meae domī vidēs, iubē eum discēdere. 5. Sī quis pontem tenet, nē tantus quidem exercitus capere urbem potest. 6. Urbs nōn satis mūnīta erat et merīdiē rēx quīdam paene cōpiās suās trāns pontem trādūxerat. 7. Dēnique mīles quīdam armātus in fluctūs dēsiluit et incolumis ad alteram rīpam oculōs vertit. 8. Quisque illī fortī mīlitī aliquid dare dēbet. 9. Tanta vērō virtūs Rōmānīs semper placuit. 10. Ōlim Corinthus erat urbs satis magna et paene par Rōmae ipsī; nunc vērō moenia dēcidērunt et pauca vestīgia urbis illīus reperīrī possunt. 11. Quisque lībertātem amat, et aliquibus vērō nōmen rēgis est invīsum.

II. 1. If you see a certain Cornelius at Corinth, send him to me. 2. Almost all the soldiers who fell down into the waves were unharmed. 3. Not even at Pompeii did I see so great a fire. 4. I myself was eager to tell something to some one. 5. Each one was praising his own work. 6. Did you see some one in the country? I did not see any one. 7. Unless some one will remain on the bridge with Horatius, the commonwealth will be in the greatest danger.

1. Observe that quīdam and quidem are different words.

299.             HOW HORATIUS HELD THE BRIDGE (Concluded)

Mox, ubi parva pars pontis mānsit, Horātius iussit comitēs discēdere et sōlus mīrā cōnstantiā impetum illius tōtius exercitūs sustinēbat. Dēnique magnō fragōre pōns in flūmen dēcīdit. Tum vērō Horātius tergum vertit et armātus in aquās dēsiluit. In eum hostēs multa tēla iēcērunt; incolumis autem per fluctūs ad alteram rīpam trānāvit. Eī propter tantās rēs gestās populus Rōmānus nōn sōlum alia magna praemia dedit sed etiam statuam Horāti in locō pūblicō posuit.

Sixth Review, Lessons XLV-LII, §§ 521-523

LESSON LIII

REGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES

300. The quality denoted by an adjective may exist in either a higher or a lower degree, and this is expressed by a form of inflection called comparison. The mere presence of the quality is expressed by the positive degree, its presence in a higher or lower degree by the comparative, and in the highest or lowest of all by the superlative. In English the usual way of comparing an adjective is by using the suffix -er for the comparative and -est for the superlative; as, positive high, comparative higher, superlative highest. Less frequently we use the adverbs more and most; as, positive beautiful, comparative more beautiful, superlative most beautiful.

In Latin, as in English, adjectives are compared by adding suffixes or by using adverbs.

301. Adjectives are compared by using suffixes as follows:

POSITIVE

COMPARATIVE

SUPERLATIVE

clārus, -a, -um (bright)

(BASE clār-)

clārior, clārīus (brighter)

clārissimus, -a, -um (brightest)

brevis, breve (short)

(BASE brev-)

brevior, brevius (shorter)

brevissimus, -a, -um (shortest)

vēlōx (swift)

(BASE veloc-)

vēlōcior, vēlōcius (swifter)

vēlōcissimus, -a, -um (swiftest)

a. The comparative is formed from the base of the positive by adding -ior masc. and fem., and -ius neut.; the superlative by adding -issimus, -issima, -issimum.

302. Less frequently adjectives are compared by using the adverbs magis, more; maximē, most; as, idōneus, suitable; magis idōneus, more suitable; maximē idōneus, most suitable.

303. Declension of the Comparative. Adjectives of the comparative degree are declined as follows:

SINGULAR

PLURAL

MASC. AND FEM.

NEUT.

MASC. AND FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

clārior

clārīus

clāriōrēs

clāriōra

Gen.

clāriōris

clāriōris

clāriōrum

clāriōrum

Dat.

clāriōrī

clāriōrī

clāriōribus

clāriōribus

Acc.

clāriōrem

clārius

clāriōrēs

clāriōra

Abl.

clāriōre

clāriōre

clāriōribus

clāriōribus

a. Observe that the endings are those of the consonant stems of the third declension.

b. Compare longus, long; fortis, brave; recēns (base, recent-), recent; and decline the comparative of each.

304. Adjectives in -er form the comparative regularly, but the superlative is formed by adding -rimus, -a, -um to the nominative masculine of the positive; as,

POSITIVE

COMPARATIVE

SUPERLATIVE

ācer, ācris, ācre

(Base acr-)

ācrior, ācrius

ācerrimus, -a, -um

pulcher, pulchra, pulchrum

(Base pulchr-)

pulchrior, pulchrius

pulcherrimus, -a, -um

līber, lībera, līberum

(Base līber-)

līberior, līberius

līberrimus, -a, -um

a. In a similar manner compare miser, aeger, crēber.

305. The comparative is often translated by quite, too, or somewhat, and the superlative by very; as, altior, quite (too, somewhat) high; altissimus, very high.

306.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 296.

I. 1. Quid explōrātōrēs quaerēbant? Explōrātōrēs tempus opportūnissimum itinerī quaerēbant. 2. Mediā in silvā ignīs quam crēberrimōs fēcimus, quod ferās tam audācis numquam anteā vīderāmus. 3. Antīquīs temporibus Germānī erant fortiōrēs quam Gallī. 4. Caesar erat clārior quam inimīcī  1 quī eum necāvērunt. 5. Quisque scūtum ingēns et pīlum longius gerēbat. 6. Apud barbarōs Germānī erant audācissimī et fortissimī. 7. Mēns hominum est celerior quam corpus. 8. Virī aliquārum terrārum sunt miserrimī. 9. Corpora Germānōrum erant ingentiōra quam Rōmānōrum. 10. Ācerrimī Gallōrum prīncipēs sine ūllā morā trāns flūmen quoddam equōs vēlōcissimōs trādūxērunt. 11. Aestāte diēs sunt longiōrēs quam hieme. 12. Imperātor quīdam ab explōrātōribus dē recentī adventū nāvium longārum quaesīvit.

II. 1. Of all birds the eagle is the swiftest. 2. Certain animals are swifter than the swiftest horse. 3. The Roman name was most hateful to the enemies of the commonwealth. 4. The Romans always inflicted the severest  2 punishment on faithless allies. 5. I was quite ill, and so I hastened from the city to the country. 6. Marcus had some friends dearer than Cæsar.  3 7. Did you not seek a more recent report concerning the battle? 8. Not even after a victory so opportune did he seek the general’s friendship.

1. Why is this word used instead of hostēs?

2. Use the superlative of gravis.

3. Accusative. In a comparison the noun after quam is in the same case as the one before it.

N.B. Beginning at this point, the selections for reading will be found near the end of the volume. (See p. 197.)

LESSON LIV

IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES · THE ABLATIVE WITH COMPARATIVES WITHOUT QUAM

307. The following six adjectives in -lis form the comparative regularly; but the superlative is formed by adding -limus to the base of the positive. Learn the meanings and comparison.

POSITIVE

COMPARATIVE

SUPERLATIVE

facilis, -e, easy

facilior, -ius

facillimus, -a, -um

difficilis, -e, hard

difficilior, -ius

difficillimus, -a, -um

similis, -e, like

similior, -ius

simillimus, -a, -um

dissimilis, -e, unlike

dissimilior, -ius

dissimillimus, -a, -um

gracilis, -e, slender

gracilior, -ius

gracillimus, -a, -um

humilis, -e, low

humilior, -ius

humillimus, -a, -um

308. From the knowledge gained in the preceding lesson we should translate the sentence Nothing is brighter than the sun

Nihil est clārius quam sōl

But the Romans, especially in negative sentences, often expressed the comparison in this way,

Nihil est clārius sōle

which, literally translated, is Nothing is brighter away from the sun; that is, starting from the sun as a standard, nothing is brighter. This relation is expressed by the separative ablative sōle. Hence the rule

309. RULE. Ablative with Comparatives. The comparative degree, if quam is omitted, is followed by the separative ablative.

310.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 296.

I. 1. Nēmō mīlitēs alacriōrēs Rōmānīs vīdit. 2. Statim imperātor iussit nūntiōs quam celerrimōs litterās Rōmam portāre. 3. Multa flūmina sunt lēniōra Rhēnō. 4. Apud Rōmanōs quis erat clārior Caesare? 5. Nihil pulchrius urbe Rōmā vīdī. 6. Subitō multitūdo audacissima magnō clamōre proelium ācrius commīsit. 7. Num est equus tuus tardus? Nōn vērō tardus, sed celerior aquilā. 8. Ubi Romae fuī, nēmō erat mihi amicior Sextō. 9. Quaedam mulierēs cibum mīlitibus dare cupīvērunt. 10. Rēx vetuit cīvis ex urbe noctū discēdere. 11. Ille puer est gracilior hāc muliere. 12. Explōrātor duās (two) viās, alteram facilem, alteram difficiliōrem, dēmōnstrāvit.

II. 1. What city have you seen more beautiful than Rome? 2. The Gauls were not more eager than the Germans. 3. The eagle is not slower than the horse. 4. The spirited woman did not fear to make the journey by night. 5. The mind of the multitude was quite gentle and friendly. 6. But the king’s mind was very different. 7. The king was not like (similar to) his noble father. 8. These hills are lower than the huge mountains of our territory.

Reading Selection

ARMA ROMANA

LESSON LV

IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES (Continued)

311. Some adjectives in English have irregular comparison, as good, better, best; many, more, most. So Latin comparison presents some irregularities. Among the adjectives that are compared irregularly are

POSITIVE

COMPARATIVE

SUPERLATIVE

bonus, -a, -um, good

melior, melius

optimus, -a, -um

magnus, -a, -um, great

maior, maius

maximus, -a, -um

malus, -a, -um, bad

peior, peius

pessimus, -a, -um

multus, -a, -um, much

——, plūs

plūrimus, -a, -um

multī, -ae, -a, many

plūrēs, plūra

plūrimī, -ae, -a

parvus, -a, -um, small

minor, minus

minimus, -a, -um

312. The following four adjectives have two superlatives. Unusual forms are placed in parentheses.

exterus, -a, -um, outward

(  exterior, -ius, outer)

extrēmus, -a, -um

(extimus, -a, -um )

outermost, last

īnferus, -a, -um, low

īnferior, -ius, lower

īnfimus, -a, -um

īmus, -a, -um

lowest

posterus, -a, -um, next

(  posterior, -ius, later)

postrēmus, -a, -um

(postumus, -a, -um )

last

superus, -a, -um, above

superior, -ius, higher

suprēmus, -a, -um

summus, -a, -um

highest

313. Plūs, more (plural more, many, several), is declined as follows:

SINGULAR

PLURAL

MASC. AND FEM.

NEUT.

MASC. AND FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

——

plūs

plūrēs

plūra

Gen.

——

plūris

plūrium

plūrium

Dat.

——

——

plūribus

plūribus

Acc.

——

plūs

plūrīs, -ēs

plūra

Abl.

——

plūre

plūribus

plūribus

a. In the singular plūs is used only as a neuter substantive.

314.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 296.

I. 1. Reliquī hostēs, quī ā dextrō cornū proelium commīserant, dē superiōre locō fūgērunt et sēsē in silvam maximam recēpērunt. 2. In extrēmā parte silvae castra hostium posita erant. 3. Plūrimī captīvī ab equitibus ad Caesarem ductī sunt. 4. Caesar vērō iussit eōs in servitūtem trādī. 5. Posterō diē magna multitūdō mulierum ab Rōmānīs in valle īmā reperta est. 6. Hae mulierēs maximē perterritae adventū Caesaris sēsē occīdere studēbant. 7. Eae quoque plūrīs fābulās dē exercitūs Rōmānī sceleribus audīverant. 8. Fāma illōrum mīlitum optima nōn erat. 9. In barbarōrum aedificiīs maior cōpia frūmentī reperta est. 10. Nēmō crēbrīs proeliīs contendere sine aliquō perīculō potest.

II. 1. The remaining women fled from their dwellings and hid themselves. 2. They were terrified and did not wish to be captured and given over into slavery. 3. Nothing can be worse than slavery. 4. Slavery is worse than death. 5. In the Roman empire a great many were killed because they refused to be slaves. 6. To surrender the fatherland is the worst crime.

Reading Selection

LESSON LVI

IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES (Concluded) · ABLATIVE OF THE MEASURE OF DIFFERENCE

315. The following adjectives are irregular in the formation of the superlative and have no positive. Forms rarely used are in parentheses.

COMPARATIVE

SUPERLATIVE

citerior, hither

(citimus, hithermost  )

interior, inner

(intimus, inmost  )

prior, former

prīmus, first

propior, nearer

proximus, next, nearest

ulterior, further

ultimus, furthest

316. In the sentence Galba is a head taller than Sextus, the phrase a head taller expresses the measure of difference in height between Galba and Sextus. The Latin form of expression would be Galba is taller than Sextus by a head. This is clearly an ablative relation, and the construction is called the ablative of the measure of difference.

EXAMPLES

Galba est altior capite quam Sextus

Galba is a head taller (taller by a head) than Sextus.

Illud iter ad Italiam est multō brevius

That route to Italy is much shorter (shorter by much)

317. RULE. Ablative of the Measure of Difference. With comparatives and words implying comparison the ablative is used to denote the measure of difference.

a. Especially common in this construction are the neuter ablatives

eō, by this, by that

hōc, by this

multō, by much

nihilō,  1 by nothing

paulō, by a little

1. nihil was originally nihilum and declined like pīlum. There is no plural.

318.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 297.

I. 1. Barbarī proelium committere statuērunt eō magis quod Rōmānī īnfīrmī esse vidēbantur. 2. Meum cōnsilium est multō melius quam tuum quia multō facilius est. 3. Haec via est multō lātior quam illa. 4. Barbarī erant nihilō tardiōrēs quam Rōmānī. 5. Tuus equus est paulō celerior quam meus. 6. Iī quī paulō fortiōrēs erant prohibuērunt reliquōs aditum relinquere. 7. Inter illās cīvitātēs Germānia mīlitēs habet optimōs. 8. Propior via quae per hanc vallem dūcit est inter portum et lacum. 9. Servī, quī agrōs citeriōrēs incolēbant, priōrēs dominōs relinquere nōn cupīvērunt, quod eōs amābant. 10. Ultimae Germāniae partēs numquam in fidem Rōmānōrum vēnērunt. 11. Nam trāns Rhēnum aditus erat multō difficilior exercituī Rōmānō.

II. 1. Another way much more difficult (more difficult by much) was left through hither Gaul. 2. In ancient times no state was stronger than the Roman empire. 3. The states of further Gaul did not wish to give hostages to Cæsar. 4. Slavery is no better (better by nothing) than death. 5. The best citizens are not loved by the worst. 6. The active enemy immediately withdrew into the nearest forest, for they were terrified by Cæsar’s recent victories.

Reading Selection

LESSON LVII

FORMATION AND COMPARISON OF ADVERBS

319. Adverbs are generally derived from adjectives, as in English (e.g. adj. sweet, adv. sweetly). Like adjectives, they can be compared; but they have no declension.

320. Adverbs derived from adjectives of the first and second declensions are formed and compared as follows:

POSITIVE

COMPARATIVE

SUPERLATIVE

Adj.

Adv.

cārus, dear

cārē, dearly

cārior

cārius

cārissimus

cārissimē

Adj.

Adv.

pulcher, beautiful

pulchrē, beautifully

pulchrior

pulchrius

pulcherrimus

pulcherrimē

Adj.

Adv.

līber, free

līberē, freely

līberior

līberius

līberrimus

līberrimē

a. The positive of the adverb is formed by adding -ē to the base of the positive of the adjective. The superlative of the adverb is formed from the superlative of the adjective in the same way.

b. The comparative of any adverb is the neuter accusative singular of the comparative of the adjective.

321. Adverbs derived from adjectives of the third declension are formed like those described above in the comparative and superlative. The positive is usually formed by adding -iter to the base of adjectives of three endings or of two endings, and -ter to the base of those of one ending;  1 as,

POSITIVE

COMPARATIVE

SUPERLATIVE

Adj.

Adv.

fortis, brave

fortiter, bravely

fortior

fortius

fortissimus

fortissimē

Adj.

Adv.

audāx, bold

audācter, boldly

audācior

audācius

audācissimus

audācissimē

1. This is a good working rule, though there are some exceptions to it.

322. Case Forms as Adverbs. As we learned above, the neuter accusative of comparatives is used adverbially. So in the positive or superlative some adjectives, instead of following the usual formation, use the accusative or the ablative singular neuter adverbially; as,

Adj.

Adv.

facilis, easy

facile (acc.), easily

prīmus, first

prīmum (acc.), first

prīmō (abl.), at first

Adj.

Adv.

multus, many

multum (acc.), much

multō (abl.), by much

plūrimus, most

plūrimum (acc.), most

323. Learn the following irregular comparisons:

bene, well

melius, better

optimē, best

diū, long   (time)

diūtius, longer

diūtissimē, longest

magnopere, greatly

magis, more

maximē, most

parum, little

minus, less

minimē, least

prope, nearly, near

propius, nearer

proximē, nearest

saepe, often

saepius, oftener

saepissimē, oftenest

324. Form adverbs from the following adjectives, using the regular rules, and compare them: laetus, superbus, molestus, amīcus, ācer, brevis, gravis, recēns.

325. RULE. Adverbs. Adverbs modify verbs, adjectives, and other adverbs.

326.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 297.

I. 1. Nūlla rēs melius gesta est quam proelium illud  2 ubi Marius multō minōre exercitū multō maiōrēs cōpiās Germānōrum in fugam dedit. 2. Audācter in Rōmānōrum cohortīs hostēs impetūs fēcērunt 3. Marius autem omnēs hōs fortissimē sustinuit. 4. Barbarī nihilō fortiōrēs erant quam Rōmānī. 5. Prīmō barbarī esse superiōrēs vidēbantur, tum Rōmānī ācrius contendērunt. 6. Dēnique, ubi iam diūtissimē paene aequō proeliō pugnātum est, barbarī fugam petiērunt. 7. Quaedam Germānōrum gentēs, simul atque rūmōrem illīus calamitātis audīvērunt, sēsē in ultimīs regiōnibus fīnium suōrum abdidērunt. 8. Rōmānī saepius quam hostēs vīcērunt, quod meliōra arma habēbant. 9. Inter omnīs gentīs Rōmānī plūrimum valēbant. 10. Hae cohortēs simul atque in aequiōrem regiōnem sē recēpērunt, castra sine ūllā difficultāte posuērunt.

II. 1. Some nations are easily overcome by their enemies. 2. Germany is much larger than Gaul. 3. Were not the Romans the most powerful among the tribes of Italy? 4. On account of (his) wounds the soldier dragged his body from the ditch with the greatest difficulty. 5. He was able neither to run nor to fight. 6. Who saved him? A certain horseman boldly undertook the matter. 7. The rumors concerning the soldier’s death were not true.

2. ille standing after its noun means that well-known, that famous.

Reading Selection

LESSON LVIII

NUMERALS · THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE

327. The Latin numeral adjectives may be classified as follows:

1. Cardinal Numerals, answering the question how many? as, ūnus, one; duo, two; etc.

2. Ordinal Numerals, derived in most cases from the cardinals and answering the question in what order? as, prīmus, first; secundus, second; etc.

3. Distributive Numerals, answering the question how many at a time? as, singulī, one at a time.

328. The Cardinal Numerals. The first twenty of the cardinals are as follows:

1, ūnus

6,

sex

11, ūndecim

16, sēdecim

2, duo

7,

septem

12, duodecim

17, septendecim

3, trēs

8,

octō

13, tredecim

18, duodēvīgintī

4, quattuor

9,

novem

14, quattuordecim

19, ūndēvīgintī

5, quīnque

10,

decem

15, quīndecim

20, vīgintī

a. Learn also centum = 100, ducentī = 200, mīlle = 1000.

329. Declension of the Cardinals. Of the cardinals only ūnus, duo, trēs, the hundreds above one hundred, and mīlle used as a noun, are declinable.

a. ūnus is one of the nine irregular adjectives, and is declined like nūllus (cf. §§ 109, 470). The plural of ūnus is used to agree with a plural noun of a singular meaning, as, ūna castra, one camp; and with other nouns in the sense of only, as, Gallī ūnī, only the Gauls.

b. Learn the declension of duo, two; trēs, three; and mīlle, a thousand. (§ 479.)

c. The hundreds above one hundred are declined like the plural of bonus; as,

ducentī, -ae, -a

ducentōrum, -ārum, -ōrum

etc.   etc.   etc.

330. We have already become familiar with sentences like the following:

Omnium avium aquila est vēlōcissima

Of all birds the eagle is the swiftest

Hoc ōrāculum erat omnium clārissimum

This oracle was the most famous of all

In such sentences the genitive denotes the whole, and the word it modifies denotes a part of that whole. Such a genitive, denoting the whole of which a part is taken, is called a partitive genitive.

331. RULE. Partitive Genitive. Words denoting a part are often used with the genitive of the whole, known as the partitive genitive.

a. Words denoting a part are especially pronouns, numerals, and other adjectives. But cardinal numbers excepting mīlle regularly take the ablative with ex or dē instead of the partitive genitive.

b. Mīlle, a thousand, in the singular is usually an indeclinable adjective (as, mīlle mīlitēs, a thousand soldiers), but in the plural it is a declinable noun and takes the partitive genitive (as, decem mīlia mīlitum, ten thousand soldiers).

EXAMPLES:

Fortissimī hōrum sunt Germānī

The bravest of these are the Germans

Decem mīlia hostium interfecta sunt

Ten thousand (lit. thousands) of the enemy were slain

Ūna ex captīvīs erat soror rēgis

One of the captives was the king’s sister

332.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 297.

I. 1. Caesar maximam partem aedificiōrum incendit. 2. Magna pars mūnītiōnis aquā flūminis dēlēta est. 3. Gallī huius regiōnis quīnque mīlia hominum coēgerant. 4. Duo ex meīs frātribus eundem rūmōrem audīvērunt. 5. Quis Rōmānōrum erat clarior Caesare? 6. Quīnque cohortēs ex illā legiōne castra quam fortissimē dēfendēbant. 7. Hic locus aberat aequō spatiō  1 ab castrīs Caesaris et castrīs Germānōrum. 8. Caesar simul atque pervēnit, plūs commeātūs ab sociīs postulāvit. 9. Nōnne mercātōrēs magnitūdinem īnsulae cognōverant? Longitūdinem sed nōn lātitūdinem cognōverant. 10. Paucī hostium obtinēbant collem quem explōrātōrēs nostrī vīdērunt.

II. 1. I have two brothers, and one of them lives at Rome. 2. Cæsar stormed that very town with three legions. 3. In one hour he destroyed a great part of the fortification. 4. When the enemy could no longer  2 defend the gates, they retreated to a hill which was not far distant.  3 5. There three thousand of them bravely resisted the Romans.  4

1. Ablative of the measure of difference.

2. Not longius. Why?

3. Latin, was distant by a small space.

4. Not the accusative.

Reading Selection

LESSON LIX

NUMERALS (Continued) · THE ACCUSATIVE OF EXTENT

333. Learn the first twenty of the ordinal numerals (§ 478). The ordinals are all declined like bonus.

334. The distributive numerals are declined like the plural of bonus. The first three are

singulī, -ae, -a, one each, one by one

bīnī, -ae, -a, two each, two by two

ternī, -ae, -a, three each, three by three

335. We have learned that, besides its use as object, the accusative is used to express space relations not covered by the ablative. We have had such expressions as per plūrimōs annōs, for a great many years; per tōtum diem, for a whole day. Here the space relation is one of extent of time. We could also say per decem pedēs, for ten feet, where the space relation is one of extent of space. While this is correct Latin, the usual form is to use the accusative with no preposition, as,

Vir tōtum diem cucurrit, the man ran for a whole day

Caesar mūrum decem pedēs mōvit, Cæsar moved the wall ten feet

336. RULE. Accusative of Extent. Duration of time and extent of space are expressed by the accusative.

a. This accusative answers the questions how long? how far?

b. Distinguish carefully between the accusative of time how long and the ablative of time when, or within which.

Select the accusatives of time and space and the ablatives of time in the following:

When did the general arrive? He arrived at two o’clock. How long had he been marching? For four days. How far did he march? He marched sixty-five miles. Where has he pitched his camp? Three miles from the river, and he will remain there several days. The wall around the camp is ten feet high. When did the war begin? In the first year after the king’s death.

337.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 298.

I. Cæsar in Gaul. Caesar bellum in Gallia septem annōs gessit. Prīmō annō Helvētiōs vīcit, et eōdem annō multae Germanōrum gentēs eī sēsē dēdidērunt. Multōs iam annōs Germānī Gallōs vexabant  1 et ducēs Germānī cōpiās suās trāns Rhēnum saepe trādūcēbant.  1 Nōn singulī veniēbant, sed multa milia hominum in Galliam contendēbant. Quā dē causā prīncipēs Galliae concilium convocāvērunt atque statuērunt legates ad Caesarem mittere. Caesar, simul atque hunc rūmōrem audīvit, cōpiās suās sine morā coēgit. Primā lūce fortiter cum Germanīs proelium commīsit. Tōtum diem ācriter pugnātum est. Caesar ipse ā dextrō cornū acicm dūxit. Magna pars exercitūs Germānī cecidit. Post magnam caedem paucī multa milia passuum ad flūmen fūgērunt.

II. 1. Cæsar pitched camp two miles from the river. 2. He fortified the camp with a ditch fifteen feet wide and a rampart nine feet high. 3. The camp of the enemy was a great way off (was distant by a great space). 4. On the next day he hastened ten miles in three hours. 5. Suddenly the enemy with all their forces made an attack upon (in with acc.) the rear. 6. For two hours the Romans were hard pressed by the barbarians. 7. In three hours the barbarians were fleeing.

1. Translate as if pluperfect.

Reading Selection

LESSON LX

DEPONENT VERBS

338. A number of verbs are passive in form but active in meaning; as, hortor, I encourage; vereor, I fear. Such verbs are called deponent because they have laid aside (dē-pōnere, to lay aside) the active forms.

a. Besides having all the forms of the passive, deponent verbs have also the future active infinitive and a few other active forms which will be noted later. (Sec§§ 375, 403.b.)

339. The principal parts of deponents are of course passive in form, as,

Conj. I

hortor, hortārī, hortātus sum, encourage

Conj. II

vereor, verērī, veritus sum, fear

Conj. III

(a  )

sequor, sequī, secūtus sum, follow

(b  )

patior, patī, passus sum, suffer, allow

Conj. IV

partior, partīrī, partītus sum, share, divide

Learn the synopses of these verbs. (See § 493.) Patior is conjugated like the passive of capiō (§ 492).

340. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE

The prepositions with the accusative that occur most frequently are

ante, before

apud, among

circum, around

contrā, against, contrary to

extrā, outside of

in, into, in, against, upon

inter, between, among

intrā, within

ob, on account of (quam ob rem, wherefore, therefore)

per, through, by means of

post, after, behind

propter, on account of, because of

trāns, across, over

a. Most of these you have had before. Review the old ones and learn the new ones. Review the list of prepositions governing the ablative, § 209.

341.             EXERCISES

First learn the special vocabulary, p. 298.

I. 1. Trēs ex lēgātīs, contrā Caesaris opīniōnem, iter facere per hostium fīnīs verēbantur. 2. Quis eōs hortātus est? Imperātor eōs hortātus est et iīs persuādēre cōnātus est, sed nōn potuit. 3. Quid lēgātōs perterruit? Aut timor hostium, quī undique premēbant, aut longitūdō viae eōs perterruit. 4. Tamen omnēs ferē Caesarem multō magis quam hostīs veritī sunt. 5. Fortissimae gentēs Galliae ex Germānīs oriēbantur. 6. Quam ob rem tam fortēs erant? Quia nec vīnum nec alia quae virtūtem dēlent ad sē portārī patiēbantur. 7. Caesar ex mercātōribus dē īnsulā Britanniā quaesīvit, sed nihil cognōscere potuit. 8. Itaque ipse statuit hanc terram petere, et mediā ferē aestāte cum multīs nāvibus longīs profectus est. 9. Magnā celeritāte iter confēcit et in opportūnissimō locō ēgressus est. 10. Barbarī summīs vīribus eum ab īnsulā prohibēre cōnātī sunt. 11. Ille autem barbarōs multa mīlia passuum īnsecūtus est; tamen sine equitātū eōs cōnsequī nōn potuit.

II. 1. Contrary to our expectation, the enemy fled and the cavalry followed close after them. 2. From all parts of the multitude the shouts arose of those who were being wounded. 3. Cæsar did not allow the cavalry to pursue too far.  1 4. The cavalry set out at the first hour and was returning  2 to camp at the fourth hour. 5. Around the Roman camp was a rampart twelve feet high. 6. Cæsar will delay three days because of the grain supply. 7. Nearly all the lieutenants feared the enemy and attempted to delay the march.

1. Comparative of longē.

2. Will this be a deponent or an active form?

Seventh Review, Lessons LIII-LX, §§ 524-526

PART III

CONSTRUCTIONS

INTRODUCTORY NOTE

The preceding part of this book has been concerned chiefly with forms and vocabulary. There remain still to be learned the forms of the Subjunctive Mood, the Participles, and the Gerund of the regular verb, and the conjugation of the commoner irregular verbs. These will be taken up in connection with the study of constructions, which will be the chief subject of our future work. The special vocabularies of the preceding lessons contain, exclusive of proper names, about six hundred words. As these are among the commonest words in the language, they must be mastered. They properly form the basis of the study of words, and will be reviewed and used with but few additions in the remaining lessons.

For practice in reading and to illustrate the constructions presented, a continued story has been prepared and may be begun at this point (see p. 204). It has been divided into chapters of convenient length to accompany progress through the lessons, but may be read with equal profit after the lessons are finished. The story gives an account of the life and adventures of Publius Cornelius Lentulus, a Roman boy, who fought in Cæsar’s campaigns and shared in his triumph. The colored plates illustrating the story are faithful representations of ancient life and are deserving of careful study.

Reading Selection

LESSON LXI

THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD

342. In addition to the indicative, imperative, and infinitive moods, which you have learned, Latin has a fourth mood called the subjunctive. The tenses of the subjunctive are

PRESENT

IMPERFECT

PERFECT

PLUPERFECT

ACTIVE AND PASSIVE

343. The tenses of the subjunctive have the same time values as the corresponding tenses of the indicative, and, in addition, each of them may refer to future time. No meanings of the tenses will be given in the paradigms, as the translation varies with the construction used.

344. The present subjunctive is inflected as follows:

CONJ.   I

CONJ.   II

CONJ.   III

CONJ.   IV

ACTIVE VOICE

SINGULAR

1. a´mem

mo´neam

re´gam

ca´piam

au´diam

2. a´mēs

mo´neās

re´gās

ca´piās

au´diās

3. a´met

mo´neat

re´gat

ca´piat

au´diat

PLURAL

1. amē´mus

moneā´mus

regā´mus

capiā´mus

audiā´mus

2. amē´tis

moneā´tis

regā´tis

capiā´tis

audiā´tis

3. a´ment

mo´neant

re´gant

ca´piant

au´diant

PASSIVE VOICE

SINGULAR

1. a´mer

mo´near

re´gar

ca´piar

au´diar

2. amē´ris (-re  )

moneā´ris (-re  )

regā´ris (-re  )

capiā´ris (-re  )

audiā´ris (-re  )

3. amē´tur

moneā´tur

regā´tur

capiā´tur

audiā´tur

PLURAL

1. amē´mur

moneā´mur

regā´mur

capiā´mur

audiā´mur

2. amē´minī

moneā´minī

regā´minī

capiā´minī

audiā´minī

3. amen´tur

monean´tur

regan´tur

capian´tur

audian´tur

a. The present subjunctive is formed from the present stem.

b. The mood sign of the present subjunctive is -ē- in the first conjugation and -ā- in the others. It is shortened in the usual places (cf. § 12), and takes the place of the final vowel of the stem in the first and third conjugations, but not in the second and fourth.

c. The personal endings are the same as in the indicative.

d. In a similar way inflect the present subjunctive of cūrō, iubeō, sūmō, iaciō, mūniō.

345. The present subjunctive of the irregular verb sum is inflected as follows:

SING.

1. sim

2. sīs

3. sit

PLUR.

1. sīmus

2. sītis

3. sint

346. The Indicative and Subjunctive Compared. 1. The two most important of the finite moods are the indicative and the subjunctive. The indicative deals with facts either real or assumed. If, then, we wish to assert something as a fact or to inquire after a fact, we use the indicative.

2. On the other hand, if we wish to express a desire or wish, a purpose, a possibility, an expectation, or some such notion, we must use the subjunctive. The following sentences illustrate the difference between the indicative and the subjunctive ideas.

INDICATIVE IDEAS

SUBJUNCTIVE IDEAS

1.

He is brave

Fortis est

1.

May he be brave

Fortis sit (idea of wishing)

2.

We set out at once

Statim proficīscimur

2.

Let us set out at once

Statim proficīscāmur (idea of willing)

3.

You hear him every day

Cotīdiē eum audīs

3.

You can hear him every day

Cotīdiē eum audiās (idea of possibility)

4.

He remained until the ship arrived

Mānsit dum nāvis pervēnit

4.

He waited until the ship should arrive

Exspectāvit dum nāvis pervenīret  1 (idea of expectation)

5.

Cæsar sends men who find the bridge

Caesar mittit hominēs quī pontem reperiunt

5.

Cæsar sends men who are to find (or to find) the bridge

Caesar hominēs mittit quī pontem reperiant (idea of purpose)

1. pervenīret, imperfect subjunctive.

NOTE. From the sentences above we observe that the subjunctive may be used in either independent or dependent clauses; but it is far more common in the latter than in the former.

347.             EXERCISE

Which verbs in the following paragraph would be in the indicative and which in the subjunctive in a Latin translation?

There have been times in the history of our country when you might be proud of being an American citizen. Do you remember the day when Dewey sailed into Manila Bay to capture or destroy the enemy’s fleet? You might have seen the admiral standing on the bridge calmly giving his orders. He did not even wait until the mines should be removed from the harbor’s mouth, but sailed in at once. Let us not despair of our country while such valor exists, and may the future add new glories to the past.

Reading Selection

LESSON LXII

THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF PURPOSE

348. Observe the sentence

Caesar hominēs mittit quī pontem reperiant,

Cæsar sends men to find the bridge

The verb reperiant in the dependent clause is in the subjunctive because it tells us what Cæsar wants the men to do; in other words, it expresses his will and the purpose in his mind. Such a use of the subjunctive is called the subjunctive of purpose.

349. RULE. Subjunctive of Purpose. The subjunctive is used in a dependent clause to express the purpose of the action in the principal clause.

350. A clause of purpose is introduced as follows:

I. If something is wanted, by

quī, the relative pronoun (as above)

ut, conj., in order that, that

quō (abl. of quī, by which), in order that, that, used when the purpose clause contains a comparative. The ablative quō expresses the measure of difference. (Cf. § 317.)

II. If something is not wanted, by

nē, conj., in order that not, that not, lest

351.             EXAMPLES

1.

Caesar cōpiās cōgit quibus hostīs īnsequātur

Cæsar collects troops with which to pursue the foe

2.

Pācem petunt ut domum revertantur

They ask for peace in order that they may return home

3.

Pontem faciunt quō facilius oppidum capiant

They build a bridge that they may take the town more easily (lit. by which the more easily)

4.

Fugiunt nē vulnerentur

They flee that they may not (or lest they) be wounded

352. Expression of Purpose in English. In English, purpose clauses are sometimes introduced by that or in order that, but much more frequently purpose is expressed in English by the infinitive, as We eat to live, She stoops to conquer. In Latin prose, on the other hand, purpose is never expressed by the infinitive. Be on your guard and do not let the English idiom betray you into this error.

353.             EXERCISES

I.

1. Veniunt ut

dūcant, mittant, videant, audiant, dūcantur, mittantur, videantur, audiantur.

2. Fugimus nē

capiāmur, trādāmur, videāmus, necēmur, rapiāmur, resistāmus.

3. Mittit nūntiōs quī

dicant, audiant, veniant, nārrent, audiantur, in conciliō sedeant.

4. Castra mūniunt quō facilius

sēsē dēfendant, impetum sustineant, hostīs vincant, salūtem petant.

II. 1. The Helvetii send ambassadors to seek  1 peace. 2. They are setting out at daybreak in order that they may make a longer march before night. 3. They will hide the women in the forest (acc. with in) that they may not be captured. 4. The Gauls wage many wars to free  1 their fatherland from slavery. 5. They will resist the Romans  2 bravely lest they be destroyed.

1. Not infinitive.

2. Not accusative.

Reading Selection

LESSON LXIII

INFLECTION OF THE IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE THE SEQUENCE OF TENSES

354. The imperfect subjunctive may be formed by adding the personal endings to the present active infinitive.

CONJ.   I

CONJ.   II

CONJ.   III

CONJ.   IV

ACTIVE

1. amā´rem

monē´rem

re´gerem

ca´perem

audī´rem

2. amā´rēs

monē´rēs

re´gerēs

ca´perēs

audī´rēs

3. amā´ret

monē´ret

re´geret

ca´peret

audī´ret

1. amārē´mus

monērē´mus

regerē´mus

caperē´mus

audīrē´mus

2. amārē´tis

monērē´tis

regerē´tis

caperē´tis

audīrē´tis

3. amā´rent

monē´rent

re´gerent

ca´perent

audī´rent

PASSIVE

1. amā´rer

monē´rer

re´gerer

ca´perer

audī´rer

2. amārē´ris(-re)

monērē´ris(-re)

regerē´ris(-re)

caperē´ris(-re)

audīrē´ris(-re)

3. amārē´tur

monērē´tur

regerē´tur

caperē´tur

audīrē´tur

1. amārē´mur

monērē´mur

regerē´mur

caperē´mur

audīrē´mur

2. amārē´minī

monērē´minī

regerē´minī

caperē´minī

audīrē´minī

3. amāren´tur

monēren´tur

regeren´tur

caperen´tur

audīren´tur

a. In a similar way inflect the imperfect subjunctive, active and passive, of cūrō, iubeō, sūmō, iaciō, mūniō.

355. The imperfect subjunctive of the irregular verb sum is inflected as follows:

SING.

1. es´sem

PLUR.

1. essē´mus

2. es´sēs

2. essē´tis

3. es´set

3. es´sent

356. The three great distinctions of time are present, past, and future. All tenses referring to present or future time are called primary tenses, and those referring to past time are called secondary tenses. Now it is a very common law of language that in a complex sentence the tense in the dependent clause should be of the same kind as the tense in the principal clause. In the sentence He says that he is coming, the principal verb, says, is present, that is, is in a primary tense; and is coming, in the dependent clause, is naturally also primary. If I change he says to he said,—in other words, if I make the principal verb secondary in character,—I feel it natural to change the verb in the dependent clause also, and I say, He said that he was coming. This following of a tense by another of the same kind is called tense sequence, from sequī, “to follow.”

In Latin the law of tense sequence is obeyed with considerable regularity, especially when an indicative in the principal clause is followed by a subjunctive in the dependent clause. Then a primary tense of the indicative is followed by a primary tense of the subjunctive, and a secondary tense of the indicative is followed by a secondary tense of the subjunctive. Learn the following table:

357.             TABLE FOR SEQUENCE OF TENSES

PRINCIPAL VERB IN THE

INDICATIVE

DEPENDENT VERBS IN THE SUBJUNCTIVE

Incomplete or

Continuing Action

Completed Action

P

R

I

M

A

R

Y

Present

Future

Future perfect

Present

Perfect

S

E

C

O

N

D

A

R

Y

Imperfect

Perfect

Pluperfect

Imperfect

Pluperfect

358. RULE. Sequence of Tenses. Primary tenses are followed by primary tenses and secondary by secondary.

359.             EXAMPLES

I. Primary tenses in principal and dependent clauses:

Mittit

Mittet

Mīserit

hominēs ut agrōs vāstent

He

sends

will send

will have sent

men

that they may

in order to

to

lay waste the fields

II. Secondary tenses in principal and dependent clauses:

Mittēbat

Mīsit

Mīserat

hominēs ut agrōs vāstārent

He

was sending

sent or has sent

had sent

men

that they might

in order to

to

lay waste the fields

360.             EXERCISES

I.

1. Vēnerant ut

dūcerent, mitterent, vidērent, audīrent, dūcerentur, mitterentur, vidērentur, audirentur

2. Fugiēbat nē

caperētur, trāderētur, vidērētur, necārētur, raperētur, resiteret.

3. Misit nūntiōs quī

dīcerent, audīrent, venīrent, nārrārent, audīrentur, in conciliō sedērent.

4. Castra mūnīvērunt quō facilius

sēsē dēfenderent, impetum sustinērent, hostīs vincerent, salūtem peterent.

II. 1. Cæsar encouraged the soldiers in order that they might fight more bravely. 2. The Helvetii left their homes to wage war. 3. The scouts set out at once lest they should be captured by the Germans. 4. Cæsar inflicted punishment on them in order that the others might be more terrified. 5. He sent messengers to Rome to announce the victory.

Reading Selection

LESSON LXIV

THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES OF PURPOSE

361. The perfect and the pluperfect subjunctive active are inflected as follows:

CONJ.   I

CONJ.   II

CONJ.   III

CONJ.   IV

PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE ACTIVE

SINGULAR

1. amā´verim

monu´erim

rē´xerim

cē´perim

audī´verim

2. amā´veris

monu´eris

rē´xeris

cē´peris

audī´veris

3. amā´verit

monu´erit

rē´xerit

cē´perit

audī´verit

PLURAL

1. amāve´rimus

monue´rimus

rēxe´rimus

cēpe´rimus

audīve´rimus

2. amāve´ritis

monue´ritis

rēxe´ritis

cēpe´ritis

audīve´ritis

3. amā´verint

monu´erint

rē´xerint

cē´perint

audī´verint

PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE ACTIVE

SINGULAR

1. amāvis´sem

monuis´sem

rēxis´sem

cēpis´sem

audīvis´sem

2. amāvis´sēs

monuis´sēs

rēxis´sēs

cēpis´sēs

audīvis´sēs

3. amāvis´set

monuis´set

rēxis´set

cēpis´set

audīvis´set

PLURAL

1. amāvissē´mus

monuissē´mus

rēxissē´mus

cēpissē´mus

audīvissē´mus

2. amāvissē´tis

monuissē´tis

rēxissē´tis

cēpissē´tis

audīvissē´tis

3. amāvis´sent

monuis´sent

rēxis´sent

cēpis´sent

audīvis´sent

a. Observe that these two tenses, like the corresponding ones in the indicative, are formed from the perfect stem.

b. Observe that the perfect subjunctive active is like the future perfect indicative active, excepting that the first person singular ends in -m and not in -ō.

c. Observe that the pluperfect subjunctive active may be formed by adding -issem, -issēs, etc. to the perfect stem.

d. In a similar way inflect the perfect and pluperfect subjunctive active of cūrō, iubeō, sūmō, iaciō, mūniō.

362. The passive of the perfect subjunctive is formed by combining the perfect passive participle with sim, the present subjunctive of sum.

CONJ.   I

CONJ.   II

CONJ.   III

CONJ.   IV

PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE PASSIVE

SINGULAR

1. amā´tus sim

mo´nitus sim

rēc´tus sim

cap´tus sim

audī´tus sim

2. amā´tus sīs

mo´nitus sīs

rēc´tus sīs

cap´tus sīs

audī´tus sīs

3. amā´tus sit

mo´nitus sit

rēc´tus sit

cap´tus sit

audī´tus sit

PLURAL

1. amā´tī sīmus

mo´nitī sīmus

rēc´tī sīmus

cap´tī sīmus

audī´tī sīmus

2. amā´tī sītis

mo´nitī sītis

rēc´tī sītis

cap´tī sītis

audī´tī sītis

3. amā´tī sint

mo´nitī sint

rēc´tī sint

cap´tī sint

audī´tī sint

363. The passive of the pluperfect subjunctive is formed by combining the perfect passive participle with essem, the imperfect subjunctive of sum.

CONJ.   I

CONJ.   II

CONJ.   III

CONJ.   IV

PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE PASSIVE

SINGULAR

1. amātus essem

monitus essem

rēctus essem

captus essem

audītus essem

2. amātus essēs

monitus essēs

rēctus essēs

captus essēs

audītus essēs

3. amātus esset

monitus esset

rēctus esset

captus esset

audītus esset

PLURAL

1. amātī essēmus

monitī essēmus

rēctī essēmus

captī essēmus

audītī essēmus

2. amātī essētis

monitī essētis

rēctī essētis

captī essētis

audītī essētis

3. amātī essent

monitī essent

rēctī essent

captī essent

audītī essent

a. In a similar way inflect the perfect and pluperfect subjunctive passive of cūrō, iubeō, sūmō, iaciō, mūniō.

364. The perfect and pluperfect subjunctive of the irregular verb sum are inflected as follows:

PERFECT

PLUPERFECT

fu´erim

fue´rimus

fuis´sem

fuissē´mus

fu´eris

fue´ritis

fuis´sēs

fuissē´tis

fu´erit

fu´erint

fuis´set

fuis´sent

365. A substantive clause is a clause used like a noun, as,

That the men are afraid is clear enough (clause as subject)

He ordered   them to call on him (clause as object)

We have already had many instances of infinitive clauses used in this way (cf. § 213), and have noted the similarity between Latin and English usage in this respect. But the Latin often uses the subjunctive in substantive clauses, and this marks an important difference between the two languages.

366. RULE. Substantive Clauses of Purpose. A substantive clause of purpose with the subjunctive is used as the object of verbs of commanding, urging, asking, persuading, or advising, where in English we should usually have the infinitive.

EXAMPLES

1.

The general ordered the soldiers to run

Imperātor mīlitibus imperāvit ut currerent

2.

He urged them to resist bravely

Hortātus est ut fortiter resisterent

3.

He asked them to give the children food

Petīvit ut līberīs cibum darent

4.

He will persuade us not to set out

Nōbīs persuādēbit nē proficīscāmur

5.

He advises us to remain at home

Monet ut domī maneāmus

a. The object clauses following these verbs all express the purpose or will of the principal subject that something be done or not done. (Cf. § 348.)

367. The following verbs are used with object clauses of purpose. Learn the list and the principal parts of the new ones.

hortor, urge

imperō, order (with the dative of the person ordered and a subjunctive clause of the thing ordered done)

moneō, advise

petō, quaerō, rogō, ask, seek

persuādeō, persuade (with the same construction as imperō)

postulō, demand, require

suādeō, advise (cf. persuādeō)

N.B. Remember that iubeō, order, takes the infinitive as in English. (Cf. § 213. 1.) Compare the sentences

Iubeō eum venīre, I order him to come

Imperō eī ut veniat, I give orders to him that he is to come

We ordinarily translate both of these sentences like the first, but the difference in meaning between iubeō and imperō in the Latin requires the infinitive in the one case and the subjunctive in the other.

368.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Petit atque hortātur ut ipse dīcat. 2. Caesar Helvētiīs imperāvit nē per prōvinciam iter facerent. 3. Caesar nōn iussit Helvētiōs per prōvinciam iter facere. 4. Ille cīvibus persuāsit ut dē fīnibus suīs discēderent. 5. Caesar prīncipēs monēbit nē proelium committant. 6. Postulāvit nē cum Helvētiīs aut cum eōrum sociīs bellum gererent. 7. Ab iīs quaesīvī nē proficīscerentur. 8. Iīs persuādēre nōn potuī ut domī manērent.

II. 1. Who ordered Cæsar to make the march? (Write this sentence both with imperō and with iubeō.) 2. The faithless scouts persuaded him to set out at daybreak. 3. They will ask him not to inflict punishment. 4. He demanded that they come to the camp. 5. He advised them to tell everything (omnia).

NOTE. Do not forget that the English infinitive expressing purpose must be rendered by a Latin subjunctive. Review § 352.

Reading Selection

LEGIO ITER FACIT

LESSON LXV

THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF POSSUM · VERBS OF FEARING

369. Learn the subjunctive of possum (§ 495), and note especially the position of the accent.

370. Subjunctive after Verbs of Fearing. We have learned that what we want done or not done is expressed in Latin by a subjunctive clause of purpose. In this class belong also clauses after verbs of fearing, for we fear either that something will happen or that it will not, and we either want it to happen or we do not. If we want a thing to happen and fear that it will not, the purpose clause is introduced by ut. If we do not want it to happen and fear that it will, nē is used. Owing to a difference between the English and Latin idiom we translate ut after a verb of fearing by that not, and nē by that or lest.

371.             EXAMPLES

timeō

timēbō

timuerō

ut

veniat

vēnerit

I fear, shall fear, shall have feared, that he will not come, has not come

timēbam

timuī

timueram

ut

venīret

vēnisset

I was fearing, feared, had feared, that he would not come, had not come

The same examples with nē instead of ut would be translated I fear that or lest he will come, has come, etc.

372. RULE. Subjunctive after Verbs of Fearing. Verbs of fearing are followed by a substantive clause of purpose introduced by ut (that not) or nē (that or lest).

373.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Caesar verēbātur ut supplicium captīvōrum Gallīs placēret. 2. Rōmānī ipsī magnopere verēbantur nē Helvētiī iter per prōvinciam facerent. 3. Timēbant ut satis reī frūmentāriae mittī posset. 4. Vereor ut hostium impetum sustinēre possim. 5. Timuit nē impedīmenta ab hostibus capta essent. 6. Caesar numquam timuit nē legiōnēs vincerentur. 7. Legiōnēs pugnāre nōn timuērunt.  1

1. Distinguish between what one is afraid to do (complementary infinitive as here) and what one is afraid will take place or has taken place (substantive clause with the subjunctive).

II. 1. We fear that they are not coming. 2. We fear lest they are coming. 3. We feared that they had come. 4. We feared that they had not come. 5. They feared greatly that the camp could not be defended. 6. Almost all feared  1 to leave the camp.

Reading Selection

LESSON LXVI

THE PARTICIPLES

374. The Latin verb has the following Participles:  1

CONJ.   I

CONJ.   II

CONJ.   III

CONJ.   IV

ACTIVE

PRESENT

amāns

loving

monēns

advising

regēns

ruling

capiēns

taking

audiēns

hearing

FUTURE

amātūrus

about to love

monitūrus

about to advise

rēctūrus

about to rule

captūrus

about to take

audītūrus

about to hear

PASSIVE

PERFECT

amātus

loved, having been loved

monitus

advised, having been advised

rēctus

ruled, having been ruled

captus

taken, having been taken

audītus

heard, having been heard

FUTURE    2

amandus

to be loved

monendus

to be advised

regendus

to be ruled

capiendus

to be taken

audiendus

to be heard

1. Review § 203.

2. The future passive participle is often called the gerundive.

a. The present active and future passive participles are formed from the present stem, and the future active and perfect passive participles are formed from the participial stem.

b. The present active participle is formed by adding -ns to the present stem. In -iō verbs of the third conjugation, and in the fourth conjugation, the stem is modified by the addition of -ē-, as capi-ē-ns, audi-ē-ns. It is declined like an adjective of one ending of the third declension. (Cf. § 256.)

amāns, loving

BASE amant-

STEM amanti-

SINGULAR

PLURAL

MASC. AND FEM.

NEUT.

MASC. AND FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

amāns

amāns

amantēs

amantia

Gen.

amantis

amantis

amantium

amantium

Dat.

amantī

amantī

amantibus

amantibus

Acc.

amantem

amāns

amantīs or -ēs

amantia

Abl.

amantī or -e

amantī or -e

amantibus

amantibus

(1) When used as an adjective the ablative singular ends in -ī; when used as a participle or as a substantive, in -e.

(2) In a similar way decline monēns, regēns, capiēns, audiēns.

c. The future active participle is formed by adding -ūrus to the base of the participial stem. We have already met this form combined with esse to produce the future active infinitive. (Cf. § 206.)

d. For the perfect passive participle see § 201. The future passive participle or gerundive is formed by adding -ndus to the present stem.

e. All participles in -us are declined like bonus.

f. Participles agree with nouns or pronouns like adjectives.

g. Give all the participles of the following verbs: cūrō, iubeō, sūmō, iaciō, mūniō.

375. Participles of Deponent Verbs. Deponent verbs have the participles of the active voice as well as of the passive; consequently every deponent verb has four participles, as,

Pres. Act.

hortāns, urging

Fut. Act.

hortātūrus, about to urge

Perf. Pass.    (in form)

hortātus, having urged

Fut. Pass. (Gerundive   )

hortandus, to be urged

a. Observe that the perfect participle of deponent verbs is passive in form but active in meaning. No other verbs have a perfect active participle. On the other hand, the future passive participle of deponent verbs is passive in meaning as in other verbs.

b. Give the participles of cōnor, vereor, sequor, patior, partior.

376. Tenses of the Participle. The tenses express time as follows:

1. The present active participle corresponds to the English present active participle in -ing, but can be used only of an action occurring at the same time as the action of the main verb; as, mīlitēs īnsequentēs cēpērunt multōs, the soldiers, while pursuing, captured many. Here the pursuing and the capturing are going on together.

2. The perfect participle (excepting of deponents) is regularly passive and corresponds to the English past participle with or without the auxiliary having been; as, audītus, heard or having been heard.

3. The future active participle, translated about to, etc., denotes time after the action of the main verb.

377. Review §§ 203, 204, and, note the following model sentences:

1. Mīlitēs currentēs erant dēfessī, the soldiers who were running (lit. running) were weary.

2. Caesar profectūrus Rōmam nōn exspectāvit, Cæsar, when about to set out (lit. about to set out) for Rome, did not wait.

3. Oppidum captum vīdimus, we saw the town which had been captured (lit. captured town).

4. Imperātor trīduum morātus profectus est, the general, since (when, or after) he had delayed (lit. the general, having delayed) three days, set out.

5. Mīlitēs vīctī terga nōn vertērunt, the soldiers, though they were conquered (lit. the soldiers conquered), did not retreat.

In each of these sentences the literal translation of the participle is given in parentheses. We note, however, that its proper translation usually requires a clause beginning with some conjunction (when, since, after, though, etc.), or a relative clause. Consider, in each case, what translation will best bring out the thought, and do not, as a rule, translate the participle literally.

378.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Puer timēns nē capiātur fugit. 2. Aquila īrā commōta avīs reliquās interficere cōnāta erat. 3. Mīlitēs ab hostibus pressī tēla iacere nōn potuērunt. 4. Caesar decimam legiōnem laudātūrus ad prīmum agmen prōgressus est. 5. Imperātor hortātus equitēs ut fortiter pugnārent signum proeliō dedit. 6. Mīlitēs hostīs octō milia passuum īnsecūtī multīs cum captīvīs ad castra revertērunt. 7. Sōl oriēns multōs interfectōs vīdit. 8. Rōmānī cōnsilium audāx suspicātī barbaris sēsē nōn commīsērunt. 9. Nāvis ē portū ēgressa nūllō in perīculō erat.

II.  3 1. The army was in very great danger while marching through the enemy’s country. 2. Frightened by the length of the way, they longed for home. 3. When the scouts were about to set out, they heard the shouts of victory. 4. When we had delayed many days, we set fire to the buildings and departed. 5. While living at Rome I heard orators much better than these. 6. The soldiers who are fighting across the river are no braver than we.

3. In this exercise use participles for the subordinate clauses.

Reading Selection

LESSON LXVII

THE IRREGULAR VERBS VOLŌ, NŌLŌ, MĀLŌ · THE ABLATIVE WITH A PARTICIPLE, OR ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE

379. Learn the principal parts and conjugation of volō, wish; nōlō (ne + volō), be unwilling; mālō (magis + volō), be more willing, prefer (§ 497). Note the irregularities in the present indicative, subjunctive, and infinitive, and in the imperfect subjunctive. (Cf. § 354.)

a. These verbs are usually followed by the infinitive with or without a subject accusative; as, volunt venīre, they wish to come; volunt amīcōs venīre, they wish their friends to come. The English usage is the same.  1

1. Sometimes the subjunctive of purpose is used after these verbs. (See § 366.)

380. Observe the following sentences:

1. Magistrō laudante omnēs puerī dīligenter labōrant, with the teacher praising, or since the teacher praises, or the teacher praising, all the boys labor diligently.

2. Caesare dūcente nēmō prōgredī timet, with Cæsar leading, or when Cæsar leads, or if Cæsar leads, or Cæsar leading, no one fears to advance.

3. Hīs rēbus cognitīs mīlitēs fūgērunt, when this was known, or since this was known, or these things having been learned, the soldiers fled.

4. Proeliō commissō multī vulnerātī sunt, after the battle had begun, or when the battle had begun, or the battle having been joined, many were wounded.

a. One of the fundamental ablative relations is expressed in English by the preposition with (cf. § 50). In each of the sentences above we have a noun and a participle in agreement in the ablative, and the translation shows that in each instance the ablative expresses attendant circumstance. For example, in the first sentence the circumstance attending or accompanying the diligent labor of the boys is the praise of the teacher. This is clearly a with relation, and the ablative is the case to use.

b. We observe, further, that the ablative and its participle are absolutely independent grammatically of the rest of the sentence. If we were to express the thought in English in a similar way, we should use the nominative independent or absolute. In Latin the construction is called the Ablative Absolute, or the Ablative with a Participle. This form of expression is exceedingly common in Latin, but rather rare in English, so we must not, as a rule, employ the English absolute construction to translate the ablative abolute. The attendant circumstance may be one of time (when or after), or one of cause (since), or one of concession (though), or one of condition (if). In each case try to discover the precise relation, and translate the ablative and its participle by a clause which will best express the thought.

381. RULE. Ablative Absolute. The ablative of a noun or pronoun with a present or perfect participle in agreement is used to express attendant circumstance.

NOTE 1. The verb sum has no present participle. In consequence we often find two nouns or a noun and an adjective in the ablative absolute with no participle expressed; as, tē duce, you (being) leader, with you as leader; patre īnfirmō, my father (being) weak.

NOTE 2. Be very careful not to put in the ablative absolute a noun and participle that form the subject or object of a sentence. Compare

a. The Gauls, having been conquered by Cæsar, returned home

b. The Gauls having been conquered by Cæsar, the army returned home

In a the subject is The Gauls having been conquered by Cæsar, and we translate,

Gallī ā Caesare victi domum revertērunt

In b the subject is the army. The Gauls having been conquered by Cæsar is nominative absolute in English, which requires the ablative absolute in Latin, and we translate,

Gallīs ā Caesare victīs exercitus domum revertit

NOTE 3. The fact that only deponent verbs have a perfect active participle (cf. § 375. a) often compels a change of voice when translating from one language to the other. For example, we can translate Cæsar having encouraged the legions just as it stands, because hortor is a deponent verb. But if we wish to say Cæsar having conquered the Gauls, we have to change the voice of the participle to the passive because vincō is not deponent, and say, the Gauls having been conquered by Cæsar (see translation above).

382.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Māvīs, nōn vīs, vultis, nōlumus. 2. Ut nōlit, ut vellēmus, ut mālit. 3. Nōlī, velle, nōluisse, mālle. 4. Vult, māvultis, ut nōllet, nōlīte. 5. Sōle oriente, avēs cantāre incēpērunt. 6. Clāmōribus audītīs, barbarī prōgredī recūsābant. 7. Caesare legiōnēs hortātō, mīlitēs paulō fortius pugnāvērunt. 8. Hīs rēbus cognitīs, Helvētiī fīnitimīs persuāsērunt ut sēcum iter facerent. 9. Labōribus cōnfectīs, mīlitēs ā Caesare quaerēbant ut sibi praemia daret. 10. Conciliō convocātō, prīncipēs ita respondērunt. 11. Dux plūrīs diēs in Helvētiōrum fīnibus morāns multōs vīcōs incendit. 12. Magnitūdine Germānōrum cognitā, quīdam ex Rōmānis timēbant. 13. Mercātōribus rogātīs, Caesar nihilō plūs reperīre potuit.

II. 1. He was unwilling, lest they prefer, they have wished. 2. You prefer, that they might be unwilling, they wish. 3. We wish, they had preferred, that he may prefer. 4. Cæsar, when he heard the rumor (the rumor having been heard), commanded (imperāre) the legions to advance more quickly. 5. Since Cæsar was leader, the men were willing to make the journey. 6. A few, terrified  2 by the reports which they had heard, preferred to remain at home. 7. After these had been left behind, the rest hastened as quickly as possible. 8. After Cæsar had undertaken the business (Cæsar, the business having been undertaken), he was unwilling to delay longer.  3

2. Would the ablative absolute be correct here?

3. Not longius. Why?

Reading Selection

LESSON LXVIII

THE IRREGULAR VERB FĪŌ · THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF RESULT

383. The verb fīō, be made, happen, serves as the passive of faciō, make, in the present system. The rest of the verb is formed regularly from faciō. Learn the principal parts and conjugation (§ 500). Observe that the i is long except before -er and in fit.

a. The compounds of facio with prepositions usually form the passive regularly, as,

Active

cōnficiō, cōnficere, cōnfēcī, cōnfectus

Passive

cōnficior, cōnficī, cōnfectus sum

384. Observe the following sentences:

1. Terror erat tantus ut omnēs fugerent, the terror was so great that all fled.

2. Terror erat tantus ut nōn facile mīlitēs sēsē reciperent, the terror was so great that the soldiers did not easily recover themselves.

3. Terror fēcit ut omnēs fugerent, terror caused all to flee (lit. made that all fled).

a. Each of these sentences is complex, containing a principal clause and a subordinate clause.

b. The principal clause names a cause and the subordinate clause states the consequence or result of this cause.

c. The subordinate clause has its verb in the subjunctive, though it is translated like an indicative. The construction is called the subjunctive of consequence or result, and the clause is called a consecutive or result clause.

d. In the last example the clause of result is the object of the verb fēcit.

e. The conjunction introducing the consecutive or result clause is ut = so that; negative, ut nōn = so that not.

385. RULE. Subjunctive of Result. Consecutive clauses of result are introduced by ut or ut nōn and have the verb in the subjunctive.

386. RULE. Object clauses of result with ut or ut nōn are found after verbs of effecting or bringing about.

387. Purpose and Result Clauses Compared. There is great similarity in the expression of purpose and of result in Latin. If the sentence is affirmative, both purpose and result clauses may be introduced by ut; but if the sentence is negative, the purpose clause has nē and the result clause ut nōn. Result clauses are often preceded in the main clause by such words as tam, ita, sic (so), and these serve to point them out. Compare

a.

Tam graviter vulnerātus est ut caperētur

He was so severely wounded that he was captured

b.

Graviter vulnerātus est ut caperētur

He was severely wounded in order that he might be captured

Which sentence contains a result clause, and how is it pointed out?

388.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Fit, fīet, ut fīat, fīēbāmus. 2. Fīō, fīēs, ut fierent, fierī, fīunt. 3. Fīētis, ut fīāmus, fīs, fīemus. 4. Mīlitēs erant tam tardī ut ante noctem in castra nōn pervenīrent. 5. Sōl facit ut omnia sint pulchra. 6. Eius modī perīcula erant ut nēmō proficīscī vellet. 7. Equitēs hostium cum equitātū nostrō in itinere contendērunt, ita tamen  1 ut nostrī omnibus in partibus superiōrēs essent. 8. Virtūs mīlitum nostrōrum fēcit ut hostēs nē ūnum quidem  2 impetum sustinērent. 9. Hominēs erant tam audācēs ut nūllō modō continērī possent. 10. Spatium erat tam parvum ut mīlitēs tēla iacere nōn facile possent. 11. Hōc proeliō factō barbarī ita perterritī sunt ut ab ultimīs gentibus lēgātī ad Caesarem mitterentur. 12. Hoc proelium factum est nē lēgātī ad Caesarem mitterentur.

1. ita tamen, with such a result however.

2. nē ... quidem, not even. The emphatic word is placed between.

II. 1. It will happen, they were being made, that it may happen. 2. It happens, he will be made, to happen. 3. They are made, we were being made, lest it happen. 4. The soldiers are so brave that they conquer. 5. The soldiers are brave in order that they may conquer. 6. The fortification was made so strong that it could not be taken. 7. The fortification was made strong in order that it might not be taken. 8. After the town was taken,  3 the townsmen feared that they would be made slaves. 9. What state is so weak that it is unwilling to defend itself?

3. Ablative absolute.

Reading Selection

LESSON LXIX

THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF CHARACTERISTIC OR DESCRIPTION · THE PREDICATE ACCUSATIVE

389. Akin to the subjunctive of consequence or result is the use of the subjunctive in clauses of characteristic or description.

This construction is illustrated in the following sentences:

1. Quis est quī suam domum nōn amet? who is there who does not love his own home?

2. Erant quī hoc facere nōllent, there were (some) who were unwilling to do this.

3. Tū nōn is es quī amīcōs trādās, you are not such a one as to, or you are not the man to, betray your friends.

4. Nihil videō quod timeam, I see nothing to fear (nothing of such as character as to fear it).

a. Each of these examples contains a descriptive relative clause which tells what kind of a person or thing the antecedent is. To express this thought the subjunctive is used. A relative clause that merely states a fact and does not describe the antecedent uses the indicative. Compare the sentences

Cæsar is the man who is leading us, Caesar est is quī nōs dūcit

(mere statement of fact, no description, with the indicative)

Cæsar is the man to lead us, Caesar est is quī nōs dūcat

(descriptive relative clause with the subjunctive)

b. Observe that in this construction a demonstrative pronoun and a relative, as is quī, are translated such a one as to, the man to.

c. In which of the following sentences would you use the indicative and in which the subjunctive?

These are not the men who did this

These are not the men to do this

390. RULE. Subjunctive of Characteristic. A relative clause with the subjunctive is often used to describe an antecedent. This is called the subjunctive of characteristic or description.

391. Observe the sentences

1. Rōmānī Caesarem cōnsulem fēcērunt, the Romans made Cæsar consul.

2.   Caesar cōnsul ā Rōmānīs factus est, Cæsar was made consul by the Romans.

a. Observe in 1 that the transitive verb fēcērunt, made, has two objects: (1) the direct object, Caesarem; (2) a second object, cōnsulem, referring to the same person as the direct object and completing the predicate. The second accusative is called a Predicate Accusative.

b. Observe in 2 that when the verb is changed to the passive both of the accusatives become nominatives, the direct object becoming the subject and the predicate accusative the predicate nominative.

392. RULE. Two Accusatives. Verbs of making, choosing, calling, showing, and the like, may take a predicate accusative along with the direct object. With the passive voice the two accusatives become nominatives.

393. The verbs commonly found with two accusatives are

creo, creāre, creāvī, creātus, choose

appellō, appellāre, appellāvī, appellātus

nōminō, nōmināre, nōmināvī, nōminātus

vocō, vocāre, vocāvī, vocātus

call

faciō, facere, fēcī, factus, make

394.             EXERCISES

I. 1. In Germāniae silvis sunt  1 multa genera ferārum quae reliquīs in locīs nōn vīsa sint. 2. Erant  1 itinera duo quibus Helvētiī domō discēdere possent. 3. Erat  1 manus nūlla, nūllum oppidum, nūllum praesidium quod sē armīs dēfenderet. 4. Tōtō frūmentō raptō, domī nihil erat quō mortem prohibēre possent. 5. Rōmānī Galbam ducem creāvērunt et summā celeritāte profectī sunt. 6. Neque erat  1 tantae multitūdinis quisquam quī morārī vellet. 7. Germānī nōn iī sunt quī adventum Caesaris vereantur. 8. Cōnsulibus occīsīs erant quī  2 vellent cum rēgem creāre. 9. Pāce factā erat nēmō quī arma trādere nōllet. 10. Inter Helvētiōs quis erat quī nōbilior illō esset?

II. 1. The Romans called the city Rome. 2. The city was called Rome by the Romans. 3. The better citizens wished to choose him king. 4. The brave soldier was not the man to run. 5. There was no one   3to call me friend. 6. These are not the men to  4 betray their friends. 7. There were (some) who called him the bravest of all.

1. Remember that when the verb sum precedes its subject it is translated there is, there are, there were, etc.

2. erant quī, there were (some) who. A wholly indefinite antecedent of quī does not need to be expressed.

3. A relative clause of characteristic or description.

4. See § 389.b.

Reading Selection

Eighth Review, Lessons LXI-LXIX, §§ 527-528

LESSON LXX

THE CONSTRUCTIONS WITH THE CONJUNCTION CUM · THE ABLATIVE OF SPECIFICATION

395. The conjunction cum has the following meanings and constructions:

cum TEMPORAL = when, followed by the indicative or the subjunctive

cum CAUSAL = since, followed by the subjunctive

cum CONCESSIVE = although, followed by the subjunctive

As you observe, the mood after cum is sometimes indicative and sometimes subjunctive. The reason for this will be made clear by a study of the following sentences:

1. Caesarem vīdī tum cum in Galliā eram, I saw Cæsar at the time when I was in Gaul.

2. Caesar in eōs impetum fēcit cum pācem peterent, Cæsar made an attack upon them when they were seeking peace.

3. Hoc erat difficile cum paucī sine vulneribus essent, this was difficult, since only a few were without wounds.

4. Cum prīmī ōrdinēs fūgissent, tamen reliquī fortiter cōnsistēbant, though the front ranks had fled, yet the rest bravely stood their ground.

a. The underlying principle is one already familiar to you (cf. § 389.a). When the cum clause states a fact and simply fixes the time at which the main action took place, the indicative mood is used. So, in the first example, cum in Galliā eram fixes the time when I saw Cæsar.

b. On the other hand, when the cum clause describes the circumstances under which the main act took place, the subjunctive mood is used. So, in the second example, the principal clause states that Cæsar made an attack, and the cum clause describes the circumstances under which this act occurred. The idea of time is also present, but it is subordinate to the idea of description. Sometimes the descriptive clause is one of cause and we translate cum by since; sometimes it denotes concession and cum is translated although.

396. RULE. Constructions with Cum. The conjunction cum means when, since, or although. It is followed by the subjunctive unless it means when and its clause fixes the time at which the main action took place.

NOTE. Cum in clauses of description with the subjunctive is much more common than its use with the indicative.

397. Note the following sentences:

1. Oppidum erat parvum magnitūdine sed magnum multitūdine hominum, the town was small in size but great in population.

2. Homō erat corpore īnfīrmus sed validus animō, the man was weak in body but strong in courage.

a. Observe that magnitūdine, multitūdine, corpore, and animō tell in what respect something is true. The relation is one covered by the ablative case, and the construction is called the ablative of specification.

398. RULE. Ablative of Specification. The ablative is used to denote in what respect something is true.

399.             IDIOMS

aliquem certiōrem facere, to inform some one (lit. to make some one more certain)

certior fierī, to be informed (lit. to be made more certain)

iter dare, to give a right of way, allow to pass

obsidēs inter sē dare, to give hostages to each other

400.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Helvētiī cum patrum nostrōrum tempore domō prefectī essent, cōnsulis exercitum in fugam dederant. 2. Cum Caesar in Galliam vēnit, Helvētiī aliōs agrōs petēbant. 3. Caesar cum in citeriōre Gallia esset, tamen dē Helvētiōrum cōnsiliīs certior fīēbat. 4. Cum Helvētiī bellō clārissimī essent, Caesar iter per prōvinciam dare recūsāvit. 5. Lēgātus cum haec audīvisset, Caesarem certiōrem fecit. 6. Cum principēs inter sē obsidēs darent, Rōmānī bellum parāvērunt. 7. Caesar, cum id nūntiātum esset, mātūrat ab urbe proficīscī. 8. Nē virtūte quidem Gallī erant parēs Germānis. 9. Caesar neque corpore neque animō īnfīrmus erat. 10. Illud bellum tum incēpit cum Caesar fuit cōnsul.

Observe in each case what mood follows cum, and try to give the reasons for its use. In the third sentence the cum clause is concessive, in the fourth and sixth causal.

II. 1. That battle was fought at the time when (tum cum) I was at Rome. 2. Though the horsemen were few in number, nevertheless they did not retreat. 3. When the camp had been sufficiently fortified, the enemy returned home. 4. Since the tribes are giving hostages to each other, we shall inform Cæsar. 5. The Gauls and the Germans are very unlike in language and laws.

Reading Selection

LESSON LXXI

VOCABULARY REVIEW · THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE · THE PREDICATE GENITIVE

401. Review the word lists in §§ 510, 511.

402. The Gerund. Suppose we had to translate the sentence

By overcoming the Gauls Cæsar won great glory

We can see that overcoming here is a verbal noun corresponding to the English infinitive in -ing, and that the thought calls for the ablative of means. To translate this by the Latin infinitive would be impossible, because the infinitive is indeclinable and therefore has no ablative case form. Latin, however, has another verbal noun of corresponding meaning, called the gerund, declined as a neuter of the second declension in the genitive, dative, accusative, and ablative singular, and thus supplying the cases that the infinitive lacks.  1 Hence, to decline in Latin the verbal noun overcoming, we should use the infinitive for the nominative and the gerund for the other cases, as follows:

Nom.

superāre

overcoming

to overcome

INFINITIVE

Gen.

Dat.

Acc.

Abl.

superandī, of overcoming

superandō, for overcoming

superandum, overcoming

superandō, by overcoming

GERUND

Like the infinitive, the gerund governs the same case as the verb from which it is derived. So the sentence given above becomes in Latin

Superandō Gallōs Caesar magnam glōriam reportāvit

1. Sometimes, however, the infinitive is used as an accusative.

403. The gerund  2 is formed by adding -ndī, -ndō, -ndum, -ndō, to the present stem, which is shortened or otherwise changed, as shown below:

PARADIGM OF THE GERUND

CONJ. I

CONJ. II

CONJ. III

CONJ. IV

Gen.

amandī

monendī

regendī

capiendī

audiendī

Dat.

amandō

monendō

regendō

capiendō

audiendō

Acc.

amandum

monendum

regendum

capiendum

audiendum

Abl.

amandō

monendō

regendō

capiendō

audiendō

a. Give the gerund of cūrō, dēleō, sūmō, iaciō, veniō.

b. Deponent verbs have the gerund of the active voice (see § 493). Give the gerund of cōnor, vereor, sequor, patior, partior.

2. The gerund is the neuter singular of the future passive participle used as a noun, and has the same formation. (Cf. § 374. d.)

404. The Gerundive. The gerundive is the name given to the future passive participle (§ 374. d) when the participle approaches the meaning of a verbal noun and is translated like a gerund. It is the adjective corresponding to the gerund. For example, to translate the plan of waging war, we may use the gerund with its direct object and say cōnsilium gerendī bellum; or we may use the gerundive and say cōnsilium bellī gerendī, which means, literally, the plan of the war to be waged, but which came to have the same force as the gerund with its object, and was even preferred to it.

405. Compare the following parallel uses of the gerund and gerundive:

GERUND

GERUNDIVE

Gen.

Spēs faciendī pācem

The hope of making peace

Spēs faciendae pācis

The hope of making peace

Dat.

Locus idōneus pugnandō

A place suitable for fighting

Locus idōneus castrīs pōnendīs

A place suitable for pitching camp

Acc.

Mīsit equitēs ad īnsequendum

He sent horsemen to pursue

Mīsit equitēs ad īnsequendōs hostīs

He sent horsemen to pursue the enemy

Abl.

Nārrandō fābulās magister puerīs placuit

The teacher pleased the boys by telling stories

Nārrandīs fābulīs magister puerīs placuit

The teacher pleased the boys by telling stories

a. We observe

(1) That the gerund is a noun and the gerundive an adjective.

(2) That the gerund, being a noun, may stand alone or with an object.

(3) That the gerundive, being an adjective, is used only in agreement with a noun.

406. RULE. Gerund and Gerundive. 1. The Gerund is a verbal noun and is used only in the genitive, dative, accusative, and ablative singular. The constructions of these cases are in general the same as those of other nouns.

2. The Gerundive is a verbal adjective and must be used instead of gerund + object excepting in the genitive and in the ablative without a preposition. Even in these instances the gerundive construction is more usual.

407. RULE. Gerund or Gerundive of Purpose. The accusative of the gerund or gerundive with ad, or the genitive with causā  3 (= for the sake of), is used to express purpose.

GERUND

GERUNDIVE

Ad audiendum vēnērunt or

Audiendī causā vēnērunt

They came to hear

Ad urbem videndam vēnērunt or

Urbis videndae causā vēnērunt

They came to see the city

3. causā always follows the genitive.

NOTE. These sentences might, of course, be written with the subjunctive of purpose,—vēnērunt ut audīrent; vēnērunt ut urbem vidērent. In short expressions, however, the gerund and gerundive of purpose are rather more common.

408. We have learned that the word denoting the owner or possessor of something is in the genitive, as, equus Galbae, Galba’s horse. If, now, we wish to express the idea the horse is Galba’s, Galba remains the possessor, and hence in the genitive as before, but now stands in the predicate, as, equus est Galbae. Hence this is called the predicate genitive.

409. RULE. Predicate Genitive. The possessive genitive often stands in the predicate, especially after the forms of sum, and is then called the predicate genitive.

410.             IDIOMS

alīcui negōtium dare, to employ someone (lit. to give business to some one)

novīs rēbus studēre, to be eager for a revolution (lit. to be eager for new things)

reī mīlitāris perītissimus, very skillful in the art of war

sē suaque omnia, themselves and all their possessions

411.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Caesar cum in Galliā bellum gereret, militibus decimae legiōnis maximē fāvit quia reī mīlitāris perītissimī erant. 2. Sociīs negōtium dedit reī frumentāriae cūrandae. 3. Lēgāti nōn sōlum audiendī causā sed etiam dicendī causā vēnērunt. 4. Imperātor iussit explōrātōres locum idōneum mūnindō reperīre. 5. Nuper hae gentēs novīs rēbus studēbant; mox iīs persuādēbō ut Caesarī sē suaque omnia dēdant. 6. Iubēre est regīnae  1 et pārēre est multitūdinis.  4 7. Hōc proeliō factō quīdam ex hostibus ad pācem petendam venērunt. 8. Erant quī arma trādere nōllent. 9. Hostēs tam celeriter prōgressī sunt ut spatium pīla in hostīs iaciendī non darētur. 10. Spatium neque arma capiendī  5 neque auxilī petendī  2 datum est.

II. 1. These ornaments   6belong to Cornelia. 2. Men very skillful in the art of war were sent   7to capture the town. 3. The scouts found a hill suitable for fortifying very near to the river. 4. Soon the cavalry will come   8to seek supplies. 5. The mind of the Gauls is eager for revolution and for undertaking wars. 6. To lead the line of battle   8belongs to the general. 7.   10Whom shall we employ to look after the grain supply?

4. Predicate genitive.

5. Which of these expressions is gerund and which gerundive?

6. belong to = are of.

7. Use the gerundive with ad.

8. Use the genitive with causā. Where should causā stand?

9. Compare the first sentence.

10. Compare the second sentence in the Latin above.

Reading Selection

LESSON LXXII

THE IRREGULAR VERB EŌ · INDIRECT STATEMENTS

412. Learn the principal parts and the conjugation of eō, go (§ 499).

a. Notice that ī-, the root of eō, is changed to e- before a vowel, excepting in iēns, the nominative of the present participle. In the perfect system -v- is regularly dropped.

413. Learn the meaning and principal parts of the following compounds of eō with prepositions:

ad´eō, adī´re, ad´iī, ad´itus, go to, visit, with the accusative

ex´eō, exī´re, ex´iī, ex´itus, go forth, with ex or dē and the ablative of the place from which

in´eō, inī´re, in´iī, in´itus, begin, enter upon, with the accusative

red´eō, redī´re, red´iī, red´itus, return, with ad or in and the accusative of the place to which

trāns´eō, trānsī´re, trāns´iī, trāns´itus, cross, with the accusative

414. Indirect Statements in English. Direct statements are those which the speaker or writer makes himself or which are quoted in his exact language. Indirect statements are those reported in a different form of words from that used by the speaker or writer. Compare the following direct and indirect statements:

Direct statements

1. The Gauls are brave

2. The Gauls were brave

3. The Gauls will be brave

Indirect statements after a verb in the present tense

1. He says that the Gauls are brave

2. He says that the Gauls were brave

3.   He says that the Gauls will be brave

Indirect statements after a verb in a past tense

1. He said that the Gauls were brave

2. He said that the Gauls had been brave

3.   He said that the Gauls would be brave

We see that in English

a. The indirect statement forms a clause introduced by the conjunction that.

b. The verb is finite (cf. § 173) and its subject is in the nominative.

c. The tenses of the verbs originally used are changed after the past tense, He said.

415. Indirect Statements in Latin. In Latin the direct and indirect statements above would be as follows:

DIRECT

STATEMENTS

1. Gallī sunt fortēs

2. Gallī erant fortēs

3.   Gallī erunt fortēs

INDIRECT

STATEMENTS

1. Dīcit or Dīxit Gallōs esse fortīs (He says or He said the Gauls to be brave)  1

2. Dīcit or Dīxit Gallōs fuisse fortīs (He says or He said the Gauls to have been brave)  1

3.   Dīcit or Dīxit Gallōs futūrōs esse fortīs (He says or He said the Gauls to be about to be brave)  1

1. These parenthetical renderings are not inserted as translations, but merely to show the literal meaning of the Latin.

Comparing these Latin indirect statements with the English in the preceding section, we observe three marked differences:

a. There is no conjunction corresponding to that.

b. The verb is in the infinitive and its subject is in the accusative.

c. The tenses of the infinitive are not changed after a past tense of the principal verb.

416. RULE. Indirect Statements. When a direct statement becomes indirect, the principal verb is changed to the infinitive and its subject nominative becomes subject accusative of the infinitive.

417. Tenses of the Infinitive. When the sentences in § 415 were changed from the direct to the indirect form of statement, sunt became esse, erant became fuisse, and erunt became futūrōs esse.

418. RULE. Infinitive Tenses in Indirect Statements. A present indicative of a direct statement becomes present infinitive of the indirect, a past indicative becomes perfect infinitive, and a future indicative becomes future infinitive.

NOTE. When translating into Latin an English indirect statement, first decide what tense of the indicative would have been used in the direct form. That will show you what tense of the infinitive to use in the indirect.

419. RULE. Verbs followed by Indirect Statements. The accusative-with-infinitive construction in indirect statements is found after verbs of saying, telling, knowing, thinking, and perceiving.

420. Verbs regularly followed by indirect statements are:

a  .

Verbs of saying and telling:

dīcō, dīcere, dīxī, dictus, say

negō, negāre, negāvī, negātus, deny, say not

nūntiō, nūntiāre, nūntiāvī, nūntiātus, announce

respondeō, respondēre, respondī, respōnsus, reply

b  .

Verbs of knowing:

cognōscō, cognōscere, cognōvī, cognitus, learn, (in the perf.) know

sciō, scīre, scīvī, scītus, know

c  .

Verbs of thinking:

arbitror, arbitrārī, arbitrātus sum, think, consider

exīstimō, exīstimāre, exīstimāvī, exīstimātus, think, believe

iūdicō, iūdicāre, iūdicāvi, iūdicātus, judge, decide

putō, putāre, putāvī, putātus, reckon, think

spērō, spērāre, spērāvi, spērātus, hope

d  .

Verbs of perceiving:

audiō, audīre, audīvī, audītus, hear

sentiō, sentīre, sēnsī, sēnsus, feel, perceive

videō, vidēre, vīdī, vīsus, see

intellegō, intellegere, intellēxī, intellēctus, understand, perceive

Learn such of these verbs as are new to you.

421.             IDIOMS

postrīdiē eius diēī, on the next day (lit. on the next day of that day)

initā aestāte, at the beginning of summer

memoriā tenēre, to remember (lit. to hold by memory)

per explōrātōrēs cognōscere, to learn through scouts

422.             EXERCISES

I. 1. It, īmus, īte, īre. 2. Euntī, iisse or īsse, ībunt, eunt. 3. Eundi, ut eant, ībitis, īs. 4. Nē īrent, ī, ībant, ierat. 5. Caesar per explorātores cognōvit Gallōs flūmen trānsīsse. 6. Rōmānī audīvērunt Helvētiōs initā aestāte dē fīnibus suīs exitūrōs esse. 7. Legātī respondērunt nēminem ante Caesarem illam īnsulam adīsse. 8. Prīncipēs Gallōrum dīcunt sē nūllum cōnsilium contrā Caesaris imperium initūrōs esse. 9. Arbitrāmur potentiam rēgīnae esse maiōrem quam cīvium. 10. Rōmānī negant se lībertātem Gallīs ēreptūrōs esse. 11. Hīs rēbus cognitīs sēnsimus lēgātōs non vēnisse ad pācem petendam. 12. Helvētii sciunt Rōmānōs priōrēs victōriās memoriā tenēre. 13. Sociī cum intellegerent multōs vulnerārī, statuērunt in suōs fīnīs redīre. 14. Aliquis nūntiāvit Mārcum cōnsulem creātum esse.

II. 1. The boy is slow. He says that the boy is, was, (and) will be slow. 2. The horse is, has been, (and) will be strong. He judged that the horse was, had been, (and) would be strong. 3. We think that the army will go forth from the camp at the beginning of summer. 4. The next day we learned through scouts that the enemy’s town was ten miles off.  2 5. The king replied that the ornaments belonged to  3 the queen.

2. to be off, to be distant, abesse.

3. Latin, were of (§ 409).

Reading Selection

TUBA

LESSON LXXIII

VOCABULARY REVIEW · THE IRREGULAR VERB FERŌ · THE DATIVE WITH COMPOUNDS

423. Review the word lists in §§ 513, 514.

424. Learn the principal parts and conjugation of the verb ferō, bear (§ 498).

1. Learn the principal parts and meanings of the following compounds of ferō, bear:

ad´ferō, adfer´re, at´tulī, adlā´tus, bring to; report

cōn´ferō, cōnfer´re, con´tulī, conlā´tus, bring together, collect

dē´ferō, dēfer´re, dē´tulī, dēlā´tus, bring to; report; grant, confer

īn´ferō, īnfer´re, in´tulī, inlā´tus, bring in, bring against

re´ferō, refer´re, ret´tulī, relā´tus, bear back, report

425. The dative is the case of the indirect object. Many intransitive verbs take an indirect object and are therefore used with the dative (cf. § 153). Transitive verbs take a direct object in the accusative; but sometimes they have an indirect object or dative as well. The whole question, then, as to whether or not a verb takes the dative, depends upon its capacity for governing an indirect object. A number of verbs, some transitive and some intransitive, which in their simple form would not take an indirect object, when compounded with certain prepositions, have a meaning which calls for an indirect object. Observe the following sentences:

1. Haec rēs exercituī magnam calamitātem attulit, this circumstance brought great disaster to the army.

2. Germānī Gallīs bellum īnferunt, the Germans make war upon the Gauls.

3. Hae cōpiae proeliō nōn intererant, these troops did not take part in the battle.

4. Equitēs fugientibus hostibus occurrunt, the horsemen meet the fleeing enemy.

5.   Galba cōpiīs fīlium praefēcit, Galba put his son in command of the troops.

In each sentence there is a dative, and in each a verb combined with a preposition. In no case would the simple verb take the dative.

426. RULE. Dative with Compounds. Some verbs compounded with ad, ante, con, dē, in, inter, ob, post, prae, prō, sub, super, admit the dative of the indirect object. Transitive compounds may take both an accusative and a dative.

NOTE 1. Among such verbs are  1

ad´ferō, adfer´re, at´tulī, adlā´tus, bring to; report

ad´sum, ades´se, ad´fuī, adfutū´rus, assist; be present

dē´ferō, dēfer´re, dē´tulī, dēlātus, report; grant, confer

dē´sum, dees´se, dē´fuī, ——, be wanting, be lacking

īn´ferō, īnfer´re, in´tulī, inlā´tus, bring against, bring upon

inter´sum, interes´se, inter´fuī, interfutū´rus, take part in

occur´rō, occur´rere, occur´rī, occur´sus, run against, meet

praefi´ciō, praefi´cere, praefē´cī, praefec´tus, appoint over, place in command of

prae´sum, praees´se, prae´fuī, ——, be over, be in command

1. But the accusative with ad or in is used with some of these, when the idea of motion to or against is strong.

427.             IDIOMS

graviter or molestē ferre, to be annoyed at, to be indignant at, followed by the accusative and infinitive

sē cōnferre ad or in, with the accusative, to betake one’s self to

alicui bellum īnferre, to make war upon some one

pedem referre, to retreat (lit. to bear back the foot)

428.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Fer, ferent, ut ferant, ferunt. 2. Ferte, ut ferrent, tulisse, tulerant. 3. Tulimus, ferēns, lātus esse, ferre. 4. Cum nāvigia insulae adpropinquārent, barbarī terrōre commōtī pedem referre cōnātī sunt. 5. Gallī molestē ferēbant Rōmānōs agrōs vastāre. 6. Caesar sociīs imperāvit nē fīnitimis suīs bellum īnferrent. 7. Explorātōrēs, qui Caesarī occurrērunt, dīxērunt exercitum hostium vulneribus dēfessum sēsē in alium locum contulisse. 8. Hostes sciēbant Rōmānōs frūmentō egēre et hanc rem Caesarī summum perīculum adlātūram esse. 9. Impedīmentīs in ūnum locum conlātis, aliquī mīlitum flūmen quod nōn longē aberat trānsiērunt. 10. Hōs rēx hortātus est ut ōrāculum adīrent et rēs audītās ad sē referrent. 11. Quem imperātor illī legiōnī praefēcit? Pūblius illī legiōnī pracerat. 12. Cum esset Caesar in citeriōre Galliā, crēbrī ad eum  2 rūmōrēs adferēbantur litterīsque quoque certior fīēbat Gallōs obsidēs inter sē dare.

II. 1. The Gauls will make war upon Cæsar’s allies. 2. We heard that the Gauls would make war upon Cæsar’s allies. 3. Publius did not take part in that battle. 4. We have been informed that Publius did not take part in that battle. 5. The man who was in command of the cavalry was wounded and began to retreat. 6. Cæsar did not place you in command of the cohort to bring  3 disaster upon the army.

2. Observe that when adferō denotes motion to, it is not followed by the dative; cf. footnote, p. 182.

3. Not the infinitive. (Cf. § 352.)

Reading Selection

LESSON LXXIV

VOCABULARY REVIEW · THE SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS

429. Review the word lists in §§ 517, 518.

430. When we report a statement instead of giving it directly, we have an indirect statement. (Cf. § 414.) So, if we report a question instead of asking it directly, we have an indirect question.

DIRECT QUESTION

INDIRECT QUESTION

Who conquered the Gauls?

He asked who conquered the Gauls

a. An indirect question depends, usually as object, upon a verb of asking (as petō, postulō, quaerō, rogō) or upon some verb or expression of saying or mental action. (Cf. § 420.)

431. Compare the following direct and indirect questions:

DIRECT

INDIRECT

Quis Gallōs vincit?

Who is conquering the Gauls?

a.

Rogat quis Gallōs vincat

He asks who is conquering the Gauls

b.

Rogavit quis Gallōs vinceret

He asked who was conquering the Gauls

Ubī est Rōma?

Where is Rome?

a.

Rogat ubi sit Rōma

He asks where Rome is

b.

Rogāvit ubi esset Rōma

He asked where Rome was

Caesarne Gallōs vīcit?

Did Cæsar conquer the Gauls?

a.

Rogat num Caesar Gallōs vīcerit

He asks whether Cæsar conquered the Gauls

b.

Rogāvit num Caesar Gallōs vīcisset

He asked whether Cæsar had conquered the Gauls

a. The verb in a direct question is in the indicative mood, but the mood is subjunctive in an indirect question.

b. The tense of the subjunctive follows the rules for tense sequence.

c. Indirect questions are introduced by the same interrogative words as introduce direct questions, excepting thatyes-or-no direct questions (cf. § 210) on becoming indirect are usually introduced by num, whether.

432. RULE. Indirect Questions. In an indirect question the verb is in the subjunctive and its tense is determined by the law for tense sequence.

433.             IDIOMS

dē tertiā vigiliā, about the third watch

iniūriās alicui īnferre, to inflict injuries upon some one

facere verba prō, with the ablative, to speak in behalf of

in reliquum tempus, for the future

434.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Rēx rogāvit quid lēgātī postulārent et cūr ad sē vēnissent. 2. Quaesīvit quoque num nec recentīs iniūriās nec dubiam Rōmānōrum amīcitiam memoriā tenērent. 3. Vidētisne quae oppida hostēs oppugnāverint? 4. Nōnne scītis cūr Gallī sub montem sēse contulerint? 5. Audīvimus quās iniūrias tibi Germānī intulissent. 6. Dē tertiā vigiliā imperātor mīsit hominēs quī cognōscerent quae esset nātūra montis. 7. Prō hīs ōrātor verba fēcit et rogāvit cūr cōnsulēs nāvīs ad plēnem summī perīculī locum mittere vellent. 8. Lēgātīs convocātīs dēmōnstrāvit quid fierī vellet. 9. Nūntius referēbat quid in Gallōrum conciliō dē armīs trādendīs dictum esset. 10. Moneō nē in reliquum tempus peditēs et equitēs trāns flūmen dūcās.

II. 1. What hill did they seize? I see what hill they seized. 2. Who has inflicted these injuries upon our dependents? 3. They asked who had inflicted those injuries upon their dependents. 4. Whither did you go about the third watch? You know whither I went. 5. At what time did the boys return home? I will ask at what time the boys returned home.

Reading Selection

LESSON LXXV

VOCABULARY REVIEW · THE DATIVE OF PURPOSE, OR END FOR WHICH

435. Review the word lists in §§ 521, 522.

436. Observe the following sentences:

1. Explōrātōrēs locum castrīs dēlēgērunt, the scouts chose a place for a camp.

2. Hoc erat magnō impedīmentō Gallīs, this was (for) a great hindrance to the Gauls.

3.   Duās legiōnēs praesidiō castrīs relīquit, he left two legions as (lit. for) a guard to the camp.

In each of these sentences we find a dative expressing the purpose or end for which something is intended or for which it serves. These datives are castrīs, impedīmentō, and praesidiō. In the second and third sentences we find a second dative expressing the person or thing affected (Gallīs and castrīs). As you notice, these are true datives, covering the relations of for which and to which. (Cf. § 43.)

437. RULE. Dative of Purpose or End. The dative is used to denote the purpose or end for which, often with another dative denoting the person or thing affected.

438.             IDIOMS

cōnsilium omittere, to give up a plan

locum castrīs dēligere, to choose a place for a camp

alicui magnō ūsuī esse, to be of great advantage to some one (lit. for great advantage to some one)

439.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Rogāvit cūr illae cōpiae relictae essent. Respondērunt illās cōpiās esse praesidiō castrīs. 2. Caesar mīsit explōrātōrēs ad locum dēligendum castrīs. 3. Quisque exīstimāvit ipsum nōmen Caesaris magnō terrōrī barbarīs futūrum esse. 4. Prīmā lūce īdem exercitus proelium ācre commīsit, sed gravia suōrum vulnera magnae cūrae imperātōrī erant. 5. Rēx respondit amīcitiam populī Rōmānī sibi ōrnāmentō et praesidiō dēbēre esse. 6. Quis praeerat equitātuī quem auxiliō Caesarī sociī mīserant? 7. Aliquibus rēs secundae sunt summae calamitātī et rēs adversae sunt mīrō ūsuī. 8. Gallīs magnō ad pugnam erat impedīmentō quod equitātus ā dextrō cornū premēbat. 9. Memoria prīstinae virtūtis nōn minus quam metus hostium erat nostrīs magnō ūsuī. 10. Tam dēnsa erat silva ut prōgredī nōn possent.

II. 1. I advise you   1to give up the plan   2of making war upon the brave Gauls. 2. Do you know   3where the cavalry has chosen a place for a camp? 3. The fear of the enemy will be of great advantage to you. 4. Cæsar left three cohorts as (for) a guard to the baggage. 5. In winter the waves of the lake are so great   4that they are (for) a great hindrance to ships. 6. Cæsar inflicted severe  5 punishment on those who burned the public buildings.

1. Subjunctive of purpose. (Cf. § 366.)

2. Express by the genitive of the gerundive.

3. Indirect question.

4. A clause of result.

5. gravis, -e.

Reading Selection

LESSON LXXVI

VOCABULARY REVIEW · THE GENITIVE AND ABLATIVE OF QUALITY OR DESCRIPTION

440. Review the word lists in §§ 524, 525.

441. Observe the English sentences

(1) A man of great courage, or (2) A man with great courage

(3)   A forest of tall trees, or (4) A forest with tall trees

Each of these sentences contains a phrase of quality or description. In the first two a man is described; in the last two a forest. The descriptive phrases are introduced by the prepositions of and with.

In Latin the expression of quality or description is very similar.

The prepositions of and with suggest the genitive and the ablative respectively, and we translate the sentences above

(1) Vir magnae virtūtis, or (2) Vir magnā virtūte

(3)   Silva altārum arborum, or (4) Silva altīs arboribus

There is, however, one important difference between the Latin and the English. In English we may say, for example, a man of courage, using the descriptive phrase without an adjective modifier. In Latin, however, an adjective modifier must always be used, as above.

a. Latin makes a distinction between the use of the two cases in that numerical descriptions of measure are in the genitive and descriptions of physical characteristics are in the ablative. Other descriptive phrases may be in either case.

442.             EXAMPLES

1. Fossa duodecim pedum, a ditch of twelve feet.

2. Homō magnīs pedibus et parvō capite, a man with big feet and a small head.

3.   Rēx erat vir summā audāciā or rēx erat vir summae audāciae, the king was a man of the greatest boldness.

443. RULE. Genitive of Description. Numerical descriptions of measure are expressed by the genitive with a modifying adjective.

444. RULE. Ablative of Description. Descriptions of physical characteristics are expressed by the ablative with a modifying adjective.

445. RULE. Genitive or Ablative of Description. Descriptions involving neither numerical statements nor physical characteristics may be expressed by either the genitive or the ablative with a modifying adjective.

446.             IDIOMS

Helvētiīs in animō est, the Helvetii intend, (lit. it is in mind to the Helvetians)

in mātrimōnium dare, to give in marriage

nihil posse, to have no power

fossam perdūcere, to construct a ditch (lit. to lead a ditch through)

447.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Mīlitēs fossam decem pedum per eōrum fīnīs perdūxērunt. 2. Prīnceps Helvētiōrum, vir summae audāciae, prīncipibus gentium fīnitimārum sorōrēs in mātrimōnium dedit. 3. Eōrum amīcitiam cōnfīrmāre voluit quō facilius Rōmānīs bellum īnferret. 4. Germanī et Gallī nōn erant eiusdem gentis. 5. Omnēs ferē Germānī erant magnīs corporum vīribus.  1 6. Gallī qui oppidum fortiter dēfendēbant saxa ingentis magnitūdinis dē mūrō iaciēbant. 7. Cum Caesar ab explōrātōribus quaereret quī illud oppidum incolerent, explōrātōrēs respondērunt eōs esse homines summā virtūte et magnō cōnsiliō. 8. Moenia vīgintī pedum ā sinistrā parte, et ā dextrā parte flūmen magnae altitūdinis oppidum dēfendēbant. 9. Cum Caesar in Galliam pervēnisset, erat rūmor Helvētiīs in animō esse iter per prōvinciam Rōmānam facere. 10. Caesar, ut eōs ab fīnibus Rōmānis prohibēret, mūnītiōnem   2multa mīlia passuum longam fēcit.

II. 1. Cæsar was a general of much wisdom and great boldness, and very skillful in the art of war. 2. The Germans were of great size, and thought that the Romans had no power. 3. Men of the highest courage were left in the camp as (for) a guard to the baggage. 4. The king’s daughter, who was given in marriage to the chief of a neighboring state, was a woman of very beautiful appearance. 5. The soldiers will construct a ditch of nine feet around the camp. 6. A river of great width was between us and the enemy.

1. From vīs. (Cf. § 468.)

2. Genitives and ablatives of description are adjective phrases. When we use an adverbial phrase to tell how long or how high or how deep anything is, we must use the accusative of extent. (Cf. § 336.) For example, in the sentence above multa mīlia passuum is an adverbial phrase (accusative of extent) modifying longam. If we should omit longam and say a fortification of many miles, the genitive of description (an adjective phrase) modifying mūnītiōnem would be used, as mūnītiōnem multōrum mīlium passuum.

Reading Selection

GLADII

LESSON LXXVII

REVIEW OF AGREEMENT, AND OF THE GENITIVE, DATIVE, AND ACCUSATIVE

448. There are four agreements:

1. That of the predicate noun or of the appositive with the noun to which it belongs (§§ 76, 81).

2. That of the adjective, adjective pronoun, or participle with its noun (§ 65).

3. That of a verb with its subject (§ 28).

4. That of a relative pronoun with its antecedent (§ 224).

449. The relation expressed by the genitive is, in general, denoted in English by the preposition of. It is used to express

1. Possession

a. As attributive (§ 38).

b. In the predicate (§ 409).

2. The whole of which a part is taken (partitive genitive) (  § 331).

3. Quality or description (  §§ 443, 445).

450. The relation expressed by the dative is, in general, denoted in English by the prepositions to or for when they do not imply motion through space. It is used to express

1. The indirect object

a. With intransitive verbs and with transitive verbs in connection with a direct object in the accusative (§ 45).

b. With special intransitive verbs (§ 154).

c. With verbs compounded with ad, ante, con, dē, in, inter, ob, post, prae, prō, sub, super (§ 426).

2. The object to which the quality of an adjective is directed (  § 143).

3. The purpose, or end for which, often with a second dative denoting the person or thing affected (  § 437).

451. The accusative case corresponds, in general, to the English objective. It is used to express

1. The direct object of a transitive verb (§ 37).

2. The predicate accusative together with the direct object after verbs of making, choosing, falling, showing, and the like (§ 392).

3. The subject of the infinitive (§ 214).

4. The object of prepositions that do not govern the ablative (§ 340).

5. The duration of time and the extent of space (§ 336).

6. The place to which (§§ 263, 266).

452.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Mīlitēs quōs vīdimus dīxērunt imperium bellī esse Caesaris imperātōris. 2. Helvētiī statuērunt quam  1 maximum numerum equōrum et carrōrum cōgere. 3. Tōtīus Galliae Helvētiī plūrimum valuērunt. 4. Multās hōrās ācriter pugnātum est neque quisquam poterat vidēre hostem fugientem. 5. Virī summae virtūtis hostīs decem mīlia passuum īnsecūtī sunt. 6. Caesar populō Rōmānō persuāsit ut sē cōnsulem creāret. 7. Victōria exercitūs erat semper imperātōrī grātissima. 8. Trīduum iter fēcērunt et Genāvam, in oppidum  2 hostium, pervēnērunt. 9. Caesar audīvit Germānōs bellum Gallīs intulisse. 10. Magnō ūsuī mīlitibus Caesaris erat quod priōribus proeliīs sēsē exercuerant.

II. 1. One  3 of the king’s sons and many of his men were captured. 2. There was no one who wished  4 to appoint her queen. 3. The grain supply was always a care (for a care) to Cæsar, the general. 4. I think that the camp is ten miles distant. 5. We marched for three hours through a very dense forest. 6. The plan   5of making war upon the allies was not pleasing to the king. 7. When he came to the hill he fortified it   6by a twelve-foot wall.

1. What is the force of quam with superlatives?

2. urbs or oppidum, appositive to a name of a town, takes a preposition.

3. What construction is used with numerals in preference to the partitive genitive?

4. What mood? (Cf. § 390.)

5. Use the gerund or gerundive.

6. Latin, by a wall of twelve feet.

LESSON LXXVIII

REVIEW OF THE ABLATIVE

453. The relations of the ablative are, in general, expressed in English by the prepositions with (or by), from (or by), and in (or at). The constructions growing out of these meanings are

I. Ablative rendered   with (or by):

1. Cause (§ 102)

2. Means (§ 103)

3. Accompaniment (§ 104)

4. Manner (§ 105)

5. Measure of difference (§ 317)

6. With a participle (ablative absolute) (§ 381)

7. Description or quality (§§ 444, 445)

8. Specification (  § 398)

II. Ablative rendered   from (or by):

1. Place from which (§§ 179, 264)

2. Ablative of separation (§ 180)

3. Personal agent with a passive verb (§ 181)

4. Comparison without   quam (§ 309)

III. Ablative rendered   in (or at):

1. Place at or in which (§§ 265, 266)

2. Time when or within which (  § 275)

454.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Gallī locīs superiōribus occupātīs itinere exercitum prohibēre cōnantur. 2. Omnēs oppidānī ex oppidō ēgressī salūtem fugā petere incēpērunt. 3. Caesar docet sē mīlitum vītam suā salūte habēre multō cāriōrem. 4. Cum celerius omnium opīniōne pervēnisset, hostēs ad eum obsidēs mīsērunt 5. Vīcus in valle positus montibus altissimīs undique continētur. 6. Plūrimum inter Gallōs haec gēns et virtūte et hominum numerō valēbat. 7. Secundā vigiliā nūllō certō ōrdine neque imperiō ē castrīs ēgressī sunt. 8. Duābus legiōnibus Genāvae relictīs, proximō diē cum reliquīs domum profectus est. 9. Erant itinera duo quibus itineribus Helvētiī domō exīre possent. 10. Rēx erat summā audāciā et magnā apud populum potentiā. 11. Gallī timōre servitūtis commōtī bellum parābant. 12. Caesar monet lēgātōs ut contineant militēs, nē studiō pugnandī aut spē praedae longius  1 prōgrediantur. 13. Bellum ācerrimum ā Caesare in Gallōs gestum est.

II. 1. The lieutenant after having seized the mountain restrained his (men) from battle. 2. All the Gauls differ from each other in laws. 3. This tribe is much braver than the rest. 4. This road is   2ten miles shorter than that. 5. In summer Cæsar carried on war in Gaul, in winter he returned to Italy. 6. At midnight the general set out from the camp with three legions. 7. I fear that you cannot protect  3 yourself from these enemies. 8.   4After this battle was finished peace was made by all the Gauls.

1. longius, too far. (Cf. § 305.)

2. Latin, by ten thousands of paces.

3. dēfendere.

4. Ablative absolute.

LESSON LXXIX

REVIEW OF THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE, THE INFINITIVE, AND THE SUBJUNCTIVE

455. The gerund is a verbal noun and is used only in the genitive, dative, accusative, and ablative singular. The constructions of these cases are in general the same as those of other nouns (§§ 402; 406.1).

456. The gerundive is a verbal adjective and must be used instead of gerund + object, excepting in the genitive and in the ablative without a preposition. Even in these instances the gerundive construction is more usual (§ 406.2).

457. The infinitive is used:

I. As in English.

a. As subject or predicate nominative (§ 216).

b. To complete the predicate with verbs of incomplete predication (complementary infinitive) (§ 215).

c. As object with subject accusative after verbs of wishing, commanding, forbidding, and the like (§ 213).

II. In the principal sentence of an indirect statement after verbs of saying and mental action. The subject is in the accusative (§§ 416, 418, 419).

458. The subjunctive is used:

1. To denote purpose (§§ 349, 366, 372).

2. To denote consequence or result (§§ 385, 386).

3. In relative clauses of characteristic or description (§ 390).

4. In cum clauses of time, cause, and concession (§ 396).

5. In indirect questions (§ 432).

459.             EXERCISES

I. 1. Caesar, cum pervēnisset, militēs hortābātur nē cōnsilium oppidī capiendi omitterent. 2. Rēx, castrīs prope oppidum positīs, mīsit explōrātōrēs quī cognōscerent ubi exercitus Rōmanus esset. 3. Nēmo relinquēbātur quī arma ferre posset. 4. Nūntiī vīdērunt ingentem armōrum multitudinem dē mūrō in fossani iactam esse. 5. Dux suōs trānsīre flūmen iussit. Trānsīre autem hoc flūmen erat difficillimum. 6. Rōmānī cum hanc calamitātem molestē ferrant, tamen terga vertere recūsāvērunt. 7. Hōc rūmōre audītō, tantus terror omnium animōs occupāvit ut nē fortissimī quidem proelium committere vellent. 8. Erant quī putārent tempus annī idōneum nōn esse itinerī faciendō. 9. Tam ācriter ab utraque parte pugnābātur ut multa mīlia hominum occīderentur. 10. Quid timēs? Timeō nē Rōmānīs in animō sit tōtam Galliam superāre et nōbīs iniūriās inferre.

II. 1. Do you not see who is standing on the wall? 2. We hear that the plan of taking the town has been given up. 3. Since the Germans thought that the Romans could not cross the Rhine, Cæsar ordered a bridge to be made. 4. When the bridge was finished, the savages were so terrified that they hid themselves. 5. They feared that Cæsar would pursue them. 6. Cæsar   1asked the traders what the size of the island was. 7. The traders advised him not   2to cross the sea. 8. He sent scouts   3to choose a place for a camp.

1. quaerere ab.

2. Not infinitive.

3. Use the gerundive with ad.

READING MATTER

INTRODUCTORY SUGGESTIONS

How to Translate. You have already had considerable practice in translating simple Latin, and have learned that the guide to the meaning lies in the endings of the words. If these are neglected, no skill can make sense of the Latin. If they are carefully noted and accurately translated, not many difficulties remain. Observe the following suggestions:

1. Read the Latin sentence through to the end, noting endings of nouns, adjectives, verbs, etc.

2. Read it again and see if any of the words you know are nominatives or accusatives. This will often give you what may be called the backbone of the sentence; that is, subject, verb, and object.

3. Look up the words you do not know, and determine their use in the sentence from their endings.

4. If you cannot yet translate the sentence, put down the English meanings of all the words in the same order as the Latin words. You will then generally see through the meaning of the sentence.

5. Be careful to

a. Translate adjectives with the nouns to which they belong.

b. Translate together prepositions and the nouns which they govern.

c. Translate adverbs with the words that they modify.

d. Make sense. If you do not make sense, you have made a mistake. One mistake will spoil a whole sentence.

6. When the sentence is correctly translated, read the Latin over again, and try to understand it as Latin, without thinking of the English translation.

The Parts of a Sentence. You will now meet somewhat longer sentences than you have had before. To assist in translating them, remember, first of all, that every sentence conveys a meaning and either tells us something, asks a question, or gives a command. Every sentence must have a subject and a verb, and the verb may always have an adverb, and, if transitive, will have a direct object.

However long a sentence is, you will usually be able to recognize its subject, verb, and object or predicate complement without any difficulty. These will give you the leading thought, and they must never be lost sight of while making out the rest of the sentence. The chief difficulty in translating arises from the fact that instead of a single adjective, adverb, or noun, we often have a phrase or a clause taking the place of one of these; for Latin, like English, has adjective, adverbial, and substantive clauses and phrases. For example, in the sentence The idle boy does not study, the word idle is an adjective. In The boy wasting his time does not study, the words wasting his time form an adjective phrase modifying boy. In the sentence The boy who wastes his time does not study, the words who wastes his time form an adjective clause modifying boy, and the sentence is complex. These sentences would show the same structure in Latin.

In translating, it is important to keep the parts of a phrase and the parts of a clause together and not let them become confused with the principal sentence. To distinguish between the subordinate clauses and the principal sentence is of the first importance, and is not difficult if you remember that a clause regularly contains a word that marks it as a clause and that this word usually stands first. These words join clauses to the words they depend on, and are called subordinate conjunctions. They are not very numerous, and you will soon learn to recognize them. In Latin they are the equivalents for such words as when, while, since, because, if, before, after, though, in order that, that, etc. Form the habit of memorizing the Latin subordinate conjunctions as you meet them, and of noting carefully the mood of the verb in the clauses which they introduce.

HERCULES

THE LABORS OF HERCULES

Hercules, a Greek hero celebrated for his great strength, was pursued throughout his life by the hatred of Juno. While yet an infant he strangled some serpents sent by the goddess to destroy him. During his boyhood and youth he performed various marvelous feats of strength, and on reaching manhood he succeeded in delivering the Thebans from the oppression of the Minyæ. In a fit of madness, sent upon him by Juno, he slew his own children; and, on consulting the Delphic oracle as to how he should cleanse himself from this crime, he was ordered to submit himself for twelve years to Eurystheus, king of Tiryns, and to perform whatever tasks were appointed him. Hercules obeyed the oracle, and during the twelve years of his servitude accomplished twelve extraordinary feats known as the Labors of Hercules. His death was caused, unintentionally, by his wife Deiani´ra. Hercules had shot with his poisoned arrows a centaur named Nessus, who had insulted Deianira. Nessus, before he died, gave some of his blood to Deianira, and told her it would act as a charm to secure her husband’s love. Some time after, Deianira, wishing to try the charm, soaked one of her husband’s garments in the blood, not knowing that it was poisoned. Hercules put on the robe, and, after suffering terrible torments, died, or was carried off by his father Jupiter.

LIII.  1 THE INFANT HERCULES AND THE SERPENTS

HERCULES ET SERPENTES

Dī  2 grave supplicium sūmmit de malīs, sed iī quī lēgibus  3 deōrum pārent, etiam post mortem cūrantur. Illa vīta dīs  2 erat grātissima quae hominibus miserīs ūtilissima fuerat. Omnium autem praemiōrum summum erat immortālitās. Illud praemium Herculī datum est.

Herculis pater fuit Iuppiter, māter Alcmēna, et omnium hominum validissimus fuisse dīcitur. Sed Iūnō, rēgīna deōrum, eum, adhūc īnfantem, interficere studēbat; nam eī  4 et  5 Herculēs et Alcmēna erant invīsī. Itaque mīsit duās serpentīs, utramque saevissimam, quae mediā nocte domum  6 Alcmēnae vēnērunt. Ibi Herculēs, cum frātre suō, nōn in lectulō sed in scūtō ingentī dormiēbat. Iam audācēs serpentēs adpropinquāverant, iam scūtum movēbant. Tum frāter, terrōre commōtus, magnā vōce mātrem vocāvit, sed Herculēs ipse, fortior quam frāter, statim ingentīs serpentīs manibus suīs rapuit et interfēcit.

1. This number refers to the lesson after which the selection may be read.

2. Dī and dīs are from deus. Cf. § 468.

3. lēgibus, § 501. 14.

4. eī, to her, referring to Juno.

5. et ... et, both ... and.

6. domum, § 501. 20.

LIV. HERCULES CONQUERS THE MINYÆ

Herculēs ā puerō  1 corpus suum gravissimīs et difficillimīs labōribus exercēbat et hōc modō vīrēs  2 suās cōnfirmāvit. Iam adulēscēns Thēbīs  3 habitābat. Ibi Creōn quīdam erat rēx. Minyae, gēns validissima, erant fīnitimī Thēbānīs, et, quia ōlim Thēbānōs vīcerant, quotannīs lēgātōs mittēbant et vectīgal postulābant. Herculēs autem cōnstituit cīvīs suōs hōc vectīgālī līberāre et dixit rēgī, “Dā mihi exercitum tuum et ego hōs superbōs hostīs superābō.” Hanc condiciōnem rēx nōn recūsāvit, et Herculēs nūntiōs in omnīs partis dīmīsit et cōpiās coēgit.  4 Tum tempore opportūnissimō proelium cum Minyīs commīsit. Diū pugnātum est, sed dēnique illī impetum Thēbānōrum sustinēre nōn potuērunt et terga vertērunt fugamque cēpērunt.

1. ā puerō, from boyhood.

2. virēs, from vīs. Cf. § 468.

3. Thēbīs, § 501. 36. 1.

4. coēgit, from cōgō.

HE COMMITS A CRIME AND GOES TO THE DELPHIAN ORACLE TO SEEK EXPIATION

Post hoc proelium Creōn rēx, tantā victōriā laetus, fīliam suam Herculī in mātrimōnium dedit. Thēbīs Herculēs cum uxōre suā diū vīvēbat et ab omnibus magnopere amābātur; sed post multōs annōs subitō   1in furōrem incidit et ipse suā manū līberōs suōs interfēcit. Post breve tempus   2ad sānitātem reductus tantum scelus expiāre cupiēbat et cōnstituit ad ōrāculum Delphicum iter facere. Hoc autem ōrāculum erat omnium clārissimum. Ibi sedēbat fēmina quaedam quae Pȳthia appellābātur. Ea cōnsilium dabat iīs quī ad ōrāculum veniēbant.

1. in furōrem incidit, went mad.

2. ad sānitātem reductus, lit. led back to sanity. What in good English?

HERCULES LEONEM SUPERAT

LV. HERCULES BECOMES SUBJECT TO EURYSTHEUS  1 · HE STRANGLES THE NEME´AN LION

Itaque Herculēs Pȳthiae tōtam rem dēmonstrāvit nec scelus suum abdidit. Ubi iam Herculēs fīnem fēcit, Pȳthia iussit eum ad urbem Tīryntha  2 discēdere et ibi rēgī Eurystheō sēsē committere. Quae  3 ubi audīvit, Herculēs ad illam urbem statim contendit et Eurystheō sē in servitūtem trādidit et dīxit, “Quid prīmum, Ō rēx, mē facere iubēs?” Eurystheus, quī perterrēbātur vī et corpore ingentī Herculis et eum occidī  4 studēbat, ita respondit: “Audī, Herculēs! Multa mira  5 nārrantur dē leōne saevissimō quī hōc tempore in valle Nemaeā omnia vāstat. Iubeō tē, virōrum omnium fortissimum, illō mōnstrō hominēs līberāre.” Haec verba Herculī maximē placuērunt. “Properābo,” inquit, “et parēbō imperiō  6 tuō.” Tum in silvās in quibus leō habitābat statim iter fēcit. Mox feram vīdit et plūrīs impetūs fēcit; frūstrā tamen, quod neque sagittīs neque ūllō aliō tēlō mōnstrum vulnerāre potuit. Dēnique Herculēs saevum leōnem suīs ingentibus bracchiīs rapuit et faucīs eius omnibus vīribus compressit. Hōc modō brevī tempore eum interfēcit. Tum corpus leōnis ad oppidum in umerīs reportāvit et pellem posteā prō  7 veste gerēbat. Omnēs autem quō eam regiōnem incolēbant, ubi fāmam dē morte leōnis ingentis accēpērunt, erant laetissimī et Herculem laudābant verbīs amplissimīs.

1. Eu-rys´theus (pronounced U-ris´thūs) was king of Tī´ryns, a Grecian city, whose foundation goes back to prehistoric times.

2. Tīryntha, the acc. case of Tīryns, a Greek noun.

3. Quae, obj. of audīvit. It is placed first to make a close connection with the preceding sentence. This is called a connecting relative.

4. occīdī, pres. pass. infin.

5. mīra, marvelous things, the adj. being used as a noun. Cf. omnia, in the next line.

6. imperiō, § 501. 14.

7. prō, for, instead of.

LVI. SLAYING THE LERNE´AN HYDRA

Deinde Herculēs ab Eurystheō iussus est Hydram occīdere. Itaque cum amīcō Iolāō  1 contendit ad palūdem Lernaeam ubi Hydra incolēbat. Hoc autem mōnstrum erat serpēns ingēns quae novem capita habēbat. Mox is mōnstrum repperit et summō  2 cum perīculō collum eius sinistrā manū rapuit et tenuit. Tum dextrā manū capita novem abscīdere incēpit, sed frūstrā labōrābat, quod quotiēns hoc fēcerat totiēns alia nova capita vidēbat. Quod  3 ubi vīdit, statuit capita ignī cremāre. Hōc modō octō capita dēlēvit, sed extrēmum caput vulnerārī nōn potuit, quod erat immortāle. Itaque illud sub ingentī saxō Herculēs posuit et ita victōriam reportāvit.

1. Iolāō, abl. of I-o-lā´us, the hero’s best friend.

2. Note the emphatic position of this adjective.

3. Quod ubi, when he saw this, another instance of the connecting relative. Cf. p. 199, l. 3.

LVII. THE ARCADIAN STAG AND THE ERYMANTHIAN BOAR

Postquam Eurystheō mors Hydrae nuntiata est, summus terror animum eius occupavit. Itaque iussit Herculem capere et ad sē reportāre cervum quendam; nam minimē cupīvit tantum virum in rēgnō suō tenēre. Hie autem cervus dīcēbātur aurea cornua et pedēs multō  1 celeriōrēs ventō  2 habēre. Prīmum Herculēs vestīgia animālis petīvit, deinde, ubi cervum ipsum vīdit, omnibus vīribus currere incēpit. Per plūrimōs diēs contendit nec noctū cessāvit. Dēnique postquam per tōtum annum cucurrerat—ita dīcitur—cervum iam dēfessum cēpit et ad Eurystheum portāvit.

Tum vērō iussus est Herculēs aprum quendam capere quī illō tempore agrōs Erymanthiōs vāstābat et hominēs illīus locī magnopere perterrēbat. Herculēs laetē negōtium suscēpit et in Arcadiam celeriter sē recēpit. Ibi mox aprum repperit. Ille autem; simul atque Herculem vīdit, statim quam  3 celerrimē fūgit et metū perterritus in fossam altam sēsē abdidit. Herculēs tamen summā cum difficultāte eum extrāxit, nec aper ūllō modō sēsē līberāre potuit, et vīvus ad Eurystheum portātus est.

1. multō, § 501. 27.

2. ventō, § 501. 34.

3. quam. What is the force of quam with a superlative?

LVIII. HERCULES CLEANS THE AUGE´AN STABLES AND KILLS THE STYMPHALIAN BIRDS

Deinde Eurystheus Herculī hunc labōrem multō graviōrem imperāvit. Augēās  1 quīdam, quī illō tempore rēgnum Ēlidis  2 obtinēbat, tria mīlia boum  3 habēbat. Hī  4 ingentī stabulō continēbantur. Hoc stabulum, quod per trīgintā annōs nōn pūrgātum erat, Herculēs intrā spatium ūnīus diēī pūrgāre iussus est. llle negōtium alacriter suscēpit, et prīmum labōre gravissimō maximam fossam fōdit per quam flūminis aquam dē montibus ad mūrum stabulī dūxit. Tum partem parvam mūrī dēlēvit et aquam in stabulum immīsit. Hōc modō fīnm operis fēcit ūnō diē facillimē.

Post paucōs diēs Herculēs ad oppidum Stymphālum iter fēcit; nam Eurystheus iusserat eum avis Stymphālidēs occīdere. Hae avēs rōstra ferrea habēbant et hominēs miserōs dēvorābant. Ille, postquam ad locum pervēnit, lacum vīdit in quō avēs incolēbant. Nūllō tamen modō Herculēs avibus adpropinquāre potuit; lacus enim nōn ex aquā sed ē līmō cōnstitit.  5 Dēnique autem avēs   6dē aliquā causā perterritae in aurās volāvērunt et magna pars eārum sagittīs Herculis occīsa est.

1. Augēās, pronounced in English Aw-jē´as.

2. Ēlidis, gen. case of Ēlis, a district of Greece.

3. boum, gen. plur. of bōs. For construction see § 501. 11.

4. ingentī stabulō, abl. of means, but in our idiom we should say in a huge stable.

5. cōnstitit, from consto.

6. dē aliquā causā perterritae, frightened for some reason.

HERCULES ET TAURUS

LIX. HERCULES CAPTURES THE CRETAN BULL AND CARRIES HIM LIVING TO EURYSTHEUS

Tum Eurystheus iussit Herculem portāre vīvum ex īnsulā Crētā taurum quendam saevissimum. Ille igitur nāvem cōnscendit—nam ventus erat idōneus—atque statim solvit. Postquam trīduum nāvigavit, incolumis īnsulae adpropinquāvit. Deinde, postquam omnia parāta sunt, contendit ad eam regiōnem quam taurus vexābat. Mox taurum vīdit ac sine ūllō metū cornua eius corripuit. Tum ingentī labōre mōnstrum ad nāvem trāxit atque cum hāc praedā ex īnsulā discessit.

THE FLESH-EATING HORSES OF DIOME´DES

Postquam ex īnsulā Crētā domum pervēnit, Hercules ab Eurystheō in Thrāciam missus est. Ibi Diomēdēs quīdam, vir saevissimus, rēgnum obtinēbat et omnīs ā fīnibus suīs prohibēbat. Herculēs iussus erat equōs Diomedis rapere et ad Eurystheum dūcere. Hī autem equī hominēs miserrimōs dēvorābant dē quibus rēx supplicium sūmere cupiēbat. Herculēs ubi pervēnit, prīmum equōs ā rēge postulāvit, sed rēx eōs dēdere recūsāvit. Deinde ille īrā commōtus rēgem occīdit et corpus eius equīs trādidit. Itaque is quī anteā multōs necāverat, ipse eōdem suppliciō necātus est. Et equī, nūper saevissima animālia, postquam dominī suī corpus dēvorāvērunt, mānsuētī erant.

LX. THE BELT OF HIPPOL´YTE, QUEEN OF THE AMAZONS

Gēns Amāzonum  1 dīcitur  2 omnīnō ex mulieribus fuisse. Hae cum virīs proelium committere nōn verēbantur. Hippolytē, Amāzonum rēgīna, balteum habuit pulcherrimum. Hunc balteum possidēre fīlia Eurystheī vehementer cupiēbat. Itaque Eurystheus iussit Herculem impetum in Amāzonēs facere. Ille multīs cum cōpiīs nāvem cōnscendīt et paucis diēbus in Amāzonum fīnīs pervēnit, ac balteum postulāvit. Eum trādere ipsa Hipporytē quidem cupīvit; reliquīs tamen Amazonibus  3 persuādēre nōn potuit. Postrīdiē Herculēs proelium commīsit. Multās hōrās utrimque quam fortissimē pugnātum est Dēnique tamen mulieres terga vertērunt et fugā salūtem petiērunt. Multae autem captae sunt, in quō numerō erat ipsa Hippolytē. Herculēs postquam balteum accēpit, omnibus captīvīs lībertātem dedit.

1. A fabled tribe of warlike women living in Asia Minor.

2. omnīnō, etc., to have consisted entirely of women.

3. Amāzonibus, § 501. 14.

THE DESCENT TO HADES AND THE DOG CER´BERUS

HERCULES ET CERBERUS

Iamque ūnus modo ē duodecim labōribus relinquēbātur sed inter omnīs hic erat difficillimus. Iussus est enim canem Cerberum  4 ex Orcō in lūcem trahere. Ex Orcō autem nēmō anteā reverterat. Praetereā Cerberus erat mōnstrum maximē horribile et tria capita habēbat. Herculēs postquam imperia Eurystheī accēpit, statim profectus est et in Orcum dēscendit. Ibi vērō nōn sine summō periculō Cerberum manibus rapuit et ingentī cum labōre ex Orcō in lūcem et adurbem Eurystheī trāxit.

Sic duodecim laborēs illī  5 intrā duodecim annōs cōnfectī sunt. Dēmum post longam vītam Herculēs ā deīs receptus est et Iuppiter fīliō suō dedit immortālitātem.

4. The dog Cerberus guarded the gate of Orcus, the abode of the dead.

5. illī, those famous.

P. CORNELIUS LENTULUS: THE STORY OF A ROMAN BOY  1

LXI. PUBLIUS IS BORN NEAR POMPE´II

P. Cornēlius Lentulus,  2 adulēscēns Rōmānus, amplissimā familiā  3 nātus est; nam pater eius, Mārcus, erat dux perītissimus, cuius virtūte  4 et cōnsiliō multae victōriae reportātae erant; atque mater eius, lūlia, ā clārissimīs maiōribus orta est. Nōn vērō in urbe sed rūrī  5 Pūblius nātus est, et cum mātre habitābat in vīllā quae in maris lītore et sub radīcibus magnī montis sita erat. Mōns autem erat Vesuvius et parva urbs Pompēiī octō mīlia  6 passuum  7 aberat. In Italiā antīquā erant plūrimae quidem villae et pulchrae, sed inter hās omnīs nūlla erat pulchrior quam villa Mārcī Iūliaeque. Frōns vīllae mūrō a maris fluctibus mūniēbātur. Hinc mare et lītora et īnsulae longē lātēque cōnspicī  8 ac saepe nāvēs longae et onerāriae poterant. Ā tergō et ab utrōque latere agrī ferācissimī patēbant. Undique erat magna variōrum flōrum cōpia et multa ingentium arborum genera quae aestāte  9 umbram dēfessīs agricolīs grātissimam adferēbant. Praetereā erant  1 in agrīs stabulīsque multa animālium genera, nōn sōlum equī et bovēs sed etiam rārae avēs. Etiam erat  10 magna piscīna plēna piscium; nam Rōmānī piscīs dīligenter colēbant.

PUERI ROMANI

1. This story is fiction with certain historical facts in Cæsar’s career as a setting. However, the events chronicled might have happened, and no doubt did happen to many a Roman youth.

2. A Roman had three names, as, Pūblius (given name), Cornēlius (name of the gēns or clan), Lentulus (family name).

3. Abl. of source, which is akin to the abl. of separation (§ 501. 32).

4. virtūte, § 501. 24.

5. rūrī, § 501. 36. 1.

6. mīlia, § 501. 21.

7. passuum, § 501. 11.

8. cōnspicī, infin. with poterant, § 215. Consult the map of Italy for the approximate location of the villa.

9. aestāte, § 501. 35.

10. How are the forms of sum translated when they precede the subject?

LXII. HIS LIFE ON THE FARM

Huius vīllae Dāvus, servus Mārcī, est vīlicus  1 et cum Lesbiā uxōre omnia cūrat. Vīlicus et uxor in casā humilī, mediīs in agrīs sitā, habitant. Ā prīmā lūce ūsque ad vesperum sē  2 gravibus labōribus exercent ut omnī rēs bene gerant.  3 Plūrima enim sunt officia Dāvī et Lesbiae. Vīlicus servōs regit nē tardī sint  4; mittit aliōs quī agrōs arent,  4 aliōs quī hortōs inrigent,  4 et opera in  5 tōtum diem impōnit. Lesbia autem omnibus vestīmenta parat, cibum coquit, pānem facit.

CASA ROMANA

Nōn longē ab hōrum casā et in summō colle situm surgēbat domicilium ipsīus dominī dominaeque amplissimum. Ibi plūrīs annōs  6 Pūblius cum mātre vītam fēlīcem agēbat; nam pater eius, Mārcus, in terrīs longinquīs gravia reī pūblicae bella gerēbat nec domum  7 revertī poterat. Neque puerō quidem molestum est rūrī  8 vīvere. Eum multae rēs dēlectant. Magnopere amat silvās, agrōs, equōs, bovēs, gallīnās, avīs, reliquaque animālia. Saepe plūrīs hōrās  9 ad mare sedet quō  9 melius fluctūs et nāvīs spectet. Nec omnīnō sine comitibus erat, quod Lȳdia, Dāvī fīlia, quae erat eiusdem aetātis, cum eō adhūc infante lūdēbat, inter quōs cum annīs amīcitia crēscēbat. Lȳdia nūllum alium ducem dēligēbat et Pūblius ab puellae latere rārō discēdēbat. Itaque sub clārō Italiae sōle Pūblius et Lȳdia, amīcī fidēlissimī, per campōs collīsque cotīdiē vagābantur. Modo in silvā fīnitimā lūdebant ubi Pūblius sagittīs  10 celeribus avis dēiciēbat et Lȳdia corōnīs variōrum flōrum comās suās ōrnābat; modo aquam et cibum portābant ad Dāvum servōsque dēfessōs quī agrōs colēbant: modo in casā parvā aut hōrās lactās in lūdō cōnsūmēbant aut auxilium dabant Lesbiae, quae cibum virō et servīs parābat vel aliās rēs domesticās agēbat.

1. The vīlicus was a slave who acted as overseer of a farm. He directed the farming operations and the sale of the produce.

2. se, reflexive pron., object of exercent.

3. For the construction, see § 501. 40.

4. in, for.

5. annōs, § 501. 21.

6. domum, § 501. 20.

7. rūrī, § 501. 36. 1.

8. hōrās, cf. annōs, line 17.

9. quō ... spectet, §§ 349, 350.

10. sagittis, § 501. 24.

LXIII. MARCUS LENTULUS, THE FATHER OF PUBLIUS, IS SHIPWRECKED · JULIA RECEIVES A LETTER FROM HIM

Iam Pūblius  1 decem annōs habēbat cum M. Cornēlius Lentulus, pater eius, quī quīnque annōs  2 grave bellum in Asiā gerēbat, non sine glōriā domum  3 revertēbātur. Namque multa secunda proelia fēcerat, maximās hostium cōpiās dēlēverat, multās urbīs populo  4 Rōmānō inimīcās cēperat. Primum nūntius pervēnit quī ā Lentulō  5 missus erat  6 ut profectiōnem suam nūntiāret. Deinde plūrīs diēs  7 reditum virī optimī māter fīliusque exspectābant et animīs  8 sollicitis deōs immortālīs frūstrā colēbant. Tum dēmum hās litterās summo cum gaudiō accēpērunt:

9“Mārcus Iūliae suac salūtem dīcit. Sī valēs, bene est; ego valeō. Ex Graeciā, quō  10 praeter spem et opīniōnem hodiē pervēnī, hās litterās ad tē scribō. Namque nāvis nostra frācta est; nōs autem—  11dīs est gratia—incolumes sumus. Ex Asiae  12 portū nāvem lēnī ventō solvimus. Postquam  13 altum mare tenuimus   14nec iam ūllae terrae appāruērunt, caelum undique et undique fluctūs, subitō magna tempestās coorta est et nāvem vehementissimē adflīxit. Ventīs fluctibusque adflīctātī  15 nec sōlem discernere nec cursum tenēre poterāmus et omnia praesentem mortem intentābant. Trīs diēs  16 et trīs noctīs  16 sine rēmīs vēlīsque agimur. Quārtō diē  17 prīmum terra vīsa est et violenter in saxa, quae nōn longē ā lītore aberant, dēiectī sumus. Tum vērō maiōra perīcula timēbāmus; sed nauta quīdam, vir fortissimus, ex nāve in fluctūs īrātōs dēsiluit   18ut fūnem ad lītus portāret; quam rem summō labōre vix effēcit. Ita omnēs servātī sumus. Grātiās igitur et honōrem Neptūnō dēbēmus, quī deus nōs ē perīculō ēripuit. Nunc Athēnīs  19 sum, quō cōnfūgī ut mihi paucās hōrās ad quiētem darem.  20 Quam prīmum autem aliam nāvem condūcam ut iter ad Italiam reliquum cōnficiam et domum  21 ad meōs cārōs revertar. Salūtā nostrum Pūblium amīcissimē et valētūdinem tuam cūrā dīligenter.   22Kalendīs Mārtiīs.”

1. was ten years old.

2. annōs, § 501. 21.

3. domum, § 501. 20.

4. populō, dat. with inimīcās, cf. § 501. 16.

5. Lentulō, § 501. 33.

6. ut ... nūntiāret, § 501. 40.

7. diēs, cf. annōs, 1. 9.

8. animīs, abl. of manner. Do you see one in line 15?

9. This is the usual form for the beginning of a Latin letter. First we have the greeting, and then the expression Sī valēs, etc. The date of the letter is usually given at the end, and also the place of writing, if not previously mentioned in the letter.

10. quō, where.

11. dīs est grātia, thank God, in our idiom.

12. Asia refers to the Roman province of that name in Asia Minor.

13. altum mare tenuimus, we were well out to sea.

14. nec iam, and no longer.

16. adflīctātī, perf. passive part. tossed about.

16. What construction?

17. diē, § 501. 35.

18. ut ... portāret, § 501. 40.

19. Athēnīs, § 501. 36. 1.

20. darem, cf. portāret, l. 6.

21. Why not ad domum?

22. Kalendīs Mārtiīs, the Calends or first of March; abl. of time, giving the date of the letter.

LXIV. LENTULUS REACHES HOME · PUBLIUS VISITS POMPEII WITH HIS FATHER

Post paucōs diēs nāvis M. Cornēlī Lentulī portum Mīsēnī  1 petiit, quī portus nōn longē ā Pompēiīs situs est; quō in portū classis Rōmānā pōnēbātur et ad pugnās nāvālīs ōrnābātur. Ibi nāvēs omnium generum cōnspicī poterant. Iamque incrēdibilī celeritāte nāvis longa quā Lentulus vehēbātur lītorī adpropinquāvit; nam nōn sōlum ventō sed etiam rēmīs impellēbātur. In altā puppe stābat gubernātor et nōn procul aliquī mīlitēs Rōmānī cum armīs splendidīs, inter quōs clārissimus erat Lentulus. Deinde servī rēmīs contendere cessāvērunt  2; nautae vēlum contrāxērunt et ancorās iēcērunt. Lentulus statim ē nāvī ēgressus est et  3 ad villam suam properāvit. Eum Iūlia, Pūblius, tōtaque familia excēpērunt.   4Quī complexūs, quanta gaudia fuērunt!

Postrīdiē eius diēī Lentulus fīliō suō dīxit, “Venī, mī Pūblī, mēcum. Pompēiōs iter hodiē faciam. Māter tua suādet  5 ut frūctūs et cibāria emam. Namque plūrīs amīcōs ad cēnam vocāvimus et multīs rēbus  6 egēmus. Ea hortātur ut quam prīmum proficīscāmur.” “Libenter, mī pater,” inquit Pūblius. “Tēcum esse mihi semper est grātum; nec Pompēiōs umquam vīdī. Sine morā proficīscī parātus sum.” Tum celeriter currum cōnscendērunt et ad urbis mūrōs vectī sunt. Stabiānā portā  7 urbem ingressī sunt. Pūblius strātās viās mīrātur et saxa altiōra quae in mediō disposita erant et altās orbitās quās rotae inter haec saxa fēcerant. Etiam strepitum mīrātur, multitūdinem, carrōs, fontīs, domōs, tabernās, forum  8 cum statuīs, templīs, reliquīsque aedificiīs pūblicīs.

1. Misenum had an excellent harbor, and under the emperor Augustus became the chief naval station of the Roman fleet. See map of Italy.

2. Why is the infinitive used with cessāvērunt?

3. See Plate I, Frontispiece.

4. Observe that these words are exclamatory.

5. What construction follows suādeō? § 501. 41.

6. rēbus, § 501. 32.

7. This is the abl. of the way by which motion takes place, sometimes called the abl. of route. The construction comes under the general head of the abl. of means. For the scene here described, see Plate II, p. 53, and notice especially the stepping-stones for crossing the street (saxa quae in mediō disposita erant).

8. The forum of Pompeii was surrounded by temples, public halls, and markets of various sorts. Locate Pompeii on the map.

LXV. A DAY AT POMPEII

Apud forum ē currū dēscendērunt et Lentulus dīxit, “Hīc sunt multa tabernārum genera, mī Pūblī. Ecce, trāns viam est popīna!   1Hoc genus tabernārum cibāria vēndit. Frūctūs quoque ante iānuam stant. Ibi cibāria mea emam.” “Optimē,” respondit Pūblius. “At ubi, mī pater, crūstula emere possumus? Namque māter nōbīs imperāvit   2ut haec quoque parārēmus. Timeō ut  3 ista popīna vēndat crūstula.” “Bene dīcis,” inquit Lentulus. “At nōnne vidēs illum fontem ā dextrā ubi aqua per leōnis caput fluit? In illō ipsō locō est taberna pīstōris quī sine dubiō vēndit crūstula.”

Brevī tempore  4 omnia erant parāta, iamque   5quīnta hōra erat. Deinde Lentulus et fīlius ad caupōnam properāvērunt, quod famē  6 et sitī  7 urgēbantur. Ibi sub arboris umbrā sēdērunt et puerō imperāvērunt ut sibi  8 cibum et vīnum daret. Huic imperiō  9 puer celeriter pāruit. Tum laetī sē  10 ex labōre refēcērunt.

Post prandium prefectī sunt ut alia urbis spectācula vidērent. Illō tempore fuērunt Pompēiīs  11 multa templa, duo theātra, thermae magnumque amphitheātrum, quae omnia post paucōs annōs flammīs atque incendiīs Vesuvī et terrae mōtū dēlēta sunt. Ante hanc calamitātem autem hominēs   1nihil dē monte veritī sunt. In amphitheātrō quidem Pūblius morārī cupīvit ut spectācula gladiātōria vidēret, quae in  13 illum ipsum diem prōscrīpta erant et iam   15rē vērā incēperant. Sed Lentulus dīxit, “Morārī, Pūblī,   16vereor ut possīmus. Iam decima hōra est et via est longa. Tempus suādet ut quam prīmum domum revertāmur.” Itaque servō imperāvit ut equōs iungeret, et sōlis occāsū  16 ad vīllam pervēnērunt.

1. We say, this kind of shop; Latin, this kind of shops.

2. ut ... parārēmus, § 501. 41.

3. How is ut translated after a verb of fearing? How nē? Cf. § 501. 42.

4. tempore, § 501. 35.

5. quīnta hōra. The Romans numbered the hours of the day consecutively from sunrise to sunset, dividing the day, whether long or short, into twelve equal parts.

6. famē shows a slight irregularity in that the abl. ending -e is long.

7. sitis, thirst, has -im in the acc. sing., -ī in the abl. sing., and no plural.

8. Observe that the reflexive pronoun sibi does not here refer to the subject of the subordinate clause in which it stands, but to the subject of the main clause. This so-called indirect use of the reflexive is often found in object clauses of purpose.

9. What case? Cf. § 501. 14.

10. sē, cf. p. 205, l. 7, and note.

11. Pompēiīs, § 501. 36. 1.

12. nihil ... veritī sunt, had no fears of the mountain.

13. in, for.

14. rē vērā, in fact.

15. vereor ut, § 501. 42.

16. occāsū, § 501. 35.

LXVI. LENTULUS ENGAGES A TUTOR FOR HIS SON

Ā prīmīs annīs quidem Iūlia ipsa fīlium suum docuerat, et Pūblius nōn sōlum   1pūrē et Latīnē loquī poterat sed etiam commodē legēbat et scrībēbat. Iam Ennium  2 aliōsque poētās lēgerat. Nunc vērō Pūblius   3duodecim annōs habēbat; itaque eī pater bonum magistrum,   4virum omnī doctrīnā et virtūte ōrnātissimum, parāvit,   5quī Graeca, mūsicam, aliāsque artīs docēret.   6Namque illīs temporibus omnēs ferē gentēs Graecē loquēbantur. Cum Pūbliō aliī puerī, Lentulī amīcōrum fīliī,  7 discēbant. Nam saepe apud Rōmānōs mōs erat   8nōn in lūdum fīliōs mittere sed domī per magistrum docēre. Cotīdiē discipulī cum magistrō in peristȳlō  9 Mārcī domūs sedēbant. Omnēs puerī bullam auream, orīginis honestae signum, in collō gerēbant, et omnēs togā praetextā amictī erant,   10quod nōndum sēdecim annōs  11 nātī sunt.

1. pūrē ... poterat, freely, could speak Latin well. What is the literal translation?

2. Ennium, the father of Latin poetry.

3. duodecim ... habēbat, cf. p. 206, l. 8, and note.

4. virum, etc., a very well-educated and worthy man. Observe the Latin equivalent.

5. quī ... docēret, a relative clause of purpose. Cf. §§ 349, 350.

6. In Cæsar’s time Greek was spoken more widely in the Roman world than any other language.

7. fīliī, in apposition with puerī.

8. nōn ... mittere. This infinitive clause is the subject of erat. Cf. § 216. The same construction is repeated in the next clause, domī ... docēre. The object of docēre is fīliōs understood.

9. The peristyle was an open court surrounded by a colonnade.

10. At the age of sixteen a boy laid aside the bulla and the toga praetexta and assumed toga virīlis or manly gown.

11. annōs, § 501. 21. The expression nōndum sēdecim annōs nātī sunt means literally, they were born not yet sixteen years. This is the usual expression for age. What is the English equivalent?

SCENE IN SCHOOL · AN EXERCISE IN COMPOSITION

TABULA ET STILUS

DISCIPULĪ. Salvē, magister.

MAGISTER. Vōs quoque omnēs, salvēte.   1Tabulāsne portāvistis et stilōs?

D. Portāvimus.

M. Iam fābulam Aesōpī  2 discēmus. Ego legam, vōs in tabulīs scrībite. Et tū, Pūblī, dā mihi ē capsā  3 Aesōpī volūmen.  4 Iam audīte omnēs: Vulpēs et Ūva.

Vulpēs ōlim famē coācta ūvam dēpendentem vīdit. Ad ūvam saliēbat, sūmere cōnāns. Frūstrā diū cōnāta, tandem īrāta erat et salīre cessāns dīxit: “Illa ūva est acerba; acerbam ūvam   5nihil moror.”

Omnia´ne scrīpsistis, puerī?

D. Omnia, magister.

1. Tablets were thin boards of wood smeared with wax. The writing was done with a stylus, a pointed instrument like a pencil, made of bone or metal, with a knob at the other end. The knob was used to smooth over the wax in making erasures and corrections.

2. Aesōpī, the famous Greek to whom are ascribed most of the fables current in the ancient world.

3. A cylindrical box for holding books and papers, shaped like a hatbox.

4. Ancient books were written on rolls made of papy´rus.

5. nihil moror, I care nothing for.

LXVII. PUBLIUS GOES TO ROME TO FINISH HIS EDUCATION

Iamque Pūblius,   1quīndecim annōs nātus,   2prīmīs litterārum elementīs cōnfectīs, Rōmam petere voluit ut scholās grammaticōrum et philosophōrum frequentāret. Et facillimē patrī  3 suō, qui ipse philosophiae studiō tenēbātur, persuāsit. Itaque   4omnibus rēbus ad profectiōnem comparātīs, pater fīliusque equīs animōsīs vectī  5 ad magnam urbem profectī sunt. Eōs proficīscentīs Iūlia tōtaque familia vōtīs precibusque prōsecūtae sunt. Tum per loca  6 plāna et collis silvīs vestītōs viam ingressī sunt ad Nōlam, quod oppidum eōs hospitiō modicō excēpit. Nōlae  7 duās hōrās morātī sunt, quod sōl merīdiānus ārdēbat. Tum rēctā viā  8 circiter vīgintī mīlia  9 passuum  9 Capuam,  9 ad īnsignem Campāniae urbem, contendērunt. Eō  10 multā nocte dēfessī pervēnērunt.   11Postrīdiē eius diēī, somnō et cibō recreātī, Capuā discessērunt et   13viam Appiam ingressī, quae Capuam tangit et ūsque ad urbem Rōmam dūcit, ante merīdiem Sinuessam pervēnērunt, quod oppidum tangit mare. Inde prīmā lūce proficīscentēs Formiās  13 properāvērunt, ubi Cicerō, ōrātor clarissimus, quī forte apud vīllam suam erat, eōs benignē excēpit. Hinc   14itinere vīgintī quīnque mīlium passuum factō, Tarracīnam, oppidum in saxīs altissimīs situm, vīdērunt. Iamque nōn longē aberant palūdēs magnae, quae multa mīlia passuum undique patent. Per eās pedestris via est gravis et in nāve viātōrēs vehuntur. Itaque   15equīs relictīs Lentulus et Pūblius nāvem cōnscendērunt, et, ūnā nocte in trānsitū cōnsūmptā, Forum Appī vēnērunt. Tum brevī tempore Arīcia eōs excēpit. Hoc oppidum, in colle situm, ab urbe Romā sēdecim mīlia passuum abest. Inde dēclivis via ūsque ad latum campum dūcit ubi Rōma stat. Quem ad locum ubi Pūblius vēnit et Rōmam adhūc remōtam, maximam tōtīus orbis terrārum urbem, cōnspēxit, summā admīrātiōne et gaudiō adfectus est. Sine morā dēscendērunt, et, mediō intervāllō quam celerrimē superātō, urbem portā Capēnā ingressī sunt.

1. quīndecim, etc., cf. p. 210, l. 5, and note.

2. prīmīs ... cōnfectīs, abl. abs. Cf. § 501. 28.

3. patrī, dat. with persuāsit.

4. omnibus ... comparātīs, cf. note 2.

5. vectī, perf. pass. part. of vehō.

6. What is there peculiar about the gender of this word?

7. Nōlae, locative case, § 501. 36.2.

8. viā, cf. portā, p. 208, l. 7, and note.

9. What construction?

10. Eō, adv. there.

11. Postrīdiē eius diēī, on the next day.

12. viam Appiam, the most famous of all Roman roads, the great highway from Rome to Tarentum and Brundisium, with numerous branches. Locate on the map the various towns that are mentioned in the lines that follow.

13. Formiās, Formiæ, one of the most beautiful spots on this coast, and a favorite site for the villas of rich Romans.

14. itinere ... factō, abl. abs. The gen. mīlium modifies itinere.

15. equīs relictīs. What construction? Point out a similar one in the next line.

LXVIII. PUBLIUS PUTS ON THE TOGA VIRILIS

BULLA

Pūblius iam tōtum annum Rōmae morābātur  1 multaque urbis spectācula vīderat et multōs sibi  2 amīcōs parāverat. Eī  3 omnēs favēbant;   4dē eō omnēs bene spērāre poterant. Cotīdiē Pūblius scholas philosophōrum et grammaticōrum tantō studiō frequentābat   5ut aliīs clārum exemplum praebēret. Saepe erat cum patre in cūriā  6; quae rēs effēcit   7ut summōs reī pūblicae virōs et audīret et vidēret. Ubi   8sēdecim annōs natus est, bullam  9 auream et togam praetextam mōre Rōmānō dēposuit atque virīlem togam sūmpsit. Virīlis autem toga erat omnīnō alba, sed praetexta clāvum purpureum in margine habēbat.   10Dēpōnere togam praetextam et sūmere togam virīlem erat rēs grātissima puerō Rōmānō, quod posteā vir et cīvis Rōmānus habēbātur.

11Hīs rēbus gestīs Lentulus ad uxōrem suam hās litterās scrīpsit:

12“Mārcus Iūliae suae salūtem dīcit. Sī valēs, bene est; ego valeō. Accēpī tuās litterās. Hās nunc Rōmā per servum fidēlissimum mittō ut dē Pūbliō nostrō quam celerrimē sciās. Nam hodiē eī togam virīlem dedī. Ante lucem surrēxī  13 et prīmum bullam auream dē collō eius remōvī. Hāc Laribus  14 cōnsecrātā et sacrīs factīs, eum togā virīlī vestīvī. Interim plūrēs amīcī cum multitūdine optimōrum cīvium et honestōrum clientium pervēnerant   15quī Pūblium domō in forum dēdūcerent. Ibi in cīvitātem receptus est et nōmen, Pūblius Cornēlius Lentulus, apud cīvīs Rōmānōs ascrīptum est. Omnēs eī amīcissimī fuērunt et magna  16 de eō praedīcunt. Sapientior enim aequālibus  17 est et magnum ingenium habet.   18Cūrā ut valeās.”

1. morābātur, translate as if pluperfect.

2. sibi, for himself.

3. Eī, why dat.?

4. dē ... poterant, in English, all regarded him as a very promising youth; but what does the Latin say?

5. ut ... praebēret, § 501. 43.

6. cūriā, a famous building near the Roman Forum.

7. ut ... audīret et vidēret, § 501. 44.

8. sēdecim, etc., cf. p. 210, l. 5, and note.

9. bullam, cf. p. 210, l. 3, and note 4.

10. These infinitive clauses are the subject of erat. Cf. § 216.

11. Hīs rēbus gestīs, i.e. the assumption of the toga virilis and attendant ceremonies.

12. Compare the beginning of this letter with the one on page 206.

13. surrēxī, from surgō.

14. The Lares were the spirits of the ancestors, and were worshiped as household gods. All that the house contained was confided to their care, and sacrifices were made to them daily.

15. quī ... dēdūcerent, § 350.

16. magna, great things, a neuter adj. used as a noun.

17. aequālibus, § 501. 34.

18. Cūrā ut valeās, take good care of your health. How does the Latin express this idea?

LXIX. PUBLIUS JOINS CÆSAR’S ARMY IN GAUL

Pūblius iam adulēscēns postquam togam virīlem sūmpsit, aliīs rēbus studēre incēpit et praesertim ūsū  1 armōrum sē  2 dīligenter exercuit. Magis magisque amāvit illās artīs quae mīlitārem animum dēlectant. Iamque erant   3quī eī cursum mīlitārem praedīcerent. Nec sine causā, quod certē patris īsigne exemplum   4ita multum trahēbat.   5Paucīs ante annīs C. Iūlius Caesar, ducum Rōmānōrum maximus, cōnsul creātus erat et hōc tempore in Galliā bellum grave gerēbat. Atque in exercitū eius plūrēs adulēscentēs mīlitābant, apud quōs erat amīcus quīdam Pūblī. Ille Pūblium crēbrīs litterīs vehementer hortābātur   6ut iter in Galliam faceret. Neque Pūblius recūsāvit, et, multīs amīcīs ad portam urbis prōsequentibus, ad Caesaris castra profectus est. Quārtō diē postquam iter ingressus est, ad Alpīs, montīs altissimōs, pervēnit. Hīs summā difficultāte superātīs, tandem Gallōrum in fīnibus erat. Prīmō autem veritus est ut  7 castrīs Rōmānīs adpropinquāre posset, quod Gallī, maximīs cōpiīs coāctīs, Rōmānōs obsidēbant et viās omnīs iam clauserant. Hīs rēbus commōtus Pūblius vestem Gallicam induit nē ā Gallīs caperētur, et ita per hostium cōpiās incolumis ad castra pervenīre potuit. Intrā mūnītiōnes acceptus, ā Caesare benignē exceptus est. Imperātor fortem adulēscentem amplissimīs verbīs laudāvit et eum   8tribūnum mīlītum creāvit.

1. Abl. of means.

2. sē, reflexive object of exercuit.

3. quī ... praedīcerent, § 501. 45.

4. ita multum trahēbat, had a great influence in that direction.

5. Paucīs ante annīs, a few years before; in Latin, before by a few years, ante being an adverb and annīs abl. of degree of difference.

6. ut ... faceret, § 501. 41.

7. ut, how translated here? See § 501. 42.

8. The military tribune was a commissioned officer nearly corresponding to our rank of colonel. The tribunes were often inexperienced men, so Cæsar did not allow them much responsibility.

IMPEDIMENTA

HOW THE ROMANS MARCHED AND CAMPED

Exercitus quī in hostium fīnibus bellum genit multīs perīcuīs circumdatus est.   1Quae perīcula ut vītāret, Rōmāni summam cūram adhībēre solēbant. Adpropinquanteēs cōpiīs hostium agmen ita dispōnēbant   2ut imperātor ipse cum plāribus legiōnibus expedītīs  3 prīmum agmen dūceret. Post eās cōpiās impedīmenta  4 tōtīus exercitūs conlocābant.   5Tum legiōnēs quae proximē cōnscrīptae erant tōtum agmen claudēbant. Equitēs quoque in omnīs partīs dīmittēbantur quī loca explōrārent; et centuriōnēs praemittēbantur ut locum castrīs idōneum dēligerent. Locus habēbatur idōneus castrīs   6quī facile dēfendī posset et prope aquam esset. Quā dē causā castra  7 in colle ab utrāque parte arduō, ā fronte lēniter dēclīvī saepe pōnēbantur; vel locus palūdibus cīnctus vel in flūminis rīpīs situs dēligēbātur. Ad locum postquam exercitus pervēnit, aliī mīlitum   8in armīs erant, aliī castra mūnīre incipiēbant. Nam   9quō tūtiōrēs ab hostibus mīlitēs essent, nēve incautī et imparātī opprimerentur, castra fossā lātā et vāllō altō mūniēbant. In castrīs portae quattuor erant ut ēruptiō mīlitum omnīs in partīs fierī posset. In angulīs castrōrum erant turrēs dē quibus tēla in hostīs coniciēbantur.   10Tālibus in castrīs quālia dēscrīpsimus Pūblius ā Caesare exceptus est.

1. Quae perīcula, object of vītārent. It is placed first to make a proper connection with the preceding sentence.

2. ut ... dūceret, § 501. 43.

3. expedītīs, i.e. without baggage and ready for action.

4. impedīmenta. Much of the baggage was carried in carts and on beasts of burden, as is shown above; but, besides this, each soldier (unless expedītus) carried a heavy pack. See also picture, p. 159.

5. The newest legions were placed in the rear, because they were the least reliable.

6. quī ... posset ... esset, § 501. 45.

7. castra, subject of pōnēbantur.

8. in armīs erant, stood under arms.

9. quō ... essent. When is quō used to introduce a purpose clause? See § 350. I.

10. Tālibus in castrīs quālia, in such a camp as. It is important to remember the correlatives tālis ... quālis, such ... as.

LXX. THE RIVAL CENTURIONS

CENTURIO

Illīs in castrīs erant duo centuriōnēs,  1 fortissimī virī, T. Pullō et L. Vorēnus, quōrum neuter alterī virtūte  2 cēdere volēbat. Inter eōs iam multōs annōs īnfēnsum certāmen gerēbātur. Tum dēmum fīnis contrōversiae hōc modō  3 factus est. Diē tertiō postquam Pūblius pervēnit, hostēs, maiōribus cōpiīs coāctīs, ācerrimum impetum in castra fēcērunt. Tum Pullō,   4cum Rōmānī tardiōrēs  5 vidērentur, “Cūr dubitās,” inquit, “Vorēne? Quam commodiōrem occāsiōnem exspectās? Hic diēs dē virtūte nostrā iūdicābit.” Haec  6 cum dīxisset, extrā mūnītiōnēs prōcessit et in eam hostium partem quae cōfertissima   7vidēbātur inrūpit. Neque Vorēnus quidem tum vāllō  8 sēsē continet, sed Pullōnem subsequitur. Tum Pullō pīlum in hostīs immittit atque ūnum ex multitūdine prōcurrentem trāicit. Hunc percussum et exanimātum hostēs scūtīs prōtegunt et in Pullōnem omnēs tēla coniciunt. Eius scūtum trānsfīgitur et tēlum in balteō dēfīgitur. Hic cāsus vāgīnam āvertit et dextram manum eius gladium ēdūcere cōnantis  9 morātur. Eum ita impedītum hostēs circumsistunt.

Tum vēro   10eī labōrantī Vorēnus, cum sit inimīcus, tamen auxilium dat. Ad hunc cōnfestim   11ā Pullōne omnis multitūdō sē convertit. Gladiō comminus pugnat Vorēnus, atque, ūnō interfectō, reliquōs paulum prōpellit. Sed īnstāns cupidius  12 īnfēlīx,   13pede sē fallente, concidit.

Huic rūrsus circumventō auxilium dat Pullō, atque ambō incolumēs, plūribus interfectīs, summā cum laude intrā mūnītiōnēs sē recipiunt. Sic inimīcōrum alter alterī auxilium dedit nec de eōrum virtūte quisquam iūdicāre potuit.

1. A centurion commanded a company of about sixty men. He was a common soldier who had been promoted from the ranks for his courage and fighting qualities. The centurions were the real leaders of the men in battle. There were sixty of them in a legion. The centurion in the picture (p. 216) has in his hand a staff with a crook at one end, the symbol of his authority.

2. virtūte, § 501. 30.

3. Abl. of manner.

4. cum ... vidērentur, § 501. 46.

5. tardiōrēs, too slow, a not infrequent translation of the comparative degree.

6. Haec, obj. of dīxisset. It is placed before cum to make a close connection with the preceding sentence. What is the construction of dīxisset?

7. vidēbatur, inrūpit. Why is the imperfect used in one case and the perfect in the other? Cf. § 190.

8. vāllō, abl. of means, but in English we should say within the rampart. Cf. ingentī stabulō, p. 201, l. 13, and note.

9. cōnantis, pres. part. agreeing with eius.

10. eī labōrantī, indir. obj. of dat.

11. ā Pullōne, from Pullo, abl. of separation.

12. cupidius, too eagerly.

13. pede sē fallente, lit. the foot deceiving itself; in our idiom, his foot slipping.

LXXI. THE ENEMY BESIEGING THE CAMP ARE REPULSED

Cum iam sex hōrās pugnatum esset  1 ac nōn sōlum vīrēs sed etiam tēla Rōmānōs dēficerent  1, atque hostēs ācrius instārent,  1 et vāllum scindere fossamque complēre incēpissent,  1 Caesar, vir reī mīlitāris perītissimus, suīs imperāvit ut proelium paulisper intermitterent,  2 et, signō datō, ex castrīs ērumperent.  2   3Quod iussī sunt faciunt, et subitō ex omnibus portīs ērumpunt. Atque tam celeriter mīlitēs concurrērunt et tam propinquī erant hostēs  4 ut spatium pīla coniciendī  5 nōn darētur. Itaque reiectīs pīlīs   6comminus gladiīs pugnātum est. Diū et audācter hostēs restitērunt et in extrēmā spē salūtis tantam virtūtem praestitērunt ut ā dextrō cornū vehementer   7multitūdine suōrum aciem Rōmanam premerent.   8Id imperātor cum animadvertisset, Pūblium adulēscentem cum equitātū mīsit quī labōrantibus  9 auxilium daret. Eius impetum sustinēre nōn potuērunt hostēs  10 et omnēs terga vertērunt. Eōs in fugam datōs Pūblius subsecūtus est ūsque ad flūmen Rhēnum, quod ab eō locō quīnque mīlia passuum aberat. Ibi paucī salūtem sibi repperērunt. Omnibus reliquīs interfectīs, Pūblius et equitēs in castra sēsē recēpērunt. Dē hāc calamitāte fīnitimae gentēs cum certiōrēs factae essent, ad Caesarem lēgātōs mīsērunt et sē suaque omnia dēdidērunt.

1. pugnātum esset, dēficerent, īnstārent, incēpissent. These are all subjunctives with cum. Cf. § 501. 46.

2. intermitterent, ērumperent. What use of the subjunctive?

3. Quod, etc., they do as ordered. The antecedent of quod is id understood, which would be the object of faciunt.

4. ut ... darētur. Is this a clause of purpose or of result?

5. coniciendī, § 402.

6. comminus gladiīs pugnātum est, a hand-to-hand conflict was waged with swords.

7. multitūdine suōrum, by their numbers. suōrum is used as a noun. What is the literal translation of this expression?

8. Id imperātor. Id is the obj. and imperātor the subj. of animadvertisset.

9. labōrantibus. This participle agrees with iīs understood, the indir. obj. of daret; qui ... daret is a purpose clause, § 501. 40.

10. hostēs, subj. of potuērunt.

LXXII. PUBLIUS GOES TO GERMANY · ITS GREAT FORESTS AND STRANGE ANIMALS

Initā aestāte Caesar litterīs certior fīēbat et per explōrātōrēs cognōscēbat plūrīs cīvitātēs Galliae novīs rēbus studēre,  1 et contrā populum Rōmānum coniūrāre  1 obsidēsque   2inter sē dare,  1 atque cum hīs Germānōs quōsdam quoque sēsē coniūnctūrōs esse.  1 Hīs litterīs nūntiīsque commōtus Caesar cōnstituit quam celerrimē in Gallōs proficīscī,  3 ut eōs inopīnantīs opprimeret, et Labiēnum lēgātum cum duābus legiōnibus peditum et duōbus mīlibus equitum in Germānōs mittere.  3   4Itaque rē frūmentāriā comparātā castra mōvit. Ab utrōque  5 rēs bene gesta est; nam Caesar tam celeriter in hostium fīnīs pervēnit ut spatium   6cōpiās cōgendī nōn darētur  7; et Labiēnus dē Germānīs tam grave supplicium sūmpsit ut nēmō ex eā gente in reliquum tempus Gallīs auxilium dare audēret.  7

Hoc iter in Germāniam Pūblius quoque fēcit et,   8cum ibi morārētur, multa mīrābilia vīdit. Praesertim vērō ingentem silvam mīrābātur, quae tantae magnitūdinis esse dīcēbātur   9ut nēmō eam trānsīre posset, nec quisquam scīret aut initium aut fīnem. Quā dē rē plūra cognōverat ā mīlite quōdam quī ōlim captus ā Germānīs multōs annōs ibi incoluit. Ille  10 dē silvā dīcēns, “Īnfīnītae magnitūdinis est haec silva,” inquit; “nee quisquam est   11huius Germāniae   12quī initium eius sciat aut ad fīnem adierit. Nāscuntur illīc multa tālia animālium genera quālia reliquīs in locīs nōn inveniuntur. Sunt bovēs quī ūnum  13 cornū habent; sunt etiam animālia quae appellantur alcēs. Hae nūllōs crūrum  14 articulōs habent. Itaque, sī forte concidērunt, sēsē ērigere nūllō modō possunt. Arborēs habent prō  15 cubīlibus; ad eās sē applicant atque ita reclīnātae quiētem capiunt. Tertium est genus eōrum quī ūrī appellantur. Hī sunt paulō minōrēs elephantīs.  16 Magna vis eōrum est et magna vēlōcitās. Neque hominī neque ferae parcunt.  17”

1. Observe that all these infinitives are in indirect statements after certior fīēbat, he was informed, and cognōscēbat, he learned. Cf. § 501.48, 49.

2. inter sē, to each other.

3. proficīscī, mittere. These infinitives depend upon cōnstituit.

4. Before beginning a campaign, food had to be provided. Every fifteen days grain was distributed. Each soldier received about two pecks. This he carried in his pack, and this constituted his food, varied occasionally by what he could find by foraging.

5. Abl. of personal agent, § 501. 33.

6. cōpiās cōgendī, § 501. 37. 1.

7. darētur, audēret, § 501. 43. audēret is not from audiō.

8. cum ... morārētur, § 501. 46.

9. ut ... posset, ... scīret, § 501. 43.

10. Ille, subj. of inquit.

11. huius Germāniae, of this part of Germany.

12. quī ... scīat ... adierit, § 501. 45.

13. ūnum, only one.

14. crūrum, from crūs.

15. prō, for, in place of.

16. elephantīs, § 501. 34.

17. parcunt. What case is used with this verb?

LXXIII. THE STORMING OF A CITY

Pūblius plūrīs diēs in Germāniā morātus  1 in Galliam rediit, et ad Caesaris castra sē contulit. Ille quia molestē ferēbat Gallōs  2 eius regiōnis obsidēs dare recūsāvisse et exercituī frūmentum praebēre nōluisse, cōnstituit eīs  3 bellum īnferre. Agrīs vāstātīs, vīcīs incēnsīs, pervēnit ad oppidum validissimum quod et nātūrā et arte mūnītum erat. Cingēbātur mūrō vīgintī quīnque pedēs  4 altō. Ā lateribus duōsitum, praeruptō fastīgiō ad plānitiem vergēgat; ā quārtō tantum  5 latere aditus erat facilis. Hoc oppidum oppugnāre,   6cum opus esset difficillimum, tamen cōnstituit Caesar. Et castrīs mūnītīs Pūbliō negōtium dedit ut rēs   7ad oppugnandum necessāriās parāret.

VINEA

Rōmānōrum autem oppugnātiō est haec.  8 Prīmum turrēs aedificantur quibus mīlitēs in summum mūrum ēvādere possint  9; vīneae  10 fīunt quibus tēctī mīlitēs ad mūrum succēdant; pluteī  11 parantur post quōs mīlitēs tormenta  12 administrent; sunt quoque arietēs quī mūrum et portās discutiant. Hīs omnibus rēbus comparātīs, deinde   13agger ab eā parte ubi aditus est facillimus exstruitur et cum vīneīs ad ipsum oppidum agitur. Tum turris in aggere prōmovētur; arietibus quī sub vīneīs conlocātī erant mūrus et portae discutiuntur; ballistīs, catapultīs, reliquīsque tormentīs lapidēs et tēla in oppidum coniciuntur. Postrēmō cum iam turris et agger altitūdinem mūrī adaequant et arietēs moenia perfrēgērunt,  14 signō datō mīlitēs inruunt et oppidum expugnant.

1. morātus. Is this part. active or passive in meaning?

2. Gallōs, subj. acc. of the infins. recūsāvisse and nōluisse. The indirect statement depends upon molestē ferēbat.

3. eīs, § 501. 15.

4. pedēs, § 501. 21.

5. tantum, adv. only.

6. cum ... esset, a clause of concession, § 501. 46.

7. ad oppugnandum, a gerund expressing purpose.

8. haec, as follows.

9. possint, subjv. of purpose. Three similar constructions follow.

10. vīneae. These vīneae were wooden sheds, open in front and rear, used to protect men who were working to take a fortification. They were about eight feet high, of like width, and double that length, covered with raw hides to protect them from being set on fire, and moved on wheels or rollers.

11. pluteī, large screens or shields with small wheels attached to them. These were used to protect besiegers while moving up to a city or while serving the engines of war.

12. tormenta. The engines of war were chiefly the catapult for shooting great arrows, and the ballista, for hurling large stones. They had a range of about two thousand feet and were very effective.

13. The agger, or mound, was of chief importance in a siege. It was begun just out of reach of the missiles of the enemy, and then gradually extended towards the point to be attacked. At the same time its height gradually increased until on a level with the top of the wall, or even higher. It was made of earth and timber, and had covered galleries running through it for the use of the besiegers. Over or beside the agger a tower was moved up to the wall, often with a battering-ram (aries) in the lowest story. (See picture, p. 221.)

14. perfrēgērunt, from perfringō.

LXXIV. THE CITY IS TAKEN · THE CAPTIVES ARE QUESTIONED

BALLISTA

Omnibus rēbus necessāriīs ad oppugnandum ā Pūbliō comparātīs, dēlīberātur in conciliō quod cōnsilium   1oppidī expugnandī ineant.  2 Tum ūnus  3 ex centuriōnibus, vir reī mīlitāris perītissimus, “Ego suādeō,” inquit, “ut ab eā parte, ubi aditus sit  4 facillimus, aggerem exstruāmus  5 et turrim prōmoveāmus  5 atque ariete admōtō simul mūrum discutere cōnēmur.  5”   6Hoc cōnsilium cum omnibus placēret, Caesar concilium dīmīsit. Deinde mīlitēs hortātus ut priōrēs victōriās memoriā  7 tenērent, iussit aggerem exstruī, turrim et arietem admovērī. Neque oppidānīs  8 cōnsilium dēfuit. Aliī ignem et omne genus tēlōrum dē mūrō in turrim coniēcērunt, aliī ingentia saxa in vīneās et arietem dēvolvērunt. Diū utrimque ācerrimē pugnātum est. Nē vulnerātī quidem pedem rettulērunt. Tandem,   9dē tertiā vigiliā, Pūblius, quem Caesar illī operī  10 praefēcerat, nūntiāvit partem  11 mūrī ictibus arietis labefactam concidisse. Quā rē audītā Caesar signum dat; mīlitēs inruunt et magnā cum caede hostium oppidum capiunt.

1. oppidī expugnandī. Is this a gerund or a gerundive construction? Cf. § 501. 37.

2. ineant. § 501. 50.

3. ūnus. subj. of inquit.

4. sit. This is a so-called subjunctive by attraction, which means that the clause beginning with ubi stands in such close connection with the subjv. clause beginning with ut, that its verb is attracted into the same mood.

5. All these verbs are in the same construction.

6. Hoc cōnsilium, subj. of placēret. For the order cf. Haec cum, etc., p. 215, l. 22, and note; Id imperātor cum, p. 217, l. 8.

7. memoriā, abl. of means.

8. oppidānīs, § 501. 15.

9. Between twelve and three o’clock in the morning. The night was divided into four watches.

10. operī, § 501. 15.

11. partem, subj. acc. of concidisse.

TURRES, ARIETES, VINEA

Postrīdiē eius diēī, hōc oppidō expugnātō,   12captīvōrum quī nōbilissimī sunt ad imperātōrem ante praetōrium  13 addūcuntur. Ipse, lōrīcā aurātā et paludāmentō purpureō īnsignis, captīvōs per interpretem in hunc modum interrogat:  14 Vōs quī estis  15?

INTERPRES. Rogat imperātor quī sītis.

CAPTĪVĪ. Fīliī rēgis sumus.

INTERPRES. Dīcunt sē fīliōs esse rēgis.

IMPERĀTOR. Cūr mihi tantās iniūriās intulistis?

INTERPRES. Rogat cūr sibi tantās iniūriās intuleritis.

CAPTĪVĪ. Iniūriās eī nōn intulimus sed prō patriā bellum gessimus. Semper voluimus Rōmānīs esse amīcī, sed Rōmānī sine causā nōs domō patriāque expellere cōnātī sunt.

INTERPRES.   16Negant sē iniūriās tibi intulisse, sed prō patriā bellum gessisse.   17Semper sē voluisse amīcōs Rōmānīs esse, sed Rōmānōs sine causā sē domō patriāque expellere cōnātōs esse.

IMPERĀTOR.   18Manēbitisne in reliquum tempus in fidē, hāc rebelliōne condōnātā?

Tum vērō captīvī multīs cum lacrimīs iūrāvērunt sē in fidē mānsūrōs esse, et Caesar eōs incolumīs domum dīmīsit.

12. captīvōrum ... sunt, the noblest of the captives.

13. The general’s headquarters.

14. Study carefully these direct questions, indirect questions, and indirect statements.

15. See Plate III, p. 148.

16. Negant, etc., they say that they have not, etc. Negant is equivalent to dīcunt nōn, and the negative modifies intulisse, but not the remainder of the indirect statement.

17. Semper, etc., that they have always, etc.

18. Manēbitisne in fidē, will you remain loyal?

LXXV. CIVIL WAR BREAKS OUT BETWEEN CÆSAR AND POMPEY · THE BATTLE OF PHARSALIA

Nē cōnfectō  1 quidem bellō Gallicō,   2bellum cīvīle inter Caesarem et Pompēium exortum est. Nam Pompēius, quī summum imperium petēbat, senātuī persuāserat ut Caesarem reī pūblicae hostem  3 iūdicāret et exercitum eius dīmittī iubēret. Quibus cognitīs rēbus Caesar exercitum suum dīmittere recūsāvit, atque, hortātus mīlitēs ut ducem totiēns victōrem ab inimīcōrum iniūriīs dēfenderent, imperāvit ut sē Rōmam sequerentur. Summā cum alacritāte mīlitēs pāruērunt, et trānsitō Rubicōne  4 initium bellī cīvīlis factum est.

Italiae urbēs quidem omnēs ferē   5rēbus Caesaris favēbant et eum benignē excēpērunt. Quā rē commōtus Pompēius ante Caesaris adventum Rōmā excessit et Brundisium  6 pervēnit, inde   7paucīs post diēbus cum omnibus cōpiīs ad Ēpīrum mare trānsiit. Eum Caesar cum septem legiōnibus et quīngentīs equitibus secūtus est, et īnsignis inter Caesaris comitātum erat Pūblius.

Plūribus leviōribus proeliīs factīs, tandem cōpiae adversae ad Pharsālum  8 in Thessaliā sitam castra posuērunt. Cum Pompeī exercitus esset bis tantus quantus Caesaris, tamen erant multī quī veterānās legiōnēs quae Gallōs et Germānōs superāverant vehementer timēbant. Quōs  9   10ante proelium commissum Labiēnus  11 lēgātus, quī ab Caesare nūper dēfēcerat, ita adlocūtus est: “  12Nōlīte exīstimāre hunc esse exercitum veterānōrum mīlitum. Omnibus interfuī proeliīs  13 neque temerē incognitam rem prōnūntiō. Perexigua pars illīus exercitūs quī Gallōs superāvit adhūc superest. Magna pars occīsa est, multī domum discessērunt, multī sunt relictī in Italiā. Hae cōpiae quās vidētis in   14citeriōre Galliā nūper cōnscrīptae sunt.” Haec  15 cum dīxisset, iūrāvit sē nisi victōrem in castra nōn reversūrum esse.   16Hoc idem Pompēius et omnēs reliquī iūrāvērunt, et magnā spē et laetitiā, sīcut certam ad victōriam, cōpiae ē castrīs exiērunt.

Item Caesar, animō  17 ad dīmicandum parātus, exercitum suum ēdūxit et septem cohortibus   18praesidiō castrīs relictīs cōpiās triplicī aciē īnstrūxit. Tum, mīlitibus studiō pugnae ārdentibus, tubā signum dedit. Mīlitēs prōcurrērunt et pīlīs missīs gladiōs strīnxērunt. Neque vērō virtūs hostibus dēfuit. Nam et tēla missa sustinuērunt et impetum gladiōrum excēpērunt et ōrdinēs cōnservāvērunt. Utrimque diū et ācriter pugnātum est nec quisquam pedem rettulit. Tum equitēs Pompēī aciem Caesaris circumīre cōnātī sunt. Quod  19 ubi Caesar animadvertit, tertiam aciem,  20 quae ad id tempus quiēta fuerat, prōcurrere iussit. Tum vērō integrōrum impetum  21 dēfessī hostēs sustinēre nōn potuērunt et omnēs terga vertērunt. Sed Pompēius dē fortūnīs suīs dēspērāns sē in castra equō contulit, inde mox cum paucīs equitibus effūgit.

1. With nē ... quidem the emphatic word stands between the two.

2. The Civil War was caused by the jealousy and rivalry between Cæsar and Pompey. It resulted in the defeat and subsequent death of Pompey and the elevation of Cæsar to the lordship of the Roman world.

3. hostem, predicate accusative, § 501. 22.

4. The Rubicon was a small stream in northern Italy that marked the boundary of Cæsar’s province. By crossing it with an armed force Cæsar declared war upon Pompey and the existing government. Cæsar crossed the Rubicon early in the year 49 B.C.

5. rēbus Caesaris favēbant, favored Cæsar’s side. In what case is rēbus?

6. Brundisium, a famous port in southern Italy whence ships sailed for Greece and the East. See map.

7. paucīs post diēbus, a few days later; literally, afterguards by a few days. Cf. paucīs ante annīs, p. 213, l. 12, and note.

7. The battle of Pharsalia was fought on August 9, 48 B.C. In importance it ranks as one of the great battles of the world.

8. Quōs, obj. of adlocūtus est.

10. ante proelium commissum, before the beginning of the battle.

11. Labiēnus, Cæsar’s most faithful and skillful lieutenant in the Gallic War. On the outbreak of the Civil War, in 49 B.C., he deserted Cæsar and joined Pompey. His defection caused the greatest joy among the Pompeian party; but he disappointed the expectations of his new friends, and never accomplished anything of importance. He fought against his old commander in several battles and was slain at the battle of Munda in Spain, 45 B.C.

12. Nōlīte exīstimāre, don´t think.

13. proeliīs, § 501. 15.

14. citeriōre Galliā. This name is applied to Cisalpine Gaul, or Gaul south of the Alps.

15. Haec, obj. of dīxisset.

16. Hoc idem, obj. of iūrāvērunt.

17. animō, § 501. 30.

18. praesidiō castrīs, § 501. 17.

19. Quod, obj. of animadvertit.

20. aciem, subj. of prōcurrere.

21. impetum, obj. of sustinēre.

LXXVI. THE TRIUMPH OF CAESAR

SIGNIFER

Pompēiō amīcīsque eius superātīs atque omnibus hostibus ubīque victīs, Caesar imperātor Rōmam rediit et   1extrā moenia urbis in campō Mārtiō castra posuit. Tum vērō amplissimīs honōribus adfectus est. Dictātor creātus est, et eī triumphus ā senātū est dēcrētus.   2Quō diē de Gallīs triumphum ēgit, tanta multitūdō hominum in urbem undique cōnflūxit   3ut omnia loca essent cōnferta. Templa patēbant, ārae fūmābant, columnae sertīs ōrnātae erant.   4Cum vērō pompa urbem intrāret, quantus hominum fremitus ortus est! Prīmum per portam ingressī sunt senātus et magistrātūs. Secūtī sunt tībīcinēs, signiferī, peditēs laureā corōnātī canentēs: “Ecce Caesar nunc triumphat, quī subēgit Galliam,” et “Mīlle, mīlle, mīlle, mīlle Gallōs trucīdāvimus.” Multī praedam captārum urbium portābant, arma, omnia bellī īnstrūmenta. Secūtī sunt equitēs, animōsīs atque splendidissimē ōrnātīs equīs vectī, inter quōs Pūblius adulēscēns fortissimus habēbātur. Addūcēbantur taurī, arietēs,   5quī dīs immortālibus immolārentur. Ita longō agmine prōgrediēns exercitus   6sacrā viā per forum in Capitōlium perrēxit.

LICTORES CUM FASCIBUS

Imperātor ipse cum urbem intrāret, undique laetō clāmōre multitūdinis salūtātus est. Stābat in currū aureō quem quattuor albī equī vehēbant. Indūtus   7togā pictā, alterā manū habēnās et lauream tenēbat, alterā eburneum scēptrum. Post eum servus in currū stāns auream corōnam super caput eius tenēbat. Ante currum miserrimī captīvī, rēgēs prīncipēsque superātārum gentium, catēnīs vīnctī, prōgrediēbantur; et vīgintī quattuor līctōrēs  8 laureatās fascīs ferentēs et signiferī currum Caesaris comitābantur. Conclūdit agmen multitūdō captīvōrum, quī, in servitūtem redāctī,  9 dēmissō vultū, vīnctīs  10 bracchiīs, sequuntur; quibuscum veniunt longissimō ōrdine mīlitēs, etiam hī praedam vel insignia mīlitāria ferentēs.

Caesar cum Capitōlium ascendisset, in templō Iovī Capitōlīnō sacra fēcit. Simul  11 captivōrum quī nōbilissimī erant, abductī in carcerem,  12 interfectī sunt. Sacrīs factīs Caesar dē Capitōliō dēscendit et in forō mīitibus suīs honōrēs mīlitārīs dedit eīsque pecūniam ex bellī praedā distribuit.

Hīs omnibus rēbus cōnfectīs, Pūblius Caesarem valēre  13 iussit et quam celerrimē ad vīllam contendit ut patrem mātremque salūtāret.

15Dē rēbus gestīs P. Cornēlī Lentulī hāctenus.

1. A victorious general with his army was not allowed to enter the city until the day of his triumph. A triumph was the greatest of all military honors.

2. Quō diē, on the day that, abl. of time.

3. ut ... essent, § 501. 43.

4. Cum ... intrāret, § 501. 46.

5. quī ... immolārentur, § 501. 40.

6. The Sacred Way was a noted street running along one side of the Forum to the base of the Capitoline Hill, on whose summit stood the magnificent temple of Jupiter Capitolinus. This route was always followed by triumphal processions.

7. The toga picta worn by a general in his triumph was a splendid robe of Tyrian purple covered with golden stars. See Plate IV, p. 213.

8. The lictors were a guard of honor that attended the higher magistrates and made a way for them through the streets. On their shoulders they carried the fasces, a bundle of rods with an ax in the middle, symbolizing the power of the law.

9. dēmissō vultū, with downcast countenance.

10. vīnctīs, from vinciō.

12. Simul, etc., At the same time those of the captives who were the noblest.

12. The prison was a gloomy dungeon on the lower slopes of the Capitoline Hill.

13. valēre iussit, bade farewell to.

14. This sentence marks the end of the story.

APPENDIX I

DECLENSIONS, CONJUGATIONS, NUMERALS, ETC.

NOUNS

460. Nouns are inflected in five declensions, distinguished by the final letter of the stem and by the termination of the genitive singular.

FIRST DECLENSION—Ā-stems, Gen. Sing. -ae

SECOND DECLENSION—O-stems, Gen. Sing. -ī

THIRD DECLENSION—Consonant stems and I-stems, Gen. Sing. -is

FOURTH DECLENSION—U-stems, Gen. Sing. -ūs

FIFTH DECLENSION—Ē-stems, Gen. Sing. -ē̆ī

461.             FIRST DECLENSION. Ā-STEMS

domina, lady   STEM dominā-   BASE domin-

SINGULAR

PLURAL

TERMINATIONS

TERMINATIONS

Nom.

domina

-a

dominae

-ae

Gen.

dominae

-ae

dominārum

-ārum

Dat.

dominae

-ae

dominīs

-īs

Acc.

dominam

-am

dominās

-ās

Abl.

dominā

-ā

dominīs

-īs

a. Dea and fīlia have the termination -ābus in the dative and ablative plural.

462.             SECOND DECLENSION. O-STEMS

a. MASCULINES IN -us

dominus, master   STEM domino-   BASE domin-

SINGULAR

PLURAL

TERMINATIONS

TERMINATIONS

Nom.

dominus

-us

dominī

-ī

Gen.

dominī

-ī

dominōrum

-ōrum

Dat.

dominō

-ō

dominīs

-īs

Acc.

dominum

-um

dominōs

-ōs

Abl.

dominō

-ō

dominīs

-īs

1. Nouns in -us of the second declension have the termination -e´ in the vocative singular, as domine.

2. Proper names in -ius, and filius, end in -ī in the vocative singular, and the accent rests on the penult, as Vergi´lī, fīlī.

b. NEUTERS IN -um

pīlum, spear   STEM   pīlo- BASE pīl-

SINGULAR

PLURAL

TERMINATIONS

TERMINATIONS

Nom.

pīlum

-um

pīla

-a

Gen.

pīlī

-ī

pīlōrum

-ōrum

Dat.

pīlō

-ō

pīlīs

-īs

Acc.

pīlum

-um

pīla

-a

Abl.

pīlō

-ō

pīlīs

-īs

1. Masculines in -ius and neuters in -ium end in -ī in the genitive singular, not in -iī, and the accent rests on the penult.

c. MASCULINES IN -er AND -ir

puer, boy

ager, field

vir, man

STEMS

puero-

agro-

viro-

BASES

puer-

agr-

vir-

SINGULAR

TERMINATIONS

Nom.

puer

ager

vir

—

Gen.

puerī

agrī

virī

-ī

Dat.

puerō

agrō

virō

-ō

Acc.

puerum

agrum

virum

-um

Abl.

puerō

agrō

virō

-ō

PLURAL

Nom.

puerī

agrī

virī

-ī

Gen.

puerō  rum

agrō  rum

virō  rum

-ō  rum

Dat.

puerī  s

agrī  s

virī  s

-ī  s

Acc.

puerō  s

agrō  s

virō  s

-ō  s

Abl.

puerī  s

agrī  s

virī  s

-ī  s

463.             THIRD DECLENSION.

CLASSIFICATION

I. CONSONANT STEMS

1. Stems that add -s to the base to form the nominative singular: masculines and feminines only.

2. Stems that add no termination in the nominitive singular:   a. masculines and feminines; b. neuters.

II. I-STEMS.

Masculines, feminines, and neuters.

464.             I. CONSONANT STEMS

all capped in fact

1. Nouns that add -s to the base to form the nominative singular: masculines and feminines only

prīnceps, m., chief

mīles, m., soldier

lapis, m., stone

BASES OR

STEMS

prīncip-

mīlit-

lapid-

SINGULAR

TERMINATIONS

Nom.

prīnceps

mīles

lapis

-s

Gen.

prīn´cipis

mīlitis

lapidis

-is

Dat.

prīn´cipī

mīlitī

lapidī

-ī

Acc.

prīn´cipem

mīlitem

lapidem

-em

Abl.

prīn´cipe

mīlite

lapide

-e

PLURAL

Nom.

prīn´cipēs

mīlitēs

lapidēs

-ēs

Gen.

prīn´cipum

mīlitum

lapidum

-um

Dat.

prīnci´pibus

mīlitibus

lapidibus

-ibus

Acc.

prīn´cipēs

mīlitēs

lapidēs

-ēs

Abl.

prīnci´pibus

mīlitibus

lapidibus

-ibus

rēx, m., king

iūdex, m., judge

virtūs, f., manliness

BASES OR

STEMS

rēg-

iūdic-

virtūt-

Nom.

rēx

iūdex

virtūs

-s

Gen.

rēgis

iūdicis

virtū´tis

-is

Dat.

rēgī

iūdicī

virtū´tī

-ī

Acc.

rēgem

iūdicem

virtū´tem

-em

Abl.

rēge

iūdice

virtū´te

-e

PLURAL

Nom.

rēgēs

iūdicēs

virtū´tēs

-ēs

Gen.

rēgum

iūdicum

virtū´tum

-um

Dat.

rēgibus

iūdicibus

virtū´tibus

-ibus

Acc.

rēgēs

iūdicēs

virtū´tēs

-ēs

Abl.

rēgibus

iūdicibus

virtū´tibus

-ibus

NOTE. For consonant changes in the nominative singular, cf. § 233. 3.

2. Nouns that have no termination in the nominative singular

a. MASCULINES AND FEMININES

cōnsul, m., consul

legiō, f., legion

ōrdō, m., row

pater, m., father

BASES OR

STEMS

cōnsul-

legiōn-

ōrdin-

patr-

SINGULAR

TERMINATIONS

Nom.

cōnsul

legiō

ōrdō

pater

—

Gen.

cōnsulis

legiōnis

ōrdinis

patris

-is

Dat.

cōnsulī

legiōnī

ōrdinī

patrī

-ī

Acc.

cōnsulem

legiōnem

ōrdinem

patrem

-em

Abl.

cōnsule

legiōne

ōrdine

patre

-e

PLURAL

Nom.

cōnsulēs

legiōnēs

ōrdinēs

patrēs

-ēs

Gen.

cōnsulum

legiōnum

ōrdinum

patrum

-um

Dat.

cōnsulibus

legiōnibus

ōrdinibus

patribus

-ibus

Acc.

cōnsulēs

legiōnēs

ōrdinēs

patrēs

-ēs

Abl.

cōnsulibus

legiōnibus

ōrdinibus

patribus

-ibus

NOTE. For vowel and consonant changes in the nominative singular, cf. § 236. 1-3.

b. NEUTERS

flūmen, n., river

tempus, n., time

opus, n., work

caput, n., head

BASES OR

STEMS

flūmin-

tempor-

oper-

capit-

SINGULAR

TERMINATIONS

Nom.

flūmen

tempus

opus

caput

—

Gen.

flūminis

temporis

operis

capitis   -is

-is

Dat.

flūminī

temporī

operī

capitī

-ī

Acc.

flūmen

tempus

opus

caput

—

Abl.

flūmine

tempore

opere

capite

-e

PLURAL

Nom.

flūmina

tempora

opera

capita

-a

Gen.

flūminum

temporum

operum

capitum

-um

Dat.

flūminibus

temporibus

operibus

capitibus

-ibus

Acc.

flūmina

tempora

opera

capita

-a

Abl.

flūminibus

temporibus

operibus

capitibus

-ibus

NOTE. For vowel and consonant changes in the nominative singular, cf. § 238. 2, 3.

465.             II. I-STEMS

a. MASCULINES AND FEMININES

caedēs, f., slaughter

hostis, m., enemy

urbs, f., city

cliēns, m., retainer

STEMS

caedi-

hosti-

urbi-

clienti-

BASES

caed-

host-

urb-

client-

SINGULAR

TERMINATIONS

Nom.

caedēs

hostis

urbs

cliēns

-s, -is, or -ēs

Gen.

caedis

hostis

urbis

clientis

-is

Dat.

caedī

hostī

urbī

clientī

-ī

Acc.

caedem

hostem

urbem

clientem

-em (-im  )

Abl.

caede

hoste

urbe

cliente

-e (-ī  )

PLURAL

Nom.

caedēs

hostēs

urbēs

clientēs

-ēs

Gen.

caedium

hostium

urbium

clientium

-ium

Dat.

caedibus

hostibus

urbibus

clientibus

-ibus

Acc.

caedīs, -ēs

hostīs, -ēs

urbīs, -ēs

clientīs, -ēs

-īs, -ēs

Abl.

caedibus

hostibus

urbibus

clientibus

-ibus

1. Avis, cīvis, fīnis, ignis, nāvis, have the abl. sing. in -ī or -e.

2. Turris has accusative turrim and ablative turrī or turre.

b. NEUTERS

īnsigne, n., decoration

animal, n., animal

calcar, n., spur

STEMS

īnsigni-

animāli-

calcāri-

BASES

īnsign-

animāl-

calcār-

SINGULAR

TERMINATIONS

Nom.

īnsigne

animal

calcar

-e or   —

Gen.

īnsignis

animālis

calcāris

-is

Dat.

īnsignī

animālī

calcārī

-ī

Acc.

īnsigne

animal

calcar

-e or   —

Abl.

īnsignī

animālī

calcārī

-ī

PLURAL

Nom.

īnsignia

animālia

calcāria

-ia

Gen.

īnsignium

animālium

calcārium

-ium

Dat.

īnsignibus

animālibus

calcāribus

-ibus

Acc.

īnsignia

animālia

calcāria

-ia

Abl.

īnsignibus

animālibus

calcāribus

-ibus

466.             THE FOURTH DECLENSION. U-STEMS

adventus, m., arrival

cornū, n., horn

STEMS

adventu-

cornu-

BASES

advent-

corn-

SINGULAR

TERMINATIONS

MASC.

NEUT.

Nom.

adventus

cornū

-us

-ū

Gen.

adventūs

cornūs

-ūs

-ūs

Dat.

adventuī (ū  )

cornū

-uī (ū  )

-ū

Acc.

adventum

cornū

-um

-ū

Abl.

adventū

cornū

-ū

-ū

PLURAL

Nom.

adventūs

cornua

-ūs

-ua

Gen.

adventuum

cornuum

-uum

-uum

Dat.

adventibus

cornibus

-ibus

-ibus

Acc.

adventūs

cornua

-ūs

-ua

Abl.

adventibus

cornibus

-ibus

-ibus

467.             THE FIFTH DECLENSION. Ē-STEMS

diēs, m., day

rēs, f. thing

STEMS

diē-

rē-

BASES

di-

r-

SINGULAR

TERMINATIONS

Nom.

diēs

rēs

-ēs

Gen.

diēī

reī

-ē̆ī

Dat.

diēī

reī

-ē̆ī

Acc.

diem

rem

-em

Abl.

diē

rē

-ē

PLURAL

Nom.

diēs

rēs

-ēs

Gen.

diērum

rērum

-ērum

Dat.

diēbus

rēbus

-ēbus

Acc.

diēs

rēs

-ēs

Abl.

diēbus

rēbus

-ēbus

468.             SPECIAL PARADIGMS

deus, m., god

domus, f., house

vīs, f., strength

iter, n., way

STEMS

deo-

domu-

vī- and vīri-

iter- and itiner-

BASES

de-

dom-

v- and vīr-

iter- and itiner-

SINGULAR

Nom.

deus

domus

vīs

iter

Gen.

deī

domūs

vīs   (rare)

itineris

Dat.

deō

domuī, -ō

vī   (rare)

itinerī

Acc.

deum

domum

vim

iter

Abl.

deō

domō, -ū

vī

itinere

PLURAL

Nom.

deī, dī

domūs

vīrēs

itinera

Gen.

deōrum, deum

domuum, -ōrum

vīrium

itinerum

Dat.

deīs, dīs

domibus

vīribus

itineribus

Acc.

deōs

domōs, -ūs

vīrīs, -ēs

itinera

Abl.

deīs, dīs

domibus

vīribus

itineribus

a. The vocative singular of deus is like the nominative.

b. The locative of domus is domī.

ADJECTIVES

469.             FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. O- AND Ā-STEMS

a. ADJECTIVES IN -us

bonus, good   STEMS bono- m. and n., bona- f.   BASE bon-

SINGULAR

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

bonus

bona

bonum

Gen.

bonī

bonae

bonī

Dat.

bonō

bonae

bonō

Acc.

bonum

bonam

bonum

Abl.

bonō

bonā

bonō

PLURAL

Nom.

bonī

bonae

bona

Gen.

bonōrum

bonārum

bonōrum

Dat.

bonīs

bonīs

bonīs

Acc.

bonōs

bonās

bona

Abl.

bonīs

bonīs

bonīs

b. ADJECTIVES IN -er

līber, free   STEMS lībero- m. and n., līberā- f.   BASE līber-

SINGULAR

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

līber

lībera

līberum

Gen.

līberī

līberae

līberī

Dat.

līberō

līberae

līberō

Acc.

līberum

līberam

līberum

Abl.

līberō

līberā

līberō

PLURAL

Nom.

līberī

līberae

lībera

Gen.

līberōrum

līberārum

līberōrum

Dat.

līberīs

līberīs

līberīs

Acc.

līberōs

līberās

lībera

Abl.

līberīs

līberīs

līberīs

pulcher, pretty   STEMS pulchro- m. and n., pulchrā- f.   BASE pulchr-

SINGULAR

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

pulcher

pulchra

pulchrum

Gen.

pulchrī

pulchrae

pulchrī

Dat.

pulchrō

pulchrae

pulchrō

Acc.

pulchrum

pulchram

pulchrum

Abl.

pulchrō

pulchrā

pulchrō

PLURAL

Nom.

pulchrī

pulchrae

pulchra

Gen.

pulchrōrum

pulchrārum

pulchrōrum

Dat.

pulchrīs

pulchrīs

pulchrīs

Acc.

pulchrōs

pulchrās

pulchra

Abl.

pulchrīs

pulchrīs

pulchrīs

470.             THE NINE IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES

alius, another   STEMS alio- m. and n., aliā- f.   BASE ali-

SINGULAR

PLURAL

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

alius

alia

aliud

aliī

aliae

alia

Gen.

alīus

alīus

alīus

aliōrum

aliārum

aliōrum

Dat.

aliī

aliī

aliī

aliīs

aliīs

aliīs

Acc.

alium

aliam

aliud

aliōs

aliās

alia

Abl.

aliō

aliā

aliō

aliīs

aliīs

aliīs

ūnus, one, only   STEMS ūno- m. and n., ūnā- f.   BASE ūn-

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

ūnus

ūna

ūnum

ūnī

ūnae

ūna

Gen.

ūnīus

ūnīus

ūnīus

ūnōrum

ūnārum

ūnōrum

Dat.

ūnī

ūnī

ūnī

ūnīs

ūnīs

ūnīs

Acc.

ūnum

ūnam

ūnum

ūnōs

ūnās

ūna

Abl.

ūnō

ūnā

ūnō

ūnīs

ūnīs

ūnīs

a. For the complete list see § 108.

471.             ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. I-STEMS

I. THREE ENDINGS

ācer, ācris, ācre, keen, eager

STEM ācri-   BASE ācr-

SINGULAR

PLURAL

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

ācer

ācris

ācre

ācrēs

ācrēs

ācria

Gen.

ācris

ācris

ācris

ācrium

ācrium

ācrium

Dat.

ācrī

ācrī

ācrī

ācribus

ācribus

ācribus

Acc.

ācrem

ācrem

ācre

ācrīs, -ēs

ācrīs, -ēs

ācria

Abl.

ācrī

ācrī

ācrī

ācribus

ācribus

ācribus

II. TWO ENDINGS

omnis, omne, every, all

STEM omni-   BASE omn-

SINGULAR

PLURAL

MASC. AND FEM.

NEUT.

MASC. AND FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

omnis

omne

omnēs

omnia

Gen.

omnis

omnis

omnium

omnium

Dat.

omnī

omnī

omnibus

omnibus

Acc.

omnem

omne

omnīs, -ēs

omnia

Abl.

omnī

omnī

omnibus

omnibus

III. ONE ENDING

pār, equal   STEM pari-   BASE par-

SINGULAR

PLURAL

MASC. AND FEM.

NEUT.

MASC. AND FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

pār

pār

parēs

paria

Gen.

paris

paris

parium

parium

Dat.

parī

parī

paribus

paribus

Acc.

parem

pār

parīs, -ēs

paria

Abl.

parī

parī

paribus

paribus

1. Observe that all i-stem adjectives have -ī in the ablative singular.

This sentence appears to be a footnote, but there is no footnote tag on the page.

472.             PRESENT ACTIVE PARTICIPLES

amāns, loving   STEM amanti-   BASE amant-

SINGULAR

PLURAL

MASC. AND FEM.

NEUT.

MASC. AND FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

amāns

amāns

amantēs

amantia

Gen.

amantis

amantis

amantium

amantium

Dat.

amantī

amantī

amantibus

amantibus

Acc.

amantem

amāns

amantīs, -ēs

amantia

Abl.

amante, -ī

amante, -ī

amantibus

amantibus

iēns, going   STEM ienti-, eunti-   BASE ient-, eunt-

Nom.

iēns

iēns

euntēs

euntia

Gen.

euntis

euntis

euntium

euntium

Dat.

euntī

euntī

euntibus

euntibus

Acc.

euntem

iēns

euntīs, -ēs

euntia

Abl.

eunte, -ī

eunte, -ī

euntibus

euntibus

473.             REGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES

POSITIVE

COMPARATIVE

SUPERLATIVE

MASC.

MASC. AND FEM.

NEUT.

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

altus (alto-)

altior

altius

altissimus

-a

-um

līber (lībero-)

līberior

līberius

līberrimus

-a

-um

pulcher (pulchro-)

pulchrior

pulchrius

pulcherrimus

-a

-um

audāx (audāci-)

audācior

audācius

audācissimus

-a

-um

brevis (brevi-)

brevior

brevius

brevissimus

-a

-um

ācer (ācri-)

ācrior

ācrius

ācerrimus

-a

-um

474.             DECLENSION OF COMPARATIVES

altior, higher

SINGULAR

PLURAL

MASC. AND FEM.

NEUT.

MASC. AND FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

altior

altius

altiōrēs

altiōra

Gen.

altiōris

altiōris

altiōrum

altiōrum

Dat.

altiōrī

altiōrī

altiōribus

altiōribus

Acc.

altiōrem

altius

altiōrēs

altiōra

Abl.

altiōre

altiōre

altiōribus

altiōribus

plūs, more

Nom.

——

plūs

plūrēs

plūra

Gen.

——

plūris

plūrium

plūrium

Dat.

——

——

plūribus

plūribus

Acc.

——

plūs

plūrīs (-ēs  )

plūra

Abl.

——

plūre

plūribus

plūribus

475.             IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES

POSITIVE

COMPARATIVE

SUPERLATIVE

bonus, -a, -um, good

melior, melius, better

optimus, -a, -um, best

malus, -a, -um, bad

peior, peius, worse

pessimus, -a, -um, worst

magnus, -a, -um, great

maior, maius, greater

maximus, -a, -um, greatest

multus, -a, -um, much

——, plūs, more

plūrimus, -a, -um, most

parvus, -a, -um, small

minor, minus, smaller

minimus, -a, -um, smallest

senex, senis, old

senior

maximus   nātū

iuvenis, -e, young

iūnior

minimus   nātū

vetus, veteris, old

vetustior, -ius

veterrimus, -a, -um

facilis, -e, easy

facilior, -ius

facillimus, -a, -um

difficilis, -e, difficult

difficilior, -ius

difficillimus, -a, -um

similis, -e, similar

similior, -ius

simillimus, -a, -um

dissimilis, -e, dissimilar

dissimilior, -ius

dissimillimus, -a, -um

humilis, -e, low

humilior, -ius

humillimus, -a, -um

gracilis, -e, slender

gracilior, -ius

gracillimus, -a, -um

exterus, outward

exterior, outer, exterior

extrēmus

extimus

outermost, last

īnferus, below

īnferior, lower

īnfimus

īmus

lowest

posterus, following

posterior, later

postrēmus

postumus

last

superus, above

superior, higher

suprēmus

summus

highest

[cis, citrā, on this side  ]

citerior, hither

citimus, hithermost

[in, intrā, in, within  ]

interior, inner

intimus, inmost

[prae, prō, before  ]

prior, former

prīmus, first

[prope, near  ]

propior, nearer

proximus, next

[ultrā, beyond  ]

ulterior, further

ultimus, furthest

476.             REGULAR COMPARISON OF ADVERBS

POSITIVE

COMPARATIVE

SUPERLATIVE

cārē (cārus), dearly

cārius

cārissimē

miserē (miser), wretchedly

miserius

miserrimē

ācriter (ācer), sharply

ācrius

ācerrimē

facile (facilis), easily

facilius

facillimē

477.             IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADVERBS

POSITIVE

COMPARATIVE

SUPERLATIVE

diū, long, a long time

diūtius

diūtissimē

bene (bonus), well

melius, better

optimē, best

male (malus), ill

peius, worse

pessimē, worst

magnopere, greatly

magis, more

maximē, most

multum (multus), much

plūs, more

plūrimum, most

parum, little

minus, less

minimē, least

saepe, often

saepīus

saepissimē

478.             NUMERALS

The cardinal numerals are indeclinable excepting ūnus, duo, trēs, the hundreds above one hundred, and mīlle used as a noun. The ordinals are declined like bonus, -a, -um.

CARDINALS

ORDINALS

(How many  )

(In what order  )

1,

ūnus, -a, -um,

one

prīmus, -a, -um

first

2,

duo, duae, duo

two

secundus (or   alter)

second

3,

trēs, tria

three  ,

tertius

third  ,

4,

quattuor

etc.

quārtus

etc.

5,

quīnque

quīntus

6,

sex

sextus

7,

septem

septimus

8,

octō

octāvus

9,

novem

nōnus

10,

decem

decimus

11,

ūndecim

ūndecimus

12,

duodecim

duodecimus

13,

tredecim (decem (et) trēs)

tertius decimus

14,

quattuordecim

quārtus decimus

15,

quīndecim

quīntus decimus

16,

sēdecim

sextus decimus

17,

septendecim

septimus decimus

18,

duodēvīgintī (octōdecim)

duodēvīcēnsimus

19,

ūndēvīgintī (novendecim)

ūndēvīcēnsimus

20,

vīgintī

vīcēnsimus

21,

vīgintī ūnus or

ūnus et vīgintī, etc.

vīcēnsimus prīmus or

ūnus et vīcēnsimus, etc.

30,

trīgintā

trīcēnsimus

40,

quadrāgintā

quadrāgēnsimus

50,

quīnquāgintā

quīnquāgēnsimus

60,

sexāgintā

sexāgēnsimus

70,

septuāgintā

septuāgēnsimus

80,

octōgintā

octōgēnsimus

90,

nōnāgintā

nōnāgēnsimus

100,

centum

centum

101,

centum (et) ūnus, etc.

centum (et) ūnus, etc.

120,

centum (et) vīgintī

centum (et) vīgintī

121,

centum (et) vīgintī ūnus, etc.

centum (et) vīgintī ūnus, etc.

200,

ducentī, -ae, -a

ducentī, -ae, -a

300,

trecentī

trecentī

400,

quadringentī

quadringentī

500,

quīngentī

quīngentī

600,

sescentī

sescentī

700,

septingentī

septingentī

800,

octingentī

octingentī

900,

nōngentī

nōngentī

1000,

mīlle

mīlle

479. Declension of duo, two, trēs, three, and mīlle, a thousand.

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

M. AND F.

NEUT.

SING.

PLUR.

N.

duo

duae

duo

trēs

trīa

mīlle

mīlia

G.

duōrum

duārum

duōrum

trium

trium

mīlle

mīlium

D.

duōbus

duābus

duōbus

tribus

tribus

mīlle

mīlibus

A.

duōs or duo

duās

duo

trīs or trēs

tria

mīlle

mīlia

A.

duōbus

duābus

duōbus

tribus

tribus

mīlle

mīlibus

NOTE. Mīlle is used in the plural as a noun with a modifying genitive, and is occasionally so used in the nominative and accusative singular. For the declension of ūnus cf. § 470.

PRONOUNS

480.             PERSONAL

ego, I

tū, you

suī, of himself, etc.

SING.

PLUR.

SING.

PLUR.

SING.

PLUR.

Nom.

ego

nōs

tū

vōs

——

——

Gen.

meī

nostrum, -trī

tuī

vestrum, -trī

suī

suī

Dat.

mihi

nōbīs

tibi

vōbīs

sibi

sibi

Acc.

mē

nōs

tē

vōs

sē, sēsē

sē, sēsē

Abl.

mē

nōbīs

tē

vōbīs

sē, sēsē

sē, sēsē

Note that suī is always reflexive.

481.             DEMONSTRATIVE

Demonstratives belong to the first and second declensions, but have the pronominal endings -ī̆us and -ī in the gen. and dat. sing.

ipse, self

SINGULAR

PLURAL

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

ipse

ipsa

ipsum

ipsī

ipsae

ipsa

Gen.

ipsī´us

ipsī´us

ipsī´us

ipsōrum

ipsārum

ipsōrum

Dat.

ipsī

ipsī

ipsī

ipsīs

ipsīs

ipsīs

Acc.

ipsum

ipsam

ipsum

ipsōs

ipsās

ipsa

Abl.

ipsō

ipsā

ipsō

ipsīs

ipsīs

ipsīs

hic, this (here), he

Nom.

hic

haec

hoc

hī

hae

haec

Gen.

huius

huius

huius

hōrum

hārum

hōrum

Dat.

huic

huic

huic

hīs

hīs

hīs

Acc.

hunc

hanc

hoc

hōs

hās

haec

Abl.

hōc

hāc

hōc

hīs

hīs

hīs

iste, this, that (of yours), he

Nom.

iste

ista

istud

istī

istae

ista

Gen.

istī´us

istī´us

istī´us

istōrum

istārum

istōrum

Dat.

istī

istī

istī

istīs

istīs

istīs

Acc.

istum

istam

istud

istōs

istās

ista

Abl.

istō

istā

istō

istīs

istīs

istīs

ille, that (yonder), he

Nom.

ille

illa

illud

illī

illae

illa

Gen.

illī´us

illī´us

illī´us

illōrum

illārum

illōrum

Dat.

illī

illī

illī

illīs

illīs

illīs

Acc.

illum

illam

illud

illōs

illās

illa

Abl.

illō

illā

illō

illīs

illīs

illīs

is, this, that, he

Nom.

is

ea

id

iī, eī

eae

ea

Gen.

eius

eius

eius

eōrum

eārum

eōrum

Dat.

eī

eī

eī

iīs, eīs

iīs, eīs

iīs, eīs

Acc.

eum

eam

id

eōs

eās

ea

Abl.

eō

eā

eō

iīs, eīs

iīs, eīs

iīs, eīs

īdem, the same

Nom.

īdem

e´adem

idem

iī´dem

eī´dem

eae´dem

e´adem

Gen.

eius´dem

eius´dem

eius´dem

eōrun´dem

eārun´dem

eōrun´dem

Dat.

eī´dem

eī´dem

eī´dem

iīs´dem

eīs´dem

iīs´dem

eīs´dem

iīs´dem

eīs´dem

Acc.

eun´dem

ean´dem

idem

eōs´dem

eās´dem

e´adem

Abl.

eō´dem

eā´dem

eō´dem

iīs´dem

eīs´dem

iīs´dem

eīs´dem

iīs´dem

eīs´dem

NOTE. In the plural of is and īdem the forms with two i’s are preferred, the two i’s being pronounced as one.

482.             RELATIVE

quī, who, which, that

SINGULAR

PLURAL

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

quī

quae

quod

quī

quae

quae

Gen.

cuius

cuius

cuius

quōrum

quārum

quōrum

Dat.

cui

cui

cui

quibus

quibus

quibus

Acc.

quem

quam

quod

quōs

quās

quae

Abl.

quō

quā

quō

quibus

quibus

quibus

483.             INTERROGATIVE

quis, substantive, who, what

SINGULAR

PLURAL

MASC. AND FEM.

NEUT.

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

quis

quid

qui

quae

quae

Gen.

cuius

cuius

quōrum

quārum

quōrum

Dat.

cui

cui

quibus

quibus

quibus

Acc.

quem

quid

quōs

quās

quae

Abl.

quō

quō

quibus

quibus

quibus

The interrogative adjective quī, quae, quod, is declined like the relative.

484.             INDEFINITES

quis and quī, as declined above,  1 are used also as indefinites (some, any). The other indefinites are compounds of quis and quī.

quisque, each

SUBSTANTIVE

ADJECTIVE

MASC. AND FEM.

NEUT.

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

quisque

quidque

quisque

quaeque

quodque

Gen.

cuius´que

cuius´que

cuius´que

cuius´que

cuius´que

Dat.

cuique

cuique

cuique

cuique

cuique

Acc.

quemque

quidque

quemque

quamque

quodque

Abl.

quōque

quōque

quōque

quāque

quōque

1. qua is generally used instead of quae in the feminine nominative singular and in the neuter nominative and accusative plural.

485.             quīdam, a certain one, a certain

Observe that in the neuter singular the adjective has quoddam and the substantive quiddam.

SINGULAR

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

quīdam

quaedam

quoddam

quiddam (subst.  )

Gen.

cuius´dam

cuius´dam

cuius´dam

Dat.

cuidam

cuidam

cuidam

Acc.

quendam

quandam

quoddam

quiddam (subst.  )

Abl.

quōdam

quādam

quōdam

PLURAL

Nom.

quīdam

quaedam

quaedam

Gen.

quōrun´dam

quārun´dam

quōrun´dam

Dat.

quibus´dam

quibus´dam

quibus´dam

Acc.

quōsdam

quāsdam

quaedam

Abl.

quibus´dam

quibus´dam

quibus´dam

486.             quisquam, substantive, any one (at all)

MASC. AND FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

quisquam

quicquam (quidquam)

Gen.

cuius´quam

cuius´quam

Dat.

cuiquam

cuiquam

Acc.

quemquam

quicquam (quidquam)

Abl.

quōquam

quōquam

487.             aliquis, substantive, some one.   aliquī, adjective, some

SINGULAR

SUBSTANTIVE

ADJECTIVE

MASC. AND FEM.

NEUT.

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

aliquis

aliquid

aliquī

aliqua

aliquod

Gen.

alicu´ius

alicu´ius

alicu´ius

alicu´ius

alicu´ius

Dat.

alicui

alicui

alicui

alicui

alicui

Acc.

aliquem

aliquid

aliquem

aliquam

aliquod

Abl.

aliquō

aliquō

aliquō

aliquā

aliquō

PLURAL FOR BOTH SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE

MASC.

FEM.

NEUT.

Nom.

aliquī

aliquae

aliqua

Gen.

aliquō´rum

aliquā´rum

aliquō´rum

Dat.

ali´quibus

ali´quibus

ali´quibus

Acc.

aliquōs

aliquās

aliqua

Abl.

ali´quibus

ali´quibus

ali´quibus

a. quis (quī), any one, any, is the least definite (§ 297. b). aliquis (aliquī), some one, some, is more definite than quis. quisquam, any one (at all), and its adjective ūllus, any, occur mostly with a negative, expressed or implied, and in clauses of comparison.

REGULAR VERBS

488.             FIRST CONJUGATION. Ā-VERBS. AMŌ

PRINCIPAL PARTS amō, amāre, amāvī, amātus

PRES. STEM amā-   PERF. STEM amāv-   P  ART. STEM amāt-

ACTIVE

PASSIVE

INDICATIVE

PRESENT

I love, am loving, do love  , etc.

I am loved  , etc.

amō

amāmus

amor

amāmur

amās

amātis

amāris, -re

amāminī

amat

amant

amātur

amantur

IMPERFECT

I loved, was loving, did love  , etc.

I was loved  , etc.

amābam

amābāmus

amābar

amābāmur

amābās

amābātis

amābāris, -re

amābāminī

amābat

amābant

amābātur

amābantur

FUTURE

I shall love  , etc.

I shall be loved  , etc.

amābō

amābimus

amābor

amābimur

amābis

amābitis

amāberis, -re

amābiminī

amābit

amābunt

amābitur

amābuntur

PERFECT

I have loved, loved, did love  , etc.

I have been (was) loved  , etc.

amāvi

amāvimus

amātus, -a, -um

sum

amātī, -ae, -a

sumus

amāvistī

amāvistis

es

estis

amāvit

amāvērunt, -re

est

sunt

PLUPERFECT

I had loved  , etc.

I had been loved  , etc.

amāveram

amāverāmus

amātus, -a, -um

eram

amātī, -ae, -a

erāmus

amāverās

amāverātis

erās

erātis

amāverat

amāverant

erat

erant

FUTURE PERFECT

I shall have loved  , etc.

I shall have been loved  , etc.

amāverō

amāverimus

amātus, -a, -um

erō

amātī, -ae, -a

erimus

amāveris

amāveritis

eris

eritis

amāverit

amāverint

erit

erunt

SUBJUNCTIVE

PRESENT

amem

amēm  us

amer

amēmur

amēs

amētis

amēris, -re

amēminī

amet

ament

amētur

amentur

IMPERFECT

amārem

amāremus

amārer

amārēmur

amārēs

amārētis

amārēris, -re

amārēminī

amāret

amārent

amārētur

amārentur

PERFECT

amāverim

amāverimus

amātus, -a, -um

sim

amātī, -ae, -a

sīmus

amāveris

amāveritis

sīs

sītis

amāverit

amāverint

sit

sint

PLUPERFECT

amāvissem

amāvissēmus

amātus, -a, -um

essem

amātī, -ae, -a

essēmus

amāvissēs

amāvissētis

essēs

essētis

amāvisset

amāvissent

esset

essent

IMPERATIVE

PRESENT

amā, love thou

amāre, be thou loved

amāte, love ye

amāminī, be ye loved

FUTURE

amātō, thou shalt love

amātor, thou shalt be loved

amātō, he shall love

amātor, he shall be loved

amātōte, you shall love

——

amantō, they shall love

amantor, they shall be loved

INFINITIVE

Pres. amāre, to love

amārī, to be loved

Perf. amāvisse, to have loved

amātus, -a, -um esse, to have been loved

Fut. amātūrus, -a, -um esse, to be about to love

[amātum īrī], to be about to be loved

PARTICIPLES

Pres. amāns, -antis, loving

Pres.   ——

Fut. amātūrus, -a, -um, about to love

Gerundive  1 amandus, -a, -um, to be loved

Perf.   ——

Perf. amātus, -a, -um, having been loved, loved

GERUND

Nom.   ——

SUPINE (Active Voice)

Gen. amandī, of loving

Acc. [amātum], to love

Dat. amandō, for loving

Abl. [amātū], to love, in the loving

Acc. amandum, loving

Abl. amandō, by loving

1. Sometimes called the future passive participle.

489.             SECOND CONJUGATION. Ē-VERBS. MONEŌ

PRINCIPAL PARTS moneō, monēre, monuī, monitus

PRES. STEM monē-   PERF. STEM monu-   PART. STEM monit-

ACTIVE

PASSIVE

INDICATIVE

PRESENT

I advise  , etc.,

I am advised,   etc.

moneō

monēmus

moneor

monēmur

monēs

monētis

monēris, -re

monēminī

monet

monent

monētur

monentur

IMPERFECT

I was advising  , etc.,

I was advised  , etc.

monēbam

monēbāmus

monēbar

monēbāmur

monēbās

monēbātis

monēbāris, -re

monēbāminī

monēbat

monēbant

monēbātur

monēbāntur

FUTURE

I shall advise  , etc.,

I shall be advised  , etc.

monēbō

monēbimus

monēbor

monēbimur

monēbis

monēbitis

monēberis, -re

monēbiminī

monēbit

monēbunt

monēbitur

monēbuntur

PERFECT

I have advised, I advised  , etc.

I have been (was) advised  , etc.

monuī

monuimus

monitus, -a, -um

sum

monitī, -ae, -a

sumus

monuistī

monuistis

es

estis

monuit

monuērunt, -re

est

sunt

PLUPERFECT

I had advised  , etc.,

I had been advised  , etc.

monueram

monuerāmus

monitus, -a, -um

eram

monitī, -ae, -a

erāmus

monuerās

monuerātis

eras

eratis

monuerat

monuerant

erat

erant

FUTURE PERFECT

I shall have advised  , etc.

I shall have been advised  , etc.

monuerō

monuerimus

monitus, -a, -um

erō

monitī, -ae, -a

erimus

monueris

monuerītis

eris

eritis

monuerit

monuerīnt

erit

erunt

SUBJUNCTIVE

PRESENT

moneam

moneāmus

monear

moneāmur

moneās

moneātis

moneāris, -re

moneāminī

moneat

moneant

moneātur

moneantur

IMPERFECT

monērem

monērēmus

monērer

monērēmur

monērēs

monērētis

monērēris, -re

monērēminī

monēret

monērent

monērētur

monērentur

PERFECT

monuerim

monuerimus

monitus, -a, -um

sim

monitī, -ae, -a

sīmus

monueris

monueritis

sīs

sītis

monuerit

monuerint

sit

sint

PLUPERFECT

monuissem

monuissēmus

monitus, -a, -um

essem

monitī, -ae, -a

essēmus

monuissēs

monuissētis

essēs

essētis

monuisset

monuissent

esset

essent

IMPERATIVE

PRESENT

monē, advise thou

monēre, be thou advised

monēte, advise ye

monēminī, be ye advised

FUTURE

monētō, thou shall advise

monētor, thou shalt be advised

monētō, he shall advise

monētor, he shall be advised

monētōte, you shall advise

——

monentō, they shall advise

monentor, they shall be advised

INFINITIVE

Pres. monēre, to advise

monērī, to be advised

Perf. monuisse, to have advised

monitus, -a, -um esse, to have been advised

Fut. monitūrus, -a, -um esse, to be about to advise

[monitum īrī], to be about to be advised

PARTICIPLES

Pres. monēns, -entis, advising

Pres.   ——

Fut. monitūrus, -a, -um, about to advise

Ger. monendus, -a, -um, to be advised

Perf.   ——

Perf. monitus, -a, -um, having been advised, advised

GERUND

Nom.   ——

SUPINE (Active Voice)

Gen. monendī, of advising

Acc. [monitum], to advise

Dat. monendō, for advising

Abl. [monitū], to advise, in the advising

Acc. monendum, advising

Abl. monendō, by advising

490.             THIRD CONJUGATION. Ĕ-VERBS. REGŌ

PRINCIPAL PARTS regō, regere, rexī, rēctus

PRES. STEM rege-   PERF. STEM rēx-   P  ART. STEM rēct-

ACTIVE

PASSIVE

INDICATIVE

PRESENT

I rule  , etc.

I am ruled  , etc.

regō

regimus

re´gor

re´gimur

regis

regitis

re´geris, -re

regi´minī

regit

regunt

re´gitur

regun´tur

IMPERFECT

I was ruling  , etc.

I was ruled  , etc.

regēbam

regēbāmus

regē´bar

regēbā´mur

regēbās

regēbātis

regēbā´ris, -re

regēbā´minī

regēbat

regēbant

regēbā´tur

regēban´tur

FUTURE

I shall rule  , etc.

I shall be ruled  , etc.

regam

regēmus

re´gar

regē´mur

regēs

regētis

regē´ris, -re

regē´minī

reget

regent

regē´tur

regen´tur

PERFECT

I have ruled  , etc.

I have been ruled  , etc.

rēxī

rēximus

rēctus, -a, -um

sum

rēctī, -ae, -a

sumus

rēxistī

rēxistis

es

estis

rēxit

rēxērunt, -re

est

sunt

PLUPERFECT

I had ruled  , etc.

I had been ruled  , etc.

rēxeram

rēxerāmus

rēctus, -a, -um

eram

rēctī, -ae, -a

erāmus

rēxerās

rēxerātis

erās

erātis

rēxerat

rēxerant

erat

erant

FUTURE PERFECT

I shall have ruled  , etc.

I shall have been ruled  , etc.

rēxerō

rēxerimus

rēctus, -a, -um

erō

rēctī, -ae, -a

erimus

rēxeris

rēxeritis

eris

eritis

rēxerit

rēxerint

erit

erunt

SUBJUNCTIVE

PRESENT

regam

regāmus

regar

regāmur

regās

regātis

regāris, -re

regāminī

regat

regant

regātur

regantur

IMPERFECT

regerem

regerēmus

regerer

regerēmur

regerēs

regerētis

regerēris, -re

regerēminī

regeret

regerent

regerētur

regerentur

PERFECT

rēxerim

rēxerimus

rēctus, -a, -um

sim

rēctī, -ae, -a

sīmus

rēxeris

rēxeritis

sīs

sītis

rēxerit

rēxerint

sit

sint

PLUPERFECT

rēxissem

rēxissēmus

rēctus, -a, -um

essem

rēctī, -ae, -a

essēmus

rēxissēs

rēxissētis

essēs

essētis

rēxisset

rēxissent

esset

essent

IMPERATIVE

PRESENT

rege, rule thou

regere, be thou ruled

regite, rule ye

regiminī, be ye ruled

FUTURE

regitō, thou shalt rule

regitor, thou shalt be ruled

regitō he shall rule

regitor, he shall be ruled

regitōte, ye shall rule

——

reguntō, they shall rule

reguntor, they shall be ruled

INFINITIVE

Pres. regere, to rule

regī, to be ruled

Perf. rēxisse, to have ruled

rēctus, -a, -um esse, to have been ruled

Fut.rēctūrus, -a, -um esse, to be about to rule

[rēctum īrī], to be about to be ruled

PARTICIPLES

Pres. regēns, -entis, ruling

Pres.   ——

Fut. rēctūrus, -a, -um, about to rule

Ger. regendus, -a, -um, to be ruled

Perf.   ——

Perf. rēctus, -a, -um, having been ruled, ruled

GERUND

Nom.   ——

SUPINE (Active Voice)

Gen. regendī, of ruling

Acc [rēctum], to rule

Dat. regendō, for ruling

Abl. [rēctū], to rule, in the ruling

Acc. regendum, ruling

Abl. regendō, by ruling

491.             FOURTH CONJUGATION. Ī-VERBS. AUDIŌ

PRINCIPAL PARTS audiō, audīre, audīvī, audītus

PRES. STEM audī-   PERF. STEM audīv-   PART. STEM audīt-

ACTIVE

PASSIVE

INDICATIVE

PRESENT

I hear  , etc.

I am heard  , etc.

audiō

audīmus

au´dior

audī´mur

audīs

audītis

audī´ris, -re

audī´minī

audit

audiunt

audī´tur

audiun´tur

IMPERFECT

I was hearing  , etc.

I was heard  , etc.

audiēbam

audiēbāmus

audiē´bar

audiēbā´mur

audiēbās

audiēbātis

audiēbā´ris, -re

audiēbā´minī

audiēbat

audiēbant

audiēbā´tur

audiēban´tur

FUTURE

I shall hear  , etc.

I shall be heard  , etc.

audiam

audiēmus

au´diar

audiē´mur

audiēs

audiētis

audiē´ris, -re

audiē´minī

audiet

audient

audiē´tur

audien´tur

PERFECT

I have heard  , etc.

I have been heard  , etc.

audīvī

audīvimus

audītus, -a, -um

sum

audītī, -ae, -a

sumus

audīvistī

audīvistis

es

estis

audīvit

audīvērunt, -re

est

sunt

PLUPERFECT

I had heard  , etc.

I had been heard  , etc.

audīveram

audīverāmus

audītus, -a, -um

eram

audītī, -ae, -a

erāmus

audīverās

audīverātis

erās

erātis

audīverat

audīverant

erat

erant

FUTURE PERFECT

I shall have heard  , etc.

I shall have been heard  , etc.

audīverō

audīverimus

audītus, -a, -um

erō

audītī, -ae, -a

erimus

audīveris

audīveritis

eris

eritis

audīverit

audīverint

erit

erunt

SUBJUNCTIVE

PRESENT

audiam

audiāmus

audiar

audiāmur

audiās

audiātis

audiāris, -re

audiāminī

audiat

audiant

audiātur

audiantur

IMPERFECT

audīrem

audīrēmus

audīrer

audīrēmur

audīrēs

audīrētis

audīrēris, -re

audīrēminī

audīret

audīrent

audīrētur

audīrentur

PERFECT

audīverim

audiverimus

audītus, -a, -um

sim

audītī, -ae, -a

sīmus

audīveris

audiveritis

sīs

sītis

audīverit

audīverint

sit

sint

PLUPERFECT

audīvissem

audīvissēmus

audītus, -a, -um

essem

audītī, -ae, -a

essēmus

audīvissēs

audīvissētis

essēs

essētis

audīvisset

audīvissent

esset

essent

IMPERATIVE

PRESENT

audī, hear thou

audīre, be thou heard

audīte, hear ye

audīminī, be ye heard

FUTURE

audītō, thou shalt hear

audītor, thou shalt be heard

audītō, he shall hear

audītor, he shall be heard

audītōte, ye shall hear

——

audiuntō, they shall hear

audiuntor, they shall be heard

INFINITIVE

Pres. audīre, to hear

audīrī, to be heard

audīvisse, to have heard

audītus, -a, -um esse, to have been heard

audītūrus, -a, -um esse, to be about to hear

[audītum īrī, to be about to be heard

PARTICIPLES

Pres. audiēns, -entis, hearing

Pres.   ——

Fut. audītūrus, -a, -um, about to hear

Ger. audiendus, -a, -um to be heard

Perf.   ——

Perf. audītus, -a, -um, having been heard, heard

GERUND

Nom.   ——

SUPINE (Active Voice)

Gen. audiendī, of hearing

Acc. [audītum], to hear

Dat. audiendō, for hearing

Abl. [audītu], to hear, in the hearing

Acc. audiendum, hearing

Abl. audiendō, by hearing

492.             THIRD CONJUGATION. VERBS IN -IŌ. CAPIŌ

PRINCIPAL PARTS capiō, capere, cēpī, captus

PRES. STEM cape-   PERF. STEM cēp-   PART. STEM capt-

ACTIVE

PASSIVE

INDICATIVE

PRESENT

capiō

capimus

ca´pior

ca´pimur

capis

capitis

ca´peris, -re

capi´minī

capit

capiunt

ca´pitur

capiun´tur

IMPERFECT

capiēbam

capiebamus

capiē´bar

capiēbā´mur

capiēbas

capiēbātis

capiēba´ris, -re

capiēbā´minī

capiēbat

capiēbant

capiēbā´tur

capieban´tur

FUTURE

capiam

capiēmus

ca´piar

capiē´mur

capiēs

capiētis

capiē´ris, -re

capiē´minī

capiet

capient

capiē´tur

capien´tur

PERFECT

cēpī, cēpistī, cēpit  , etc.

captus, -a, -um   sum, es, est  , etc.

PLUPERFECT

cēperam, cēperās, cēperat  , etc.

captus, -a, -um   eram, erās, erat  , etc.

FUTURE PERFECT

cēperō, cēperis, cēperit  , etc.

captus, -a, -um   erō, eris, erit  , etc.

SUBJUNCTIVE

PRESENT

capiam, capiās, capiat  , etc.

capiar, -iāris, -re, -iātur  , etc.

IMPERFECT

caperem, caperēs, caperet  , etc.

caperer, -erēris, -re, -erētur  , etc.

PERFECT

cēperim, cēperis, cēperit  , etc.

captus, -a, -um   sim, sīs, sit  , etc.

PLUPERFECT

cēpissem, cēpissēs, cēpisset  , etc.

captus,-a, -um   essem, essēs, esset  , etc.

IMPERATIVE

PRESENT

2d Pers.   cape

capite

capere

capiminī

FUTURE

2d Pers. capitō

capitōte

capitor

——

3rd Pers. capitō

capiuntō

capitor

capiuntor

INFINITIVE

Pres. capere

capī

Perf. cēpisse

captus, -a, -um esse

Fut. captūrus, -a, -um esse

[captum   īrī]

PARTICIPLES

Pres. capiēns, -ientis

Pres.   ——

Fut. captūrus, -a, -um

Ger. capiendus, -a, -um

Perf.   ——

Perf. captus, -a, -um

GERUND

SUPINE (Active Voice)

Gen. capiendī

Acc. [captum  ]

etc.

Abl. [captū  ]

493.             DEPONENT VERBS

PRINCIPAL PARTS

I.

hortor, hortārī, hortātus sum, urge

II.

vereor, verērī, veritus sum, fear

III.

sequor, sequī, secūtus sum, follow

IV.

partior, partīrī, partītus sum, share, divide

NOTE. In addition to the passive conjugation, deponent verbs use certain forms from the active. These are marked with a star. Deponent -iō verbs of the third conjugation are inflected like the passive of capiō.

INDICATIVE

Pres.

hortor

vereor

sequor

partior

hortāris, -re

verēris, -re

sequeris, -re

partīris, -re

hortātur

verētur

sequitur

partītur

hortāmur

verēmur

sequimur

partīmur

hortāminī

verēminī

sequiminī

partīminī

hortantur

verentur

sequuntur

partiuntur

Impf.

hortābar

verēbar

sequēbar

partiēbar

Fut.

hortābor

verēbor

sequar

partiar

Perf.

hortātus sum

veritus sum

secūtus sum

partītus sum

Plup.

hortātus eram

veritus eram

secūtus eram

partītus eram

F. P.

hortātus erō

veritus erō

secūtus erō

partītus erō

SUBJUNCTIVE

Pres.

horter

verear

sequar

partiar

Impf.

hortārer

verērer

sequerer

partīrer

Perf.

hortātus sim

veritus sim

secūtus sim

partītus sim

Plup.

hortātus essem

veritus essem

secūtus essem

partītus essem

IMPERATIVE

Pres.

hortāre

verēre

sequere

partīre

Fut.

hortātor

verētor

sequitor

partītor

INFINITIVE

Pres.

hortārī

verērī

sequī

partīrī

Perf.

hortātus esse

veritus esse

secūtus esse

partītus esse

Fut.

*hortātūrus esse

*veritūrus esse

*secūtūrus esse

*partītūrus esse

PARTICIPLES

Pres.

*hortāns

*verēns

*sequēns

*partiēns

Fut.

*hortāturus

*veritūrus

*secūtūrus

*partītūrus

Perf.

hortātus

veritus

secūtus

partītus

Ger.

hortandus

verendus

sequendus

partiendus

GERUND

*hortandī  , etc.

*verendī  , etc.

*sequendī  , etc.

*partiendī  , etc.

SUPINE

*[hortātus, -tū  ]

*[veritum, -tū  ]

*[secūtum, -tū  ]

*[partītum, -tū  ]

IRREGULAR VERBS

494.             sum, am, be

PRINCIPAL PARTS sum, esse, fuī, futūrus

PRES. STEM es-   PERF. STEM fu-   PART. STEM fut-

INDICATIVE

PRESENT

SINGULAR

PLURAL

sum, I am

sumus, we are

es, thou art

estis, you are

est, he (she, it) is

sunt, they are

IMPERFECT

eram, I was

erāmus, we were

erās, thou wast

erātis, you were

erat, he was

erant, they were

FUTURE

erō, I shall be

erimus, we shall be

eris, thou wilt be

eritis, you will be

erit, he will be

erunt, they will be

PERFECT

fuī, I have been, was

fuimus, we have been, were

fuistī, thou hast been, wast

fuistis, you have been, were

fuit, he has been, was

fuērunt, fuēre, they have been, were

PLUPERFECT

fueram, I had been

fuerāmus, we had been

fuerās, thou hadst been

fuerātis, you had been

fuerat, he had been

fuerant, they had been

FUTURE PERFECT

fuerō, I shall have been

fuerimus, we shall have been

fueris, thou wilt have been

fueritis, you will have been

fuerit, he will have been

fuerint, they will have been

SUBJUNCTIVE

PRESENT

IMPERFECT

SINGULAR

PLURAL

SINGULAR

PLURAL

sim

sīmus

essem

essēmus

sīs

sītis

essēs

essētis

sit

sint

esset

essent

PERFECT

PLUPERFECT

fuerim

fuerimus

fuissem

fuissēmus

fueris

fueritis

fuissēs

fuissētis

fuerit

fuerint

fuisset

fuissent

IMPERATIVE

PRESENT

FUTURE

2d Pers. Sing. es, be thou

2d Pers. Sing. estō, thou shalt be

2d Pers. Plur. este, be ye

3d Pers. Sing. estō, he shall be

2d Pers. Plur. estōte, ye shall be

3d Pers. Plur. suntō, they shall be

INFINITIVE

PARTICIPLE

Pres. esse, to be

Perf. fuisse, to have been

Fut. futūrus, -a, -um esse or fore,

to be about to be

futūrus, -a, -um, about to be

495.             possum, be able, can

PRINCIPAL PARTS possum, posse, potuī  , ——

INDICATIVE

SUBJUNCTIVE

SINGULAR

PLURAL

SINGULAR

PLURAL

Pres.

possum

pos´sumus

possim

possī´mus

potes

potes´tis

possīs

possī´tis

potest

possunt

possit

possint

Impf.

poteram

poterāmus

possem

possē´mus

Fut.

poterō

poterimus

——

——

Perf.

potuī

potuimus

potuerim

potuerimus

Plup.

potueram

potuerāmus

potuissem

potuissēmus

F. P.

potuerō

potuerimus

——

——

INFINITIVE

Pres.   posse

Perf.   potuisse

PARTICIPLE

Pres. potens, gen. -entis, (adjective) powerful

496.             prōsum, benefit

PRINCIPAL PARTS prōsum, prōdesse, prōfuī, prōfutūrus

PRES. STEM prōdes-   PERF. STEM prōfu-   PART. STEM prōfut-

INDICATIVE

SUBJUNCTIVE

SINGULAR

PLURAL

SINGULAR

PLURAL

Pres.

prōsum

prō´sumus

prōsim

prōsī´mus

prōdes

prōdes´tis

prōsīs

prōsī´tis

prōdest

prōsunt

prōsit

prōsint

Impf.

prōderam

prōderāmus

prōdessem

prodessē´mus

Fut.

prōderō

prōderimus

——

——

Perf.

prōfuī

prōfuimus

prōfuerim

prōfuerimus

Plup.

prōfueram

prōfuerāmus

prōfuissem

prōfuissēmus

F. P.

prōfuerō

prōfuerimus

——

——

IMPERATIVE

Pres. 2d Pers.   prōdes, prōdeste

Fut. 2d Pers.   prōdestō, prōdestōte

INFINITIVE

Pres.   prōdesse

Perf.   prōfuisse

Fut.   prōfutūrus, -a, -um esse

F  UTURE PARTICIPLE prōfutūrus, -a, -um

497.

PRINCIPAL

PARTS

volō, velle, voluī, ——, be willing, will, wish

nōlō, nōlle, nōluī, ——, be unwilling, will not

mālō, mālle, māluī, ——, be more willing, prefer

Nōlō and mālō are compounds of volō. Nōlō is for ne (not) + volō, and mālō for mā (from magis, more) + volō. The second person vīs is from a different root.

INDICATIVE

SINGULAR

Pres.

volō

nōlō

mālō

vīs

nōn vis

māvīs

vult

nōn vult

māvult

PLURAL

volumus

nōlumus

mālumus

vultis

nōn vultis

māvul´tis

volunt

nōlunt

mālunt

Impf.

volēbam

nōlēbam

mālēbam

Fut.

volam, volēs, etc.

nōlam, nōlēs, etc.

mālam, mālēs, etc.

Perf.

voluī

nōluī

māluī

Plup.

volueram

nōlueram

mālueram

F. P.

voluerō

nōluerō

māluerō

SUBJUNCTIVE

SINGULAR

Pres.

velim

nōlim

mālim

velīs

nōlīs

mālīs

velit

nōlit

mālit

PLURAL

velī´mus

nōlī´mus

mālī´mus

velī´tis

nōlī´tis

mālī´tis

velint

nōlint

mālint

Impf.

vellem

nōllem

māllem

Perf.

voluerim

nōluerim

māluerim

Plup.

voluissem

nōluissem

māluissem

IMPERATIVE

Pres.

——

nōlī

nōlīte

——

Fut.

——

nōlītō, etc.

——

INFINITIVE

Pres.

velle

nōlle

mālle

Perf.

voluisse

nōluisse

māluisse

PARTICIPLE

Pres.

volēns, -entis

nōlēns, -entis

——

498.             ferō, bear, carry, endure

PRINCIPAL PARTS ferō, ferre, tulī, lātus

PRES. STEM fer-   PERF. STEM tul-   PART. STEM lāt-

INDICATIVE

ACTIVE

PASSIVE

Pres.

ferō

ferimus

feror

ferimur

fers

fertīs

ferris, -re

ferimimī

fert

ferunt

fertur

feruntur

Impf.

ferēbam

ferēbar

Fut.

feram, ferēs, etc.

ferar, ferēris, etc.

Perf.

tulī

lātus, -a, -um sum

Plup.

tuleram

lātus, -a, -um eram

F. P.

tulerō

lātus, -a, -um erō

SUBJUNCTIVE

Pres.

feram, ferās, etc.

ferar, ferāris, etc.

Impf.

ferrem

ferrer

Perf.

tulerim

lātus, -a, -um sim

Plup.

tulissem

lātus, -a, -um essem

IMPERATIVE

Pres. 2d Pers.   fer

ferte

ferre

feriminī

Fut. 2d Pers.   fertō

fertōte

fertor

3d Pers.    fertō

ferunto

fertor

feruntor

INFINITIVE

Pres.

ferre

ferrī

Perf.

tulisse

lātus, -a, -um esse

Fut.

lātūrus, -a, -um esse

——

PARTICIPLES

Pres.

ferēns, -entis

Pres.   ——

Fut.

lātūrus, -a, -um

Ger.   ferendus, -a, -um

Perf.

——

Perf.   lātus, -a, -um

GERUND

S  UPINE (Active Voice)

Gen.   ferendī

Acc.   ferendum

Acc.   [lātum]

Dat.   ferendō

Abl.   ferendō

Abl.   [lātū]

499.             eō, go

PRINCIPAL PARTS eō, īre, iī (īvī), ĭtum   (n. perf. part.)

PRES. STEM ī-   PERF. STEM ī- or īv-   PART. STEM it-

INDICATIVE

SUBJUNCTIVE

IMPERATIVE

SING.

PLUR.

Pres.

eō

īs

it

īmus

ītis

eunt

eam

2d Pers.   ī

īte

Impf.

ībam

īrem

Fut.

ībō

——

2d Pers. ītō

3d Pers.   ītō

ītōte

euntō

Perf.

iī (īvī)

ierim (īverim)

Plup.

ieram (īveram)

īssem (īvissem)

F. P.

ierō (īverō)

INFINITIVE

PARTICIPLES

Pres.

īre

Pres. iēns, gen. euntis (§ 472  )

Perf.

īsse (īvisse)

Fut.   itūrus, -a, -um

Fut.

itūrus, -a, -um esse

Ger.   eundum

GERUND

SUPINE

Gen.   eundī

Acc.   [itum]

Dat.   eundō

Abl.   [itū]

Acc.   eundum

Abl.   eundō

a. The verb eō is used impersonally in the third person singular of the passive, as ītur, itum est, etc.

b. In the perfect system the forms with v are very rare.

500.             fīō, passive of faciō; be made, become, happen

PRINCIPAL PARTS fīō, fierī, factus sum

INDICATIVE

SUBJUNCTIVE

IMPERATIVE

Pres.

fīō

fīs

fit

——

——

fīunt

fīam

2d Pers.   fī

fīte

Impf.

fīēbam

fierem

Fut.

fīam

——

Perf.

factus, -a, -um sum

factus, -a, -um sim

Plup.

factus, -a, -um eram

factus, -a, -um essem

F. P.

factus, -a, -um erō

INFINITIVE

PARTICIPLES

Pres.

fierī

Perf.   factus, -a, -um

Perf.

factus, -a, -um esse

Ger.   faciendus, -a, -um

Fut.

[factum īrī]

CASTRA MURO FOSSAQUE MUNIUNTUR

APPENDIX II

501.             RULES OF SYNTAX

NOTE. The rules of syntax are here classified and numbered consecutively. The number of the text section in which the rule appears is given at the end of each.

Nominative Case

1. The subject of a finite verb is in the nominative and answers the question Who? or What? § 36.

Agreement

2. A finite verb must always be in the same person and number as its subject. § 28.

3. A predicate noun agrees in case with the subject of the verb. § 76.

4. An appositive agrees in case with the noun which it explains. § 81.

5. Adjectives agree with their nouns in gender, number, and case. § 65.

6. A predicate adjective completing a complementary infinitive agrees in gender, number, and case with the subject of the main verb. § 215. a.

7. A relative pronoun must agree with its antecedent in gender and number; but its case is determined by the way it is used in its own clause. § 224.

Prepositions

8. A noun governed by a preposition must be in the accusative or ablative case. § 52.

Genitive Case

9. The word denoting the owner or possessor of something is in the genitive and answers the question Whose? § 38.

10. The possessive genitive often stands in the predicate, especially after the forms of sum, and is then called the predicate genitive. § 409.

11. Words denoting a part are often used with the genitive of the whole, known as the partitive genitive. § 331.

12. Numerical descriptions of measure are expressed by the genitive with a modifying adjective. § 443.

Dative Case

13. The indirect object of a verb is in the dative. § 45.

14. The dative of the indirect object is used with the intransitive verbs crēdō, faveō, noceō, pāreō, persuādeō, resistō, studeō, and others of like meaning. § 154.

15. Some verbs compounded with ad, ante, con, dē, in, inter, ob, post, prae, prō, sub, super, admit the dative of the indirect object. Transitive compounds may take both an accusative and a dative. § 426.

16. The dative is used with adjectives to denote the object toward which the given quality is directed. Such are, especially, those meaning near, also fit, friendly, pleasing, like, and their opposites. § 143.

17. The dative is used to denote the purpose or end for which; often with another dative denoting the person or thing affected. § 437.

Accusative Case

18. The direct object of a transitive verb is in the accusative and answers the question Whom? or What? § 37.

19. The subject of the infinitive is in the accusative. § 214.

20. The place to which is expressed by ad or in with the accusative. Before names of towns, small islands, domus, and rūs the preposition is omitted. §§ 263, 266.

21. Duration of time and extent of space are expressed by the accusative. § 336.

22. Verbs of making, choosing, calling, showing, and the like, may take a predicate accusative along with the direct object. With the passive voice the two accusatives become nominatives. § 392.

Ablative Case

23. Cause is denoted by the ablative without a preposition. This answers the question Because of what? § 102.

24. Means is denoted by the ablative without a preposition. This answers the question By means of what? or With what? § 103.

25. Accompaniment is denoted by the ablative with cum. This answers the question With whom? § 104.

26. The ablative with cum is used to denote the manner of an action. Cum may be omitted, if an adjective is used with the ablative. This answers the question How? or In what manner? § 105.

27. With comparatives and words implying comparison the ablative is used to denote the measure of difference. § 317.

28. The ablative of a noun or pronoun with a present or perfect participle in agreement is used to express attendant circumstance. This is called the ablative absolute. § 381.

29. 1. Descriptions of physical characteristics are expressed by the ablative with a modifying adjective. § 444.

2. Descriptions involving neither numerical statements nor physical characteristics may be expressed by either the genitive or the ablative with a modifying adjective. § 445.

30. The ablative is used to denote in what respect something is true. § 398.

31. The place from which is expressed by ā or ab, dē, ē or ex with the separative ablative. This answers the question Whence? Before names of towns, small islands, domus, and rūs the preposition is omitted. §§ 264, 266.

32. Words expressing separation or deprivation require an ablative to complete their meaning. This is called the ablative of separation. § 180.

33. The word expressing the person from whom an action starts, when not the subject, is put in the ablative with the preposition ā or ab. This is called the ablative of the personal agent. § 181.

34. The comparative degree, if quam is omitted, is followed by the separative ablative. § 309.

35. The time when or within which anything happens is expressed by the ablative without a preposition. § 275.

36. 1. The place at or in which is expressed by the ablative with in. This answers the question Where? Before names of towns, small islands, and rūs the preposition is omitted. §§ 265, 266.

2. Names of towns and small islands, if singular and of the first or second declension, and the word domus express the place in which by the locative. § 268.

Gerund and Gerundive

37. 1. The gerund is a verbal noun and is used only in the genitive, dative, accusative, and ablative singular. The constructions of these cases are in general the same as those of other nouns. § 406. 1.

2. The gerundive is a verbal adjective and must be used instead of gerund + object, excepting in the genitive and in the ablative without a preposition. Even in these instances the gerundive construction is more usual. § 406. 2.

38. The accusative of the gerund or gerundive with ad, or the genitive with causā, is used to express purpose. § 407.

Moods and Tenses of Verbs

39. Primary tenses are followed by primary tenses, and secondary by secondary. § 358.

40. The subjunctive is used in a dependent clause to express the purpose of the action in the principal clause. § 349.

41. A substantive clause of purpose with the subjunctive is used as object with verbs of commanding, urging, asking, persuading, or advising, where in English we should usually have the infinitive. § 366.

42. Verbs of fearing are followed by a substantive clause of purpose introduced by ut (that not) or nē (that or lest). § 372.

43. Consecutive clauses of result are introduced by ut or ut nōn, and have the verb in the subjunctive. § 385.

44. Object clauses of result with ut or ut nōn are found after verbs of effecting or bringing about. § 386.

45. A relative clause with the subjunctive is often used to describe an antecedent. This is called the subjunctive of characteristic or description. § 390.

46. The conjunction cum means when, since, or although. It is followed by the subjunctive unless it means when and its clause fixes the time at which the main action took place. § 396.

47. When a direct statement becomes indirect, the principal verb is changed to the infinitive, and its subject nominative becomes subject accusative of the infinitive. § 416.

48. The accusative-with-infinitive construction in indirect statements is found after verbs of saying, telling, knowing, thinking, and perceiving. § 419.

49. A present indicative of a direct statement becomes present infinitive of the indirect, a past indicative becomes perfect infinitive, and a future indicative becomes future infinitive. § 418.

50. In an indirect question the verb is in the subjunctive and its tense is determined by the law for tense sequence. § 432.

DOMINA

APPENDIX III

REVIEWS  1

1. It is suggested that each of these reviews be assigned for a written test.

I. REVIEW OF VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR THROUGH LESSON VIII

Lesson IX

502. Give the English of the following words:  1

NOUNS

agricola

ancilla

aqua

casa

causa

cēna

corōna

dea

domina

fābula

fera

fīlia

fortūna

fuga

gallīna

iniūria

īnsula

lūna

nauta

pecūnia

puella

pugna

sagitta

silva

terra

tuba

via

victōria

ADJECTIVES

alta

bona

clāra

grāta

lāta

longa

magna

mala

nova

parva

pulchra

sōla

VERBS

amat

dat

est

habitat

labōrat

laudat

nārrat

necat

nūntiat

parat

portat

pugnat

sunt

vocat

PREPOSITIONS

PRONOUNS

ADVERBS

CONJUNCTIONS

INTERROGATIVE

PARTICLE

ā or ab

ad

cum

dē

ē or ex

in

mea

tua

quis

cuius

cui

quem

quid

cūr

deinde

nōn

ubi

et

quia

quod

-ne

1. Proper nouns and proper adjectives are not repeated in the reviews. Words used in Cassar’s “Gallic War” are in heavy type.

503. Give the Latin of the following words:  1

Underline the words you do not remember. Do not look up a single word till you have gone through the entire list. Then drill on the words you have underlined.

flight

story

new

lives (verb)

away from

who

why

forest

wreath

deep, high

dinner

famous

cottage

battle (noun)

trumpet

lady, mistress

whom

island

wide

tells

money

calls

with

your

then, in the

next place

daughter

to whom

fortune

out from

labors (verb)

gives

small

in

and

sailor

farmer

goddess

wild beast

praises (verb)

alone

pleasing

prepares

are

to

because

arrow

my

kills

girl

fights (verb)

carries

chicken

victory

land

what

way

bad

loves

pretty

water

great

is

announces

injury, wrong

where

not

good

maid

down from

long

cause

whose

1. The translations of words used in Cæsar are in italics.

504. Review Questions. How many syllables has a Latin word? How are words divided into syllables? What is the ultima? the penult? the antepenult? When is a syllable short? When is a syllable long? What is the law of Latin accent? Define the subject of a sentence; the predicate; the object; the copula. What is inflection? declension? conjugation? What is the ending of the verb in the third person singular, and what in the plural? What does the form of a noun show? Name the Latin cases. What case is used for the subject? the direct object? the possessor? What relation is expressed by the dative case? Give the rule for the indirect object. How are questions answered in Latin? What is a predicate adjective? an attributive adjective? What is meant by agreement? Give the rule for the agreement of the adjective. What are the three relations expressed by the ablative? What can you say of the position of the possessive pronoun? the modifying genitive? the adjective? What is the base? What is grammatical gender? What is the rule for gender in the first declension? What are the general principles of Latin word order?

505. Fill out the following summary of the first declension:

THE FIRST OR Ā-DECLENSION

1. Ending in the nominative singular

2. Rule for gender

3. Case terminations

a. Singular

b. Plural

4. Irregular nouns

Go on to Lesson IX

II. REVIEW OF LESSONS IX-XVII

Lesson XVIII

506. Give the English of the following words:

NOUNS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION

agrī cultūra

cōnstantia

cōpia

dīligentia

fāma

fēmina

galea

inopia

lacrima

lōrīca

patria

praeda

NOUNS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION

ager

amīcus

arma (plural)

auxilium

bellum

carrus

castrum

cibus

cōnsilium

domicilium

dominus

equus

fīlius

fluvius

frūmentum

gladius

lēgātus

līberī

magister

mūrus

numerus

oppidānus

oppidum

pīlum

populus

praemium

proelium

puer

scūtum

servus

studium

tēlum

vīcus

vir

ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSONS

aeger, aegra, aegrum

alius, alia, aliud

alter, altera, alterum

armātus, -a, -um

crēber, crēbra, crēbrum

dūrus, -a, -um

fīnitimus, -a, -um

īnfīrmus, -a, -um

legiōnārius, -a, -um

līber, lībera, līberum

mātūrus, -a, -um

meus, -a, -um

miser, misera, miserum

multus, -a, -um

neuter, neutra, neutrum

noster, nostra, nostrum

alter, altera, alterum

pulcher, pulchra, pulchrum

sōlus, -a, -um

suus, -a, -um

fīnitimus, -a, -um

tuus, -a, -um

ūllus, -a, -um

ūnus, -a, -um

uter, utra, utrum

validus, -a, -um

vester, vestra, vestrum

VERBS

DEMONSTRATIVE

PRONOUN

ADVERBS

arat

cūrat

dēsīderat

mātūrat

properat

is, ea, id

CONJUNCTIONS

an

-que

sed

iam

quō

saepe

PREPOSITION

apud

507. Give the Latin of the following words:

sword

corselet

man

your (plural)

hasten

but

among

tear (noun)

village

strong

long for

and (enclitic)

often

want (noun)

which (of two)

care for

or (in a question)

whither

wagon

townsman

wretched

ripe

war

number

my

free (adj.)

children

wall

grain

weapon

one

plow (verb)

this or that

already

helmet

river

zeal

any

he

son

slave

your (singular)

she

woman

horse

shield (noun)

whole

it

aid (noun)

legionary

weak

arms

master

(of school)

friend

neighboring

sick

lieutenant

field

report, rumor

abode

boy

his own

alone

prize (noun)

master (owner)

carefulness

plenty

troops

plan (noun)

people

beautiful

no (adj.)

our

battle

spear

food

steadiness

fatherland

town

fort

camp

neither (of two)

much

agriculture

other

the other (of two)

hard

booty

frequent

armed

508. Review Questions. How many declensions are there? What three things must be known about a noun before it can be declined? What three cases of neuter nouns are always alike, and in what do they end in the plural? What two plural cases are always alike? When is the vocative singular not like the nominative? What is a predicate noun? With what does it agree? What is an appositive? Give the rule for the agreement of an appositive. How can we tell whether a noun in -er is declined like puer or like ager? Decline bonus, līber, pulcher. How can we tell whether an adjective in -er is declined like līber or like pulcher? Why must we say nauta bonus and not nauta bona? Name the Latin possessive pronouns. How are they declined? With what does the possessive pronoun agree? When do we use tuus and when vester? Why is suus called a reflexive possessive? What is the non-reflexive possessive of the third person? When are possessives omitted? What four uses of the ablative case are covered by the relations expressed in English by with? Give an illustration in Latin of the ablative of manner; of the ablative of cause; of the ablative of means; of the ablative of accompaniment. What ablative regularly has cum? What ablative sometimes has cum? What uses of the ablative never have cum? Name the nine pronominal adjectives, with their meanings. Decline alius, nūllus. Decline is. What does is mean as a demonstrative adjective or pronoun? What other important use has it?

509. Fill out the following summary of the second declension:

THE SECOND OR

O-DECLENSION

1. Endings in the nominative

2. Rule for gender

3. Case terminations of nouns in -us

a. Singular

b. Plural

a. The vocative singular of nouns in -us

4. Case terminations of nouns in -um

a. Singular

b. Plural

5. Peculiarities of nouns in -er and -ir

6. Peculiarities of nouns in -ius and -ium

Go on to Lesson XVIII

III. REVIEW OF LESSONS XVIII-XXVI

Lesson XXVII

510. Give the English of the following words:

NOUNS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION

disciplīna

fōrma

poena

potentia

rēgīna

superbia

trīstitia

NOUNS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION

lūdus

ōrnāmentum

sacrum

socius

verbum

ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS

amīcus

antīquus

fīnitimus

grātus

idōneus

inimīcus

interfectus

īrātus

laetus

molestus

perpetuus

proximus

septem

superbus

ADVERBS

CONJUNCTIONS

PERSONAL PRONOUN

hodiē

ibi

maximē

mox

nunc

nūper

etiam

nōn sōlum ... sed etiam

ego

VERBS

CONJ. I

CONJ. II

CONJ. III

CONJ. IV

volō, -āre

IRREGULAR VERB

sum, esse

dēleō, -ēre

doceō, -ēre

faveō, -ēre

habeō, -ēre

iubeō, -ēre

moneō, -ēre

moveō, -ēre

noceō, -ēre

pāreō, -ēre

persuādeō, -ēre

sedeō, -ēre

studeō, -ēre

videō, -ēre

agō, -ere

capiō, -ere

crēdō, -ere

dīcō, -ere

dūcō, -ere

faciō, -ere

fugiō, -ere

iaciō, -ere

mittō, -ere

rapiō, -ere

regō, -ere

resistō, -ere

audiō, -īre

mūniō, -īre

reperiō, -īre

veniō, -īre

511. Give the Latin of the following words. In the case of verbs always give the first form and the present infinitive.

ancient

come

resist

see

be

fly

I

proud

word

sadness

find

rule (verb)

be eager for

not only ...

but also

seven

ally, companion

pride

fortify

send

sit

also

school

hear

hurl

persuade

only

nearest

sacred rite

queen

flee

obey

lately

constant

ornament

power

make, do

injure

now

annoying

lead

move

soon

glad

punishment

believe

advise

especially,

most of all

angry

beauty

say

command (verb)

there

slain

training

take

have

to-day

unfriendly

drive

favor (verb)

suitable

pleasing

teach

neighboring

destroy

friendly

seize

512. Review Questions. What is conjugation? Name two important differences between conjugation in Latin and in English. What is tense? What is mood? What are the Latin moods? When do we use the indicative mood? Name the six tenses of the indicative. What are personal endings? Name those you have had. Inflect sum in the three tenses you have learned. How many regular conjugations are there? How are they distinguished? How is the present stem found? What tenses are formed from the present stem? What is the tense sign of the imperfect? What is the meaning of the imperfect? What is the tense sign of the future in the first two conjugations? in the last two? Before what letters is a final long vowel of the stem shortened? What are the three possible translations of a present, as of pugnō? Inflect arō, sedeō, mittō, faciō, and veniō, in the present, imperfect, and future active. What forms of -iō verbs of the third conjugation are like audiō? what like regō? Give the rule for the dative with adjectives. Name the special intransitive verbs that govern the dative. What does the imperative mood express? How is the present active imperative formed in the singular? in the plural? What three verbs have a shortened present active imperative? Give the present active imperative of portō, dēleō, agō, faciō, mūniō.

Go on to Lesson XXVII

IV. REVIEW OF LESSONS XXVII-XXXVI

Lesson XXXVII

513. Give the English of the following words:

NOUNS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION

āla

cūra

mora

porta

prōvincia

vīta

NOUNS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION

animus

aurum

bracchium

deus

locus

mōnstrum

nāvigium

ōrāculum

perīculum

ventus

vīnum

ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS

adversus

attentus

cārus

commōtus

dēfessus

dexter

dubius

maximus

perfidus

plēnus

saevus

sinister

ADVERBS

anteā

celeriter

dēnique

diū

frūstrā

graviter

ita

longē

semper

subitō

tamen

tum

CONJUNCTIONS

autem

sī

ubi

PREPOSITIONS

dē

per

prō

sine

VERBS

CONJ. I

CONJ. II

adpropinquō

nāvigō

occupō

postulō

recūsō

reportō

servō

stō

superō

temptō

vāstō

vulnerō

contineō

egeō

prohibeō

respondeō

teneō

CONJ. III

IRREGULAR VERB

discēdō

gerō

interficiō

absum

514. Translate the following words. Give the genitive and the gender of the nouns and the principal parts of the verbs.

be away

wind

through

if

savage

wound (verb)

wine

delay

faithless

right

seize

quickly

before, in behalf of

battle

down from or concerning

moreover

greatest

oracle

danger

lay waste

gate

doubtful

opposite, adverse

demand

finally

attentive

then, at that time

weary

overcome,

conquer

boat, ship

sail (verb)

life

save

full

refuse

heavily

monster

approach

nevertheless

place

be without,

lack

moved

gold

restrain, keep from

without

hold

suddenly

dear

always

god

hold in, keep

afar

thus, so,

as follows

arm (noun)

when

in vain

stand

bring back, win

before,

previously

depart,

go away

province

care, trouble

kill

reply (verb)

wing

mind, heart

left (adj.)

bear, carry on

try

for a long time

515. Give the principal parts and meaning of the following verbs:

sum

dō

teneō

iubeō

agō

mittō

mūniō

moveō

crēdō

rapiō

reperiō

dēleō

resistō

audiō

moneō

capiō

doceō

regō

faveō

noceō

dīcō

pāreō

dūcō

faciō

persuādeō

sedeō

studeō

fugiō

veniō

iaciō

videō

absum

egeō

gerō

stō

516. Review Questions. What are the personal endings in the passive voice? What is the letter -r sometimes called? What are the distinguishing vowels of the four conjugations? What forms constitute the principal parts? What are the three different conjugation stems? How may they be found? What are the tenses of the indicative? of the infinitive? What tense of the imperative have you learned? What forms are built on the present stem? on the perfect stem? on the participial stem? What are the endings of the perfect active indicative? What is the tense sign of the pluperfect active? of the future perfect active? How is the present active infinitive formed? the present passive infinitive? How is the present active imperative formed? the present passive imperative? How is the perfect active infinitive formed? the perfect passive infinitive? How is the future active infinitive formed? What is a participle? How are participles in -us declined? Give the rule for the agreement of the participle. How are the perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect passive indicative formed? Conjugate the verb sum in all moods and tenses as far as you have learned it (§ 494). What is meant by the separative ablative? How is the place from which expressed in Latin? Give the rule for the ablative of separation; for the ablative of the personal agent. How can we distinguish between the ablative of means and the ablative of the personal agent? What is the perfect definite? the perfect indefinite? What is the difference in meaning between the perfect indefinite and the imperfect? What two cases in Latin may be governed by a preposition? Name the prepositions that govern the ablative. What does the preposition in mean when it governs the ablative? the accusative? What are the three interrogatives used to introduce yes-and-no questions? Explain the force of each. What words are sometimes used for yes and no? What are the different meanings and uses of ubi?

Go on to Lesson XXXVII

V. REVIEW OF LESSONS XXXVII-XLIV

Lesson XLV

517. Give the English of the following words:

NOUNS

FIRST DECLENSION

SECOND DECLENSION

rīpa

barbarī

captīvus

castellum

impedīmentum

THIRD DECLENSION

animal

arbor

avis

caedēs

calamitās

calcar

caput

cīvis

cliēns

collis

cōnsul

dēns

dux

eques

fīnis

flūmen

fōns

frāter

homō

hostīs

ignis

imperātor

īnsigne

iter

iūdex

labor

lapis

legiō

mare

māter

mēnsis

mīles

mōns

nāvis

opus

ōrātor

ōrdō

pater

pedes

pēs

pōns

prīnceps

rēx

salūs

sanguis

soror

tempus

terror

turris

urbs

victor

virtūs

vīs

ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS

barbarus

dexter

sinister

summus

PREPOSITIONS

ADVERBS

CONJUNCTIONS

in with the abl.

in with the acc.

trāns

cotīdiē

numquam

nec, neque

nec ... nec, or neque ... neque

VERBS

CONJ. I

CONJ. III

cessō

confirmō

oppugnō

vetō

accipiō

incipiō

petō

ponō

vincō

vivō

518. Translate the following words. Give the genitive and the gender of the nouns and the principal parts of the verbs:

forbid

rank, row

brother

force

across

savages

horseman

never

mountain

manliness,

courage

leader

put, place

time

savage,

barbarous

sister

seek

captive

hindrance,

baggage

man-of-war

judge

defeat, disaster

fire

tree

foot soldier

receive

general

highest

fountain

orator

neither ... nor

and not

left

tooth

soldier

month

city

victor

daily

live (verb)

conquer

consul

mother

retainer

citizen

head

safety

assail, storm

begin

march

decoration

bridge

bird

cease

man

river

work (noun)

and

ship

bank

redoubt, fort

sea

tower

drill (verb)

legion

terror

into, to

right (adj.)

in

stone

blood

labor (noun)

king

spur

chief

slaughter

strengthen

foot

enemy

animal

father

519. Review Questions. Give the conjugation of possum. What is an infinitive? What three uses has the Latin infinitive that are like the English? What is the case of the subject of the infinitive? What is meant by a complementary infinitive? In the sentence The bad boy cannot be happy, what is the case of happy? Give the rule. Decline quī. Give the rule for the agreement of the relative. What are the two uses of the interrogative? Decline quis. What is the base of a noun? How is the stem formed from the base? Are the stem and the base ever the same? How many declensions of nouns are there? Name them. What are the two chief divisions of the third declension? How are the consonant stems classified? Explain the formation of lapis from the stem lapid-, mīles from mīlit-, rēx from rēg-. What nouns have i-stems? What peculiarities of form do i-stems have,—masc., fem., and neut.? Name the five nouns that have -ī and -e in the abl. Decline turris. Give the rules for gender in the third declension. Decline mīles, lapis, rēx, virtūs, cōnsul, legiō, homō, pater, flūmen, opus, tempus, caput, caedēs, urbs, hostis, mare, animal, vīs, iter.

520. Fill out the following scheme:

THE THIRD DECLENSION

GENDER ENDINGS

Masculine

Feminine

Neuter

CASE TERMINATIONS

I. CONSONANT STEMS

a. Masc. and fem.

b  . Neuters

II. I-STEMS

a. Masc. and fem.

b  . Neuters

IRREGULAR NOUNS

Go on to Lesson XLV

VI. REVIEW OF LESSONS XLV-LII

Lesson LIII

521. Give the English of the following words:

NOUNS

FIRST DECLENSION

SECOND DECLENSION

amīcitia

hōra

littera

annus

modus

nūntius

oculus

rēgnum

signum

supplicium,

supplicium dare

supplicium sūmere dē

tergum,

tergum vertere

vestīgium

THIRD DECLENSION

FOURTH DECLENSION

aestās

corpus

hiems

lībertās

lūx,

prīma lūx

nōmen

nox

pars

pāx

rūs

sōl

vōx

vulnus

adventus

cornū

domus

equitātus

exercitus

fluctus

impetus

lacus

manus

metus

portus

FIFTH DECLENSION

INDECLINABLE NOUN

aciēs

diēs

fidēs,

in fidem venīre

rēs,

rēs gestae

rēs adversae

rēs pūblica

rēs secundae

spēs

nihil

ADJECTIVES

FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS

THIRD DECLENSION

dēnsus

invīsus

mīrus

paucī

prīmus

prīstinus

pūblicus

secundus

tantus

vērus

ācer, ācris, ācre

brevis, breve

difficilis, difficile

facīlis, facile

fortis, forte

gravis, grave

incolumis, incolume

omnis, omne

pār, pār

vēlōx, vēlōx

PRONOUNS

PERSONAL

DEMONSTRATIVE

INTENSIVE

INDEFINITE

ego

nōs

suī

tū

vōs

hic

īdem

ille

iste

ipse

aliquis, aliquī

quīdam

quis, quī

quisquam

quisque

ADVERBS

CONJUNCTIONS

PREPOSITIONS

nē ... quidem

ōlim

paene

quoque

satis

vērō

itaque

nisi

ante

post

propter

VERBS

CONJ. I

CONJ. II

CONJ. III

CONJ. IV

conlocō

convocō

cremō

dēmōnstrō

mandō

dēbeō

exerceō

maneō

placeō

sustineō

committō,

committere proelium

dēcidō

ēripiō

sūmō,

sūmere supplicium dē

trādūcō

vertō

dēsiliō

522. Translate the following words. Give the genitive and the gender of the nouns and the principal parts of the verbs.

if not, unless

on account of

unharmed

public

commonwealth

leap down, dismount

lead across

remain

call together

friendship

footprint, trace

each

fear (noun)

hope

therefore

behind, after

so great

equal

in truth, indeed

that (yonder)

a certain

fall down

owe, ought

measure, mode

eye

name

wave, billow

thing, matter

exploits

republic

prosperity

adversity

former, old-time

all, every

any one (at all)

this (of mine)

heavy, serious

hateful, detested

true

burn

snatch from

letter

punishment

inflict

punishment on

suffer punishment

liberty

sun

sustain

take up, assume

hour

reign, realm

messenger

part, direction

body

harbor

faith, protection

of himself

also, too

sufficiently

burn

that (of yours)

before

you (plur.)

light

daybreak

winter

attack

line of battle

army

drill, train

join battle

house, home

midday

wonderful

brave

almost

the same

some, any

if any one

self, very

not even

easy

dense

point out, explain

difficult

first

arrange, station

please

year

peace

back

turn the back, retreat

night

hand, force

lake

day

commit, intrust

a few only

sharp, eager

we

turn

you (sing.)

I

signal

summer

cavalry

wound

horn, wing

country

second, favorable

short

voice

formerly, once

arrival

come under the

protection of

swift

nothing

523. Review Questions. By what declensions are Latin adjectives declined? What can you say about the stem of adjectives of the third declension? Into what classes are these adjectives divided? How can you tell to which of the classes an adjective belongs? Decline ācer, omnis, pār. What are the nominative endings and genders of nouns of the fourth or u-declension? What nouns are feminine by exception? Decline adventus, lacus, cornū, domus. Give the rules for the ordinary expression of the place to which, the place from which, the place in which. What special rules apply to names of towns, small islands, and rūs? What is the locative case? What words have a locative case? What is the form of the locative case? Translate Galba lives at home, Galba lives at Rome, Galba lives at Pompeii. What is the rule for gender in the fifth or ē-declension? Decline diēs, rēs. When is the long ē shortened? What can you say about the plural of the fifth declension? Decline tuba, servus, pīlum, ager, puer, mīles, cōnsul, flūmen, caedēs, animal. How is the time when expressed? Name the classes of pronouns and define each class. Decline ego, tū, is. What are the reflexives of the first and second persons? What is the reflexive of the third person? Decline it. Translate I see myself, he sees himself, he sees him. Decline ipse. How is ipse used? Decline īdem. Decline hic, iste, ille. Explain the use of these words. Name and translate the commoner indefinite pronouns. Decline aliquis, quisquam, quīdam, quisque.

Go on to Lesson LIII

VII. REVIEW OF LESSONS LIII-LX

Lesson LXI

524. Give the English of the following words:

NOUNS

FIRST DECLENSION

SECOND DECLENSION

aquila

fossa

aedificium

captīvus

concilium

imperium

negōtium

spatium

vāllum

THIRD DECLENSION

agmen

celeritās

cīvitās

clāmor

cohors

difficultās

explōrātor

gēns

lātitūdō

longitūdō

magnitūdō

mēns

mercātor

mīlle

mors

mulier

multitūdō

mūnītiō

nēmō

obses

opīniō

regiō

rūmor

scelus

servitūs

timor

vallēs

FOURTH DECLENSION

FIFTH DECLENSION

aditus

commeātus

passus

rēs frūmentāria

ADJECTIVES

FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS

aequus

bīnī

ducentī

duo

exterus

īnferus

maximus

medius

minimus

opportūnus

optimus

pessimus

plūrimus

posterus

prīmus

reliquus

secundus

singulī

superus

tardus

ternī

ūnus

THIRD DECLENSION

alacer, alacris, alacre

audāx, audāx

celer, celeris, celere

citerior, citerius

difficilis, difficile

dissimilis, dissimile

facilis, facile

gracilis, gracile

humilis, humile

ingēns, ingēns

interior, interius

lēnis, lēne

maior, maius

melior, melius

minor, minus

nōbilis, nōbile

peior, peius

——, plūs

prior, prius

recēns, recēns

similis, simile

trēs, tria

ulterior, ulterius

ADVERBS

ācriter

audācter

bene

facile

ferē

fortiter

magis

magnopere

maximē

melius

minimē

multum

optimē

parum

paulō

plūrimum

prope

propius

proximē

quam

statim

tam

undique

CONJUNCTIONS

PREPOSITIONS

atque, ac

aut

aut ... aut

et ... et

nam

quā dē causā

quam ob rem

simul atque or

simul ac

circum

contrā

inter

ob

trāns

VERBS

CONJ. I

CONJ. II

cōnor

hortor

moror

vexō

obtineō

perterreō

valeō

vereor

CONJ. III

abdō

cadō

cognōscō

cōnsequor

contendō

cupiō

currō

dēdō

dēfendō

ēgredior

incendō

incolō

īnsequor

occīdō

patior

premō

proficīscor

prōgredior

quaerō

recipiō

relinquō

revertor

sequor

statuō

subsequor

suscipiō

trādō

trahō

CONJ. III

orior

perveniō

525. Translate the following words. Give the genitive and the gender of the nouns and the principal parts of the verbs:

on account of

nearly

keenly, sharply

thousand

two

opportune

remaining

above (adj.)

next

grain supply

pace

shout (noun)

from all sides

against

around

three

further

line of march

manor

region

fortification

eagle

almost

boldly

bravely

across

between, among

hither (adj.)

so

less

more

most

worst

difficulty

hostage

death

command, power

captive

or

and

arrive

attempt, try

length

width

scout

cohort

tribe, nation

business

by a little

somewhat

crime

difficult

equal

move forward,

advance

multitude

woman

desire (verb)

give over,

surrender

kill

overtake

hasten, strive

hide

one

first

second, favorable

two hundred

former

inner

middle

low

outward

three by three

provisions

speed

ditch

wherefore or

therefore

for this reason

fear (noun)

return

inquire

set out

move out, disembark

fear (verb)

worse

greater, larger

two by two

least (adv.)

opinion,

expectation

approach, entrance

trader

magnitude, size

council, assembly

space, room

either ... or

rise, arise

suffer, allow

press hard

fall

surrender

set fire to

defend

possess, hold

delay (verb)

nearest (adv.)

nearer (adv.)

better (adj.)

well known, noble

mild, gentle

swift

eager

low (adj.)

slender

one by one

no one

least (adv.)

little (adv.)

learn, know

drag

undertake

run

fix, decide

leave

abandon

be strong

receive, recover

terrify, frighten

dwell

state, citizenship

valley

slavery

greatly

best of all (adv.)

better (adv.)

well (adv.)

very much

much

unlike

like (adj.)

slow

very greatly,

exceedingly

building

mind (noun)

easily

easy

recent

huge, great

bold

immediately

as soon as

for

than

best (adj.)

greatest

follow close

encourage

annoy, ravage

hide

follow

pursue

both ... and

rampart

526. Review Questions. What is meant by comparison? In what two ways may adjectives be compared? Compare clārus, brevis, vēlōx, and explain the formation of the comparative and the superlative. What are the adverbs used in comparison? Compare brevis by adverbs. Decline the comparative of vēlōx. How are adjectives in -er compared? Compare ācer, pulcher, liber. What are possible translations for the comparative and superlative? Name the six adjectives that form the superlative in -limus. Translate in two ways Nothing is brighter than the sun. Give the rule for the ablative with comparatives. Compare bonus, magnus, malus, multus, parvus, exterus, īnferus, posterus, superus. Decline plūs. Compare citerior, interior, propior, ulterior. Translate That route to Italy is much shorter. Give the rule for the expression of measure of difference. Name five words that are especially common in this construction. How are adverbs usually formed from adjectives of the first and second declensions? from adjectives of the third declension? Compare the adverbs cārē, līberē, fortiter, audācter. What cases of adjectives are sometimes used as adverbs? What are the adverbs from facilis? multus? prīmus? plūrimus? bonus? magnus? parvus? Compare prope, saepe, magnopere. How are numerals classified? Give the first twenty cardinals. Decline ūnus, duo, trēs, mīlle. How are the hundreds declined? What is meant by the partitive genitive? Give the rule for the partitive genitive. What sort of words are commonly used with this construction? What construction is used with quīdam and cardinal numbers excepting mīlle? Give the first twenty ordinals. How are they declined? How are the distributives declined? Give the rule for the expression of duration of time and extent of space. What is the difference between the ablative of time and the accusative of time? What is a deponent verb? Give the synopsis of one. What form always has a passive meaning? Conjugate amō, moneō, regō, capiō, audiō, in the active and passive.

Go on to Lesson LXI

VIII. REVIEW OF LESSONS LXI-LXIX

Lesson LXX

527. Review the vocabularies of the first seventeen lessons. See §§ 502, 503, 506, 507.

528. Review Questions. Name the tenses of the subjunctive. What time is denoted by these tenses? What are the mood signs of the present subjunctive? How may the imperfect subjunctive be formed? How do the perfect subjunctive and the future perfect indicative active differ in form? How is the pluperfect subjunctive active formed? Inflect the subjunctive active and passive of cūrō, dēleō, vincō, rapiō, mūniō. Inflect the subjunctive tenses of sum; of possum. What are the tenses of the participles in the active? What in the passive? Give the active and passive participles of amō, moneō, regō, capiō, audiō. Decline regēns. What participles do deponent verbs have? What is the difference in meaning between the perfect participle of a deponent verb and of one not deponent? Give the participles of vereor. How should participles usually be translated? Conjugate volō, nolō, mālō, fīō.

What is the difference between the indicative and subjunctive in their fundamental ideas? How is purpose usually expressed in English? How is it expressed in Latin? By what words is a Latin purpose clause introduced? When should quō be used? What is meant by sequence of tenses? Name the primary tenses of the indicative and of the subjunctive; the secondary tenses. What Latin verbs are regularly followed by substantive clauses of purpose? What construction follows iubeō? What construction follows verbs of fearing? How is consequence or result expressed in Latin? How is a result clause introduced? What words are often found in the principal clause foreshadowing the coming of a result clause? How may negative purpose be distinguished from negative result? What is meant by the subjunctive of characteristic or description? How are such clauses introduced? Explain the ablative absolute. Why is the ablative absolute of such frequent occurrence in Latin? Explain the predicate accusative. After what verbs are two accusatives commonly found? What do these accusatives become when the verb is passive?

Go on to Lesson LXX

IMPERATOR MILITES HORTATUR

SPECIAL VOCABULARIES

The words in heavy type are used in Cæsar’s “Gallic War.”

LESSON IV, § 39

NOUNS

dea, goddess (deity)

Diā´na, Diana

fera, a wild beast (fierce)

Lātō´na, Latona

sagit´ta, arrow

VERBS

est, he (she, it) is; sunt, they are

necat, he (she, it) kills, is killing, does kill

CONJUNCTION  1

et, and

PRONOUNS

quis, interrog. pronoun, nom. sing., who?

cuius (pronounced co͝oi´yo͝os, two syllables), interrog. pronoun, gen. sing., whose?

1. A conjunction is a word which connects words, parts of sentences, or sentences.

LESSON V, § 47

NOUNS

corō´na, wreath, garland, crown

fā´bula, story (fable)

pecū´nia, money (pecuniary)

pugna, battle (pugnacious)

victō´ria, victory

VERBS

dat, he (she, it) gives

nārrat, he (she, it) tells (narrate)

CONJUNCTION  1

quia or quod, because

PRONOUN

cui (pronounced co͝oi, one syllable), interrog. pronoun, dat. sing., to whom? for whom?

1. A conjunction is a word which connects words, parts of sentences, or sentences.

LESSON VI, § 56

ADJECTIVES

bona, good

grāta, pleasing

magna, large, great

mala, bad, wicked

parva, small, little

pulchra, beautiful, pretty

sōla, alone

NOUNS

ancil´la, maidservant

Iūlia, Julia

ADVERBS  1

cūr, why

nōn, not

PRONOUNS

mea, my; tua, thy, your (possesives)

quid, interrog. pronoun, nom. and acc. sing., what?

-ne, the question sign, an enclitic (§ 16) added to the first word, which, in a question, is usually the verb, as amat, he loves, but amat´ne? does he love? est, he is; estne? is he? Of course -ne is not used when the sentence contains quis, cūr, or some other interrogative word.

1. An adverb is a word used to modify a verb, an adjective, or another adverb; as, She sings sweetly; she is very talented; she began to sing very early.

LESSON VII, § 62

NOUNS

casa, -ae, f., cottage

cēna, -ae, f., dinner

gallī´na, -ae, f., hen, chicken

īn´sula, ae, f., island (pen-insula)

ADVERBS

de-in´de, then, in the next place

ubi, where

PREPOSITION

ad, to, with acc. to express motion toward

VERBS

ha´bitat, he (she, it) lives, is living, does live (inhabit)

laudat, he (she, it) praises, is praising, does praise (laud)

parat, he (she, it) prepares, is preparing, does prepare

vocat, he (she, it) calls, is calling, does call; invites, is inviting, does invite (vocation)

PRONOUN

quem, interrog. pronoun, acc. sing., whom?

LESSON VIII, § 69

NOUNS

Italia, -ae, f., Italy

Sicilia, -ae, f., Sicily

tuba, -ae, f., trumpet (tube)

via, -ae, f., way, road, street (viaduct)

ADJECTIVES

alta, high, deep (altitude)

clāra, clear, bright; famous

lāta, wide (latitude)

longa, long (longitude)

nova, new (novelty)

LESSON IX, § 77

N  OUNS

bellum, -ī, n., war (re-bel)

cōnstantia, -ae, f., firmness, constancy, steadiness

dominus, -ī, m., master, lord (dominate)

equus, -ī, m., horse (equine)

frūmentum, -ī, n., grain

lēgātus, -ī, m., lieutenant, ambassador (legate)

Mārcus, -ī, m., Marcus, Mark

mūrus, -ī, m., wall (mural)

oppidānus, -ī, m., townsman

oppidum, -ī, n., town

pīlum, -ī, n., spear (pile driver)

servus, -ī, m., slave, servant

Sextus, -ī, m., Sextus

VERBS

cūrat, he (she, it) cares for, with acc.

properat, he (she, it) hastens

LESSON X, § 82

N  OUNS

amīcus, -ī, m., friend (amicable)

Germānia, -ae, f., Germany

patria, -ae, f., fatherland

populus, -ī, m., people

Rhēnus, -ī, m., the Rhine

vīcus, -ī, m., village

LESSON XI, § 86

N  OUNS

arma, armōrum, n., plur., arms, especially defensive weapons

fāma, -ae, f., rumor; reputation, fame

galea, -ae, f., helmet

praeda, -ae, f., booty, spoils (predatory)

tēlum, -ī, n., weapon of offense, spear

A  DJECTIVES

dūrus, -a, -um, hard, rough; unfeeling, cruel; severe, toilsome (durable)

Rōmānus, -a, -um, Roman. As a noun, Rōmānus, -ī, m., a Roman

LESSON XII, § 90

NOUNS

fīlius, fīlī, m., son (filial)

fluvius, fluvī, m., river (fluent)

gladius, gladī, m., sword (gladiator)

praesidium, praesi´dī, n., garrison, guard, protection

proelium, proelī, n., battle

ADJECTIVES

fīnitimus, -a, -um, bordering upon, neighboring, near to. As a noun, fīnitimī, -ōrum, m., plur., neighbors

Germānus, -a, -um, German. As a noun, Germānus, -ī, m., a German

multus, -a, -um, much; plur., many

ADVERB

saepe, often

LESSON XIII, § 95

N  OUNS

ager, agrī, m., field (acre)

cōpia, -ae, f., plenty, abundance (copious); plur., troops, forces

Cornēlius, Cornē´lī, m., Cornelius

lōrī´ca, -ae, f., coat of mail, corselet

praemium, praemī, n., reward, prize (premium)

puer, puerī, m., boy (puerile)

Rōma, -ae, f., Rome

scūtum, -ī, n., shield (escutcheon)

vir, virī, m., man, hero (virile)

A  DJECTIVES

legiōnārius, -a, -um,  1 legionary, belonging to the legion. As a noun, legiōnāriī, -ōrum, m., plur., legionary soldiers

līber, lībera, līberum, free (liberty) As a noun. līberī, -ōrum, m., plur., children (lit. the freeborn)

pulcher, pulchra, pulchrum, pretty, beautiful

PREPOSITION

apud, among, with acc.

CONJUNCTION

sed, but

1. The genitive singular masculine of adjectives in -ius ends in -iī and the vocative in -ie; not in -ī, as in nouns.

LESSON XIV, § 99

N  OUNS

auxilium, auxi´lī, n., help, aid (auxiliary)

castrum, -ī, n., fort (castle); plur., camp (lit. forts)

cibus, -ī, m., food

cōnsilium, cōnsi´lī, n., plan (counsel)

dīligentia, -ae, f., diligence, industry

magister, magistrī, m.,   master, teacher  1

A  DJECTIVES

aeger, aegra, aegrum, sick

crēber, crēbra, crēbrum, frequent

miser, misera, miserum, wretched, unfortunate (miser)

1. Observe that dominus, as distinguished from magister, means master in the sense of owner.

LESSON XV, § 107

NOUNS

carrus, -ī, m., cart, wagon

inopia, -ae, f., want, lack; the opposite of cōpia

studium, studī, n., zeal, eagerness (study)

VERB

mātūrat, he (she, it) hastens. Cf. properat

ADJECTIVES

armātus, -a, -um, armed

īnfīrmus, -a, -um, week, feeble (infirm)

vali´dus, -a, -um, strong, sturdy

ADVERB

iam, already, now

-que, conjunction, and; an enclitic (cf. § 16) and always added to the second of two words to be connected, as arma tēla´que, arms and weapons.

LESSON XVII, § 117

N  OUNS

agrī cultūra, -ae, f., agriculture

domicilīum, domīci´lī, n., dwelling place (domicile) abode

fēmina, -ae, f., woman (female)

Gallia, -ae, f., Gaul

Gallus, -i, m., a Gaul

lacrima, -ae, f., tear

numerus, -ī, m., number (numeral)

ADJECTIVE

mātūrus, -a, -um, ripe, mature

VERBS

arat, he (she, it) plows (arable)

dēsīderat, he (she, it) misses, longs for (desire), with acc.

ADVERB

quō, whither

CONJUNCTION

an, or, introducing the second half of a double question, as Is he a Roman or a Gaul, Estne Romanus an Gallus?

LESSON XVIII, § 124

NOUNS

lūdus, -ī, m.,school

socius, socī, m., companion, ally (social)

ADJECTIVES

īrātus, -a, -um, angry, furious (irate)

laetus, -a, -um, happy, glad (social)

A  DVERBS

hodiē, to-day

ibi, there, in that place

mox,   presently, soon, of the immediate future

nunc, now, the present moment

nūper, lately, recently, of the immediate past

LESSON XX, § 136

N  OUNS

fōrma, -ae, f., form, beauty

poena, -ae, f., punishment, penalty

potentia, -ae, f., power (potent)

regīna, -ae, f., queen (regal)

superbia, -ae, f., pride, haughtiness

trīstītīa, -ae, f., sadness, sorrow

ADJECTIVES

septem, indeclinable, seven

superbus, -a, -um, proud, haughty (superb)

CONJUNCTIONS

nōn sōlum ... sed etiam, not only ... but also

LESSON XXI, § 140

NOUNS

sacrum, -ī, n., sacrifice, offering, rite

verbum, -ī, n., word (verb)

VERBS

sedeō, -ēre, sit (sediment)

volō, -āre,   fly (volatile)

ADJECTIVES

interfectus, -a, -um, slain

molestus, -a, -um, troublesome, annoying (molest)

perpetuus, -a, -um, perpetual, continuous

ego, personal pronoun, I (egotism). Always emphatic in the nominative.

LESSON XXII, § 146

N  OUNS

disciplīna, -ae, f., training, culture, discipline

ōrnāmentum, -ī, n., ornament, jewel

Gāius, Gāī, m., Caius, a Roman first name

Tiberius, Tibe´rī, m.,   Tiberius, a Roman first name

VERB

doceō, -ēre, teach (doctrine)

ADVERB

maximē, most of all, especially

ADJECTIVE

antīquus, -qua, -quum, old, ancient (antique)

LESSON XXVII, § 168

NOUNS

āla, -ae, f., wing

deus, -ī, m., god (deity)  1

monstrum, -ī, n., omen, prodigy; monster

ōrāculum, -ī, n., oracle

VERB

vāstō, -āre, lay waste, devastate

ADJECTIVES

commōtus, -a, -um, moved, excited

maximus, -a, -um, greatest (maximum)

saevus, -a, -um, fierce, savage

ADVERBS

ita, thus, in this way, as follows

tum, then, at that time

1. For the declension of deus, see § 468

LESSON XXVIII, § 171

VERBS

respondeō, -ēre, respond, reply

servō, -āre, save, preserve

ADJECTIVE

cārus, -a, -um, dear (cherish)

CONJUNCTION

autem, but, moreover, now. Usually

stands second, never first

NOUN

vīta, -ae, f., life (vital)

LESSON XXIX, § 176

VERB

superō, -āre, conquer, overcome (insuperable)

NOUNS

cūra, -ae, f., care, trouble

locus, -ī, m., place, spot (location). Locus is neuter in the plural and is declined loca, -ōrum, etc.

perīculum, -ī, n., danger, peril

ADVERBS

semper, always

tamen, yet, nevertheless

PREPOSITIONS

dē, with abl., down from; concerning

per, with acc., through

CONJUNCTION

si, if

LESSON XXX, § 182

V  ERBS

absum, abesse, irreg., be away, be absent, be distant, with separative abl.

adpropinquō, -āre, draw near, approach (propinquity), with dative  1

contineō, -ēre, hold together, hem in, keep (contain)

discēdō, -ere, depart, go away, leave, with separative abl.

egeō, -ēre, lack, need, be without, with separative abl.

interficiō, -ere, kill

prohibeō, -ēre, restrain, keep from (prohibit)

vulnerō, -āre, wound (vulnerable)

NOUNS

prōvincia, -ae, f., province

vīnum, -ī, n., wine

ADJECTIVE

dēfessus, -a, -um, weary, worn out

ADVERB

longē, far, by far, far away

1. This verb governs the dative because the idea of nearness to is stronger than that of motion to. If the latter idea were the stronger, the word would be used with ad and the accusative.

LESSON XXXI, § 188

NOUNS

aurum, -ī, n., gold (oriole)

mora, -ae, f., delay

nāvigium, nāvi´gī, n., boat, ship

ventus, -ī, m., wind (ventilate)

VERB

nāvigō, -āre, sail (navigate)

ADJECTIVES

attentus, -a, -um, attentive, careful

dubius, -a, -um, doubtful (dubious)

perfidus, -a, -um, faithless, treacherous (perfidy)

ADVERB

anteā, before, previously

PREPOSITION

sine, with abl., without

LESSON XXXII, § 193

NOUNS

animus, -ī, m., mind, heart; spirit, feeling (animate)

bracchium, bracchī, n., forearm, arm

porta, -ae, f., gate (portal)

ADJECTIVES

adversus, -a, -um, opposite; adverse, contrary

plēnus, -a, -um, full (plenty)

PREPOSITION

prō, with abl., before; in behalf of; instead of

ADVERB

diū, for a long time, long

LESSON XXXIV, § 200

A  DVERBS

celeriter, quickly (celerity)

dēnique, finally

graviter, heavily, severely (gravity)

subitō, suddenly

VERB

reportō, -āre, -āvī, bring back, restore; win, gain (report)

LESSON XXXVI, § 211

dexter, dextra, dextrum, right (dextrous)

sinister, sinistra, sinistrum, left

frūstrā, adv., in vain (frustrate)

gerō, gerere, gessī, gestus, bear, carry on; wear; bellum gerere, to wage war

occupō, occupāre, occupāvī, occupātus, seize, take possession of (occupy)

postulō, postulāre, postulāvī, postulātus, demand (ex-postulate)

recūsō, recūsāre, recūsāvī, recūsātus, refuse

stō, stāre, stetī, status, stand

temptō, temptāre, temptāvī, temptātus, try, tempt, test; attempt

teneō, tenēre, tenuī, ——, keep, hold (tenacious)

The word ubi, which we have used so much in the sense of where in asking a question, has two other uses equally important:

1. ubi = when, as a relative conjunction denoting time; as,

Ubi mōnstrum audīvērunt, fūgērunt, when they heard the monster, they fled

2. ubi = where, as a relative conjunction denoting place; as,

Videō oppidum ubi Galba habitat, I see the town where Galba lives

Ubi is called a relative conjunction because it is equivalent to a relative pronoun. When in the first sentence is equivalent to at the time at which; and in the second, where is equivalent to the place in which.

LESSON XXXVII, § 217

neque or nec, conj., neither, nor, and ... not; neque ... neque, neither ... nor

castellum, -ī, n., redoubt, fort (castle)

cotīdiē, adv., daily

cessō, cessāre, cessāvī, cessātus, cease, with the infin.

incipiō, incipere, incēpī, inceptus, begin (incipient), with the infin.

oppugnō, oppugnāre, oppugnāvī, oppugnātus, storm, assail

petō, petere, petivi or petiī, petītus, aim at, assail, storm, attack; seek, ask (petition)

pōnō, pōnere, posuī, positus, place, put (position); castra pōnere, to pitch camp

possum, posse, potuī, ——, be able, can (potent), with the infin.

vetō, vetāre, vetuī, vetitus, forbid (veto), vith the infin.; opposite of iubeō, command

vincō, vincere, vīcī, victus, conquer (in-vincible)

vīvō, vīvere, vīxī, ——, live, be alive (re-vive)

LESSON XXXIX, § 234

barbarus, -a, -um, strange, foreign, barbarous. As a noun, barbarī, -ōrum, m., plur., savages, barbarians

dux, ducis, m., leader (duke). Cf. the verb dūcō

eques, equitis, m., horseman, cavalryman (equestrian)

iūdex, iūdicis, m., judge

lapis, lapidis, m., stone (lapidary)

mīles, mīlitis, m., soldier (militia)

pedes, peditis, m., foot soldier (pedestrian)

pēs, pedis,  1 m., foot (pedal)

prīnceps, prīncipis, m., chief (principal)

rēx, rēgis, m., king (regal)

summus, -a, -um, highest, greatest (summit)

virtūs, virtūtis, f., manliness, courage (virtue)

1. Observe that e is long in the nom. sing, and short in the other cases.

LESSON XL, § 237

Caesar, -aris, m., Cæsar

captīvus, -ī, m., captive, prisoner

cōnsul, -is, m., consul

frāter, frātris, m., brother (fraternity)

homō, hominis, m., man, human being

impedīmentum, -ī, n., hindrance (impediment); plur. impedīmenta, -ōrum, baggage

imperātor, imperātōris, m., commander in chief, general (emperor)

legiō, legiōnis, f., legion

māter, mātris, f., mother (maternal)

ōrdō, ōrdinis, m., row, rank (order)

pater, patris, m., father (paternal)

salūs, salūtis, f., safety (salutary)

soror, sorōris, f., sister (sorority)

LESSON XLI, § 239

calamitās, calamitātis, f., loss, disaster, defeat (calamity)

caput, capitis, n., head (capital)

flūmen, flūminis, n., river (flume)

labor, labōris, m., labor, toil

opus, operis, n., work, task

ōrātor, ōrātōris, m., orator

rīpa, -ae, f., bank (of a stream)

tempus, temporis, n., time (temporal)

terror, terrōris, m., terror, fear

victor, victōris, m., victor

accipiō, accipere, accēpī, acceptus, receive, accept

cōnfirmō, cōnfīrmāre, cōnfīrmāvī, cōnfīrmātus, strengthen, establish, encourage (confirm)

LESSON XLIII, § 245

animal, animālis (-ium  1), n., animal

avis, avis (-ium), f., bird (aviation)

caedēs, caedīs (-ium), f., slaughter

calcar, calcāris (-ium), n., spur

cīvis, cīvis (-ium), m. and f., citizen (civic)

cliēns, clientis (-ium), m., retainer, dependent (client)

fīnis, fīnis (-ium), m., end, limit (final); plur., country, territory

hostis, hostis (-ium), m. and f., enemy in war (hostile). Distinguish from inimīcus, which means a personal enemy

ignis, ignis (-ium), m., fire (ignite)

īnsigne, īnsignis (-ium), n. decoration, badge (ensign)

mare, maris (-ium  2), n., sea (marine)

nāvis, nāvis (-ium), f., ship (naval);

nāvis longa, man-of-war

turris, turris (-ium), f., tower (turret)

urbs, urbis (-ium), f., city (suburb). An urbs is larger than an oppidum.

1. The genitive plural ending -ium is written to mark the i-stems.

2. The genitive plural of mare is not in use.

LESSON XLIV, § 249

arbor, arboris, f., tree (arbor)

collis, collis (-ium), m., hill

dēns, dentis (-ium), m., tooth (dentist)

fōns, fontis (-ium), m.. fountain, spring; source

iter, itineris, n., march, journey, route (itinerary)

mēnsis, mēnsis (-ium), m., month

moenia, -ium, n., plur., walls, fortifications. Cf. mūrus

mōns, montis (-ium), m., mountain;

summus mōns, top of the mountain

numquam, adv., never

pōns, pontis, m., bridge (pontoon)

sanguis, sanguinis, m., blood (sanguinary)

summus, -a, -um, highest, greatest (summit)

trāns, prep, with acc., across (transatlantic)

vīs (vīs), gen. plur. virium, f. strength, force, violence (vim)

LESSON XLV, § 258

ācer, ācris, ācre, sharp, keen, eager (acrid)

brevis, breve, short, brief

difficilis, difficile, difficult

facilis, facile, facile, easy

fortis, forte, brave (fortitude)

gravis, grave, heavy, severe, serious (grave)

omnis, omne, every, all (omnibus)

pār, gen. paris, equal (par)

paucī, -ae, -a, few, only a few (paucity)

secundus, -a, -um, second; favorable, opposite of adversus

signum, -ī, n., signal, sign, standard

vēlōx, gen. vēlōcis, swift (velocity)

conlocō, conlocāre, conlocāvī, conlocātus, arrange, station, place (collocation)

dēmōnstrō, dēmōnstrāre, dēmōnstrāvī, dēmōnstrātus, point out, explain (demonstrate)

mandō, mandāre, mandāvī, mandātus, commit, intrust (mandate)

LESSON XLVI, § 261

adventus, -ūs, m., approach, arrival (advent)

ante, prep, with acc., before (ante-date)

cornū, -ūs, n., horn, wing of an army (cornucopia);

ā dextrō cornū, on the right wing;

ā sinistrō cornū, on the left wing

equitātus, -ūs, m., cavalry

exercitus, -ūs, m., army

impetus, -ūs, m., attack (impetus); impetum facere in, with acc., to make an attack on

lacus, -ūs, dat. and abl. plur. lacubus, m., lake

manus, -ūs, f., hand; band, force (manual)

portus, -ūs, m., harbor (port)

post, prep, with acc., behind, after (post-mortem)

cremō, cremāre, cremāvī, cremātus, burn (cremate)

exerceō, exercēre, exercuī, exercitus, practice, drill, train (exercise)

LESSON XLVII, § 270

Athēnae, -ārum, f., plur., Athens

Corinthus, -ī, f., Corinth

domus, -ūs, locative domī, f., house, home (dome). Cf. domicilium

Genāva, -ae, f., Geneva

Pompēii, -ōrum, m., plur.,   Pompeii, a city in Campania. See map

propter, prep. with acc., on account of, because of

rūs, rūris, in the plur. only nom. and acc. rūra, n., country (rustic)

tergum, tergī, n., back; ā tergō, behind, in the rear

vulnus, vulneris, n., wound (vulnerable)

committō, committere, commīsī, commissus, intrust, commit; proelium committere, join battle

convocō, convocāre, convocāvī, convocātus, call together, summon (convoke)

timeō, timēre, timuī, ——, fear; be afraid (timid)

vertō, vertere, vertī, versus, turn, change (convert); terga vertere, to turn the backs, hence to retreat

LESSON XLVIII, § 276

aciēs, -ēī, f., line of battle

aestās, aestātis, f., summer

annus, -ī, m., year (annual)

diēs, diēī, m., day (diary)

fidēs, fideī, no plur., f., faith, trust; promise, word; protection; in fidem venīre, to come under the protection

fluctus, -ūs, m. wave, billow (fluctuate)

hiems, hiemis, f., winter

hōra, -ae, f., hour

lūx, lūcis, f., light (lucid); prīma lux, daybreak

merīdiēs, acc. -em, abl. -ē, no plur., m., midday (meridian)

nox, noctis (-ium), f., night (nocturnal)

prīmus, -a, -um, first (prime)

rēs, reī, f., thing, matter (real);

rēs gestae, deeds, exploits (lit. things performed); rēs adversae, adversity; rēs secundae, prosperity

spēs, speī, f., hope

LESSON XLIX, § 283

amīcitia, -ae, f., friendship (amicable)

itaque, conj., and so, therefore, accordingly

littera, -ae, f., a letter of the alphabet;

plur., a letter, an epistle

metus, metūs, m., fear

nihil, indeclinable, n., nothing (nihilist)

nūntius, nūntī, m., messenger. Cf. nūntiō

pāx, pācis, f., peace (pacify)

rēgnum, -ī, n., reign, sovereignty, kingdom

supplicum, suppli´cī, n., punishment;

supplicum sūmere dē, with abl., inflict punishment on;

supplicum dare, suffer punishment. Cf. poena

placeō, placēre, placuī, placitus, be pleasing to, please, with dative. Cf. § 154

sūmō, sūmere, sūmpsī, sūmptus, take up, assume

sustineō, sustinēre, sustinuī, sustentus, sustain

LESSON L, § 288

corpus, corporis, n., body (corporal)

dēnsus, -a, -um, dense

īdem, e´adem, idem, demonstrative pronoun, the same (identity)

ipse, ipsa, ipsum, intensive pronoun, self; even, very

mīrus, -a, -um, wonderful, marvelous (miracle)

ōlim, adv., formerly, once upon a time

pars, partis (-ium), f., part, region, direction

quoque, adv., also. Stands after the word which it emphasizes

sōl, sōlis, m., sun (solar)

vērus, -a, -um, true, real (verity)

dēbeō, dēbēre, dēbuī, dēbitus, owe, ought (debt)

ēripiō, ēripere, ēripuī, ēreptus, snatch from

LESSON LI, § 294

hic, haec, hoc, demonstrative pronoun, this (of mine); he, she, it

ille, illa, illud, demonstrative pronoun that (yonder); he, she, it

invīsus, -a, -um, hateful, detested, with dative Cf. § 143

iste, ista, istud, demonstrative pronoun, that (of yours); he, she, it

lībertās, -ātis, f., liberty

modus, -ī, m., measure; manner, way, mode

nōmen, nōminis, n., name (nominate)

oculus, -ī, m., eye (oculist)

prīstinus, -a, -um, former, old-time (pristine)

pūblicus, -a, -um, public, belonging to the state; rēs pūblica, reī pūblicae, f., the commonwealth, the state, the republic

vestīgium, vestī´gī, n., footprint, track; trace, vestige

vōx, vōcis, f., voice

LESSON LII, § 298

incolumis, -e, unharmed

nē ... quidem, adv., not even. The emphatic word stands between nē and quidem

nisi, conj., unless, if ... not

paene, adv., almost (pen-insula)

satis, adv., enough, sufficiently (satisfaction)

tantus, -a, -um, so great

vērō, adv., truly, indeed, in fact. As a conj. but, however, usually stands second, never first.

dēcidō, dēcidere, dēcidī, ——, fall down (deciduous)

dēsiliō, dēsilīre, dēsiluī, dēsultus, leap down, dismount

maneō, manēre, mānsī, mānsūrus, remain

trādūcō, trādūcere, trādūxī, trāductus, lead across

LESSON LIII, § 306

aquila, -ae, f., eagle (aquiline)

audāx, gen. audācis, adj., bold, audacious

celer, celeris, celere, swift, quick (celerity). Cf. vēlōx

explōratōr, -ōris, m., scout, spy (explorer)

ingēns, gen. ingentis, adj., huge, vast

medius, -a, -um, middle, middle part of (medium)

mēns, mentis (-ium), f., mind (mental). Cf. animus

opportūnus, -a, -um, opportune

quam, adv., than. With the superlative quam gives the force of as possible, as quam audācissimī virī, men as bold as possible

recens, gen. recentis, adj., recent

tam, adv., so. Always with an adjective or adverb, while ita is generally used with a verb

quaerō, quaerere, quaesīvī, quaesītus, ask, inquire, seek (question). Cf. petō

LESSON LIV, § 310

alacer, alacris, alacre, eager, spirited, excited (alacrity)

celeritās, -ātis, f., speed (celerity)

clāmor, clāmōris, m., shout, clamor

lēnis, lēne, mild, gentle (lenient)

mulier, muli´eris, f., woman

multitūdō, multitūdinis, f., multitude

nēmŏ, dat. nēminī, acc. nēminem (gen. nūllīus, abl. nūllō, from nūllus), no plur., m. and f., no one

nōbilis, nōbile, well known, noble

noctū, adv. (an old abl.), by night (nocturnal)

statim, adv., immediately, at once

subitō, adv., suddenly

tardus, -a, -um, slow (tardy)

cupiō, cupere, cupīvī, cupītus, desire, wish (cupidity)

LESSON LV, § 314

aedificium, aedifi´cī, n., building, dwelling (edifice)

imperium, impe´rī, n., command, chief power; empire

mors, mortis (-ium), f., death (mortal)

reliquus, -a, -um, remaining, rest of. As a noun, m. and n. plur., the rest (relic)

scelus, sceleris, n., crime

servitūs, -ūtis, f., slavery (servitude)

vallēs, vallis (-ium), f., valley

abdō, abdere, abdidī, abditus, hide

contendō, contendere, contendī, contentus, strain, struggle; hasten (contend)

occīdō, occīdere, occīdī, occīsus, cut down, kill. Cf. necō, interficiō

perterreō, perterrēre, perterruī, perterritus, terrify, frighten

recipiō, recipere, recēpī, receptus, receive, recover; sē recipere, betake one’s self, withdraw, retreat

trādō, trādere, trādidī, trāditus, give over, surrender, deliver (traitor)

LESSON LVI, § 318

aditus, -ūs, m., approach, access; entrance

cīvitās, cīvitātis, f., citizenship; body of citizens, state (city)

inter, prep, with acc., between, among (interstate commerce)

nam, conj., for

obses, obsidis, m. and f., hostage

paulō, adv. (abl. n. of paulus), by a little, somewhat

incolō, incolere, incoluī, ——, transitive, inhabit; intransitive, dwell. Cf.

habitō, vīvō

relinquō, relinquere, relīquī, relictus, leave, abandon (relinquish)

statuō, statuere, statuī, statūtus, fix, decide (statute), usually with infin.

LESSON LVII, § 326

aequus, -a, -um, even, level; equal

cohors, cohortis (-ium), f., cohort, a tenth part of a legion, about 360 men

currō, currere, cucurrī, cursus, run (course)

difficultās, -ātis, f., difficulty

fossa, -ae, f., ditch (fosse)

gēns, gentis (-ium), f., race, tribe, nation (Gentile)

negōtium, negōtī, n., business, affair, matter (negotiate)

regiō, -ōnis, f., region, district

rūmor, rūmōris, m., rumor, report. Cf. fāma

simul atque, conj., as soon as

suscipiō, suscipere, suscēpī, susceptus, undertake

trahō, trahere, trāxī, trāctus, drag, draw (ex-tract)

valeō, valēre, valuī, valitūrus, be strong; plūrimum valēre, to be most powerful, have great influence (value). Cf. validus

LESSON LVIII, § 332

commeātus, -ūs, m.. provisions

lātitūdō, -inis, f., width (latitude)

longitūdō, -inis, f., length (longitude)

magnitūdō, -inis, f., size, magnitude

mercātor, mercātōris, m., trader, merchant

mūnītiō, -ōnis, f., fortification (munition)

spatium, spatī, n., room, space, distance; time

cognōscō, cognōscere, cognōvī, cognitus, learn; in the perfect tenses, know (re-cognize)

cōgō, cōgere, coēgī, coāctus, collect; compel (cogent)

dēfendō, dēfendere, dēfendī, dēfēnsus, defend

incendō, incendere, incendī, incēnsus, set fire to, burn (incendiary). Cf. cremō

obtineō, obtinēre, obtinuī, obtentus, possess, occupy, hold (obtain)

perveniō, pervenīre, pervēnī, perventus, come through, arrive

LESSON LIX, § 337

agmen, agminis, n., line of march, column; prīmum agmen, the van; novissimum agmen, the rear

atque, ac, conj., and; atque is used before vowels and consonants, ac before consonants only. Cf. et and -que

concilium, conci´lī, n., council, assembly

Helvētiī, -ōrum, m., the Helvetii, a Gallic tribe

passus, passūs, m., a pace, five Roman feet; mīlle passuum, a thousand (of) paces, a Roman mile

quā dē causā, for this reason, for what reason

vāllum, -ī, n., earth-works, rampart

cadō, cadere, cecidī, cāsūrus, fall (decadence)

dēdō, dēdere, dēdidī, dēditus, surrender, give up; with a reflexive pronoun, surrender one’s self, submit, with the dative of the indirect object

premō, premere, pressī, pressus, press hard, harass

vexō, vexāre, vexāvī, vexātus, annoy, ravage (vex)

LESSON LX, § 341

aut, conj., or; aut ... aut, either ... or

causā, abl. of causa, for the sake of, because of. Always stands after the gen. which modifies it

ferē, adv., nearly, almost

opīniō, -ōnis, f., opinion, supposition, expectation

rēs frūmentāria, reī frūmentāriae, f. (lit. the grain affair), grain supply

timor, -ōris, m., fear. Cf. timeō

undique, adv., from all sides

cōnor, cōnārī, cōnātus sum, attempt, try

ēgredior, ēgredī, ēgressus sum, move out, disembark; prōgredior, move forward, advance (egress, progress)

moror, morārī, morātus sum, delay

orior, orirī, ortus sum, arise, spring; begin; be born (from) (origin)

proficīscor, proficīscī, profectus sum, set out

revertor, revertī, reversus sum, return (revert). The forms of this verb are usually active, and not deponent, in the perfect system. Perf. act., revertī

sequor, sequī, secūtus sum, follow (sequence). Note the following compounds of sequor and the force of the different prefixes: cōnsequor (follow with), overtake; īnsequor (follow against), pursue; subsequor (follow under), follow close after

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

Translations inclosed within parentheses are not to be used as such; they are inserted to show etymological meanings.

The “parentheses” are shown in square brackets [ ], as in the original.

A   B   C   D   E   F   G   H   I   L   M   N   O   P   Q   R   S   T   U   V

A

ā or ab, prep. with abl. from, by, off. Translated on in ā dextrō cornū, on the right wing; ā fronte, on the front or in front; ā dextrā, on the right; ā latere, on the side; etc.

ab-dō, -ere, -didī, -ditus, hide, conceal

ab-dūcō, -ere, -dūxī, -ductus, lead off, lead away

abs-cīdō, -ere, -cīdī,-cīsus [ab(s), off, + caedō, cut], cut off

ab-sum, -esse, āfuī, āfutūrus, be away, be absent, be distant, be off; with ā or ab and abl., § 501.32

ac, conj., see atque

ac-cipiō, -ere, -cēpī, -ceptus [ad, to, + capiō, take], receive, accept

ācer, ācris, ācre, adj. sharp; figuratively, keen, active, eager (§ 471)

acerbus, -a, -um, adj. bitter, sour

aciēs, -ēī, f. [ācer, sharp], edge; line of battle

ācriter, adv. [ācer, sharp], compared ācrius, ācerrimē, sharply, fiercely

ad, prep. with acc. to, towards, near. With the gerund or gerundive, to, for

ad-aequō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, make equal, make level with

ad-dūcō, -ere, -dūxī, -ductus, lead to; move, induce

ad-eō, -īre, -iī, -itus, go to, approach, draw near, visit, with acc. (§ 413)

ad-ferō, ad-ferre, at-tulī, ad-lātus, bring, convey; report, announce; render, give (§ 426)

ad-ficiō, -ere, -fēcī, -fectus [ad, to, + faciō, do], affect, visit

adflīctātus, -a, -um, adj. [part. of adflīctō, shatter], shattered

ad-flīgō, -ere, -flīxī, -flīctus, dash upon, strike upon; harass, distress

ad-hibeō, -ēre, -uī, -itus [ad, to, + habeō, hold], apply, employ, use

ad-hūc, adv. hitherto, as yet, thus far

aditus, -ūs, m. [adeō, approach], approach, access; entrance. Cf. adventus

ad-ligō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, bind to, fasten

ad-loquor, -loquī, -locūtus sum, dep. verb [ad, to, + loquor, speak], speak to, address, with acc.

ad-ministrō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, manage, direct

admīrātiō, -ōnis, f. [admīror, wonder at], admiration, astonishment

ad-moveō, -ēre, -mōvī, -mōtus, move to; apply, employ

ad-propinquō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, come near, approach, with dat.

ad-sum, -esse, -fuī, -futūres, be present; assist; with dat., § 426

adulēscēns, -entis, m. and f. [part. of adolēscō, grow], a youth, young man, young person

adventus, -ūs, m. [ad, to, + veniō, come], approach, arrival (§ 466)

adversus, -a, -um, adj. [part. of advertō, turn to], turned towards, facing; contrary, adverse.

rēs adversae, adversity

aedificium, aedifi´cī, n. [aedificō, build], building, edifice

aedificō, -āre, -āvi, -ātus [aedēs, house, + faciō, make], build

aeger, aegra, aegrum, adj. sick, feeble

aequālis, -e, adj. equal, like. As a noun, aequālis, -is, m. or f. one of the same age

aequus, -a, -um, adj. even, level; equal

Aesōpus, -ī, m. Æsop, a writer of fables

aestās, -ātis, f. summer, initā aestāte, at the beginning of summer

aetās, -ātis, f. age

Aethiopia, -ae, f. Ethiopia, a country in Africa

Āfrica, -ae, f. Africa

Āfricānus, -a, -um, adj. of Africa. A name given to Scipio for his victories in Africa

ager, agrī, m. field, farm, land (§ 462. c)

agger, -eris, m. mound

agmen, -inis, n. [agō, drive], an army on the march, column.

prīmum agmen, the van

agō, -ere, ēgī, āctus, drive, lead; do, perform.

vītam agere, pass life

agricola, -ae, m. [ager, field, + colō, cultivate], farmer

agrī cultūra, -ae, f. agriculture

āla, -ae, f. wing

alacer, -cris, -cre, adj. active, eager. Cf. ācer

alacritās, -ātis, f. [alacer, active], eagerness, alacrity

alacriter, adv. [alacer, active], comp alacrius, alacerrimē, actively, eagerly

albus, -a, -um, adj., white

alcēs, -is, f. elk

Alcmēna, -ae, f. Alcme´na, the mother of Hercules

aliquis (-quī), -qua, -quid (-quod), indef. pron. some one, some (§ 487)

alius, -a, -ud (gen. -īus, dat. -ī), adj. another, other.

alius ... alius, one ... another.

aliī ... aliī, some ... others (§ 110)

Alpēs, -ium, f. plur. the Alps

alter, -era, -erum (gen. -īus, dat. -ī), adj. the one, the other (of two).

alter ... alter, the one ... the other (§ 110)

altitūdō, -inis, f. [altus, high], height

altus, -a, -um, adj. high, tall, deep

Amāzonēs, -um, f. plur. Amazons, a fabled tribe of warlike women

ambō, -ae, -ō, adj. (decl. like duo), both

amīcē, adv. [amīcus, friendly], superl. amīcissimē, in a friendly manner

amiciō, -īre, ——, -ictus [am-, about, + iaciō, throw], throw around, wrap about, clothe

amīcitia, -ae, f. [amīcus, friend], friendship

amīcus, -a, -um, adj. [amō, love], friendly. As a noun, amīcus, -ī, m. friend

ā-mittō, -ere, -mīsī, -missus, send away; lose

amō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, love, like, be fond of (§ 488)

amphitheātrum, -ī, n. amphitheater

amplus, -a, -um, adj. large, ample; honorable, noble

an, conj. or, introducing the second part of a double question

ancilla, -ae, f. maidservant

ancora, -ae, f. anchor

Andromeda, -ae, f. Androm´eda, daughter of Cepheus and wife of Perseus

angulus, -ī, m. angle, corner

anim-advertō, -ere, -tī, -sus [animus, mind, + advertō, turn to], turn the mind to, notice

animal, -ālis, n. [anima, breath], animal (§ 465. b)

animōsus, -a, -um, adj. spirited

animus, -ī, m. [anima, breath], mind, heart; spirit, courage, feeling; in this sense often plural

annus, -i, m. year

ante, prep, with acc. before

anteā, adv. [ante], before, formerly

antīquus, -a, -um, adj. [ante, before], former, ancient, old

aper, aprī, m. wild boar

Apollō, -inis, m. Apollo, son of Jupiter and Latona, brother of Diana

ap-pāreō, -ēre, -uī, —— [ad + pāreō, appear], appear

ap-pellō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, call by name, name. Cf. nōminō, vocō

Appius, -a, -um, adj. Appian

ap-plicō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, apply, direct, turn

apud, prep, with acc. among; at, at the house of

aqua, -ae, f. water

aquila, -ae, f. eagle

āra, -ae, f. altar

arbitror, -ārī, -ātus sum, think, suppose (§ 420. c). Cf. exīstimō, putō

arbor, -oris, f. tree (§ 247. 1. a)

Arcadia, -ae, f. Arcadia, a district in southern Greece

ārdeō, -ēre, ārsī, ārsūrus, be on fire, blaze, burn

arduus, -a, -um, adj. steep

Arīcia, -ae, f. Aricia, a town on the Appian Way, near Rome

ariēs, -etis, m. battering-ram (p. 221)

arma, -ōrum, n. plur. arms, weapons. Cf. tēlum

armātus, -a, -um, adj. [armō, arm], armed, equipped

arō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, plow, till

ars, artis, f. art, skill

articulus, -ī, m. joint

ascrībō, -ere, -scrīpsī, -scrīptus [ad, in addition, + scrībō, write], enroll, enlist

Āsia, -ae, f. Asia, i.e. Asia Minor

at, conj. but. Cf. autem, sed

Athēnae, -ārum, f. plur. Athens

Atlās, -antis, m. Atlas, a Titan who was said to hold up the sky

at-que, ac, conj. and, and also, and what is more. atque may be used before either vowels or consonants, ac before consonants only

attentus, -a, -um, adj. [part. of attendō, direct (the mind) toward], attentive, intent on, careful

at-tonitus, -a, -um, adj. thunderstruck, astounded

audācia, -ae, f. [audāx, bold], boldness, audacity

audācter, adv. [audāx, bold], compared audācius, audācissimē, boldly

audāx, -ācis, adj. bold, daring

audeō, -ēre, ausus sum, dare

audiō, -īre, -īvī or -īī, -ītus, hear, listen to (§§ 420.d; 491)

Augēās, -ae, m. Auge´as, a king whose stables Hercules cleaned

aura, -ae, f. air, breeze

aurātus, -a, -um, adj. [aurum, gold], adorned with gold

aureus, -a, -um, adj. [aurum, gold], golden

aurum, -ī, n. gold

aut, conj. or.

aut ... aut, either ... or

autem, conj., usually second, never first, in the clause, but, moreover, however, now. Cf. at, sed

auxilium, auxi´lī, n. help, aid, assistance; plur. auxiliaries

ā-vertō, -ere, -tī, -sus, turn away, turn aside

avis, -is, f. bird (§ 243. 1)

B

ballista, -ae, f. ballista, an engine for hurling missiles (p. 220)

balteus, -ī, m. belt, sword belt

barbarus, -ī, m. barbarian, savage

bellum, -ī, n. war.

bellum īnferre, with dat. make war upon

bene, adv. [for bonē, from bonus], compared melius, optimē, well

benignē, adv. [benignus, kind], compared benignius, benignissimē, kindly

benignus, -a, -um, adj. good-natured, kind, often used with dat.

bīnī, -ae, -a, distributive numeral adj. two each, two at a time (§ 334)

bis, adv. twice

bonus, -a, -um, adj. compared melior, optimus, good, kind (§ 469. a)

bōs, bovis (gen. plur. boum or bovum, dat. and abl. plur. bōbus or būbus), m. and f. ox, cow

bracchium, bracchī, n. arm

brevis, -e, adj. short

Brundisium, -ī, n. Brundisium, a seaport in southern Italy. See map

bulla, -ae, f. bulla, a locket made of small concave plates of gold fastened by a spring (p. 212)

C

C. abbreviation for Gāius, Eng. Caius

cadō, -ere, ce´cidī, cāsūrus, fall

caedēs, -is, f. [caedō, cut], (a cutting down), slaughter, carnage (§ 465. a)

caelum, -ī, n. sky, heavens

Caesar, -aris, m. Cæsar, the famous general, statesman, and writer

calamitās, -ātis, f. loss, calamity, defeat, disaster

calcar, -āris, n. spur (§ 465. b)

Campānia, -ae, f. Campania., a district of central Italy. See map

Campānus, -a, -um, adj. of Campania

campus, -ī, m. plain, field, esp. the Campus Martius, along the Tiber just outside the walls of Rome

canis, -is, m. and f. dog

canō, -ere, ce´cinī, ——, sing

cantō, -āre, -āvi, -ātus [canō, sing], sing

Capēnus, -a, -um, adj. of Capena, esp. the Porta Cape´na, the gate at Rome leading to the Appian Way

capiō, -ere, cēpī, captus, take, seize, capture (§ 492)

Capitōlīnus, -a, -um, adj. belonging to the Capitol, Capitoline

Capitōlium, Capitō´lī, n. [caput, head], the Capitol, the hill at Rome on which stood the temple of Jupiter Capitolinus and the citadel

capsa, -ae, f. box for books

captīvus, -ī, m. [capiō, take], captive

Capua, -ae, f. Capua, a large city of Campania. See map

caput, -itis, n. head (§ 464. 2. b)

carcer, -eris, m. prison, jail

carrus, -ī, m. cart, wagon

cārus, -a, -um, adj. dear; precious

casa, -ae, f. hut, cottage

castellum, -ī, n. [dim. of castrum, fort], redoubt, fort

castrum, -ī, n. fort. Usually in the plural, castra, -ōrum, a military camp.

castra pōnere, to pitch camp

cāsus, -us, m. [cadō, fall], chance; misfortune, loss

catapulta, -ae, f. catapult, an engine for hurling stones

catēna, -ae, f. chain

caupōna, -ae, f. inn

causa, -ae, f. cause, reason, quā dē causā, for this reason

cēdō, -ere, cessī, cessūrus, give way, retire

celer, -eris, -ere, adj. swift, fleet

celeritās, -ātis, f. [celer, swift], swiftness, speed

celeriter, adv. [celer, swift], compared celerius, celerrimē, swiftly

cēna, -ae, f. dinner

centum, indecl. numeral adj. hundred

centuriō, -ōnis, m. centurion, captain

Cēpheus (dissyl.), -eī (acc. Cēphea), m. Cepheus, a king of Ethiopia and father of Andromeda

Cerberus, -ī, m. Cerberus, the fabled three-headed dog that guarded the entrance to Hades

certāmen, -inis, n. [certō, struggle], struggle, contest, rivalry

certē, adv. [certus, sure], compared certius, certissimē, surely, certainly

certus, -a, -um, adj. fixed, certain, sure.

aliquem certiōrem facere (to make some one more certain), to inform some one

cervus, -ī, m. stag, deer

cessō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, delay, cease

cibāria, -ōrum, n. plur. food, provisions

cibus, -ī, m. food, victuals

Cimbrī, -ōrum, m. plur. the Cimbri

Cimbricus, -a, -um, adj. Cimbrian

cīnctus, -a, -um, adj. [part. of cingō, surround], girt, surrounded

cingō, -ere, cīnxī, cīnctus, gird, surround

circiter, adv. about

circum, prep, with acc. around

circum´-dō, -dare, -dedī, -datus, place around, surround, inclose

circum´-eō, -īre, -iī, -itus, go around

circum-sistō, -ere, circum´stetī, ——, stand around, surround

circum-veniō, -īre, -vēnī, -ventus (come around), surround

citerior, -ius, adj. in comp., superl. citimus, hither, nearer (§ 475)

cīvīlis, -e, adj. [cīvis], civil

cīvis, -is, m. and f. citizen (§ 243. 1)

cīvitās, -ātis, f. [cīvis, citizen], (body of citizens), state; citizenship

clāmor, -ōris, m. shout, cry

clārus, -a, -um, adj. clear; famous, renowned; bright, shining

classis, -is, f. fleet

claudō, -ere, -sī, -sus, shut, close

clavus, -ī, m. stripe

cliēns, -entis, m. dependent, retainer, client (§ 465. a)

Cocles, -itis, m. (blind in one eye), Cocles, the surname of Horatius

co-gnōscō, -ere, -gnōvī, -gnītus, learn, know, understand. Cf. sciō (§ 420. b)

cōgō, -ere, coēgī, coāctus [co(m)-, together, + agō, drive], (drive together), collect; compel, drive

cohors, cohortis, f. cohort, the tenth part of a legion, about 360 men

collis, -is, m. hill, in summō colle, on top of the hill (§ 247. 2. a)

collum, -ī, n. neck

colō, -ere, coluī, cultus, cultivate, till; honor, worship; devote one’s self to

columna, -ae, f. column, pillar

com- (col-, con-, cor-, co-), a prefix, together, with, or intensifying the meaning of the root word

coma, -ae, f. hair

comes, -itis, m. and f. [com-, together, + eō, go], companion, comrade

comitātus, -ūs, m. [comitor, accompany], escort, company

comitor, -ārī, -ātus sum, dep. verb [comes, companion], accompany

com-meātus, -ūs, m. supplies

com-minus, adv. [com-, together, + manus, hand], hand to hand

com-mittō, -ere, -mīsī, -missus, join together; commit, intrust.

proelium committere, join battle.

sē committere with dat, trust one’s self to

commodē, adv. [commodus, fit], compared commodius, commodissimē, conveniently, fitly

commodus, -a, -um, adj. suitable, fit

com-mōtus, -a, -um, adj. [part. of commoveō, move], aroused, moved

com-parō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [com-, intensive, + parō, prepare], prepare; provide, get

com-pleō, -ēre, -plēvī, -plētus [com-, intensive, + pleō, fill], fill up

complexus, -ūs, m. embrace

com-primō, -ere, -pressī, -pressus [com-, together, + premō, press], press together, grasp, seize

con-cidō, -ere, -cidī, —— [com-, intensive, + cadō, fall], fall down

concilium, conci´lī, n. meeting, council

con-clūdō, -ere, -clūsī, -clūsus [com-, intensive, + claudō, close], shut up, close; end, finish

con-currō, -ere, -currī, -cursus [com-, together, + currō, run], run together; rally, gather

condiciō, -ōnis, f. [com-, together, + dicō, talk], agreement, condition, terms

con-dōnō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, pardon

con-dūcō, -ere, -dūxī, -ductus, hire

cōn-ferō, -ferre, -tulī, -lātus, bring together.

sē cōnferre, betake one’s self

cōn-fertus, -a, -um, adj. crowded, thick

cōnfestim, adv. immediately

cōn-ficiō, -ere, -fēcī, -fectus [com-, completely, + faciō, do], make, complete, accomplish, finish

cōn-fīrmō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, make firm, establish, strengthen, affirm, assert

cōn-fluō, -ere, -flūxī, ——, flow together

cōn-fugiō, -ere, -fūgī, -fugitūrus, flee for refuge, flee

con-iciō, -ere, -iēcī, -iectus [com-, intensive, + iaciō, throw], hurl

con-iungō, -ere, -iūnxī, -iūnctus [com-, together, + iungō, join], join together, unite

con-iūrō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [com-, together, + iūrō, swear], unite by oath, conspire

con-locō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [com-, together, + locō, place], arrange, place, station

conloquium, conlo´quī, n. [com-, together, + loquor, speak], conversation, conference

cōnor, -ārī, -ātus sum, dep. verb, endeavor, attempt, try

cōn-scendō, -ere, -scendī, -scēnsus [com-, intensive, + scandō, climb], climb up, ascend.

nāvem cōnscendere, embark, go on board

cōn-scrībō, -ere, -scrīpsī, -scrīptus [com-, together, + scrībō, write], (write together), enroll, enlist

cōn-secrō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [com-, intensive, + sacrō, consecrate], consecrate, devote

cōn-sequor, -sequī, -secūtus sum, dep. verb [com-, intensive, + sequor, follow], pursue; overtake; win

cōn-servō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [com-, intensive, + servō, save], preserve, save

cōnsilium, cōnsi´lī, n. plan, purpose, design; wisdom

cōn-sistō, -ere, -stitī, -stitus [com-, intensive, + sistō, cause to stand], stand firmly, halt, take one’s stand

cōn-spiciō, -ere, -spēxī, -spectus [com-, intensive, + spiciō, spy], look at attentively, perceive, see

cōnstantia, -ae, f. firmness, steadiness, perseverance

cōn-stituō, -ere, -uī, -ūtus [com-, intensive, + statuō, set], establish, determine, resolve

cōn-stō, -āre, -stitī, -stātūrus [com-, together, + stō, stand], agree; be certain ; consist of

cōnsul, -ulis, m. consul (§ 464. 2. a)

cōn-sūmō, -ere, -sūmpsī, -sūmptus [com-, intensive, + sumō, take], consume, use up

con-tendō, -ere, -dī, -tus, strain; hasten; fight, contend, struggle

con-tineō, -ēre, -uī, -tentus [com-, together, + teneō, hold], hold together, hem in, contain; restrain

contrā, prep, with acc. against, contrary to

con-trahō, -ere, -trāxī, -trāctus [com-, together, + trahō, draw], draw together; of sails, shorten, furl

contrōversia, -ae, f. dispute, quarrel

con-veniō, -īre, -vēnī, -ventus [com-, together, + veniō, come], come together, meet, assemble

con-vertō, -ere, -vertī, -versus [com-, intensive, + vertō, turn], turn

con-vocō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [com-, together, + vocō, call], call together

co-orior, -īrī, -ortus sum, dep. verb [com-, intensive, + orior, rise], rise, break forth

cōpia, -ae, f. [com-, intensive, + ops, wealth], abundance, wealth, plenty. Plur. cōpiae, -ārum, troops

coquō, -ere, coxī, coctus, cook

Corinthus, -ī, f. Corinth, the famous city on the Isthmus of Corinth

Cornēlia, -ae, f. Cornelia, daughter of Scipio and mother of the Gracchi

Cornēlius, Cornē´lī, m. Cornelius, a Roman name

cornū, -ūs, n. horn; wing of an army, ā dextrō cornū, on the right wing (§ 466)

corōna, -ae, f. garland, wreath; crown

corōnātus, -a, -um, adj. crowned

corpus, -oris, n. body

cor-ripiō, -ere, -uī, -reptus [com-, intensive, + rapiō, seize], seize, grasp

cotīdiānus, -a, -um, adj. daily

cotīdiē, adv. daily

crēber, -bra, -brum, adj. thick, crowded, numerous, frequent

crēdō, -ere, -dīdī, -ditus, trust, believe, with dat. (§ 501.14)

cremō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, burn

creō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, make; elect, appoint

Creōn, -ontis, m. Creon, a king of Corinth

crēscō, -ere, crēvī, crētus, rise, grow, increase

Crēta, -ae, f. Crete, a large island in the Mediterranean

Crētaeus, -a, -um, adj. Cretan

crūs, crūris, n. leg

crūstulum, -ī, n. pastry, cake

cubīle, -is, n. bed

cultūra, -ae, f. culture, cultivation

cum, conj. with the indic. or subjv. when; since; although (§ 501.46)

cum, prep, with abl. with (§ 209)

cupidē, adv. [cupidus, desirous], compared cupidius, cupidissimē, eagerly

cupiditās, -ātis, f. [cupidus, desirous], desire, longing

cupiō, -ere, -īvī or -iī, -ītus, desire, wish. Cf. volō

cūr, adv. why, wherefore

cūra, -ae, f. care, pains; anxiety

cūria, -ae, f. senate house

cūrō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [cūra, care], care for, attend to, look after

currō, -ere, cucurrī, cursus, run

currus, -ūs, m. chariot

cursus, -ūs, m. course

custōdiō, -īre, -īvī, -ītus [custōs, guard], guard, watch

D

Daedalus, -ī, m. Dæd´alus, the supposed inventor of the first flying machine

Dāvus, -ī, m. Davus, name of a slave

dē, prep, with abl. down from, from; concerning, about, for (§ 209).

quā dē causā, for this reason, wherefore

dea, -ae, f. goddess (§ 461. a)

dēbeō, -ēre, -uī, -itus [dē, from, + habeō, hold], owe, ought, should

decem, indecl. numeral adj. ten

dē-cernō, -ere, -crēvī, -crētus [dē, from, + cernō, separate], decide, decree

dē-cidō, -ere, -cidī, —— [dē, down, + cadō, fall], fall down

decimus, -a, -um, numeral adj. tenth

dēclīvis, -e, adj. sloping downward

dē-dō, -ere, -didī, -ditus, give up, surrender, sē dēdere, surrender one’s self

dē-dūcō, -ere, -dūxī, -ductus [dē, down, + dūcō, lead], lead down, escort

dē-fendō, -ere, -dī, -fēnsus, ward off, repel, defend

dē-ferō, -ferre, -tulī, -lātus [dē, down, + ferō, bring], bring down; report, announce (§ 426)

dē-fessus, -a, -um, adj. tired out, weary

dē-ficiō, -ere, -fēcī, -fectus [dē, from, + faciō, make], fail, be wanting; revolt from

dē-fīgō, -ere, -fīxī, -fīxus [dē, down, + fīgō, fasten], fasten, fix

dē-iciō, -ere, -iēcī, -iectus [dē, down, + iaciō, hurl], hurl down; bring down, kill

de-inde, adv. (from thence), then, in the next place

dēlectō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, delight

dēleō, -ēre, -ēvī, -ētus, blot out, destroy

dēlīberō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, weigh, deliberate, ponder

dē-ligō, -ere, -lēgī, -lēctus [dē, from, + legō, gather], choose, select

Delphicus, -a, -um, adj. Delphic

dēmissus, -a, -um [part. of dēmittō, send down], downcast, humble

dē-mōnstrō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [dē, out, + mōnstrō, point], point out, show

dēmum, adv. at last, not till then.

tum dēmum, then at last

dēnique, adv. at last, finally. Cf. postrēmō

dēns, dentis, m. tooth (§ 247. 2. a)

dēnsus, -a, -um, adj. dense, thick

dē-pendeō, -ēre, ——, —— [dē, down, + pendeō, hang], hang from, hang down

dē-plōrō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [dē, intensive, + plōrō, wail], bewail, deplore

dē-pōnō, -ere, -posuī, -positus [dē, down, + pōnō, put], put down

dē-scendō, -ere, -dī, -scēnsus [dē, down, + scandō, climb], climb down, descend

dē-scrībō, -ere, -scrīpsī, -scrīptus [dē, down, + scrībō, write], write down

dēsīderō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, long for

dē-siliō, -īre, -uī, -sultus [dē, down, + saliō, leap], leap down

dē-spērō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [dē, away from, + spērō, hope], despair

dē-spiciō, -ere, -spēxi, -spectus [dē, down], look down upon, despise

dē-sum, -esse, -fuī, -futūrus [dē, away from, + sum, be], be wanting, lack, with dat. (§ 426)

deus, -ī, m. god (§ 468)

dē-volvō, -ere, -volvī, -volūtus [dē, down, + volvō, roll], roll down

dē-vorō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [dē, down, + vorō, swallow], devour

dexter, -tra, -trum (-tera, -terum), adj. to the right, right.

ā dextrō cornū, on the right wing

Diāna, -ae, f. Diana, goddess of the moon and twin sister of Apollo

dīcō, -ere, dīxī, dictus (imv. dīc), say, speak, tell. Usually introduces indirect discourse (§ 420. a)

dictātor, -ōris, m. [dictō, dictate], dictator, a chief magistrate with unlimited power

diēs, -ēi or diē, m., sometimes f. in sing., day (§ 467)

dif-ferō, -ferre, distulī, dīlātus [dis-, apart, + ferō, carry], carry apart; differ.

differre inter sē, differ from each other

dif-ficilis, -e, adj. [dis-, not, + facilis, easy], hard, difficult (§ 307)

difficultās, -ātis, f. [difficilis, hard], difficulty

dīligenter, adv. [dīligēns, careful], compared dīligentius, dīligentissimē, industriously, diligently

dīligentia, -ae, f. [dīligēns, careful], industry, diligence

dī-micō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, fight, struggle

dī-mittō, -ere, -mīsī, -missus [dī-, off, + mittō, send], send away, dismiss, disband.

dīmittere animum in, direct one’s mind to, apply one’s self to

Diomēdēs, -is, m. Dī-o-mē´dēs, a name

dis-, dī-, a prefix expressing separation, off, apart, in different directions. Often negatives the meaning

dis-cēdō, -ere, -cessī, -cessus [dis-, apart, + cēdō, go], depart from, leave, withdraw, go away

dis-cernō, -ere, -crēvī, -crētus [dis-, apart, + cernō, sift], separate; distinguish

disciplīna, -ae, f. instruction, training, discipline

discipulus, -ī, m. [discō, learn], pupil, disciple

discō, -ere, didicī, ——, learn

dis-cutiō, -ere, -cussī, -cussus [dis-, apart, + quatiō, shake], shatter, dash to pieces

dis-pōnō, -ere, -posuī, -positus [dis-, apart, + pōnō, put], put here and there, arrange, station

dis-similis, -e, adj. [dis-, apart, + similis, like], unlike, dissimilar (§ 307)

dis-tribuō, -ere, -uī, -ūtus, divide, distribute

diū, adv., compared diūtius, diūtissimē, for a long time, long (§ 477)

dō, dare, dedī, datus, give.

in fugam dare, put to flight.

alicui negōtium dare, employ some one

doceō, -ēre, -uī, -tus, teach, show

doctrīna, -ae, f. [doctor, teacher], teaching, learning, wisdom

dolor, -ōris, m. pain, sorrow

domesticus, -a, -um, adj. [domus, house], of the house, domestic

domicilium, domici´lī, n. dwelling; house, abode. Cf. domus

domina, -ae, f. mistress (of the house), lady (§ 461)

dominus, -ī, m. master (of the house), owner, ruler (§ 462)

domus, -ūs, f. house, home.

domī, locative, at home (§ 468)

dormiō, -īre, -īvī, -ītus, sleep

dracō, -ōnis, m. serpent, dragon

dubitō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, hesitate

dubius, -a, -um, adj. [duo, two], (moving two ways), doubtful, dubious

du-centī, -ae, -a, numeral adj. two hundred

dūcō, -ere, dūxī, ductus (imv. dūc), lead, conduct

dum, conj. while, as long as

duo, duae, duo, numeral adj. two (§ 479)

duo-decim, indecl. numeral adj. twelve

dūrus, -a, -um, adj. hard, tough; harsh, pitiless, bitter

dux, ducis, m. and f. [cf. dūcō, lead], leader, commander

E

ē or ex, prep, with abl. out of, from, off, of (§ 209)

eburneus, -a, -um, adj. of ivory

ecce, adv. see! behold! there! here!

ē-dūcō, -ere, -dūxī, -ductus [ē, out, + dūcō, lead], lead out, draw out

ef-ficiō, -ere, -fēcī, -fectus [ex, thoroughly, + faciō, do], work out; make, cause

ef-fugiō, -ere, -fūgī, -fugitūrus [ex, from, + fugiō, flee], escape

egeō, -ēre, -uī, ——, be in need of, lack, with abl. (§ 501.32)

ego, pers. pron. I; plur. nōs, we (§ 480)

ē-gredior, -ī, ēgressus sum, dep. verb [ē, out of, + gradior, go], go out, go forth.

ē nāvī ēgredī, disembark

ē-iciō, -ere, -iēcī, -iectus [ē, forth, + iaciō, hurl], hurl forth, expel

elementum, -ī, n., in plur. first principles, rudiments

elephantus, -ī, m. elephant

Ēlis, Ēlidis, f. E´lis, a district of southern Greece

emō, -ere, ēmī, ēmptus, buy, purchase

enim, conj., never standing first, for, in fact, indeed. Cf. nam

Ennius, Ennī, m. Ennius, the father of Roman poetry, born 239 B.C.

eō, īre, iī (īvī), itūrus, go (§ 499)

eō, adv. to that place, thither

Ēpīrus, -ī, f. Epi´rus, a district in the north of Greece

eques, -itis, m. [equus, horse], horseman, cavalryman

equitātus, -ūs, m. [equitō, ride], cavalry

equus, -ī, m. horse

ē-rigō, -ere, -rēxī, -rēctus [ē, out, + regō, make straight], raise up

ē-ripiō, -ere, -uī, -reptus [ē, out of, + rapiō, seize], seize, rescue

ē-rumpō, -ere, -rūpī, -ruptus [ē, forth, + rumpō, break], burst forth

ēruptiō, -ōnis, f. sally

Erymanthius, -a, -um, adj. Erymanthian, of Erymanthus, a district in southern Greece

et, conj. and, also.

et ... et, both ... and. Cf. atque, ac, -que

etiam, adv. (rarely conj.) [et, also, + iam, now], yet, still; also, besides. Cf. quoque.

nōn sōlum ... sed etiam, not only ... but also

Etrūscī, -ōrum, m. the Etruscans, the people of Etruria. See map of Italy

Eurōpa, -ae, f. Europe

Eurystheus, -ī, m. Eurys´theus, a king of Tiryns, a city in southern Greece

ē-vādō, -ere, -vāsī, -vāsus [ē, out, + vādō, go], go forth, escape

ex, see ē

exanimātus, -a, -um [part. of exanimō, put out of breath (anima)], adj. out of breath, tired; lifeless

ex-cipiō, -ere, -cēpī, -ceptus [ex, out, + capiō, take], welcome, receive

exemplum, -ī, n. example, model

ex-eō,-īre,-iī,-itūrus [ex, out, + eō, go], go out, go forth (§ 413)

ex-erceō, -ēre, -uī, -itus [ex, out, + arceō, shut], (shut out), employ, train, exercise, use

exercitus, -us, m. [exerceō, train], army

ex-īstimō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [ex, out, + aestimō, reckon], estimate; think, judge (§ 420. c). Cf. arbitror, putō

ex-orior, -īrī, -ortus sum, dep. verb [ex, forth, + orior, rise], come forth, rise

expedītus, -a, -um, adj. without baggage

ex-pellō, -ere, -pulī, -pulsus [ex, out, + pellō, drive], drive out

ex-piō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [ex, intensive, + pīo, atone for], make amends for, atone for

explōrātor, -ōris, m. [explōrō, investigate], spy, scout

explōrō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, examine, explore

ex-pugnō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [ex, out, + pugnō, fight], take by storm, capture

exsilium, exsi´lī, n. [exsul, exile], banishment, exile

ex-spectō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [ex, out, + spectō, look], expect, wait

ex-struō, -ere, -strūxī, -strūctus [ex, out, + struō, build], build up, erect

exterus, -a, -um, adj., compared exterior, extrēmus or extimus, outside, outer (§ 312)

extrā, prep, with acc. beyond, outside of

ex-trahō, -ere, -trāxī, -trāctus [ex, out, + trahō, drag], drag out, pull forth

extrēmus, -a, -um, adj., superl. of exterus, utmost, farthest (§ 312)

F

fābula, -ae, f. story, tale, fable

facile, adv. [facilis, easy], compared facilius, facillimē, easily (§ 322)

facilis, -e, adj. [cf. faciō, make], easy, without difficulty (§ 307)

faciō, -ere, fēcī, factus (imv. fac), make, do; cause, bring about.

impetum facere in, make an attack upon.

proelium facere, fight a battle.

iter facere, make a march or journey.

aliquem certiōrem facere, inform some one.

facere verba prō, speak in behalf of.

Passive fīō, fierī, factus sum, be done, happen.

certior fierī, be informed

fallō, -ere, fefellī, falsus, trip, betray, deceive

fāma, -ae, f. report, rumor; renown, fame, reputation

famēs, -is (abl. famē), f. hunger

familia, -ae, f. servants, slaves; household, family

fascēs, -ium (plur. of fascis), f. fasces (p. 225)

fastīgium, fastī´gī, n. top; slope, descent

fātum, -ī, n. fate, destiny

faucēs, -ium, f. plur. jaws, throat

faveō, -ēre, fāvī, fautūrus, be favorable to, favor, with dat. (§ 501.14)

fēlīx, -īcis, adj. happy, lucky

fēmina, -ae, f. woman. Cf. mulier

fera, -ae, f. [ferus, wild], wild beast

ferāx, -ācis, adj. fertile

ferē, adv. about, nearly, almost

ferō, ferre, tulī, lātus, bear.

graviter or molestē ferre, be annoyed (§ 498)

ferreus, -a, -um, adj. [ferrum, iron], made of iron

fidēlis, -e, adj. [fidēs, trust], faithful, true

fidēs, fideī or fidē, trust, faith; promise, word; protection.

in fidem venīre, come under the protection.

in fidē manēre, remain loyal

fīlia, -ae (dat. and abl. plur. fīliābus), f. daughter (§ 461. a)

fīlius, fīlī (voc. sing, fīlī), m. son

fīnis, -is, m. boundary, limit, end; in plur. territory, country (§ 243. 1)

fīnitimus, -a, -um, adj. [fīnis, boundary], adjoining, neighboring. Plur. fīnitimī, -ōrum, m. neighbors

fīō, fierī, factus sum, used as passive of faciō. See faciō (§ 500)

flamma, -ae, f. fire, flame

flōs, flōris, m. flower

fluctus, -ūs, m. [of. fluō, flow], flood, wave, billow

flūmen, -inis, n. [cf. fluō, flow], river (§ 464. 2. b)

fluō, -ere, flūxī, fluxus, flow

fluvius, fluvī, m. [cf. fluō, flow], river

fodiō, -ere, fōdī, fossus, dig

fōns, fontis, m. fountain (§ 247. 2. a)

fōrma, -ae, f. form, shape, appearance; beauty

Formiae, -ārum, f. Formiae, a town of Latium on the Appian Way. See map

forte, adv. [abl. of fors, chance], by chance

fortis, -e, adj. strong; fearless, brave

fortiter, adv. [fortis, strong], compared fortius, fortissimē, strongly; bravely

fortūna, -ae, f. [fors, chance], chance, fate, fortune

forum, -ī, n. market place, esp. the Forum Rōmānum, where the life of Rome centered

Forum Appī, Forum of Appius, a town in Latium on the Appian Way

fossa, -ae, f. [cf. fodiō, dig], ditch

fragor, -ōris, m. [cf. frangō, break], crash, noise

frangō, -ere, frēgī, frāctus, break

frāter, -tris, m. brother

fremitus, -ūs, m. loud noise

frequentō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, attend

frētus, -a, -um, adj. supported, trusting. Usually with abl. of means

frōns, frontis, f. front, ā fronte, in front

frūctus, -ūs, m. fruit

frūmentārius, -a, -um, adj. pertaining to grain.

rēs frūmentāria, grain supplies

frūmentum, -ī, n. grain

frūstrā, adv. in vain, vainly

fuga, -ae, f. [cf. fugiō, flee], flight.

in fugam dare, put to flight

fugiō, -ere, fūgī, fugitūrus, flee, run; avoid, shun

fūmō, -are, ——, ——, smoke

fūnis, -is, m. rope

furor, -ōris, m. [furō, rage], madness.

in furōrem incīdere, go mad

G

Gāius, Gāī, m. Gaius, a Roman name, abbreviated C., English form Caius

Galba, -ae, m. Galba, a Roman name

galea, -ae, f. helmet

Gallia, -ae, f. Gaul, the country comprising what is now Holland, Belgium, Switzerland, and France

Gallicus, -a, -um, adj. Gallic

gallīna, -ae, f. hen, chicken

Gallus, -ī, m. a Gaul

gaudium, gaudī, n. joy

Genāva, -ae, f. Geneva, a city in Switzerland

gēns, gentis, f. [cf. gignō, beget], race, family; people, nation, tribe

genus, -eris, n. kind, variety

Germānia, -ae, f. Germany

Germānus, -ī, m. a German

gerō, -ere, gessī, gestus, carry, wear; wage.

bellum gerere, wage war.

rēs gestae, exploits.

bene gerere, carry on successfully

gladiātōrius, -a, -um, adj. gladiatorial

gladius, gladī, m. sword

glōria, -ae, f. glory, fame

Gracchus, -ī, m. Gracchus, name of a famous Roman family

gracilis, -e, adj. slender (§ 307)

Graeca, -ōrum, n. plur. Greek writings, Greek literature

Graecē, adv. in Greek

Graecia, -ae, f. Greece

grammaticus, -ī, m. grammarian

grātia, -ae, f. thanks, gratitude

grātus, -a, -um, adj. acceptable, pleasing. Often with dat. (§ 501.16)

gravis, -ē, adj. heavy; disagreeable; serious, dangerous; earnest, weighty

graviter, adv. [gravis, heavy], compared gravius, gravissimē, heavily; greatly, seriously.

graviter ferre, bear ill, take to heart

gubernātor, -ōris, m. [gubernō, pilot], pilot

H

habēna, -ae, f. halter, rein.

habeō, -ēre, -uī, -itus, have, hold; regard, consider, deem

habitō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [cf. habeō, have], dwell, abide, inhabit. Cf. incolō, vīvō

hāc-tenus, adv. thus far

Helvētiī, -ōrum, m. the Helvetii, a Gallic tribe

Herculēs, -is, m. Hercules, son of Jupiter and Alcmena, and god of strength

Hesperidēs, -um, f. the Hesperides, daughters of Hesperus, who kept the garden of the golden apples

hic, haec, hoc, demonstrative adj. and pron. this (of mine); as pers. pron. he, she, it (§ 481)

hīc, adv. here

hiems, -emis, f. winter

hīnc, adv. [hīc, here], from here, hence

Hippolytē, -ēs, f. Hippolyte, queen of the Amazons

ho-diē, adv. [modified form of hōc diē, on this day], to-day

homō, -inis, m. and f. (human being), man, person

honestus, -a, -um, adv. [honor, honor], respected, honorable

honor, -ōris, m. honor

hōra, -ae, f. hour

Horātius, Horā´tī, m. Horatius, a Roman name

horribilis, -e, adj. terrible, horrible

hortor, -āri, -ātus sum, dep. verb, urge, incite, exhort, encourage (§ 493)

hortus, -ī, m. garden

hospitium, hospi´tī, n. [hospes, host], hospitality

hostis, -is, m. and f. enemy, foe (§ 465. a)

humilis, -e, adj. low, humble (§ 307)

Hydra, -ae, f. the Hydra, a mythical water snake slain by Hercules

I

iaciō, -ere, iēcī, iactus, throw, hurl

iam, adv. now, already.

nec iam, and no longer

Iāniculum, -ī, n. the Janiculum, one of the hills of Rome

iānua, -ae, f. door

ibi, adv. there, in that place

Īcarus, -ī, m. Ic´arus, the son of Dædalus

ictus, -ūs, m. [cf. īcō, strike], blow

īdem, e´adem, idem, demonstrative pron. [is + dem], same (§ 481)

idōneus, -a, -um, adj. suitable, fit

igitur, conj., seldom the first word, therefore, then. Cf. itaque

ignis, -is, m. fire (§§ 243.1; 247.2.a; 465.1)

ignōtus, -a, -um, adj. [in-, not, + (g)notus, known], unknown, strange

ille, illa, illud, demonstrative adj. and pron. that (yonder); as pers. pron. he, she, it (§ 481)

illīc, adv. [cf. ille], yonder, there

im-mittō, -ere, -mīsī, -missus [in, against, + mittō, send], send against; let in

immolō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [in, upon, + mola, meal], sprinkle with sacrificial meal; offer, sacrifice

im-mortālis, -e, adj. [in-, not, + mortalis, mortal], immortal

im-mortālitās, -ātis, f. [immortālis, immortal], immortality

im-parātus, -a, -um, adj. [in-, not, + parātus, prepared], unprepared

impedīmentum, -ī, n. [impediō, hinder], hindrance; in plur. baggage

impedītus, -a, -um, adj. [part. of impediō, hinder], hindered, burdened

im-pellō, -ere, -pulī, -pulsus [in, against, + pellō, strike], strike against; impel, drive, propel

imperātor, -ōris, m. [imperō, command], general

imperium, impe´rī, n. [imperō, command], command, order; realm, empire; power, authority

imperō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, command, order. Usually with dat. and an object clause of purpose (§ 501.41). With acc. object, levy, impose

impetus, -ūs, m. attack, impetum facere in, make an attack upon

im-pōnō, -ere, -posui, -positus [in, upon, + pōnō, place], place upon; impose, assign

in, prep, with acc. into, to, against, at, upon, towards; with abl. in, on.

in reliquum tempus, for the future

in-, inseparable prefix. With nouns and adjectives often with a negative force, like English un-, in-

in-cautus, -a, -um, adj. [in-, not, + cautus, careful], off one’s guard

incendium, incendī, n. flame, fire. Cf. ignis, flamma

in-cendō, -ere, -dī, -cēnsus, set fire to, burn

in-cidō, -ere, -cidī, ——, [in, in, on, + cadō, fall], fall in, fall on; happen.

in furōrem incidere, go mad

in-cipiō, -ere, -cēpi, -ceptus [in, on, + capiō, take], begin

in-cognitus, -a, -um, adj. [in-, not, + cognitus, known], unknown

in-colō, -ere, -uī, ——, [in, in, + colō, dwell], inhabit; live

incolumis, -e, adj. sound, safe, uninjured, imharmed

in-crēdibilis, -e, adj. [in-, not, + crēdibilis, to be believed], incredible

inde, from that place, thence

induō, -ere, -uī, -ūtus, put on

indūtus, -a, -um, adj. [part. of induō, put on], clothed

in-eō, -īre, -iī, -itus [in, into, + eō, go], go into; enter upon, begin, with acc. (§ 413)

īn-fāns, -fantis, adj. [in-, not, + *fāns, speaking], not speaking. As a noun, m. and f. infant

īn-fēlīx, -īcis, adj. [in-, not, + fēlīx, happy], unhappy, unlucky

īnfēnsus, -a, -um, adj. hostile

īn´-ferō, īnfer´re, in´tulī, inlā´tus [in, against, + ferō, bear], bring against or upon, inflict, with acc. and dat. (§ 501.15).

bellum īnferre, with dat., make war upon

īnferus, -a, -um, adj. low, below (§ 312).

īn-fīnītus, -a, -um, adj. [in-, not, + fīnītus, bounded], boundless, endless

īn-fīrmus, -a, -um, adj. [in-, not, + fīrmus, strong], weak, infirm

ingenium, inge´ni, n. talent, ability

ingēns, -entis, adj. vast, huge, enormous, large. Cf. magnus

in-gredior, -gredī, -gressus sum [in, in, + gradior, walk], advance, enter

inimīcus, -a, -um, adj. [in-, not, + amīcus, friendly], hostile. As a noun, inimīcus, -ī, m. enemy, foe. Cf. hostis

initium, ini´tī, entrance, beginning

initus, -a, -um, part. of ineō.

initā aestāte, at the beginning of summer

iniūria, -ae, f. [in, against, + iūs, law], injustice, wrong, injury.

alicui iniūriās īnferre, inflict wrongs upon some one

inopia, -ae, f. [inops, needy], want, need, lack

in-opīnāns, -antis, adj. [in-, not, + opīnāns, thinking], not expecting, taken by surprise

inquit, said he, said she. Regularly inserted in a direct quotation

in-rigō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, irrigate, water

in-rumpō, -ere, -rūpī, -ruptus [in, into, + rumpō, break], burst in, break in

in-ruō, -ere, -ruī,—— [in, in, + ruō, rush], rush in

īn-sequor, -sequī, -secūtus sum, dep. verb [in, on, + sequor, follow], follow on, pursue

īn-signe, -is, n. badge, decoration (§ 465. b)

īnsignis, -e, adj. remarkable, noted

īnstāns, -antis, adj. [part. of īnsto, be at hand], present, immediate

īn-stō, -āre, -stitī, -statūrus [in, upon, + stō, stand], stand upon; be at hand; pursue, press on

īnstrūmentum, -ī, n. instrument

īn-struō, -ere, -strūxī, -strūctus [in, on, + struō, build], draw up

īnsula, -ae, f. island

integer, -gra, -grum, untouched, whole; fresh, new

intellegō, -ere, -lēxī, -lēctus [inter, between, +legō, choose], perceive, understand (§ 420. d)

intentō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, aim; threaten

inter, prep. with acc. between, among; during, while (§ 340)

interfectus, -a, -um, adj. [part. of inter-ficiō, kill], slain, dead

inter-ficiō, -ere, -fēcī, -fectus [inter, between, + faciō, make], put out of the way, kill. Cf. necō, occīdō, trucīdō

interim, adv. meanwhile

interior, -ius, adj. interior, inner (§ 315)

inter-mittō, -ere, -mīsī, -missus, leave off, suspend

interpres, -etis, m. and f. interpreter

inter-rogō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, question

inter-sum, -esse, -fuī, -futūrus [inter, between, +sum, be], be present, take part in, with dat. (§ 501.15)

inter-vāllum, -ī, n. interval, distance

intrā, adv. and prep. with acc. within, in

intrō, -āre, -āvi, -ātus, go into, enter

in-veniō, -īre, -vēnī, -ventus [in, upon, +veniō, come], find

invīsus, -a, -um, adj. [part. of invideō, envy], hated, detested

Iolāus, -ī, m. I-o-lā´us, a friend of Hercules

ipse, -a, -um, intensive pron. that very, this very; self, himself, herself, itself, (§ 481)

īra, -ae, f. wrath, anger

īrātus, -a, -um, adj. [part. of īrāscor, be angry], angered, enraged

is, ea, id, demonstrative adj. and pron. this, that; he, she, it (§ 481)

iste, -a, -ud, demonstrative adj. and pron. that (of yours), he, she, it (§ 481)

ita, adv. so, thus. Cf. sīc and tam

Italia, -ae, f. Italy

ita-que, conj. and so, therefore

item, adv. also

iter, itineris, n. journey, march, route; way, passage (§§ 247.1.a; 468).

iter dare, give a right of way, allow to pass.

iter facere, march (see p. 159)

iubeō, -ēre, iussī, iussus, order, command. Usually with the infin. and subj. acc. (§ 213)

iūdex, -icis, m. and f. judge (§ 464. 1)

iūdicō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [iūdex, judge], judge, decide (§ 420. c)

Iūlia, -ae, Julia, a Roman name

Iūlius, Iūlī, m. Julius, a Roman name

iungō, -ēre, iūnxī, iūnctus, join; yoke, harness

Iūnō, -ōnis, f. Juno, the queen of the gods and wife of Jupiter

Iuppiter, Iovis, m. Jupiter, the supreme god

iūrō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, swear, take an oath

iussus, -a, -um, part. of iubeō, ordered

L

L., abbreviation for Lūcius

labefactus, -a, -um, adj. [part. of labefaciō, cause to shake], shaken, weakened, ready to fall

Labiēnus, -ī, m. La-bi-e´nus, one of Cæsar’s lieutenants

labor, -ōris, m. labor, toil

labōrō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [labor, labor], labor; suffer, be hard pressed

lacrima, -ae, f. tear

lacus, -ūs (dat. and abl. plur. lacubus), m. lake

laetē, adv. [laetus, glad], compared laetius, laetissimē, gladly

laetitia, -ae, f. [laetus, glad], joy

laetus, -a, -um, adj. glad, joyful

lapis, -idis, m. stone (§§ 247.2.a; 464.1)

Lār, Laris, m.; plur. Larēs, -um (rarely -ium), the Lares or household, gods

lātē, adv. [lātus, wide], compared lātius, lātissimē, widely

Latinē, adv. in Latin.

Latīnē loquī, to speak Latin

lātitūdō, -inis, f. [lātus, wide], width

Lātōna, -ae, f. Latona, mother of Apollo and Diana

latus, -a, -um, adj. wide

lātus, -eris, n. side, flank.

ab utrōque latere, on each side

laudō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [laus, praise], praise

laurea, -ae, f. laurel

laureātus, -a, -um, adj. crowned with laurel

laus, laudis, f. praise

lectulus, -ī, m. couch, bed

lēgātus, -ī, m. ambassador; lieutenant

legiō, -ōnis, f. [cf. legō, gather], (body of soldiers), legion, about 3600 men (§ 464. 2. a)

legiōnārius, -a, -um, adj. legionary. Plur. legiōnariī, -ōrum, m. the soldiers of the legion

legō, -ere, lēgī, lēctus, read

lēnis, -e, adj. gentle, smooth, mild

lēniter, adv. [lēnis, gentle], compared lēnius, lēnissimē, gently

Lentulus, -i, m. Lentulus, a Roman family name

leō, -ōnis, m. lion

Lernaeus, -a, -um, adj. Lernæean, of Lerna, in southern Greece

Lesbia, -ae, f. Lesbia, a girl’s name

levis, -e, adj. light

lēx, lēgis, f. measure, law

libenter, adv. [libēns, willing], compared libentius, libentissimē, willingly, gladly

līber, -era, -erum, adj. free (§ 469. b)

līberī, -ōrum, m. [līber, free], children

līberō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [līber, free], set free, release, liberate

lībertās, -ātis, f. [līber, free], freedom, liberty

līctor, -ōris, m. lictor (p. 225)

līmus, -ī, m. mud

littera, -ae, f. a letter of the alphabet; in plur. a letter, epistle

lītus, -oris, n. seashore, beach

locus, -ī, m. (plur. locī and loca, m. and n.), place, spot

longē, adv. [longus, long], comp. longius, longissimē, a long way off; by far

longinquus, -a, -um, adj. [longus, long], distant, remote

longitūdō, -inis, f. [longus, long], length

longus, -a, -um, adj. long

loquor, loqui, locūtus sum, dep. verb, talk, speak

lōrīca, -ae, f. [lōrum, thong], coat of mail, corselet

lūdō, -ere, lūsī, lūsus, play

lūdus, -ī, m. play; school, the elementary grades. Cf. schola

lūna, -ae, f. moon

lūx, lūcis, f. (no gen. plur.), light.

prīma lūx, daybreak

Lȳdia, -ae, f. Lydia, a girl’s name

M

M., abbreviation for Mārcus

magicus, -a, -um, adj. magic

magis, adv. in comp. degree [magnus, great], more, in a higher degree (§ 323)

magister, -trī, m. master, commander; teacher

magistrātus, -ūs, m. [magister, master], magistracy; magistrate

magnitūdō, -inis, f. [magnus, great], greatness, size

magnopere, adv. [abl. of magnum opus], compared magis, maximē, greatly, exceedingly (§ 323)

magnus, -a, -um, adj., compared maior, maximus, great, large; strong, loud (§ 311)

maior, maius, -ōris, adj., comp. of magnus, greater, larger (§ 311)

maiōrēs, -um, m. plur. of maior, ancestors

mālō, mālle, māluī, —— [magis, more, + volō, wish], wish more, prefer (§ 497)

malus, -a, -um, adj., compared peior, pessimus, bad, evil (§ 311)

mandō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [manus, hand, + dō, put], (put in hand), intrust; order, command

maneō, -ēre, mānsī, mānsūrus, stay, remain, abide

Mānlius, Mānlī, m. Manlius, a Roman name

mānsuētus, -a, -um, adj. [part. of mānsuēscō, tame], tamed

manus, -ūs, f. hand; force, band

Mārcus, -ī, m. Marcus, Mark, a Roman first name

mare, -is, n. (no gen. plur.), sea.

mare tenēre, be out to sea

margō, -inis, m. edge, border

marītus, -ī, m. husband

Marius, Marī, m. Marius, a Roman name, esp. C. Marius, the general

Mārtius, -a, -um, adj. of Mars, esp. the Campus Martius

māter, -tris, f. mother

mātrimōnium, mātrimō´nī, n. marriage.

in mātrimōnium dūcere, marry

mātūrō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, hasten. Cf. contendō, properō

mātūrus, -a, -um, adj. ripe, mature

maximē, adv. in superl. degree [maximus, greatest], compared magnopere, magis, maximē, especially, very much (§ 323)

maximus, -a, -um, adj., superl. of magnus, greatest, extreme (§ 311)

medius, -a, -um, adj. middle part; middle, intervening

melior, -ius, -ōris, adj., comp. of bonus, better (§ 311)

melius, adv. in comp. degree, compared bene, melius, optimē, better (§ 323)

memoria, -ae, f. [memor, mindful], memory.

memoriā tenēre, remember

mēns, mentis, f. mind. Cf. animus

mēnsis, -is, m. month (§ 247. 2. a)

mercātor, -ōris, m. [mercor, trade], trader, merchant

merīdiānus, -a, -um, adj. [merīdiēs, noon], of midday

merīdiēs, —— (acc. -em, abl. -ē), m. [medius, mid, + diēs, day], noon

metus, -ūs, m. fear, dread

meus, -a, -um, possessive adj. and pron. my, mine (§ 98)

mīles, -itis, m. soldier (§ 464. 1)

mīlitāris, -e, adj. [mīles, soldier], military.

rēs mīlitāris, science of war

mīlitō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [mīles, soldier], serve as a soldier

mīlle, plur. mīlia, -ium, numeral adj. and subst. thousand (§ 479)

minimē, adv. in superl. degree, compared parum, minus, minimē, least, very little; by no means (§ 323)

minimus, -a, -um, adj. in superl. degree, compared parvus, minor, minimus, least, smallest (§ 311)

minor, minus, -ōris, adj. in comp. degree, compared parvus, minor, minimus, smaller, less (§ 311)

Mīnōs, -ōis, m. Minos, a king of Crete

minus, adv. in comp. degree, compared parum, minus, minimē, less (§ 323)

Minyae, -ārum, m. the Minyae, a people of Greece

mīrābilis, -e, adj. [mīror, wonder at], wonderful, marvelous

mīror, -ārī, -ātus sum, dep. verb [mīrus, wonderful], wonder, marvel, admire

mīrus, -a, -um, adj. wonderful

Mīsēnum, -ī, Mise´num, a promontory and harbor on the coast of Campania. See map

miser, -era, -erum, adj. wretched, unhappy, miserable

missus, -a, -um, part. of mittō, sent

mittō, -ere, mīsī, missus, send

modicus, -a, -um [modus, measure], modest, ordinary

modo, adv. [abl. of modus, measure, with shortened o], only, merely, just now.

modo ... modo, now ... now, sometimes ... sometimes

modus, -ī, m. measure; manner, way; kind

moenia, -ium, n. plur. [cf. mūniō, fortify], walls, ramparts

molestē, adv. [molestus, troublesome], compared molestius, molestissimē, annoyingly.

molestē ferre, to be annoyed

molestus, -a, -um, troublesome, annoying, unpleasant (§ 501.16)

moneō, -ēre, -uī, -itus, remind, advise, warn (§ 489)

mōns, montis, m. mountain (§ 247. 2. a)

mōnstrum, -ī, n. monster

mora, -ae, f. delay

moror, -ārī, -ātus sum, dep. verb [mora, delay], delay, linger; impede

mors, mortis, f. [cf. morior, die], death

mōs, mōris, m. custom, habit

mōtus, -ūs, m. [cf. moveō, move], motion, movement.

terrae mōtus, earthquake

moveō, -ēre, mōvī, mōtus, move

mox, adv. soon, presently

mulier, -eris, f. woman

multitūdō, -inis, f. [multus, much], multitude

multum (multō), adv. [multus, much], compared plūs, plūrimum, much (§ 477)

multus, -a, -um, adj., compared plūs, plūrimus, much; plur. many (§ 311)

mūniō, -īre, -īvī or -iī, -ītus, fortify, defend

mūnītiō, -ōnis, f. [mūniō, fortify], defense, fortification

mūrus, -ī, m. wall. Cf. moenia

mūsica, -ae, f. music

N

nam, conj. for. Cf. enim

nam-que, conj., a strengthened nam, introducing a reason or explanation, for, and in fact; seeing that

nārrō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, tell, relate

nāscor, nāscī, nātus sum, dep. verb, be born, spring from

nātūra, -ae, f. nature

nātus, part. of nāscor

nauta, -ae, m. [for nāvita, from nāvis, ship], sailor

nāvālis, -e, adj. [nāvis, ship], naval

nāvigium, nāvi´gī, n. ship, boat

nāvigō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [nāvis, ship, + agō, drive], sail, cruise

nāvis, -is (abl. -ī or -e), f. ship (§ 243. 1).

nāvem cōnscendere, embark, go on board.

nāvem solvere, set sail.

nāvis longa, man-of-war

nē, conj. and adv. in order that not, that (with verbs of fearing), lest; not.

nē ... quidem, not even

-ne, interrog. adv., enclitic (see §§ 16, 210). Cf. nōnne and num

nec or neque, conj. [nē, not, + que, and], and not, nor.

nec ... nec or neque ... neque, neither ... nor

necessārius, -a, -um, adj. needful, necessary

necō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [cf. nex, death], kill. Cf. interficiō, occīdō, trucīdō

negō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, deny, say not (§ 420. a)

negōtium, negō´tī, n. [nec, not, + ōtium, ease], business, affair, matter.

alicui negōtium dare, to employ some one

Nemaeus, -a, -um, adj. Neme´an, of Neme´a, in southern Greece

nēmŏ, dat. nēminī (gen. nūllīus, abl. nūllō, supplied from nūllus), m. and f. [nē, not, + homō, man], (not a man), no one, nobody

Neptūnus, -ī, m. Neptune, god of the sea, brother of Jupiter

neque, see nec

neuter, -tra, -trum (gen. -trīus, dat. -trī), adj. neither (of two) (§ 108)

nē-ve, conj. adv. and not, and that not, and lest

nihil, n. indecl. [nē, not, + hīlum, a whit], nothing.

nihil posse, to have no power

nihilum, -ī, n., see nihil

Niobē, -ēs, f. Ni´obe, the queen of Thebes whose children were destroyed by Apollo and Diana

nisi, conj. [nē, not, + sī, if], if not, unless, except

nōbilis, -e, adj. well known; noble

noceō, -ēre, -uī, -itūrus [cf. necō, kill], hurt, injure, with dat. (§ 501.14)

noctū, abl. used as adv. [cf. nox, night], at night, by night

Nōla, -ae, f. Nola, a town in central Campania. See map

nōlō, nōlle, nōluī, —— [ne, not, + volō, wish], not to wish, be unwilling (§ 497)

nōmen, -inis, n. [cf. nōscō, know], (means of knowing), name

nōminō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [nōmen, name], name, call. Cf. appellō, vocō

nōn, adv. [nē, not, + ūnum, one], not.

nōn sōlum ... sed etiam, not only ... but also

nōn-dum, adv. not yet

nōn-ne, interrog. adv. suggesting an affirmative answer, not? (§ 210). Cf. -ne and num

nōs, pers. pron. we (see ego) (§ 480)

noster, -tra, -trum, possessive adj. and pron. our, ours. Plur. nostrī, -ōrum, m. our men (§ 98)

novem, indecl. numeral adj. nine

novus, -a, -um, adj. new.

novae rēs, a revolution

nox, noctis, f. night, multā nocte, late at night

nūllus, -a, -um (gen. -īus, dat. -ī) adj. [nē, not, + ūllus, any], not any, none, no (§ 108)

num, interrog. adv. suggesting a negative answer (§ 210). Cf. -ne and nōnne. In indir. questions, whether

numerus, -ī, m. number

numquam, adv. [nē, not, + umquam, ever], never

nunc, adv. now. Cf. iam

nūntiō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [nūntius, messenger], report, announce (§ 420. a)

nūntius, nūntī, m. messenger

nūper, adv. recently, lately, just now

nympha, -ae, f. nymph

O

ob, prep. with acc. on account of. In compounds it often means in front of, against, or it is intensive.

quam ob rem, for this reason (§ 340)

obses, -idis, m. and f. hostage

ob-sideō,-ēre,-sēdī, -sessus [ob, against, + sedeō, sit], besiege

obtineō, -ēre, -uī, -tentus [ob, against, + teneō, hold], possess, occupy, hold

occāsiō, -ōnis, f. favorable opportunity, favorable moment

occāsus, -ūs, m. going down, setting

occīdō, -ere, -cīdī, -cīsus [ob, down, + caedō, strike], strike down; cut down, kill. Cf. interficiō, necō

occupō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [ob, completely, + capiō, take], seize, take possession of, occupy. Cf. rapio

oc-currō, -ere, -currī, -cursus [ob, against + currō, run], run towards; meet, with dat. (§ 426)

ōceanus, -ī, m. the ocean

octō, indecl. numeral adj. eight

oculus, -ī, m. eye

officium, offi´cī, n. duty

ōlim, adv. formerly, once upon a time

ōmen, -inis, n. sign, token, omen

ō-mittō, -ere, -mīsī, -missus [ob, over, past, + mittō, send], let go, omit.

consilium omittere, give up a plan

omnīnō, adv. [omnis, all], altogether, wholly, entirely

omnis, -e, adj. all, every. Cf. tōtus

onerāria, -ae, f. [onus, load], with nāvis expressed or understood, merchant vessel, transport

onus, -eris, n. load, burden

opīniō, -ōnis, f. [opīnor, suppose], opinion, supposition, expectation

oppidānus, -ī, m. [oppidum, town], townsman

oppidum, -ī, n. town, stronghold

opportūnus, -a, -um, adj. suitable, opportune, favorable

op-primō, -ere, -pressī, -pressus [ob, against, + premō, press], (press against), crush; surprise

oppugnātiō, -ōnis, f. storming, assault

oppugnō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [ob, against, + pugnō fight], fight against, assault, storm, assail

optimē, adv. in superl. degree, compared bene, melius, optimē, very well, best of all (§ 323)

optimus, -a, -um, adj. in superl. degree, compared bonus, melior, optimus, best, most excellent (§ 311)

opus, -eris, n. work, labor, task (§ 464. 2. b)

ōrāculum, -ī, n. [ōrō, speak], oracle

ōrātor, -ōris, m. [ōrō, speak], orator

orbis, -is, m. ring, circle.

orbis terrārum, the earth, world

orbita, -ae, f. [orbis, wheel], rut

Orcus, -ī, m. Orcus, the lower world

ōrdō, -inis, m. row, order, rank (§ 247. 2. a)

orīgo, -inis, f. [orior, rise], source, origin

orior, -īrī, ortus sum, dep. verb, arise, rise, begin; spring, be born

ōrnāmentum, -ī, n. [ōrnō, fit out], ornament, jewel

ōrnātus, -a, -um, adj. [part. of ōrnō, fit out] fitted out; adorned

ōrnō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, fit out, adorn

P

P., abbreviation for Pūblius

paene, adv. nearly, almost

palūdāmentum, -ī, n. military cloak

palūs, -ūdis, f. swamp, marsh

pānis, -is, m. bread

pār, paris, adj. equal (§ 471. III)

parātus, -a, -um, adj. [part. of parō, prepare], prepared, ready

parcō, -ere, peper´cī (parsī), parsūrus, spare, with dat. (§ 501.14)

pāreō, -ēre, -uī, ——, obey, with dat. (§ 501 .14)

parō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, prepare for, prepare; provide, procure

pars, partis, f. part, share; side, direction

parum, adv., compared minus, minimē, too little, not enough (§ 323)

parvus, -a, -um, adj., compared minor, minimus, small, little (§ 311)

passus, -ūs, m. step, pace.

mīlle passuum, thousand paces, mile (§ 331. b)

pateō, -ēre, patuī, ——, lie open, be open; stretch, extend

pater, -tris, m. father (§ 464. 2. a)

patior, -ī, passus sum, dep. verb, bear, suffer, allow, permit

patria, -ae, f. [cf. pater, father], fatherland, (one’s) country

paucus, -a, -um, adj. (generally plur.), few, only a few

paulisper, adv. for a little while

paulō, adv. by a little, little

paulum adv. a little, somewhat

pāx, pācis, f. (no gen. plur.), peace

pecūnia, -ae, f. [pecus, cattle], money

pedes, -itis, m. [pēs, foot], foot soldier

pedester, -tris, -tre, adj. [pēs, foot], on foot; by land

peior, peius, -ōris, adj. in comp. degree, compared malus, peior, pessimus, worse (§ 311)

pellis, -is, f. skin, hide

penna, -ae, f. feather

per, prep. with acc. through, by means of, on account of. In composition it often has the force of thoroughly, completely, very (§ 340)

percussus, -a, -um, adj. [part. of percutiō, strike through], pierced

per-dūcō, -ere, -dūxī, -ductus [per, through, + dūcō, lead], lead through.

fossam perdūcere, to construct a ditch

per-exiguus, -a, -um, adj. [per, very, + exiguus, small], very small, very short

perfidus, -a, -um, adj. faithless, treacherous, false

per-fringō, -ere, -frēgī, -frāctus [per, through, frangō, break], shatter

pergō, -ere, perrēxī, perrēctus [per, through, + regō, conduct], go on, proceed, hasten

perīculum, -ī, n. trial, test; danger

peristȳlum, -ī, n. peristyle, an open court with columns around it

perītus, -a, -um, adj. skillful

perpetuus, -a, -um, adj. perpetual

Perseus, -eī, Perseus, a Greek hero, son of Jupiter and Danaë

persōna, -ae, f. part, character, person

per-suādeō, -ēre, -suāsī, -suāsus [per, thoroughly, + suādeō, persuade], persuade, advise, with dat. (§ 501.14), often with an object clause of purpose (§ 501.41)

per-terreō, -ēre, -uī, -itus [per, thoroughly, + terreō, frighten], thoroughly terrify, alarm

per-veniō, -īre, -vēnī, -ventus [per, through, + veniō, come], arrive, reach, come to

pēs, pedis, m. foot.

pedem referre, retreat (§ 247. 2. a)

pessimus, -a, -um, adj. in superl. degree, compared malus, peior, pessimus, worst (§ 311)

petō, -ere, -īvī or -iī, -ītus, strive for, seek, beg, ask; make for, travel to. Cf. postulō, quaerō, rogō

Pharsālus, -ī
, f. Pharsa´lus or Pharsa´lia, a town in Thessaly, near which
Cassar defeated Pompey, 48 B.C.

philosophia, -ae, f. philosophy

philosophus, -ī, m. philosopher

pictus, -a, -um, adj. [part. of pingō, paint], colored, variegated

pīlum, -ī, n. spear, javelin (§ 462. b)

piscīna, -ae, f. [piscis, fish], fish pond

piscis, -is, m. fish

pīstor, -ōris, m. baker

placeō. -ēre, -uī, -itus
, please, be pleasing,
with dat. (§ 501.14)

plānitiēs, -ēī, f. [plānus, level], plain

plānus, -a, -um, adj. level, flat

plēnus, -a, -um, full

plūrimum, adv. in superl. degree, compared multum, plūs, plūrimum, very much.

plūrimum valēre, be most influential (§ 322)

plūrimus, -a, -um, adj. in superl. degree, compared multus, plūs, plūrimus, most, very many (§ 311)

plūs, plūris, adj. in comp. degree, compared multus, plūs, plūrimus; sing. n. as substantive, more; plur. more, several (§ 311)

pluteus, -ī, m. shield, parapet

poena, -ae, f. punishment, penalty

poēta, -ae, m. poet

pompa, -ae, f. procession

Pompēiī, -ōrum, m. Pompeii, a city of Campania. See map

Pompēius, Pompē´ī, m. Pompey, a Roman name

pōmum, -ī, n. apple

pōnō, -ere, posuī, positus, put, place.

castra pōnere, pitch camp

pōns, pontis, m. bridge (§ 247. 2. a)

popīna, -ae, f. restaurant

populus, -ī, m. people

Porsena, -ae, m. Porsena, king of Etruria, a district of Italy. See map

porta, -ae, f. gate, door

portō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, bear, carry

portus, -ūs, m. [cf. porta, gate], harbor

possideō, -ēre, -sēdī, -sessus, have, own, possess

possum, posse, potuī, ——, irreg. verb [potis, able, + sum, I am], be able, can (§ 495).

nihil posse, have no power

post, prep, with acc. after, behind (§ 340)

posteā, adv. [post, after, + eā, this], afterwards

(posterus), -a, -um, adj., compared posterior, postrēmus or postumus, following, next (§ 312)

postquam, conj. after, as soon as

postrēmō, adv. [abl. of postrēmus, last], at last, finally. Cf. dēmum, dēnique (§ 322)

postrīdiē, adv. [posterō, next, + diē, day], on the next day

postulō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, ask, demand, require. Cf. petō, quaerō, rogō

potentia, -ae, f. [potēns, able], might, power, force

prae-beō, -ēre, -uī, -itus [prae, forth, + habeō, hold], offer, give

praeda, -ae, f. booty, spoil, plunder

prae-dīcō, -ere, -dīxī, -dictus [prae, before, + dīcō, tell], foretell, predict

prae-ficiō, -ere, -fēcī, -fectus [prae, before, + faciō, make], place in command, with acc. and dat. (§ 501.15)

prae-mittō, -ere, -mīsī, -missus [prae, forward, + mittō, send], send forward

praemium, praemī, n. reward, prize

praeruptus, -a, -um [part. of prae-rumpō, break off], broken off, steep

praesēns, -entis, adj. present, immediate

praesertim, adv. especially, chiefly

praesidium, praesi´di, n. guard, garrison, protection

prae-stō, -āre, -stitī, -stitus [prae, before, + sto, stand], (stand before), excel, surpass, with dat. (§ 501.15); show, exhibit

prae-sum, -esse, -fuī, -futūrus [prae, before, + sum, be], be over, be in command of, with dat. (§ 501.15)

praeter, prep, with acc. beyond, contrary to (§ 340)

praetereā, adv. [praeter, besides, + eā, this], in addition, besides, moreover

praetextus, -a, -um, adj. bordered, edged

praetōrium, praetō´rī, n. prætorium

prandium, prandī, n. luncheon

premō, -ere, pressī, pressus, press hard, compress; crowd, drive, harass

(prex, precis), f. prayer

prīmō, adv. [prīmus, first], at first, in the beginning (§ 322)

prīmum, adv. [prīmus, first], first.

quam primum, as soon as possible

prīmus, -a, -um, adj. in superl. degree, compared prior, prīmus, first (§ 315)

prīnceps, -cipis, m. [prīmus, first, + capiō, take], (taking the first place), chief, leader (§ 464. 1)

prior, prius, -ōris, adj. in comp. degree, superl., prīmus, former (§ 315)

prīstinus, -a, -um, adj. former, previous

prō, prep, with abl. before; for, for the sake of, in behalf of; instead of, as (§ 209). In composition, forth, forward

prō-cēdō, -ere, -cussī, -cessūrus [prō, forward, + cēdō, go], go forward, proceed

procul, adv. far, afar off

prō-currō, -ere, -currī (-cucurrī), -cur-sus [prō, forward, + currō, run], run forward

proelium, proeli, n. battle, combat.

proelium committere, join battle.

proelium facere, fight a battle

profectiō, -ōnis, f. departure

proficīscor, -ī, -fectus sum, dep. verb, set out, march. Cf. ēgredior, exeō

prō-gredior, -ī, -gressus sum, dep. verb [prō, forth, + gradior, go], go forth, proceed, advance. Cf. pergō, prōcēdō

prōgressus, see prōgredior

prohibeō, -ēre, -uī, -itus [prō, forth, away from, + habeō, hold], keep away from, hinder, prevent

prō-moveō, -ēre, -mōvī, -mōtus [prō, forward, + moveō, move], move forward, advance

prō-nūntiō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [prō, forth, + nūntiō, announce], proclaim, declare

prope, adv., compared propius, proxi-mē, nearly. Prep, with acc. near

prō-pellō, -ere, -pulī, -pulsus [prō, forth, + pellō, drive], drive forth; move, impel

properō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [properus, quick], go quickly, hasten. Cf. contendō, maturō

propinquus, -a, -um, adj. [prope, near], near, neighboring

propior, -ius, -ōris, adj. in comp. degree, superl., proximus, nearer (§ 315)

propius, adv. in comp. degree, compared prope, propius, proximē, nearer (§ 323)

propter, prep. with acc. on account of, because of (§ 340)

prō-scrībō, -ere, -scrīpsī, -scriptus [prō, forth, + scribō, write], proclaim, publish. Cf. prōnūntiō

prō-sequor, -sequī, -secūtus sum, dep. verb [prō, forth, + sequor, follow], escort, attend

prō-sum, prōdesse, prōfuī, prōfutūrus [prō, for, + sum, be], be useful, benefit, with dat. (§§ 496; 501.15)

prō-tegō, -ere, -tēx=i], -tēctus [prō, in front, + tegō, cover], cover in front, protect

prōvincia, -ae, f. territory, province

proximē, adv. in superl. degree, compared prope, propius, proximē, nearest, next; last, most recently (§ 323)

proximus, -a, -um, adj. in superl. degree, compared propior, proximus, nearest, next (§ 315)

pūblicus, -a, -um, adj. [populus,people], of the people, public, res pūblica, the commonwealth

puella, -ae, f. [diminutive of puer, boy], girl, maiden

puer, -eri, m. boy; slave (§ 462. c)

pugna, -ae, f -fight, battle. Cf. proelium

pugnō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [pugna, battle], fight. Cf. contendō, dīmicō

pulcher, -chra, -chrum, adj. beautiful, pretty (§§ 469.b; 304)

Pullō, -ōnis, m. Pullo, a centurion

pulsō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, strike, beat

puppis, -is (acc. -im, abl. -ī), f. stern of a ship, deck

pūrē, adv. [pūrus, pure], comp. pūrius, purely

pūrgō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, cleanse, clean

purpureus, -a, -um, adj. purple, dark red

putō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, reckon, think (§ 420,c). Cf. arbitror, exīstimō

Pȳthia, -ae, f. Pythia, the inspired priestess of Apollo at Delphi

Q

quā dē causā, for this reason, wherefore

quā rē, therefore, for this reason

quaerō, -ere, -sīvī, -sītus, seek, ask, inquire. Cf. petō, postulō, rogō

quālis, -e, interrog. pronom. adj. of what sort, what kind of.

talis ... qualis, such ... as

quam, adv. how; after a comparative, than ; with a superlative, translated as ... as possible, quam prīmum, as soon as possible

quantus, -a, -um, adj. [quam, how], how great, how much, tantus ... quantus, as great as

quārtus, -a, -um, numeral adj. [quattuor, four], fourth

quattuor, indecl. numeral adj. four

quattuor-decim, indecl. numeral adj. fourteen

-que, conj., enclitic, and (§ 16). Cf. ac, atque, et

quī, quae, quod, rel. pron. and adj. who, which, what, that (§ 482)

quia, conj. because. Cf. quod

quīdam, quaedam, quiddam (quoddam), indef. pron. and adj. a certain one, a certain, a (§ 485).

quidem, adv. to be sure, certainly, indeed, nē ... quidem, not even

quiēs, -ētis, f. rest, repose

quiētus, -a, -um, adj. quiet, restful

quīndecim, indecl. numeral adj. fifteen

quīngentī, -ae, -a, numeral adj. five hundred

quīnque, indecl. numeral adj. five

quīntus, -a, -um, numeral adj. fifth

quis (quī), quae, quid (quod), interrog. pron. and adj. who? what? which? (§ 483).

quis (quī), qua (quae), quid (quod), indef. pron. and adj., used after sī, nisi, nē, num, any one, anything, some one, something, any, some (§ 484).

quisquam, quicquam or quidquam (no fem. or plur.), indef. pron. any one (at all), anything (at all) (§ 486).

quisque, quaeque, quidque (quodque), indef. pron. and adj. each, each one, every (§ 484).

quō, interrog. and rel. adv. whither, where

quō, conj. in order to, that, with comp. degree (§ 350).

quod, conj. because, in that. Cf. quia

quoque, conj., following an emphatic word, also, too. Cf. etiam

quot-annīs, adv. [quot, how many + annus, year], every year, yearly

quotiēns, interrog. and rel. adv. how often? as often as

R

rādīx, -īcis, f. root; foot

rapiō, -ere, -uī, -tus, seize, snatch

rārō, adv. [rārus, rare], rarely

rārus, -a, -um, adj. rare

re- or red-, an inseparable prefix, again, back, anew, in return

rebelliō, -ōnis, f. renewal of war, rebellion

recēns, -entis, adj. recent

re-cipiō, -ere, -cēpī, -ceptus [re-, back, + capiō, take], take back, receive.

sē recipere, withdraw, retreat

re-clīnātus, -a, -um, part. of reclīnō, leaning back

re-creātus, -a, -um, part. of recreō, refreshed

rēctus, -a, -um, adj. [part. of regō, keep straight], straight, direct

re-cūsō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, refuse

red-āctus, -a, -um, part. of redigō, reduced, subdued

red-eō, -īre, -iī, -itus [red-, back, + eō, go], go back, return (§ 413). Cf. revertō

reditus, -ūs, m. [cf. redeō, return], return, going back

re-dūcō, -ere, -dūxī, -ductus [re-, back, + dūcō, lead], lead back

re-ferō, -ferre, rettulī, -lātus [re-, back, + ferō, bear], bear back; report.

pedem referre, withdraw, retreat

re-ficiō, -ere, -fēcī, -fectus [re-, again, + faciō, make], make again, repair.

sē reficere, refresh one’s self

rēgīna, -ae, f. [rēx, king], queen

regiō, -ōnis, f. region, district

rēgnum, -ī, n. sovereignty; kingdom

regō, -ere, rēxī, rēctus [cf. rēx, king], govern, rule (§ 490)

re-iciō, -ere, -iēcī, -iectus [re-, back, + iaciō, hurl], hurl back; throw away

re-linquō, -ere, -līquī, -lictus [re-, behind, + linquō, leave], leave behind, leave, abandon

reliquus, -a, -um, adj. [cf. relinquō, leave], left over, remaining. As a noun, plur. the rest

remōtus, -a, -um, adj. [part. of re-moveō, remove], remote, distant

re-moveō, -ēre, -mōvī, -motus [re-, back, + moveō, move], remove

rēmus, -ī, m. oar

re-periō, -īre, repperī, repertus, find

re-portō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [re-, back, + portō, carry], carry back, bring back, win, gain

rēs, reī, f. thing, business, matter, deed, event, circumstance (§ 467).

quam ob rem, for this reason.

rēs adversae, adversity.

rēs frūmentāria, grain supplies.

rēs gestae, exploits.

rēs militāris, science of war.

rēs pūblica, the commonwealth.

rēs secundae, prosperity

re-scindō, -ere, -scidī, -scissus [re-, back, + scindō, cut], cut off, cut down

re-sistō, -ere, -stitī, —— [re-, back, + sistō, cause to stand], oppose, resist, with dat. (§ 501.14)

re-spondeō, -ēre, -spondī, -spōnsus [re-, in return, + spondeō, promise], answer, reply (§ 420. a)

re-vertō, -ere, -ī, ——, or dep. verb re-vertor, -ī, -sus sum [re-, back, + vertō, turn], turn back, return. Usually active in the perf. system

re-vinciō, -īre, -vīnxī, -vīnctus [re-, back, + vinciō, bind], fasten

rēx, rēgis, m. [cf. regō, rule], king

Rhēnus, -ī, m. the Rhine, a river of Germany

rīpa, -ae, f. bank

rogō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, ask. Cf. petō, postulō, quaerō

Rōma, -ae, f. Rome. See map

Rōmānus, -a, -um, adj. [Rōma, Rome], Roman, follows its noun. As a noun, m. and f. a Roman

rosa, -ae, f. rose

rōstrum, -ī, n. beak of a ship. In plur., the rostra, the speaker’s stand in the Roman Forum

rota, -ae, f. wheel

Rubicō, -ōnis, m. the Rubicon, a river in northern Italy. See map

rūmor, -ōris, m. report, rumor

rūrsus, adv. [for reversus, turned back], again, in turn

rūs, rūris (locative abl. rūrī, no gen., dat., or abl. plur.), n. the country (§ 501. 36. 1). Cf. ager, patria, terra

S

Sabīnus, -a, -um, adj. Sabine. As a noun, m. and f. a Sabine. The Sabines were an ancient people of central Italy. See map

sacrum, -ī, n. [sacer, consecrated], something consecrated, sacrifice; usually in plur., religious rites

saepe, adv., compared saepius, saepissimē, often, frequently

saevus, -a, -um, adj. cruel, savage

sagitta, -ae, f. arrow

saliō, -īre, -uī, saltus, jump

salūs, -ūtis, f. safety; health.

salūtem dīcere, send greetings

salūtō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [salūs, health], greet, salute

salvē, imv. of salveō, hail, greetings

sanguis, -inis, m. blood (§ 247. 2. a]

sānitās, -ātis, f. [sānus, sound], health, sanity

sapiēns, -entis, adj. [part. of sapiō, be wise], wise, sensible

satis, adv. and indecl. noun, enough, sufficient, sufficiently

saxum, -ī, n. rock, stone

scelus, -eris, n. crime, sin

scēptrum, -ī, n. scepter

schola, -ae, f. school, the higher grades. Cf. lūdus

scientia, -ae, f. [sciēns, knowing], skill, knowledge, science

scindō, -ere, scidī, scissus, cut, tear

sciō, -īre, -īvī, -ītus, know (§ 420. b). Cf. cognōscō

scrībō, -ere, scrīpsī, scrīptus, write

scūtum, -ī, n. shield, buckler

sē, see suī

sēcum = sē + cum

secundus, -a, -um, adj. [sequor, follow], following, next, second; favorable, successful.

rēs secundae, prosperity

sed, conj. but, on the contrary.

nōn sōlum ... sed etiam, not only ... but also

sēdecim, indecl. numeral adj. sixteen

sedeō, -ēre, sēdī, sessus, sit

semper, adv. always, forever

senātus, -ūs, m. [cf. senex, old], council of elders, senate

sentiō, -īre, sēnsī, sēnsus, feel, know, perceive (§ 420. d). Cf. intellegō, videō

septem, indecl. numeral adj. seven

septimus, -a, -um, numeral adj. seventh

sequor, -ī, secūtus sum, dep. verb, follow (§ 493)

serpēns, -entis, f. [serpō, crawl], serpent, snake

sertae, -ārum, f. plur. wreaths, garlands

servitūs, -ūtis, f. [servus, slave], slavery, servitude

servō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, save, rescue, keep

servus, -ī, m. slave

sēsē, emphatic for sē

sex, indecl. numeral adj. six

Sextus, -ī, m. Sextus, a Roman first name

sī, conj. if

sīc, adv. thus, in this way. Cf. ita, tam

Sicilia, -ae, f. Sicily. See map

sīc-ut, just as, as if

signifer, -erī, m. [signum, standard, + ferō, bear], standard bearer (p. 224)

signum, -ī, n. ensign, standard; signal

silva, -ae, f. wood, forest

similis, -e, adj., compared similior, simillimus, like, similar (§ 307)

simul, adv. at the same time

simul ac or simul atque, conj. as soon as

sine, prep. with abl. without (§ 209)

singulī, -ae, -a, distributive numeral adj. one at a time, single (§ 334)

sinister, -tra, -trum, adj. left

Sinuessa, -ae, f. Sinues´sa, a town in Campania. See map

sitis, -is (acc. -im, abl. -ī, no plur.), f. thirst

situs, -a, -um, adj. [part. of sinō, set], situated, placed, lying

socius, socī, m. comrade, ally

sōl, sōlis (no gen. plur.), m. sun

soleō, -ēre, solitus sum, semi-dep. verb, be wont, be accustomed

sollicitus, -a, -um, adj. disturbed, anxious

sōlum, adv. [sōlus, alone], alone, only.

nōn sōlum ... sed etiam, not only ... but also

sōlus, -a, -um (gen. -īus, dat. -ī), adj. alone, only (§ 108)

solvō, -ere, solvī, solūtus, loosen, unbind.

nāvem solvere, set sail

somnus, -ī, m. sleep

soror, -ōris, f. sister

spatium, spatī, n. space, distance; time; opportunity

spectāculum, -ī, n. [spectō, look at], show, spectacle

spectō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, look at, witness

spērō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [spēs, hope], hope, expect (§ 420. c)

spēs, speī, f. hope (§ 273. 2)

splendidē, adv. [splendidus], compared splendidius, splendidissimē, splendidly, handsomely

splendidus, -a, -um, adj. brilliant, gorgeous, splendid

Stabiānus, -a, -um, Stabian

stabulum, -ī, n. [cf. stō, stand], standing place, stable, stall

statim, adv. [cf. stō, stand], on the spot, at once, instantly

statua, -ae, f. [sistō, place, set], statue

statuō, -ere, -uī, -ūtus [status, station], decide, determine

stilus, -ī, m. iron pencil, style (p. 210)

stō, -āre, stetī, status, stand

strātus, -a, -um, adj. [part. of sternō, spread], paved (of streets)

strepitus, -ūs, m. [strepō, make a noise], noise, din

stringō, -ere, strīnxī, strictus, bind tight; draw, unsheathe

studeō, -ēre, -uī, ——, give attention to, be eager, with dat. (§ 501.14)

studium, studī, n. [cf. studeō, be eager for], eagerness, desire, zeal, devotion

stultus, -a, -um, adj. foolish, stupid

Stymphālis, -idis, adj. f. Stymphalian, of Stympha´lus, a lake in southern Greece

Stymphālus, -ī, m. Stympha´lus, a district of southern Greece with a town, mountain, and lake, all of the same name

suādeō, -ēre, -sī, -sus, advise, recommend, with subjv. of purpose (§ 501.41)

sub, prep, with acc. and abl. under, below, up to; at or to the foot of

sub-igō, -ere, -ēgī, -āctus [sub, under, + agō, drive], subdue, reduce

subitō, adv. [subitus, sudden], suddenly

sub-sequor, -ī, -secūtus sum, dep. verb [sub, below, + sequor, follow], follow close after, follow up

suc-cēdō, -ere, -cessī, -cessus [sub, below, + cēdō, go], follow, succeed

suī, reflexive pron. of himself (herself, itself, themselves) (§ 480).

sēcum = sē + cum.

sēsē, emphatic form of sē

sum, esse, fuī, futūrus, irreg. verb, be; exist (§ 494)

summus, -a, -um, adj. in superl. degree, compared superus, superior, suprēmus or summus (§ 312), supreme, highest; best, greatest.

in summō colle, on the top of the hill

sūmō, -ere, sūmpsī, sūmptus, take up; assume, put on.

sūmere supplicium dē, inflict punishment on

super, prep. with acc. and abl. over, above

superbia, -ae, f. [superbus, proud], pride, arrogance

superbus, -a, -um, adj. proud, haughty

superior, comp. of superus

superō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [superus, above], go over; subdue, overcome; surpass, excel

super-sum, -esse, -fuī, ——, be over, survive, with dat. (§ 501.15)

superus, -a, -um, adj., compared superior, suprēmus or summus, above, upper (§ 312)

supplicium, suppli´cī, n. [supplex, kneeling in entreaty], punishment, torture.

supplicium sūmere dē, inflict punishment on.

supplicium dare, suffer punishment

surgō, -ere, surrēxī, —— [sub, from below, + regō, straighten], rise

sus-cipiō, -ere, -cēpī, -ceptus [sub, under, + capiō, take], undertake, assume, begin

suspicor, -ārī, -ātus sum, dep. verb, suspect, surmise, suppose

sus-tineō, -ēre, -tinuī, -tentus [sub, under, + teneō, hold], hold up, bear, sustain, withstand

suus, -a, -um, reflexive possessive adj. and pron., his, her, hers, its, their, theirs (§ 98)

T

T., abbreviation of Titus

taberna, -ae, f. shop, stall

tabula, -ae, f. tablet for writing

tālis, -e, adj. such.

tālis ... quālis, such ... as

tam, adv. so, such. Cf. ita, sīc

tamen, adv. yet, however, nevertheless

tandem, adv. at length, finally

tangō, -ere, tetigī, tāctus, touch

tantum, adv. [tantus], only

tantus, -a, -um, adj. so great, such.

tantus ... quantus, as large as

tardus, -a, -um, adj. slow, late; lazy

Tarpēia, -ae, f. Tarpeia (pronounced Tar-pē´ya), the maiden who opened the citadel to the Sabines

Tarquinius, Tarqui´nī, Tarquin, a Roman king. With the surname Superbus, Tarquin the Proud

Tarracīna, -ae, f. Tarraci´na, a town in Latium. See map

taurus, -ī, m. bull

tēctus, -a, -um, adj. [part. of tegō, cover], covered, protected

tēlum, -ī, n. weapon

temerē, adv. rashly, heedlessly

tempestās, -ātis, f. [tempus, time] storm, tempest

templum, -ī, n. temple, shrine

tempto, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, try, test; make trial of, attempt

tempus, -oris, n. time (§ 464. 2. b). in reliquum tempus, for the future

teneō, -ēre, tenuī, ——, hold, keep

tergum, -ī, n. back, ā tergō, on the rear, tergum vertere, retreat, flee

ternī, -ae, -a, distributive numeral adj. three each, by threes (§ 334)

terra, -ae, f. earth, ground, land.

orbis terrārum, the whole world

terror, -ōris, m. [cf. terreō, frighten], dread, alarm, terror

tertius, -a, -um, numeral adj. third

Teutonēs, -um, m. the Teutons

theātrum, -ī, n. theater

Thēbae, -ārum, f. Thebes, a city of Greece

Thēbānī, -ōrum, m. Thebans, the people of Thebes

thermae, -ārum, f. plur. baths

Thessalia, -ae, f. Thessaly, a district of northern Greece

Thrācia, -ae, f. Thrace, a district north of Greece

Tiberius, Tibe´rī, m. Tiberius, a Roman first name

tībīcen, -īnis, m. [cf. tībia, pipe], piper, flute player

timeō, -ēre, -uī, ——, fear, be afraid of. Cf. vereor

timor, -ōris, m. [cf. timeō, fear], fear, dread, alarm. Cf. metus

Tīryns, Tīrynthis, f. Ti´ryns, an ancient town in southern Greece, where Hercules served Eurystheus

toga, -ae, f. [cf. tegō, cover], toga

tormentum, -ī, n. engine of war

totiēns, adv. so often, so many times

tōtus, -a, -um, (gen. -īus, dat. -ī), adj. all, the whole, entire (§ 108)

trā-dō, -ere, -didī, -ditus [trāns, across, + dō, deliver], give up, hand over, surrender, betray

trā-dūcō, -ere, -dūxī, -ductus [trāns, across, + dūcō, lead], lead across

trahō, -ere, trāxī, trāctus, draw, pull, drag.

multum trahere, protract, prolong much

trā-iciō, -ere, -iēcī, -iectus [trāns, across, + iaciō, hurl], throw across; transfix

trā-nō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [trāns, across, + nō, swim], swim across

trāns, prep. with acc. across, over (§ 340)

trāns-eō, -īre, -iī, -itus [trāns, across, + eō, go], go across, cross (§ 413)

trāns-fīgō, -ere, -fīxī, -fīxus [trāns, through, + fīgō, drive], transfix

trānsitus, —— (acc. -um, abl. -ū), m. [cf. trānseō, cross over], passage across

trēs, tria, numeral adj. three (§ 479)

trīduum, trīduī, n. [trēs, three, + diēs, days], three days’ time, three days

trīgintā, indecl. numeral adj. thirty

triplex, -icis, adj. threefold, triple

trīstis, -e, adj. sad; severe, terrible

trīstitia, -ae, f. [trīstis, sad], sadness, sorrow

triumphō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [triumphus, triumph], celebrate a triumph

triumphus, -ī, m. triumphal procession, triumph.

triumphum agere, celebrate a triumph

trucīdō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, cut to pieces, slaughter. Cf. interficiō, necō, occīdō

tū, tuī (plur. vōs), pers. pron. thou, you (§ 480)

tuba, -ae, f. trumpet

Tullia, -ae, f. Tullia, a Roman name

tum, adv. then, at that time

turris, -is, f. tower (§ 465. 2)

tūtus, -a, -um, adj. safe

tuus, -a, -um, possessive adj. and pron. your, yours (§ 98)

U

ubi, rel. and interrog. adv. where, when

ūllus, -a, -um (gen. -īus, dat. -ī), adj. any (§ 108)

ulterior, -ius, -ōris, adj. in comp. degree, superl. ultimus, farther, more remote (§ 315)

ultimus, -a, -um, adj. in superl. degree (see ulterior), farthest (§ 315)

umbra, -ae, f. shade

umerus, -ī, m. shoulder

umquam, adv. ever, at any time

ūnā, adv. [ūnus, one], in the same place, at the same time

ūndecimus, -a, -um, numeral adj. [ūnus, one, + decimus, tenth], eleventh

undique, adv. from every quarter, on all sides, everywhere

ūnus, -a, -um (gen. -īus, dat. -ī), numeral adj. one; alone (§ 108)

urbs, -is, f. city (§ 465. a)

urgeō, -ēre, ursī, ——, press upon, crowd, hem in

ūrus, -ī, m. wild ox, urus

ūsque, adv. all the way, even

ūsus, -ūs, m. use, advantage

ut, conj. with the subjv. that, in order that, that not (with verbs of fearing), so that, to (§ 350. 1)

uter, -tra, -trum (gen. -īus, dat. -ī), interrog. pron. which of two? which? (§ 108)

uterque, utraque, utrumque, indef. pron. each of two, each, both.

ab utrāque parte, on both sides

ūtilis, -e, adj. [ūtor, use], useful

utrimque, adv. [uterque, each of two], on each side, on either hand

ūva, -ae, f. grape, bunch of grapes

uxor, -ōris, f. wife

V

vāgīna, -ae, sheath, scabbard

vagor, -ārī, -ātus sum, dep. verb, wander

valeō, -ēre, -uī, -itūrus, be powerful, be well; in the imperative as a greeting, farewell.

plūrimum valēre, have the most power

valētūdō, -inis, f. [valeō, be well], health

validus, -a, -um, adj. [cf. valeō, be strong], strong, able, well

vallēs, -is, f. valley

vāllum, -ī, n. rampart, earthworks

varius, -a, -um, adj. bright-colored

vāstō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [vāstus, empty], (make empty), devastate, lay waste

vectīgal, -ālis, n. tax, tribute

vehementer, adv. [vehemēns, eager], compared vehementius, vehementissimē, eagerly, vehemently

vehō, -ere, vexī, vectus, convey, carry. In the passive often in the sense of ride, sail

vel, conj. or.

vel ... vel, either ... or. Cf. aut

vēlōcitās, -ātis, f. [vēlōx, swift], swiftness

vēlōx, -ōcis, adj. swift, fleet

vēlum, -ī, n. sail

vēndō, -ere, vēndidī, vēnditus, sell

veniō, -īre, vēnī, ventus, come, go

ventus, -ī, m. wind

verbum, -ī, n. word.

verba facere prō, speak in behalf of

vereor, -ērī, -itus sum, dep. verb, fear; reverence, respect (§ 493). Cf. timeō

Vergilius, Vergi´lī, m. Vergil, the poet

vergō, -ere, ——, ——, turn, lie

vērō, adv. [vērus, true], in truth, surely; conj. but, however.

tum vērō, then you may be sure, introducing the climax of a story

vertō, -ere, -tī, -sus, turn, change.

tergum vertere, retreat, flee

vērus, -a, -um, true, actual

vesper, -erī, m. evening

vester, -tra, -trum, possessive adj. and pron. your, yours (§ 98)

vestīgium, vestī´gī, n. [cf. vestīgō, track], footstep, track, trace

vestīmentum, -ī, n. [vestis, clothing], garment

vestiō, -īre, -īvī, -ītus [vestis, clothing], clothe, dress

vestis, -is, f. clothing, attire, garment, robe

vestītus, -a, -um, adj. [part. of vestiō, clothe], clothed

Vesuvius, Vesu´vi, m. Vesuvius, the volcano near Pompeii. See map

veterānus, -a, -um, adj. old, veteran

vetō, -āre, -uī, -itus, forbid, prohibit

vexō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, trouble, annoy

via, -ae, f. way, road, street; way, manner. Cf. iter

viātor, -ōris, m. [via], traveler

victor, -ōris, m. [vincō, conquer], conqueror, victor. In apposition, with adj. force victorious

victōria, -ae, f. [victor, victor], victory

vīcus, -ī, m. village

videō, -ēre, vīdī, vīsus, see, perceive. Pass. be seen; seem (§ 420. d)

vigilia, -ae, f. [vigil awake], watch.

dē tertia vigilia, about the third watch

vīgintī, indecl. numeral adj. twenty

vīlicus, -ī, m. [vīlla, farm], steward, overseer of a farm

vīlla, -ae, f. farm, villa

vinciō, -īre, vīnxī, vīnctus, bind, tie, fetter

vincō, -ere, vīcī, victus, conquer, defeat, overcome. Cf. subigō, superō

vīnea, -ae, f. shed (p. 219)

vīnum, -ī, n. wine

violenter, adv. [violentus, violent], compared violentius, violentissimē, violently, furiously

vir, virī, m. man, husband; hero (§ 462. c)

virīlis, -e, adj. [vir, man], manly

virtūs, -ūtis, f. [vir, man], manliness; courage, valor; virtue (§ 464. 1)

vīs, (vīs), f. strength, power, might, violence (§ 468)

vīta, -ae, f. [cf. vīvō, live], life, vītam agere, spend or pass life

vīto, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, shun, avoid

vīvō, -ere, vīxī, ——, live. Cf. habitō, incolō

vīvus, -a, -um, adj. [cf. vīvō, live], alive, living

vix, adv. scarcely, hardly

vocō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus, call, summon, invite. Cf. appellō, nōminō

volō, -āre, -āvī, -ātūrus, fly

volō, velle, voluī, ——, irreg. verb, will, be willing; wish (§ 497). Cf. cupio

volūmen, -inis, n. roll, book

Vorēnus, -ī, m. Vore´nus, a centurion

vōs, pers. pron.; you (see tū) (§ 480)

vōtum, -ī, n. [neut. part. of voveō, vow], vow, pledge, prayer

vōx, vōcis, f. [cf. vocō, call], voice, cry; word

vulnerō, -āre, -āvī, -ātus [vulnus, wound], wound, hurt

vulnus, -eris, n. wound, injury

vulpēs, -īs, f. fox

EQUES ROMANUS

ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY

This vocabulary contains only the words used in the English-Latin exercises. For details not given here, reference may be made to the Latin-English vocabulary. The figures 1, 2, 3, 4, after verbs indicate the conjugation.

A   B   C   D   E   F   G   H   I   J   K   L   M   N   O   P   Q   R   S   T   U   V   W   Y   Z

A

a, an, commonly not translated

able (be), possum, posse, potuī, ——(§ 495)

abode, domicilium, domici´lī, n.

about (adv.), circiter

about (prep.), dē, with abl.

about to, expressed by fut. act. part.

abundance, cōpia, -ae, f.

across, trāns, with acc.

active, ācer, ācris, ācre

advance, prōgredior, 3

advantage, ūsus, -ūs, m.

advise, moneō, 2

after (conj.), postquam; often expressed by the perf. part.

after (prep.), post, with acc.

against, in, contrā, with acc.

aid, auxilium, auxi´lī, n.

all, omnis, -e; tōtus, -a, -um (§ 108)

allow, patior, 3

ally, socius, socī, m.

almost, paene; ferē

alone, ūnus, -a, -um; sōlus, -a, -um (§ 108)

already, iam

also, quoque

always, semper

ambassador, lēgātus, -ī, m.

among, apud, with acc.

ancient, antīquus, -a, -um

and, et; atque (ac); -que

and so, itaque

Andromeda, Andromeda, -ae, f.

angry, īrātus, -a, um

animal, animal, -ālis, n.

announce, nūntiō, 1

annoying, molestus, -a, -um

another, alius, -a, -ud (§ 109)

any, ūllus, -a, -um (§ 108)

any one, anything, quisquam, quicquam or quidquam (§ 486)

appearance, fōrma, -ae, f.

appoint, creō, 1

approach, adpropinquō, 1, with dat.

are, used as auxiliary, not translated; as a copula, sum (§ 494)

arise, orior, 4

arm, bracchium, bracchī, n.

armed, armātus, -a, -um

arms, arma, -ōrum, n. plur.

army, exercitus, -ūs, m.

around, circum, with acc.

arrival, adventus, -us, m.

arrow, sagitta, -ae, f.

art of war, rēs mīlitāris

as possible, expressed by quam and superl..

ask, petō, 3; quaerō, 3; rogō, 1

assail, oppugnō, 1

at, in, with acc. or abl.; with names of towns, locative case or abl. without a preposition (§ 268); time when, abl.

at once, statim

at the beginning of summer, initā aestāte

Athens, Athēnae, -ārum, f.

attack, impetus, -us, m.

attempt, cōnor, 1; temptō, 1

away from, ā or ab, with abl.

B

bad, malus, -a, -um

baggage, impedīmenta, -ōrum, n. plur.

bank, rīpa, -ae, f.

barbarians, barbarī, -ōrum, m. plur.

battle, proelium, proelī, n.; pugna, -ae. f.

be, sum (§ 494)

be absent, be far, absum (§ 494)

be afraid, timeō, 2; vereor, 2

be away, absum (§ 494)

be in command of, praesum, with dat. (§§ 494, 426)

be informed, certior fīō

be off, be distant, absum (§ 494)

be without, egeō, with abl. (§ 180)

beast (wild), fera, -ae, f.

beautiful, pulcher, -chra, -chrum

because, quia; quod

because of, propter, with acc.; or abl. of cause

before, heretofore (adv.), anteā

before (prep.), ante, with acc.;

prō, with abl.

begin, incipiō, 3

believe, crēdō, 3, with dat. (§ 153)

belong to, predicate genitive (§ 409)

best, optimus, superl. of bonus

betray, trādō, 3

better, melior, comp. of bonus

between, inter, with acc.

billow, fluctus, -us, m.

bird, avis, -is, f. (§ 243. 1)

blood, sanguis, -inis, m.

body, corpus, -oris. n.

bold, audāx, -ācis; fortis, -e

boldly, audācter; fortiter

boldness, audācia, -ae, f.

booty, praeda, -ae, f.

both, each (of two), uterque, utraque, utrumque

both ... and, et ... et

boy, puer, -erī, m.

brave, fortis, -e

bravely, fortiter

bridge, pōns, pontis, m.

bright, clārus, -a, -um

bring back, reportō, 1

bring upon
, īnferō, -ferre, -tulī, -lātus,
with acc. and dat. (§ 426)

brother, frāter, -tris, m.

building, aedificium, aedifi´cī. n.

burn, cremō, 1; incendō, 3

business, negōtium, negō´tī, n.

but, however, autem, sed

by, ā, ab, with abl.; denoting means, abl. alone; sometimes implied in a participle

by night, noctū

C

Cæsar, Caesar, -aris, m.

calamity, calamitās, -ātis, f.

call, vocō, 1; appellō, 1; nōminō, 1

call together, convocō, 1

camp, castra, -ōrum, n. plur.

can, could, possum, posse, potuī, —— (§ 495)

capture, capiō, 3; occupō, 1

care, cūra, -ae, f.

care for, cūrō, 1

careful, attentus, -a, -um

carefulness, dīligentia, -ae, f.

carry, ferō, ferre, tulī, lātus (§ 498); portō, 1

carry on, gerō, 3

cart, carrus, -ī, m.

cause, causa, -ae, f.

cavalry, equitātus, -ūs, m.

cease, cessō, 1

Cepheus, Cēpheus, -ī, m.

certain (a), quīdam, quaedam, quoddam (quiddam) (§ 485)

chicken, gallīna, -ae, f.

chief, prīnceps, -cipis, m.

children, līberī, -ōrum, m. plur.

choose, dēligō, 3

choose, elect, creō, 1

citizen, cīvis, -is, m. and f. (§ 243. 1)

city, urbs, urbis, f.

clear, clārus, -a, -um

cohort, cohors, -rtis, f.

come, veniō, 4

command, imperō, 1, with dat. (§ 45); iubeō, 2; praesum, with dat. (§ 426)

commit, committō, 3

commonwealth, rēs pūblica, reī pūblicae

concerning, dē, with abl.

conquer, superō, 1; vincō, 3

construct (a ditch), perdūcō, 3

consul, cōnsul, -ulis, m.

contrary to, contrā, with acc.

Corinth, Corinthus, -ī, f.

Cornelia, Cornēlia, -ae, f.

Cornelius, Cornēlius, Cornē´li, m.

corselet, lōrīca, -ae, f.

cottage, casa, -ae, f.

country, as distinguished from the city, rūs, rūris, n.; as territory, fīnēs, -ium, m., plur. of fīnis

courage, virtūs, -ūtis, f.

crime, scelus, -eris, n.

cross, trānseō, 4 (§ 499)

crown, corōna, -ae, f.

D

daily, cotīdiē

danger, perīculum, -ī, n.

daughter, fīlia, -ae, f. (§ 67)

day, diēs, -ēī, m.

daybreak, prīma lūx

dear, cārus, -a, -um

death, mors, mortis, f.

deed, rēs, reī, f.

deep, altus, -a, -um

defeat, calamitās, -ātis, f.

defend, dēfendō, 3

delay (Noun), mora, -ae, f.

delay (verb), moror, 1

demand, postulō, 1

dense, dēnsus, -a, -um

depart, discēdō, 3; exeō, 4; proficīscor, 3

dependent, cliēns, -entis, m.

design, cōnsilium, consi´lī n.

desire, cupiō, 3

destroy, dēleō, 2

Diana, Diāna, -ae, f.

differ, differō, differre, distulī, dīlātus (§ 498)

different, dissimilis, -e

difficult, difficilis, -e

difficulty, difficultās, -ātis, f.

diligence, dīligentia, -ae, f.

dinner, cēna, -ae, f.

disaster, calamitās, -ātis, f.

distant (be), absum, -esse, āfuī, āfutūrus (§ 494)

ditch, fossa, -ae, f.

do, agō, 3; faciō, 3; when used as auxiliary, not translated

down from, dē, with abl.

drag, trahō, 3

drive, agō, 3

dwell, habitō, 1; incolō, 3; vīvō, 3

dwelling, aedificium, aedifi´cī, n.

E

each, quisque, quaeque, quidque (quodque) (§ 484)

each of two, uterque, utraque, utrumque

each other, inter with acc. of a reflexive

eager, ācer, ācris, ācre; alacer, alacris, alacre

eager (be), studeō, 2

eagerness, studium, studī, n.

eagle, aquila, -ae, f.

easily, facile

easy, facilis, -e

either ... or, aut ... aut

empire, imperium, impe´rī, n.

employ, negōtium dō

encourage, hortor, 1

enemy, hostis, -is, m. and f.; inimīcus, -ī, m.

enough, satis

entire, tōtus, -a, -um (§ 108)

expectation, opīniō, -ōnis, f.

eye, oculus, -ī, m.

F

faithless, perfidus, -a, -um

famous, clārus, -a, -um

far, longē

farmer, agricola, -ae, m.

farther, ulterior, -ius

father, pater, patris, m.

fatherland, patria, -ae, f.

favor, faveō, 2

favorable, idōneus, -a,-um; secundus, -a, -um

fear, metus, -ūs, m.; timor, -ōris, m.

fear, be afraid, timeō, 2

few, paucī, -ae, -a

field, ager, agrī, m.

fifteen, quīndecim

fight, contendō, 3; pugnō, 1

find, reperiō, 4

finish, cōnficiō, 3

fire, ignis, -is, m. (§ 243. 1)

firmness, cōnstantia, -ae, f.

first, prīmus, -a, -um

flee, fugiō, 3

flight, fuga, -ae, f.

fly, volō, 1

foe, see enemy

follow close after, subsequor, 3

food, cibus, -ī, m.

foot, pēs, pedis, m.

foot-soldier, pedes, -itis, m.

for (conj.), enim, nam

for (prep.), sign of dat.; dē, prō, with abl.; to express purpose, ad, with gerundive; implied in acc. of time and of extent of space

for a long time, diū

forbid, vetō, 1

forces, cōpiae, -ārum, f., plur. of cōpia

forest, silva, -ae, f.

fort, castellum, -ī, n.; castrum, -ī, n.

fortification, mūnitiō, -ōnis, f.

fortify, mūniō, 4

fortune, fortūna, -ae, f.

fourth, quārtus, -a, -um

free, līber, -era, -erum

free, liberate, līberō, 1

frequent, crēber, -bra, -brum

friend, amīcus, -ī, m.

friendly (adj.), amīcus, -a, -um

friendly (adv.), amīcē

friendship, amīcitia, -ae, f.

frighten, perterreō, 2

from, ā or ab, dē, ē, ex, with abl. Often expressed by the separative ablative without a prep.

from each other, inter, with acc. of a reflexive pron.

full, plēnus, -a, -um

G

Galba, Galba, -ae, m.

garland, corōna, -ae, f.

garrison, praesidium, praesi´dī, n.

gate, porta, -ae, f.

Gaul, Gallia, -ae, f.

Gaul (a), Gallus, -ī, m.

general, imperātor, -ōris, m.

Geneva, Genāva, -ae, f.

gentle, lēnis, -e

German, Germānus, -a, -um

Germans (the), Germānī, -ōrum, m. plur.

Germany, Germānia, -ae, f.

get (dinner), parō, 1

girl, puella, -ae, f.

give, dō, dare, dedī, datus

give over, surrender, dēdō, 3; trādō, 3

give up, omittō, 3

go, eō, 4 (§ 499)

go forth, prōgredior, 3

god, deus, -ī, m. (§ 468)

goddess, dea, -ae, f. (§ 67)

gold, aurum, -ī, n.

good, bonus, -a, -um

grain, frūmentum, -ī, n.

grain supply, rēs frūmentāria

great, ingēns, -entis; magnus, -a, -um

greatest, maximus, -a, -um; summus, -a, -um

guard, praesidium, praesi´dī, n.

H

hand, manus, -ūs, f.

happy, laetus, -a, -um

harbor, portus, -ūs, m.

hasten, contendō, 3; mātūrō, 1; properō, 1

hateful, invīsus, -a, -um

haughty, superbus, -a, -um

have, habeō, 2

have no power, nihil possum

he, is; hic; iste; ille; or not expressed

head, caput, -itis, n.

hear, audiō

heart, animus, -ī, m.

heavy, gravis, -e

Helvetii (the), Helvētiī, -ōrum, m. plur.

hem in, contineō, 2

hen, gallīna, -ae, f.

her, eius; huius; istīus; illīus; reflexive, suus, -a, -um (§ 116)

hide, abdō, 3

high, altus, -a, -um

highest, summus, -a, -um

hill, collis, -is, m.

himself, suī. See self

hindrance, impedīmentum, -ī, n.

his, eius; huius; istīus; illīus; reflexive, suus, -a, -um (§ 116)

hither, citerior, -ius (§ 315)

hold, teneō, 2

home, domus, -ūs, f. (§ 468).

at home, domī (§ 267)

hope (Noun), spēs, speī, f.

hope (verb), spērō, 1

horse, equus, -ī, m.

horseman, eques, -itis, m.

hostage, obses, -idis, m. and f.

hostile, inimīcus, -a, -um

hour, hōra, -ae, f.

house, domicilium, domici´lī, n.; domus, -ūs, f. (§ 468)

hurl, iaciō, 3

I

I, ego (§ 280); or not expressed

if, sī. if not, nisi

ill, aeger, -gra, -grum

immediately, statim

in (of place), in, with abl.; (of time or of specification) abl. without prep.

in order that, ut, with subjv.;

in order that not, lest, nē, with subjv.

in vain, frūstrā

industry, dīligentia, -ae, f.

inflict injuries upon, iniūriās īnferō with dat. (§ 426)

inflict punishment on, supplicium sūmō de

inform some one, aliquem certiōrem faciō

injure, noceō, 2, with dat. (§ 153)

injury, iniūria, -ae, f.

into, in, with acc.

intrust, committō, 3; mandō, 1

invite, vocō, 1

is, used as auxiliary, not translated; as a copula, sum (§ 494)

island, īnsula, -ae, f.

it, is; hie; iste; ille; or not expressed

Italy, Italia, -ae, f.

its, eius; huius; istīus; illīus; reflexive, suus, -a, -um (§ 116)

itself, suī. See self

J

join battle, proelium committō

journey, iter, itineris, n. (§ 468)

judge (Noun), iūdex, -icis, m.

judge (verb), iūdicō, 1

Julia, Iūlia, -ae, f.

just now, nūper

K

keep, contineō, 2; prohibeo, 2; teneō, 2

keep on doing something, expressed by the impf. indic.

kill, interficiō, 3; necō, 1 ; occīdō, 3

king, rēx, rēgis, m.

kingdom, rēgnum, -ī, n.

know, cognōscō, 3, in perf.; sciō, 4

L

labor (Noun), labor, -ōris, m.

labor (verb), labōrō, 1

lack (Noun), inopia, -ae, f.

lack (verb), egeō, 2, with abl. (§ 180)

lady, domina, -ae, f.

lake, lacus, -ūs, m. (§ 260. 2)

land, terra, -ae, f.

language, lingua, -ae, f.

large, ingēns, -entis ; magnus, -a, -um

larger, maior, maius

lately, nūper

Latona, Lātōna, -ae, f.

law, lēx, lēgis, f.

lay waste, vāstō, 1

lead, dūco, 3

leader, dux, ducis, m. and f.

learn, know, cognōscō, 3

leave, depart from, discēdō, 3

leave behind, abandon, relinquō, 3

left, sinister, -tra, -trum

legion, legiō, -ōnis, f.

legionaries, legiōnāriī, -ōrum, m. plur.

length, longitūdō, -inis, f.

lest, nē, with subjv.

letter (of the alphabet), littera, -ae, f; (an epistle) litterae, -ārum, f. plur.

lieutenant, lēgātus, -ī, m.

light, lūx, lūcis, f.

like (adj.), similis, -e

like, love, amō, 1

line of battle, aciēs, aciēī, f.

little, parvus, -a, -um

live, habitō, 1; incolō, 3; vīvō, 3

long, longus, -a, -um

long, for a long time, diū

long for, dēsīderō, 1

look after, cūrō, 1

love, amō, 1

M

maid, maid servant, ancilla, -ae,f.

make, faciō, 3

make war upon, bellum īnferō with dat. (§ 426)

man, homō, -inis, m. and f.; vir, virī, m.

man-of-war, nāvis longa

many, multī, -ae, -a, plur. of multus

march, iter, itineris, n. (§ 468)

Mark, Mārcus, -ī, m.

marriage, mātrimōnium, mātrimō´nī, n.

master, dominus, -ī, m.; magīster, -trī, m.

matter, negōtium, negō´tī, n.; rēs, reī, f.

means, by means of, the abl.

messenger, nūntius, nūntī, m.

midnight, media nox

mile, mīlle passuum (§ 331. b)

miles, mīlia passuum

mind, animus, -ī, m.; mēns, mentis, f.

mine, meus, -a, -um

mistress, domina, -ae, f.

money, pecūnia, -ae, f.

monster, mōnstrum, -ī, n.

month, mēnsis, -is, m.

moon, lūna, -ae, f.

more (adj.), plūs, plūris (§ 313); or a comparative. Adverb, magis

most (adj.), plūrimus, -a, -um; superl. degree. Adverb, maximē; plūrimum

mother, māter, mātris, f.

mountain, mōns, montis, m.

move, moveō, 2

moved, commōtus, -a, -um

much (by), multō

multitude, multitūdō, -inis. f.

my, meus, -a, -um

myself, mē, reflexive. See self

N

name, nōmen, -inis, n.

nation, gēns, gentis, f.

near, propinquus, -a, -um

nearest, proximus, -a, -um

nearly, ferē

neighbor, fīnitimus, -ī, in.

neighboring, fīinitimus, -a, -um

neither, neque or nec;

neither ... nor, neque (nec) ... neque (nec)

never, numquam

nevertheless, tamen

new, novus, -a, -um

next day, postrīdiē eius diēī

next to, proximus, -a, -um

night, nox, noctis, f.

nine, novem

no, minimē; or repeat verb with a negative (§ 210)

no, none, nūllus, -a, -um (§ 109)

no one, nēmō, nūllīus

nor, neque or nec

not, nōn

not even, nē ... quidem

not only ... but also, nōn sōlum ... sed etiam

nothing, nihil or nihilum, -ī, n.

now, nunc

number, numerus, -ī, m.

O

obey, pāreō, 2, with dat. (§ 153)

of, sign of gen.;

dē, with abl.;

out of, ē or ex, with abl.

often, saepe

on (of place), in, with abl.;

(of time) abl. without prep.

on account of, propter, with acc.; or abl. of cause.

on all sides, undique

once (upon a time), ōlim

one, ūnus, -a, -um (§ 108)

one ... another, alius ... alius (§ 110)

only (adv.), sōlum; tantum

opportune, opportunus, -a, -um

opposite, adversus, -a, -um

oracle, ōrāculum, -ī, n.

orator, ōrātor, -ōris, m.

order, imperō, 1; iubeō, 2

ornament, ōrnāmentum, -ī, n.

other, alius, -a, -ud (§ 109)

others (the), reliquī, -ōrum, m. plur.

ought, dēbeō, 2

our, noster, -tra, -trum

ourselves, nōs, as reflexive object. See self

overcome, superō, 1 ; vincō, 3

own (his, her, its, their), suus, -a, -um

P

part, pars, partis, f.

peace, pāx, pācis, f.

people, populus, -ī, m.

Perseus, Perseus, -ī, m.

persuade, persuādeō, 2, with dat. (§ 153)

pitch camp, castra pōnō

place (Noun), locus, -ī, m.

place, arrange, conlocō, 1

place, put, pōnō, 3

place in command, praeficiō, 3, with acc. and dat. (§ 426)

plan (a), cōnsilium, cōnsi´lī, n.

please, placeō, 2, with dat. (§ 154)

pleasing, grātus, -a, -um

plow, arō, 1

Pompeii, Pompēiī, -ōrum, m. plur.

possible (as), expressed by quam and superl.

powerful (be), valeō, 2

praise, laudō, 1

prefer, mālō, mālle, māluī, —— (§ 497)

prepare for, parō, 1, with acc.

press hard, premō, 3

protection, fidēs, fideī, f.

province, prōvincia, -ae, f.

public, pūblicus, -a, -um

Publius, Pūblius, Pūblī, m.

punishment, poena, -ae, f.; supplicium, suppli´cī, n.

purpose, for the purpose of, ut, quī, or quō, with subjv.;

ad, with gerund or gerundive; causā, following the genitive of a gerund or gerundive

pursue, īnsequor, 3

Q

queen, rēgīna, -ae, f.

quickly, celeriter

quite, expressed by the comp. degree

R

rampart, vāllum, -ī, n.

rear, novissimum agmen

reason, causa, -ae, f.

receive, accipiō, 3; excipiō, 3

recent, recēns, -entis

recently, nūper

redoubt, castellum, -ī, n.

refuse, recūsō, 1

remain, maneō, 2

remaining, reliquus, -a, -um

reply, respondeō, 2

report (Noun), fama, -ae, f.; rūmor, -ōris, m.

report (verb), adferō; dēferō; referō (§ 498)

republic, rēs pūblica

require, postulō, 1

resist, resistō, 3, with dat. (§ 154)

rest (the), reliquī, -ōrum, m. plur.

restrain, contineō, 2

retainer, cliēns, -entis, m.

retreat, pedem referō; terga vertō

return, redeō, 4; revertor, 3

revolution, rēs novae

Rhine, Rhēnus, -ī, m.

right, dexter, -tra, -trum

river, flūmen, -inis, n.; fluvius, fluvī, m.

road, via, -ae, f.

Roman, Rōmānus, -a, -um

Rome, Rōma, -ae, f.

row, ōrdō, -inis, m.

rule, regō, 3

rumor, fāma, -ae, f.; rūmor, -ōris, m.

run, currō, 3

S

sacrifice, sacrum, -ī, n.

safety, salūs, -ūtis, f.

sail, nāvigō, 1

sailor, nauta, -ae, m.

sake, for the sake of, causā, following a gen.

same, īdem, eadem, idem (§ 287)

savages, barbarī, -ōrum, m. plur.

save, servō, 1

say, dīcō, 3

school, lūdus, -ī, m.; schola, -ae, f.

scout, explōrātor, -ōris, m.

sea, mare, -is, n.

second, secundus, -a, -um

see, videō, 2

seek, petō, 3

seem, videor, 2, passive of videō

seize, occupō, 1; rapiō, 3

self, ipse, -a, -um (§ 286); suī (§ 281)

send, mittō, 3

set fire to, incendō, 3

set out, proficīscor, 3

seven, septem

Sextus, Sextus, -ī, m.

she, ea; haec; ista; illa (§ 115); or not expressed

ship, nāvis, -is, f. (§ 243. 1)

short, brevis, -e

shout, clāmor, -ōris, m.

show, dēmōnstrō, 1

Sicily, Sicilia, -ae, f.

sick, aeger, -gra, -grum

side, latus, -eris, n.

siege, obsidiō, -ōnis, f.

since, cum, with subjv. (§ 396); the abl. abs. (§ 381)

sing, canō, 3; cantō, 1

sister, soror, -ōris, f.

sit, sedeō, 2

size, magnitūdō, -inis, f.

skillful, perītus, -a, -um

slave, servus, -ī, m.

slavery, servitiūs, -ūtis, f.

slow, tardus, -a, -um

small, parvus, -a, -um

snatch, rapiō, 3

so, ita; sīc; tam

so great, tantus, -a, -um

so that, ut; so that not, ut nōn

soldier, mīles, -itis, m.

some, often not expressed; quis (quī), qua (quae), quid (quod); aliquī, aliqua, aliquod

some one, quis; aliquis (§ 487)

some ... others, aliī ... aliī (§ 110)

something, quid; aliquid (§ 487)

son, fīlius, fīlī, m.

soon, mox

space, spatium, spatī, n.

spear, pīlum, -ī, n.

spirited, ācer, ācris, ācre; alacer, alacris, alacre

spring, fōns, fontis, m.

spur, calcar, -āris, n.

stand, stō, 1

state, cīvitās, -ātis, f.

station, conlocō, 1

steadiness, cōnstantia, -ae, f.

stone, lapis, -idis, m.

storm, oppugnō, 1

story, fābula, -ae, f.

street, via, -ae, f.

strength, vīs, (vīs), f.

strong, fortis, -e; validus, -a, -um

sturdy, validus, -a, -um

such, tālis, -e

suddenly, subitō

suffer punishment, supplicium dō

sufficiently, satis

suitable, idōneus, -a, -um

summer, aestās, -ātis, f.

sun, sōl, sōlis, m.

supplies, commeātus, -ūs, m.

surrender, trādō, 3

suspect, suspicor, 1

swift, celer, -eris, -ere; vēlōx, -ōcis

sword, gladius, gladī, m.

T

take, capture, capiō, 3

take part in, intersum, -esse, -fuī, -futūrus, with dat. (§ 426)

take possession of, occupō, 1

tall, altus, -a, -um

task, opus, operis, n.

teach, doceō, 2

teacher, magister, -trī, m.

tear (Noun), lacrima, -ae, f.

tell, dīcō, 3; nārrō, 1

ten, decem

terrified, perterritus, -a, -um

terrify, perterreō, 2

than, quam

that (conj. after verbs of saying and the like), not expressed

that (pron.), is; iste; ille

that, in order that, in purpose clauses, ut; after verbs of fearing, nē (§§ 349, 366, 372)

that not, lest, in purpose clauses, nē; after verbs of fearing, ut (§§ 349, 366, 372)

the, not expressed

their, gen. plur. of is; reflexive, suus, -a, -um (§ 116)

their own, suus, -a, -um (§ 116)

then, at that time, tum

then, in the next place, deinde, tum

there, as expletive, not expressed

there, in that place, ibi

therefore, itaque

they, iī; hī; istī; illī; or not expressed

think, arbitror, 1; exīstimō, 1; putō, 1

third, tertius, -a, -um

this, hic, haec, hoc; is, ea, id

though, cum. with subjv. (§ 396)

thousand, mīlle (§ 479)

three, trēs, tria (§ 479)

through, per, with acc.

thy, tuus, -a, -um

time, tempus, -oris, n.

to, sign of dat.; ad, in, with acc.; expressing purpose, ut, quī, with subjv.; ad, with gerund or gerundive

to each other, inter, with acc. of a reflexive pron.

to-day, hodiē

tooth, dēns, dentis, m.

top of, summus, -a, -um

tower, turris, -is, f. (§ 243. 2)

town, oppidum, -ī, n.

townsman, oppidānus, -ī, m.

trace, vestīgium, vestī´gī, n.

trader, mercātor, -ōris, m.

train, exerceō, 2

tree, arbor, -oris, f.

tribe, gēns, gentis, f.

troops, cōpiae, -ārum, f. plur.

true, vērus, -a, -um

trumpet, tuba, -ae, f.

try, cōnor, 1; temptō, 1

twelve, duodecim

two, duo, duae, duo (§ 479)

U

under, sub, with acc. or abl.

undertake, suscipiō, 3

unharmed, incolumis, -e

unless, nisi

unlike, dissimilis, -e

unwilling (be), nōlō, nōlle, nōluī, —— (§ 497)

up to, sub, with acc.

us, nōs, acc. plur. of ego

V

very, superl. degree; maximē; ipse, -a, -um (§ 285)

victor, victor, -ōris, m.

victory, victōria, -ae, f.

village, vīcus, -ī, m.

violence, vīs, (vīs), f.

violently, vehementer

voice, vōx, vōcis, f.

W

wage, gerō, 3

wagon, carrus. -ī, m.

wall, mūrus, -ī, m.

want, inopia, -ae, f.

war, bellum, -ī, n.

watch, vigilia, -ae, f.

water, aqua, -ae, f.

wave, fluctus, -ūs, m.

way, iter, itineris, n. (§ 468); via, -ae, f.

way, manner, modus, -ī, m.

we, nōs, plur. of ego; or not expressed

weak, īnfīrmus, -a, -um

weapons, arma, -ōrum, n. plur.; tēla, -ōrum, n. plur.

wear, gerō, 3

weary, dēfessus, -a, -um

what, quis (quī), quae, quid (quod) (§ 483)

when, ubi; cum (§ 396); often expressed by a participle

where, ubi

which, quī, quae, quod (§ 482); which of two, uter, utra, utrum (§ 108)

while, expressed by a participle

whither, quō

who (rel.), quī, quae (§ 482); (interrog.) quis (§ 483)

whole, tōtus, -a, -um (§ 108)

whose, cuius; quōrum, quārum, quōrum, gen. of quī, quae, quod, rel.; or of quis, quid, interrog.

why, cūr

wicked, malus, -a, -um

wide, lātus, -a, -um

width, lātitūdō, -inis, f.

wild beast, fera, -ae, f.

willing (be), volō, velle, voluī, —— (§ 497)

win (a victory), reportō, 1

wind, ventus, -ī, m.

wine, vīnum, -ī, n.

wing, cornū, -ūs, n.

winter, hiems, -emis, f.

wisdom, cōnsilium, consi´lī, n.

wish, cupiō, 3; volō, velle, voluī, —— (§ 497);

wish not, nōlō, nōlle, nōluī, —— (§ 497)

with, cum, with abl.; sometimes abl. alone

withdraw, sē recipere

without, sine, with abl.

woman, fēmina, -ae, f.; mulier, -eris, f.

wonderful, mīrus, -a, -um

word, verbum, -ī, n.

work, labor, -ōris, m.; opus, -eris, n.

worse, peior, peius, comp. of malus

worst, pessimus, -a, -um, superl. of malus

wound (Noun), vulnus, -eris, n.

wound (verb), vulnerō, 1

wreath, corōna, -ae, f.

wretched, miser, -era, -erum

wrong, iniūria, -ae, f.

Y

year, annus, -ī, m.

yes, certē; ita; vērō; or, more usually, repeat the verb (§ 210)

yonder (that), ille, -a, -ud

you, sing. tū; plur. vōs (§ 480); or not expressed

your, sing. tuus, -a, -um; plur. vester, -tra, -trum (§ 98. b)

Z

zeal, studium, studī, n.

INDEX

The numbers in all cases refer to sections.

ā-declension of nouns, 57, 461

ā-verbs, conjugation of, 488

ablative case, 48, 50

absolute, 381

after a comparative, 309

of accompaniment, 104

of agent, 181

of cause, 102

of description, 444, 445

of manner, 105

of means or instrument, 103

of measure of difference, 317

of place from which, 179

of place where, 265

of separation, 180

of specification, 398

of time, 275

accent, 14-16

accompaniment

abl. of, 104

accusative case, 33

as subject of the infinitive, 214

object, 37

of duration and extent, 336

of place to which, 263, 266

predicate, 392

with prepositions,   340

adjectives, 54, 55

agreement, 65

comparison

regular, 301

by adverbs, 302

irregular, 307, 311, 312, 315

declension of comparatives, 303

of first and second declensions, 83, 93, 469

of third declension, 250-257, 471

with the dative, 143

adverbs, 319

comparison, 320, 323

formation

regular, 320, 321

irregular, 322, 323

agent

expressed by the abl. with ā or ab, 181

agreement

of adjectives, 65, 215. a

of appositives, 81

of predicate nouns, 76

of relative pronouns, 224

of verbs, 28

aliquis, 487

alius, 108, 110, 470

alphabet, 1-3

alter, 108, 110

antepenult, 9. 3

accent of, 15

apposition, 80, 81

article

not used in Latin,   22. a

base, 58

cardinal numerals, 327-329, 478

case, 32. 2

causal clauses with cum, 395, 396

cause,

expressed by the abl., 102

characteristic

subjv. of, 389, 390

comparative

declension of, 303

comparison

abl. of, 309

degrees of, 300

of adjectives, 300-315

irregular, 311-315, 473, 475

of adverbs

regular, 320-476

irregular, 323, 477

positive wanting, 315

six adjectives in   -lis, 307

complementary infinitive, 215

compound verbs

with the dative, 425, 426

concessive clauses with cum, 395, 396

conjugation stems, 184

conjugations

the four regular, 126, 488-491

irregular, 494-500

consonants, 2

copula, 21

cum

conjunction, 395

cum

preposition,   209

dative case, 43

of indirect object, 44, 45

of purpose, or end for which, 437

with adjectives, 143

with compound verbs, 426

with special verbs, 153

dea

declension of, 67

declension, 23, 32

degree of difference

expressed by the abl., 317

demonstrative adjectives and pronouns, 112-115, 290-292, 481

deponent verbs, 338, 339, 493

descriptive ablative and genitive, 441-445

descriptive relative clause

with the subjv., 389, 390

deus

declension of, 468

difference, measure of, 316, 317

diphthongs, 6

direct statements, 414

distributive numerals, 327. 3, 334

domī

locative, 267

domus

declension of, 468

duo

declension of, 479

duration of time, expressed by the acc., 336

ē-declension of nouns, 272, 273, 467

ē-verbs, conjugation of, 489

ĕ-verbs, conjugation of, 490

ego

declension of,   280, 480

enclitics, 16

eō

conjugation of, 499

extent of space

expressed by the acc.,   336

fearing

subjv. after verbs of, 370-372

ferō

conjugation of, 498

fifth or ē-declension, 272, 273, 467

fīlia

declension of, 67

fīlius

declension of, 87-89

finite verb

defined, 173

fīō

conjugation of,   500

first conjugation, 488

first or ā-declension, 57, 461

fourth conjugation, 491

fourth or u-declension, 259, 260, 466

from

how expressed, 178-181

future participle

formation of, 374. c

future perfect

formation of

active, 187. 3

passive, 202

future tense

formation of,   137, 156

gender

in English and in Latin, 60

in the first declension, 61

in the second declension, 72

in the third declension, 247

in the fourth declension, 260

in the fifth declension, 272

general observations on declension, 74

genitive case

English equivalents of, 33

of description, 443, 445

of nouns in -ius and -ium, 87

partitive, 331

possessive, 38, 409

gerund

a verbal noun, 402, 403

gerundive

a verbal adjective, 404

with   ad to express purpose, 407

hic

declension and use of,   290, 291

how to read Latin, 17

i

consonant, 3

i-stems of nouns, 231, 241-244

ī-verbs

conjugation of, 491

īdem

declension of, 287, 481

iēns

declension of, 472

ille

declension and use of, 290-293, 481

imperative

formation of, 161, 175

irregular, 161. 2

in commands, 161

imperfect indicative, formation and use of, 133, 134, 165. 1

imperfect subjunctive, 354

indefinite pronouns and adjectives, 296, 297, 484-487

independent clauses, 219

indirect object, 44, 45

indirect questions, 430-432

indirect statements, 414-419

infinitive

as object, 213

as subject, 216

complementary, 215

definition of, 173

does not express purpose, 352

formation of, 126, 174, 205, 206

in indirect statements, 415-410

used as in English,   213-216

inflection

defined, 23

instrument

abl. of, 100. b, 103

intensive pronoun

ipse, declension and use of, 285, 286, 481

interrogative pronouns and adjectives, 225-227, 483

intransitive verbs,

defined, 20. a

with the dative, 153

iō-verbs of the third conj., 492

ipse

declension and use of, 285, 481

irregular adjectives, 108

irregular comparison

of adjectives, 307 311, 312

of adverbs, 323

irregular nouns, 67, 246, 468

irregular verbs, 494-500

is

declension and use of, 113-116

iste

declension and use of, 290, 292, 481

iter

declension of,   468

Latin word order, 68

locative case, 267

magis and maximē

comparison by, 302

mālō

conjugation of, 4.97

manner

abl. of, 105

means

abl. of,   103

measure of difference

abl. of, 316, 317

mīlle,

declension of, 479

construction with, 331. a,b

moods, defined, 121

-ne, enclitic

in questions, 210

nē, conj., that not, lest

with negative clauses of purpose, 350.II

with verbs of fearing, 370

nine irregular adjectives, 108-110

nōlō

conjugation of, 497

nominative case, 35, 36

nōnne

in questions,   210

nōs

declension of, 280, 480

Nouns, 19. 2

first declension, 57, 461

second declension, 71-74,87-92,462

third declension, 230-247, 463-465

fourth declension, 259, 260, 466

fifth declension, 272, 273, 467

num, in questions, 210

number, 24

numerals, 327-334, 478, 479

o-declension of nouns, 71-74, 87-92, 462

object, 20

direct, 37

indirect,   44, 45

order of words, 68

ordinal numerals, 327. 2, 478

participial stem, 201. 2

participles, defined, 203

agreement of, 204

formation,

of present, 374. b

of perfect, 201

of future, 374. c,d

of deponent verbs, 375

tenses of, 376

translated by a clause, 377

partitive genitive, 330, 331

passive voice

defined, 163

formation of, 164, 202

penult, 9. 3

accent of, 15

perfect indicative

formation,

in the active, 185, 186

in the passive, 202

meaning of, 190

definite, 190

indefinite, 190

distinguished from the imperfect, 190

perfect infinitive

active, 195

passive, 205

perfect passive participle, 201

perfect stem, 185

perfect subjunctive

active, 361

passive, 362

person, 122

personal endings

active, 122

passive, 164

personal pronouns, 280, 480

place

where, whither, whence, 263-265

names of towns and domus and rūs, 266-268

pluperfect indicative

active, 187. 2

passive,   202

pluperfect subjunctive

active, 361

passive, 363

plūs

declension of, 313

possessive pronouns, 97, 98

possum

conjugation of, 495

predicate

defined, 19

predicate adjective

defined, 55

predicate noun, 75, 76

prepositions

with the abl., 209

with the acc., 340

present indicative, 128, 130, 147

present stem, 126. a

present subjunctive, 344

primary tenses, 356

principal parts, 183

pronouns

classification of, 278

defined, 19. 2. a

demonstrative, 481

indefinite, 297, 484-487

intensive, 285, 286, 481

interrogative, 483

personal, 480

possessive, 97, 98

reflexive, 281

relative, 220, 221

pronunciation, 4-7

prōsum

conjugation of, 496

purpose

dative of, 436, 437

expressed by the gerund or gerundive with ad, 407

not expressed by the infinitive, 352

subjunctive of,   348-350, 365-367

quality

gen. or abl. of, 441-445

quam

with a comparative, 308

quantity, 11-13

questions

direct, 210

indirect, 430-432

quī

declension and use of,   220,221, 482

quīdam

declension of, 485

quis

declension and use of, 225-227, 483

quisquam

declension of, 486

quisque

declension of,   484

reflexive pronouns, 281

relative clauses of characteristic or description, 389, 390

relative clauses of purpose, 348, 349

relative pronouns, 220, 221

result clauses, 384-387

reviews, 502-528

rūs

constructions of,   266

sē

distinguished from ipse, 285. a

second conjugation, 489

second or o-declension, 71-93, 462

sentences

simple, complex, compound, 219

separation

abl. of, 180

separative ablative, 178-181

sequence of tenses, 356-358

space

extent of, expressed by the acc., 336

specification

abl. of, 398

stems

of nouns, 230

of verbs, 184

subject

defined, 19. 2

of the infinitive, 213, 214

subjunctive

formation of the present, 344

of the imperfect, 354

of the perfect, 361, 362

of the pluperfect,   361. c, 363

subjunctive constructions

characteristic or description, 389, 390

indirect questions, 430-432

purpose, 349, 366, 372

result, 385, 386

time, cause, or concession, with cum, 395, 396

subjunctive ideas, 346

subjunctive tenses, 342, 343

subordinate clauses, 219

suī

declension of, 281, 480

sum

conjugation of, 494

suus

use of, 98. c, 116

syllables, 8

division of, 9

quantity of, 13

syntax

rules of,   501

temporal clauses with cum, 395, 396

tense

defined, 120

tense signs

imperfect, 133

future, 137, 156

pluperfect active, 187. 2

future perfect active, 187. 3

tenses

primary and secondary, 356

sequence of, 357, 358

third conjugation, 490, 492

third declension of nouns

classes, 231, 463

consonant stems, 232-238, 464

gender, 247

i-stems, 241-244, 465

irregular nouns,   246

time

abl. of, 275

time

acc. of, 336

towns

rules for names of, 266, 267, 268

transitive verb, 20. a

trēs

declension of, 479

tū

declension of, 280, 480

tuus

compared with   vester, 98. b

u-declension of nouns, 259, 260, 466

ultima, 9. 3

verbs

agreement of, 28

conjugation of, 126, 488-491

deponent, 338, 339, 493

irregular, 494-500

personal endings of, 122, 164

principal parts of, 183

vester

compared with tuus, 98. b

vīs

declension of, 468

vocabularies

English-Latin, pp. 332-343

Latin-English, pp. 299-331

special, pp.   283-298

vocative case, 56. a

of nouns in -us of the second declension, 73. b

of proper nouns in -ius and of fīlius, 88

voice

defined, 163

volō

conjugation of, 497

vōs

declension of, 280, 480

vowels

sounds of, 5, 6

quantity of,   12

DISPLAY PROBLEMS

The illustration in section 77 with interlocked text may not display properly on all browsers.

Picture by Itself

Two grammatical diagrams were given as images. They are shown here in plain-text format.

Prepositions, section 179:

_________

ā or ab  |         |  ē or ex

/____________|    _____|_____________\

\            |  Place  |             /

|_________|

|

| dē

|

V

Demonstrative pronouns, section 290:

hic           iste           ille

SPEAKER ---------->-------------->---------------->

_this_, _he_;  _that_, _he_;  _that_, _he_

(near);       (remote);     (more remote)

*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ***

Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will be renamed.

Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license, especially commercial redistribution.

START: FULL LICENSE

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE

PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK

To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project Gutenberg™ License available with this file or online at www.gutenberg.org/license.

Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works

1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™ electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property (trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.

1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg™ electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.

1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the United States and you are located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg™ works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when you share it without charge with others.

1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg™ work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any country other than the United States.

1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:

1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied or distributed:

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this eBook.

1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™ trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™ License for all works posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.

1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™ License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™.

1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License.

1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted on the official Project Gutenberg™ website (www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.

1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works provided that:

• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the method you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”

• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.

• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of receipt of the work.

• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works.

1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.

1.F.

1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment.

1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the problem.

1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.

1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.

1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any Defect you cause.

Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg™

Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from people in all walks of life.

Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™’s goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent future for Project Gutenberg™ and future generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org.

Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation

The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit 501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws.

The Foundation’s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact

Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation

Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations ($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS.

The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate.

While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who approach us with offers to donate.

International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.

Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate

Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg™ electronic works

Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.

Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.

Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility: www.gutenberg.org.

This website includes information about Project Gutenberg™, including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.

Table of Contents

The Project Gutenberg eBook of Latin for Beginners, by Benjamin L. D'Ooge

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS

BENJAMIN L. D’OOGE, Ph.D.

CONTENTS

PREFACE

LATIN FOR BEGINNERS TO THE STUDENT—BY WAY OF INTRODUCTION

PART I

THE PRONUNCIATION OF LATIN

PART II

WORDS AND FORMS

PART III

CONSTRUCTIONS

READING MATTER

APPENDIX I

DECLENSIONS, CONJUGATIONS, NUMERALS, ETC.

APPENDIX II

APPENDIX III

REVIEWS1

SPECIAL VOCABULARIES

LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY

INDEX

DISPLAY PROBLEMS

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE